<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Prateek</id>
	<title>Open Educational Resources - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Prateek"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php/Special:Contributions/Prateek"/>
	<updated>2026-06-15T14:28:42Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.35.7</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Thunderbird-new&amp;diff=14015</id>
		<title>Learn Thunderbird-new</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Thunderbird-new&amp;diff=14015"/>
		<updated>2023-08-11T11:42:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Overview of Features */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction ===&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird (TB) is a '''“Free and Open Source software (FOSS)”''' email client tool for managing your emails, new feeds and new mailing groups. This mail client tool will help you to access and store your emails in multiple devices. Generally to access your emails from the mail servers (like gmail, rediff or hotmail) you need an Internet connectivity, with this thunderbird email client you can configure email account to access your emails even when you are offline (without Internet connectivity) as well.  Thunderbird is an powerful email client tool with wide range of features like configuring multiple email accounts, filters, changing themes, add-ons and etc...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Thunderbird is a free and open-source software email client tool.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Latest version is 102&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|Kmail, Mailspring, Evaluation,  etc...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Thunderbird is not available on smartphones. There are some other apps available for smartphones such as K-9 mail, Blue Mail, Spark Email, Clean-fox etc&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|https://www.thunderbird.net/en-US/&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird is an email client, which does the usual functions of mailing – receiving, sending and storing emails. Mails can be stored in folders and sub folders to categorize mails based on subjects or senders or time periods or a combination of these. Files can be attached and shared with others. Emails can be searched easily by providing information on different elements such as sender, receiver, date etc. Mail ids can be connected to form '''‘mailing-lists’''' (such as google groups), by which, mail sent to the list id will be sent to all members of the group, this is ideal to create '''‘professional learning communities’''' of teachers with a common interest or need. Thunderbird  consider one of the powerful tool to manage multiple email accounts and emails include accessing feeds and public channels. The application helps you to manage your office email account (s) to in one place to manage your work and organizing emails based on your priorities and projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Installation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Ubuntu OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# This application is included in Ubuntu and many other Linux-based operating systems.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you cannot find this tool on your Ubuntu computer, you can install the app using the terminal by following these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
## Open the terminal by clicking on '''&amp;quot;Applications/Menu → System Tools → Terminal&amp;quot;''' (or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+T).&lt;br /&gt;
## Type the following command in the terminal window:  '''sudo apt install thunderbird'''&lt;br /&gt;
## Press	the '''&amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot;''' key on your keyboard. To initiate the installation	process, you will be prompted to enter your system administrator	password (no text will appear as you type it).&lt;br /&gt;
## Press	the '''&amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot;''' key again to start the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Windows OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
To download Thunderbird for Windows OS, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Visit the official Thunderbird website by clicking here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. On the website, locate the '''&amp;quot;Free Download&amp;quot;''' button and click on it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. After the download is complete, navigate to the location where the file was saved. Double-click on the downloaded file to initiate the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Follow the on-screen prompts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ When prompted to select a location, click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ If asked to choose a layout type, select your preferred option and click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once the installation process is finished, you will see a '''&amp;quot;Done&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot;''' button. Click on it to complete the installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For MAC OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
To download Thunderbird for mac OS from the official website, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click here to visit the official Thunderbird website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. On the website, locate and click on the '''&amp;quot;Free Download&amp;quot;''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. After the download is complete, locate the downloaded file and open it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Drag the Thunderbird application icon to your '''&amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot;''' folder to install it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once the installation is complete, navigate to your '''&amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot;''' folder and open the Thunderbird application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Follow the on-screen prompts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ When asked to select a location, click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ If prompted to choose a layout type, select your preferred option and click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. Once the installation is done, a '''&amp;quot;Done&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot;''' button will appear. Click on it to complete the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Smart phones =====&lt;br /&gt;
   1. For Android phones, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Unfortunately, Thunderbird is not available for phones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. However, you can use an alternative mobile-based FOSS (Free and Open-Source Software) tool called K9 on your phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click here to download and install K9 on your phone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
      Note: Please note that K9 is not available for iOS devices. iOS users can install the BlueMail app (which is not FOSS) instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Working with the Application ===&lt;br /&gt;
After installing the application on your computer, you can open it by following these steps on ubuntu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Navigate to the '''&amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot;''' menu on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Go to the '''&amp;quot;Internet&amp;quot;''' category and look for either '''&amp;quot;Thunderbird&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Mozilla Thunderbird&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click on the Thunderbird/Mozilla Thunderbird option to open the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Windows user can search the Thunderbird application from the application list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin using Thunderbird, you need to configure your email account(s) by providing your email ID and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Configuring email account ====&lt;br /&gt;
To configure email account follow the below steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the application screen, click on '''“Email”''' button to get the email configuration dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Provide your name, email address, and password in the respective fields (As per the details available on mail server).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Once you type all the required details, click on continue. (as shown in the below figure1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will check your login details with e mail server and in the next screen select '''“IMAP”''' (select POP3 only if you use single device to access emails) under the available configuration section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of commonly using email server connections which are IMAP and POP3. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   • IMAP: It allows multiple devices at a time to access and read the mails include inbox, sent, draft and all other folders created on a device. This is suitable to user who wants to access emails from the multiple devices like laptop, mobile phones and etc...)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   • POP3: It allows a single device at a time to access your emails through server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the required configuration method (IMAP/POP3), now click on '''Done/Finish''' (as shown in the above figure).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will take few minutes to connect to your email server and to check your login credentials. If all the given details are correct, thunderbird will start fetching the list of your folders and start synchronizing your mail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Enabling Menu Bar ====&lt;br /&gt;
The menu bar in any application is an essential section that grants access to all available features and settings. By default, the menubar in Thunderbird is hidden, but you can temporarily enable it by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Alt&amp;quot;''' key on your keyboard. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you prefer to have the menu bar displayed at all times in Thunderbird, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on an empty space within the tab strip of Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the pop-up menu that appears, check the option labelled '''&amp;quot;Menu bar.&amp;quot;''' (You may refer to the above image for guidance.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, the menu bar will be shown continuously in Thunderbird, allowing easy access to all its functionalities and settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Get Messages ====&lt;br /&gt;
When you initially set up your email accounts in Thunderbird, by default thunderbird connect to your email server and download all new emails and folders from your webmail server. Additionally, Thunderbird will automatically check for new emails each time you start the application and at intervals of ten minutes (you can modify this interval under email account settings).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manually check for new emails, you can click on the '''&amp;quot;Get Messages&amp;quot;''' button. This button serves two purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. It fetches any new emails that are available on the mail server but have not been downloaded to your Thunderbird application yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. It helps you download emails that are still stored on the mail server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access the '''&amp;quot;Get Messages&amp;quot;''' button, look for it in the top left corner of the Thunderbird window. Clicking on this button will initiate the process of retrieving new emails and updating your Thunderbird inbox with the latest messages from your email server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Thunderbird Layout ====&lt;br /&gt;
The default layout in Thunderbird is the classic layout, but there are two additional layout options available: wide view and vertical view layout. To explore these layout options, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the '''&amp;quot;View&amp;quot;''' menu in Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the dropdown menu, select '''&amp;quot;Layout&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the submenu, you will find the options '''&amp;quot;View Classic&amp;quot;''', '''&amp;quot;View Wide&amp;quot;''', and '''&amp;quot;View Vertical&amp;quot;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Choose the layout that suits your preferences by selecting the corresponding option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Message List Columns ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird allows you to customize the columns displayed in the message list, providing flexibility in choosing the information you want to see for each email. Here are the steps to customize the message list columns in Thunderbird:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird interface, make sure you are in the Mail tab, where the message list is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Right-click on the column headers in the message list. The column headers are typically labels such as '''&amp;quot;From,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Subject,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Date,&amp;quot;''' etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. A context menu will appear, showing a list of available columns that you can display in the message list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the context menu, you can see a list of per-defined columns, such as '''&amp;quot;Sender,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Recipient,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Size,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Tags,&amp;quot;''' and more. These columns represent different information associated with the emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. To add a column, simply click on the checkbox next to the column name in the context menu. This will add the column to the message list, and the respective information will be displayed for each email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. By clicking on these each column heading the emails will be sorted accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. You can also rearrange the columns in the message list by clicking and dragging the column headers to your preferred positions. This allows you to customize the layout according to your preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Composing/sending new mail ====&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to replying to emails which you receive to your inbox, you can compose new emails using the '''&amp;quot;Compose Email&amp;quot;''' or '''“Write”''' feature in Thunderbird. To compose a new email, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the '''&amp;quot;Write&amp;quot;''' button located in the top left corner of the thunderbird window. This will open a new email composition window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the &amp;quot;From&amp;quot; section, you can select the email account through which you want to send the email. (this is applicable only if your have multiple account been added in your thunderbird)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. When composing a new email, you will come across the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       a) '''&amp;quot;To&amp;quot;''': Enter the recipient's email address. You can add multiple recipients by separating their email addresses with commas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       b) '''&amp;quot;Cc&amp;quot;''': (Carbon Copy): If you want to send a copy of the email to additional recipients, enter their email addresses in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       c) '''&amp;quot;Bcc&amp;quot;''': (Blind Carbon Copy): If you want to send a copy of the email to recipients without disclosing their addresses to others, use this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       d) '''&amp;quot;Subject&amp;quot;''': Provide a descriptive subject line for your email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the main body of the email, type your message. If desired, you can format the text using the formatting options available in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. To attach files or documents, click on the paper-clip icon or select the '''&amp;quot;Attach&amp;quot;''' option from the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Once you have composed your email, click on the '''&amp;quot;Send&amp;quot;''' button to send it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird will send the email using the selected email account, and it will appear in the Sent folder as a record of your sent message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding Attachment to the email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Your attachments refer to files that are sent alongside in your email message. Thunderbird supports a wide range of file types, including videos, audios, pictures, and documents (However, there are certain limitations on attachments, such as file size restrictions and permissible file extensions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach files to your email in Thunderbird, please follow the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Compose a new email or click on  reply to an email you have received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. At the top right side of the Thunderbird screen, click on the '''&amp;quot;Attach&amp;quot;''' icon. This will open your computer's local folder location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Browse through your folders to locate the file(s) you wish to attach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Select the desired file and click '''&amp;quot;Open.&amp;quot;''' Repeat this step if you need to attach multiple files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you can use the drag-and-drop method to attach files. Simply locate the files you want to attach on your desktop or file explorer, and then drag and drop them into the compose window in Thunderbird. This method works with files from various applications as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding Signature to your email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Signatures allow users to include the information to be sent with every email, including name, contact details or a quote. To add a signature to your email in Thunderbird, follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird main window, click on the '''“edit”''' option from the menubar and then choose '''&amp;quot;Account Settings&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the Account Settings window, select the email account for which you want to add a signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Under the selected account, scroll down and find the '''&amp;quot;Signature Text&amp;quot;''' section on the right side pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Check the box next to '''&amp;quot;Attach the signature”'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Click on the '''&amp;quot;Choose...&amp;quot;''' button and browse your computer to select the file containing your desired signature in html format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you add a signature to your email account going forward all your outgoing mails will have signature at the end of the email thread. To change this option to add your  signature just about the quote and just below your email body, follow the below steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the same account setting window navigate to the '''&amp;quot;Composition &amp;amp; Addressing&amp;quot;''' tab. Look for the '''&amp;quot;composition&amp;quot;''' section within the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Under when outgoing option, select '''“ start the reply above the quote”''' option and under place my signature setting select '''“below the reply (above the quote)”''' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Once you have finished configuring your signature, click on the '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Font configuration ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Default font configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the default font in Thunderbird's mail client, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' menu at the top of the Thunderbird window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the dropdown menu, select '''&amp;quot;Preferences&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the Preferences or Settings window, locate the '''&amp;quot;Fonts &amp;amp; Colors&amp;quot;''' section. You can use the search bar to find it quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Within the Fonts &amp;amp; Colors section, click on the '''&amp;quot;Advanced&amp;quot;''' button. This will open a new window with additional font settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. In the Advanced Fonts window, look for the option that says '''&amp;quot;Allow messages to use other fonts&amp;quot;''' and make sure it is unchecked. This will ensure that Thunderbird uses the default font consistently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Once you have made the necessary changes, click '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Apply&amp;quot;''' to save the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can set the default font in Thunderbird's mail client. This will ensure that the mail client uses the specified font for all your emails, providing a consistent appearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Rewrap text =====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option in Thunderbird allows you to reformat the text of an email or a specific paragraph to fit within a specified line length. This is particularly useful when you want to adjust the formatting of your email to ensure it is visually appealing and easy to read.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are replying to the other emails or composing new email, select the text or paragraph that you want to rewrap. You can do this by clicking and dragging the cursor over the desired text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on the selected text and choose the '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option from the context menu. Alternatively, you can find the '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option in the Thunderbird menu bar under '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. It will automatically adjust the formatting of the selected text to fit within the specified line length, which is usually determined by the width of the email composition window.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Repeat the process if you need to rewrap additional paragraphs or sections of text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using the '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option, you can ensure that your text is properly formatted within the email, eliminating excessive line breaks and improving readability. It's a convenient feature to make your emails more visually appealing and professional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before sending the email make sure all your inserted links and tables are not effected with this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Using text editor external tool =====&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure your fonts remain intact when copying and pasting text into Thunderbird, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. If you need to copy text from other files or external sources, be aware that there is a chance it could disrupt the formatting of your email's fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. To avoid this issue, first copy the content from the source application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Open a text editor application such as Pluma or gedit, or any other notepad-style app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Paste the copied text into the text editor (this will remove the pre-formatted style with the text).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Once the text is pasted into the text editor, copy it again from there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Now, open Thunderbird and compose your email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Paste the text you copied from the text editor directly into your email in Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can prevent any  font style issues that may occur when copying and pasting text into Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: Tag email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Email tags will help you to organize your email messages by categories. You can tag your emails based on the projects or priority, personal, office and etc…  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To tag emails in Thunderbird, you can follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Navigate to the folder containing the message you want to tag (e.g., Inbox, Sent, or a custom folder).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Select the message you wish to tag by clicking on it. You can also select multiple messages by holding down the Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac) key and clicking on the desired messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Once the message(s) is selected, right-click on the message and choose '''&amp;quot;Tag&amp;quot;''' from the context menu (as shown in the above image ). Alternatively, you can also find the '''&amp;quot;Tag&amp;quot;''' option in the Thunderbird menu bar under '''&amp;quot;Message&amp;quot;''' or in the message toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. A list of available tags will be displayed. Click on the desired tag to apply it to the selected message(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. If the tag you want to use is not available, you can create a new tag. To do this, choose '''&amp;quot;Manage Tags&amp;quot;''' from the tag menu. In the '''&amp;quot;Tags&amp;quot;''' window, click on the '''&amp;quot;New&amp;quot;''' button and enter the name and color for the new tag. Click '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' to create the tag and then apply it to the selected message(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. The selected message(s) will now be tagged with the chosen tag, and the tag will be displayed next to the message in the message list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. Also, '''To remove a tag''', follow the same steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keyboard shortcut: See the numbers in the Tag menu, To quickly tag a email, press the respective number key. The email will be tagged with that tag. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can easily tag messages in Thunderbird, allowing you to organize and categorize your emails based on different criteria or priorities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: with Folders ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird folders help you to organize your emails in a hierarchical structure, making it easier to manage and locate specific emails quickly. You can create folders for different projects, categories, people, or any other criteria that suits your needs. By moving emails from your inbox to specific folders, you can keep your inbox clean. This allows you to focus on important emails and reduces the chances of missing any crucial messages.  To create folders in Thunderbird and move emails into them, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Thunderbird interface, locate the left-hand pane where your email accounts and folders are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on the email account or an existing folder where you want to create a new folder. A context menu will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the context menu, select '''&amp;quot;New Folder.&amp;quot;''' A dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the dialog box, enter a name for the new folder. Choose a descriptive name that reflects the purpose or category of the emails you plan to store in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Click '''&amp;quot;Create Folder&amp;quot;''' to create the new folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. The new folder will now appear in the left-hand pane, under the selected account or parent folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you create a folder, now you can move any emails into it using move option. To move emails manually into a folder:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Select the email or emails you want to move. You can do this by clicking on the email while holding down the Ctrl key to select multiple emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Right-click on the selected email(s) to open the context menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. From the context menu, hover over the '''&amp;quot;Move To&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Move&amp;quot;''' option. A sub-menu will appear with a list of folders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Click on the folder where you want to move the selected email(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. The selected email(s) will be moved to the chosen folder, and they will no longer appear in the original location (e.g., the inbox).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: with Message filtering ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird allows you to set up message filters based on various criteria such as sender, subject, or keywords. These filters can automatically move incoming emails to specific folders, helping you automate the organization process. Each account has its own set of filters. Filters can move emails to folders, delete them, forward them to other email addresses, and more. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First you need to create folder for moving these auto filter emails to it. Follow the '''“Managing Emails: with Folders”''' section instruction to create folder and then follow the below steps to create filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Go to Tools – Message filters option from the menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Click on '''New''' option from the Message filter dialog box. A Filter Rules dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the '''&amp;quot;Filter Name&amp;quot;''' field, type a name for your filter and Under '''&amp;quot;Apply filter when&amp;quot;''', check one of the options or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In most cases, you won’t want to change from the default '''“Getting New Mail”''' and '''“Manually Run”''' options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the '''&amp;quot;Getting New Mail: &amp;quot;''' dropdown menu, choose either Filter before Junk Classification or Filter after Junk Classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Choose a property, a test and a value for each rule you want to apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A property is a email element or characteristic such as '''“Subject”''' or '''“From”''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A test is a check on the property, such as '''“contains”''' or '''“is in my address book”''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A value completes the test with a specific detail, such as an email address or keyword&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Choose one or more actions for emails that meet those criteria (Note: To add another rule, click Add a new rule '''“+”''' at the end of the last rule. To delete a rule, click Remove this rule '''“-”'''), and Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. In the Message Filters dialog box, at the top line, select the account (from the dropdown list) that the filters are to apply to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   8. Click '''Run Now''' if you want the new filter to be applied to emails you’ve already received. The filter will automatically be applied to all new emails after it's saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE:Filters are executed in the order they appear in the list of filters, except when that order is not possible, in which case you will see the message Note: Filter actions will be run in a different order, and the link See execution order. If you click the link, you will see which order is used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Search emails: quick filter option ====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''“Quick Filter”''' toolbar helps you limit the number of emails that are displayed in the email list or quickly filter messages within the selected email folder. It can be used, for example, to only show emails from the specific sender, emails containing a specific word or emails with attachments. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Filter toolbar is displayed above the message lists. You can show or hide it by clicking the Filter icon '''Quick Filter''' button in your toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Quick Filter bar, click the Tag button. The emails list will be narrowed down to all emails that contain at least one tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Search emails : through Search emails option ====&lt;br /&gt;
Searching mail will help easy in find the required mail by applying the filter. To search a mail Go to '''“Edit→Find→Search Messages”''' or right click on the folder in which you want to search emails. A window will open as shown in below image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Select the '''Search for messages''' in drop-down menu to choose between All Mail, a specific address, or a folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Select the '''Subject''' drop-down list to choose the criteria for the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the next box, choose an operator (for example, '''contains, doesn't contain, or begins with''').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Type a search term in the text field and select '''Search'''. Your results appear in the box below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Saved search messages ====&lt;br /&gt;
A Saved Search is a special folder which shows a selection of emails which match your pre-defined search criteria. Saved Searches are a great way of saving time because instead of typing or recreating your most frequent searches again and again, you can just get immediate live results by looking at your Saved Search folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you create a Saved Search, you can choose criteria such as email addresses, subject words, tags, or dates. You can even choose different source folders from several accounts. Thunderbird then creates a folder which shows only matching emails. New matching emails from the specified source folders will automatically be shown in the Saved Search folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, you may want to view all emails from your supervisor in their own folder named '''“Supervisor”.''' Just add their email address to a Saved Search and their emails will automatically show up in the '''“supervisor”''' folder as they arrive. Yet the same emails will also still be shown in the source folders like your Inbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lets see how to do this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. From the File menu, click New, and then Saved Search from the sub-menu. The '''New Saved Search Folder''' dialog appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Change the Name for your Saved Search as you want to have it in the folder list. The folder that was selected when you opened the New Saved Search Folder dialog in step 1 will be displayed as the default name and location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click the Create as a subfolder of dropdown if you wish to change the parent folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. To select the folders to search, click the '''Choose''' button. A dialog will be displayed that contains a hierarchical view of all the folders in all of your accounts. Select the checkbox next to each folder you wish to include in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. If your emails are not stored on your local system for offline access (for example, if they are stored on a central IMAP server), check Search Online. This is only necessary if you are filtering based on the body of the email, as addresses and the subject line are stored locally even if you leave the email body on the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using Event and Task ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Thunderbird calendar option allows you to create, edit, and manage events, appointments, and tasks. You can set reminders, specify start and end times, add descriptions, invite attendees, and categories events for better organization. By default the calendar will not be enabled on the thunderbird. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the calendar you need to click on the calendar icon on the right side pane of the thunderbird window, then you will find the calendar tab. On the left side of the Thunderbird windows screen, you will find the option to '''“Enable”''' the calendar click on it. Once you click on it  '''“Event and Task”''' option will be enabled on the menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create events and tasks in Thunderbird's calendar, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird interface, click on the '''&amp;quot;Calendar&amp;quot;''' tab at the top to switch to the calendar view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the calendar view, select the specific calendar where you want to create the event or task. If you have multiple calendars, they will be listed on the left-hand side of the calendar view. Now click on the Event and Task option from the menu bar and select '''New Event''' or '''New Task''' as required, both has same template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. A pop-up window will appear to create the event. Here, enter the event title, start and end times, and any additional details such as location, description, or attendees.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Adjust any other settings or options as needed, such as reminders, recurrence (if the event repeats), or privacy settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Click on the attendances  and add the email Id of the people you to invite for the event (If it is task then attendances will not be available)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Click '''&amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' to create the event. It will now appear on the selected calendar at the specified date and time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit or modify events and tasks by selecting them from the calendar or task list and making changes in the event or task details window. To access the details, double-click on the event or task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird's calendar also allows you to set reminders for events and tasks. When creating or editing an event or task, you can specify the reminder time and choose the notification method (e.g., pop-up alert, sound, email).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using Add-on ====&lt;br /&gt;
Add-on will enrich your requirement of the mail client. To add the add-on Go to '''“Tools→ Add-on and Themes”''' you will get a new window as show in below image, click on the Extension option and search the required Add-on need to you like: '''Tbsyn, CalDAV and CardDAV, Lightning Calender, Mail Merge.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding required extensions on thunderbird&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the toggle option to enable and disable all the installed add-on’s .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Configure Next-cloud Calendar ====&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to Google calendar we have our own Cloud based calender called '''Next-cloud Calendar'''. To integrate the Nextcloud Calendar with Thunderbird mail client, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Make sure you have two necessary add-ons, Tbsyn and CalDAV and CardDAV, installed in Thunderbird. These add-ons facilitate the synchronization between the calendar and the mail client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. After adding the required add-ons, locate the Tbsyn settings by clicking on the spanner icon. This action will open a new window, as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. To configure the Nextcloud calendar, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Click on the '''&amp;quot;Account action&amp;quot;''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Select '''&amp;quot;Add new account&amp;quot;''' from the options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Click on '''&amp;quot;CalDAV &amp;amp; CardDAV.&amp;quot;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. A new tab will open, allowing you to enter the account information. Fill in the required details, such as the server address (cloud.itforchange.net), username (your nextcloud username), and password (Nextcloud login password) associated with your Nextcloud account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once you have entered the account information, click on '''&amp;quot;Next.&amp;quot;''' The Calendar selection window will appear, displaying the available calendars associated with your Nextcloud account. Select the desired calendars (Blr calendar, your team calendar and etc...) that you want to synchronise with Thunderbird calender.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. After selecting the calendar, click on '''&amp;quot;Synchronize now&amp;quot;''' to initiate the synchronization process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. The Nextcloud calendar is now configured in Thunderbird, and any updates or changes made to the nextcloud calendar will be notified within the mail client as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can successfully set up and synchronize the Nextcloud Calendar with Thunderbird, allowing you to manage your events and appointments seamlessly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== References ===&lt;br /&gt;
   1. https://support.mozilla.org/en-US/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. https://www.lifewire.com&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Thunderbird-new&amp;diff=14014</id>
		<title>Learn Thunderbird-new</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Thunderbird-new&amp;diff=14014"/>
		<updated>2023-08-11T11:41:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction ===&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird (TB) is a '''“Free and Open Source software (FOSS)”''' email client tool for managing your emails, new feeds and new mailing groups. This mail client tool will help you to access and store your emails in multiple devices. Generally to access your emails from the mail servers (like gmail, rediff or hotmail) you need an Internet connectivity, with this thunderbird email client you can configure email account to access your emails even when you are offline (without Internet connectivity) as well.  Thunderbird is an powerful email client tool with wide range of features like configuring multiple email accounts, filters, changing themes, add-ons and etc...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Thunderbird is a free and open-source software email client tool.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Latest version is 102&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|Kmail, Mailspring, Evaluation,  etc...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Thunderbird is not available on smartphones. There are some other apps available for smartphones such as K-9 mail, Blue Mail, Spark Email, Clean-fox etc&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|https://www.thunderbird.net/en-US/&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird is an email client, which does the usual functions of mailing – receiving, sending and storing emails. Mails can be stored in folders and sub folders to categorize mails based on subjects or senders or time periods or a combination of these. Files can be attached and shared with others. Emails can be searched easily by providing information on different elements such as sender, receiver, date etc. Mail ids can be connected to form ‘mailing-lists’ (such as google groups), by which, mail sent to the list id will be sent to all members of the group, this is ideal to create ‘professional learning communities’ of teachers with a common interest or need. Thunderbird  consider one of the powerful tool to manage multiple email accounts and emails include accessing feeds and public channels. The application helps you to manage your office email account (s) to in one place to manage your work and organizing emails based on your priorities and projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Installation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Ubuntu OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# This application is included in Ubuntu and many other Linux-based operating systems.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you cannot find this tool on your Ubuntu computer, you can install the app using the terminal by following these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
## Open the terminal by clicking on '''&amp;quot;Applications/Menu → System Tools → Terminal&amp;quot;''' (or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+T).&lt;br /&gt;
## Type the following command in the terminal window:  '''sudo apt install thunderbird'''&lt;br /&gt;
## Press	the '''&amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot;''' key on your keyboard. To initiate the installation	process, you will be prompted to enter your system administrator	password (no text will appear as you type it).&lt;br /&gt;
## Press	the Enter key again to start the installation process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Windows OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
To download Thunderbird for Windows OS, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Visit the official Thunderbird website by clicking here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. On the website, locate the '''&amp;quot;Free Download&amp;quot;''' button and click on it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. After the download is complete, navigate to the location where the file was saved. Double-click on the downloaded file to initiate the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Follow the on-screen prompts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ When prompted to select a location, click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ If asked to choose a layout type, select your preferred option and click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once the installation process is finished, you will see a '''&amp;quot;Done&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot;''' button. Click on it to complete the installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For MAC OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
To download Thunderbird for mac OS from the official website, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click here to visit the official Thunderbird website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. On the website, locate and click on the '''&amp;quot;Free Download&amp;quot;''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. After the download is complete, locate the downloaded file and open it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Drag the Thunderbird application icon to your '''&amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot;''' folder to install it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once the installation is complete, navigate to your '''&amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot;''' folder and open the Thunderbird application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Follow the on-screen prompts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ When asked to select a location, click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ If prompted to choose a layout type, select your preferred option and click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. Once the installation is done, a '''&amp;quot;Done&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot;''' button will appear. Click on it to complete the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Smart phones =====&lt;br /&gt;
   1. For Android phones, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Unfortunately, Thunderbird is not available for phones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. However, you can use an alternative mobile-based FOSS (Free and Open-Source Software) tool called K9 on your phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click here to download and install K9 on your phone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
      Note: Please note that K9 is not available for iOS devices. iOS users can install the BlueMail app (which is not FOSS) instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Working with the Application ===&lt;br /&gt;
After installing the application on your computer, you can open it by following these steps on ubuntu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Navigate to the '''&amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot;''' menu on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Go to the '''&amp;quot;Internet&amp;quot;''' category and look for either '''&amp;quot;Thunderbird&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Mozilla Thunderbird&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click on the Thunderbird/Mozilla Thunderbird option to open the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Windows user can search the Thunderbird application from the application list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin using Thunderbird, you need to configure your email account(s) by providing your email ID and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Configuring email account ====&lt;br /&gt;
To configure email account follow the below steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the application screen, click on '''“Email”''' button to get the email configuration dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Provide your name, email address, and password in the respective fields (As per the details available on mail server).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Once you type all the required details, click on continue. (as shown in the below figure1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will check your login details with e mail server and in the next screen select '''“IMAP”''' (select POP3 only if you use single device to access emails) under the available configuration section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of commonly using email server connections which are IMAP and POP3. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   • IMAP: It allows multiple devices at a time to access and read the mails include inbox, sent, draft and all other folders created on a device. This is suitable to user who wants to access emails from the multiple devices like laptop, mobile phones and etc...)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   • POP3: It allows a single device at a time to access your emails through server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the required configuration method (IMAP/POP3), now click on '''Done/Finish''' (as shown in the above figure).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will take few minutes to connect to your email server and to check your login credentials. If all the given details are correct, thunderbird will start fetching the list of your folders and start synchronizing your mail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Enabling Menu Bar ====&lt;br /&gt;
The menu bar in any application is an essential section that grants access to all available features and settings. By default, the menubar in Thunderbird is hidden, but you can temporarily enable it by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Alt&amp;quot;''' key on your keyboard. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you prefer to have the menu bar displayed at all times in Thunderbird, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on an empty space within the tab strip of Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the pop-up menu that appears, check the option labelled '''&amp;quot;Menu bar.&amp;quot;''' (You may refer to the above image for guidance.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, the menu bar will be shown continuously in Thunderbird, allowing easy access to all its functionalities and settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Get Messages ====&lt;br /&gt;
When you initially set up your email accounts in Thunderbird, by default thunderbird connect to your email server and download all new emails and folders from your webmail server. Additionally, Thunderbird will automatically check for new emails each time you start the application and at intervals of ten minutes (you can modify this interval under email account settings).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manually check for new emails, you can click on the '''&amp;quot;Get Messages&amp;quot;''' button. This button serves two purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. It fetches any new emails that are available on the mail server but have not been downloaded to your Thunderbird application yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. It helps you download emails that are still stored on the mail server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access the '''&amp;quot;Get Messages&amp;quot;''' button, look for it in the top left corner of the Thunderbird window. Clicking on this button will initiate the process of retrieving new emails and updating your Thunderbird inbox with the latest messages from your email server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Thunderbird Layout ====&lt;br /&gt;
The default layout in Thunderbird is the classic layout, but there are two additional layout options available: wide view and vertical view layout. To explore these layout options, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the '''&amp;quot;View&amp;quot;''' menu in Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the dropdown menu, select '''&amp;quot;Layout&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the submenu, you will find the options '''&amp;quot;View Classic&amp;quot;''', '''&amp;quot;View Wide&amp;quot;''', and '''&amp;quot;View Vertical&amp;quot;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Choose the layout that suits your preferences by selecting the corresponding option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Message List Columns ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird allows you to customize the columns displayed in the message list, providing flexibility in choosing the information you want to see for each email. Here are the steps to customize the message list columns in Thunderbird:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird interface, make sure you are in the Mail tab, where the message list is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Right-click on the column headers in the message list. The column headers are typically labels such as '''&amp;quot;From,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Subject,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Date,&amp;quot;''' etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. A context menu will appear, showing a list of available columns that you can display in the message list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the context menu, you can see a list of per-defined columns, such as '''&amp;quot;Sender,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Recipient,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Size,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Tags,&amp;quot;''' and more. These columns represent different information associated with the emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. To add a column, simply click on the checkbox next to the column name in the context menu. This will add the column to the message list, and the respective information will be displayed for each email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. By clicking on these each column heading the emails will be sorted accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. You can also rearrange the columns in the message list by clicking and dragging the column headers to your preferred positions. This allows you to customize the layout according to your preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Composing/sending new mail ====&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to replying to emails which you receive to your inbox, you can compose new emails using the '''&amp;quot;Compose Email&amp;quot;''' or '''“Write”''' feature in Thunderbird. To compose a new email, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the '''&amp;quot;Write&amp;quot;''' button located in the top left corner of the thunderbird window. This will open a new email composition window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the &amp;quot;From&amp;quot; section, you can select the email account through which you want to send the email. (this is applicable only if your have multiple account been added in your thunderbird)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. When composing a new email, you will come across the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       a) '''&amp;quot;To&amp;quot;''': Enter the recipient's email address. You can add multiple recipients by separating their email addresses with commas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       b) '''&amp;quot;Cc&amp;quot;''': (Carbon Copy): If you want to send a copy of the email to additional recipients, enter their email addresses in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       c) '''&amp;quot;Bcc&amp;quot;''': (Blind Carbon Copy): If you want to send a copy of the email to recipients without disclosing their addresses to others, use this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       d) '''&amp;quot;Subject&amp;quot;''': Provide a descriptive subject line for your email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the main body of the email, type your message. If desired, you can format the text using the formatting options available in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. To attach files or documents, click on the paper-clip icon or select the '''&amp;quot;Attach&amp;quot;''' option from the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Once you have composed your email, click on the '''&amp;quot;Send&amp;quot;''' button to send it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird will send the email using the selected email account, and it will appear in the Sent folder as a record of your sent message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding Attachment to the email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Your attachments refer to files that are sent alongside in your email message. Thunderbird supports a wide range of file types, including videos, audios, pictures, and documents (However, there are certain limitations on attachments, such as file size restrictions and permissible file extensions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach files to your email in Thunderbird, please follow the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Compose a new email or click on  reply to an email you have received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. At the top right side of the Thunderbird screen, click on the '''&amp;quot;Attach&amp;quot;''' icon. This will open your computer's local folder location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Browse through your folders to locate the file(s) you wish to attach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Select the desired file and click '''&amp;quot;Open.&amp;quot;''' Repeat this step if you need to attach multiple files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you can use the drag-and-drop method to attach files. Simply locate the files you want to attach on your desktop or file explorer, and then drag and drop them into the compose window in Thunderbird. This method works with files from various applications as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding Signature to your email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Signatures allow users to include the information to be sent with every email, including name, contact details or a quote. To add a signature to your email in Thunderbird, follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird main window, click on the '''“edit”''' option from the menubar and then choose '''&amp;quot;Account Settings&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the Account Settings window, select the email account for which you want to add a signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Under the selected account, scroll down and find the '''&amp;quot;Signature Text&amp;quot;''' section on the right side pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Check the box next to '''&amp;quot;Attach the signature”'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Click on the '''&amp;quot;Choose...&amp;quot;''' button and browse your computer to select the file containing your desired signature in html format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you add a signature to your email account going forward all your outgoing mails will have signature at the end of the email thread. To change this option to add your  signature just about the quote and just below your email body, follow the below steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the same account setting window navigate to the '''&amp;quot;Composition &amp;amp; Addressing&amp;quot;''' tab. Look for the '''&amp;quot;composition&amp;quot;''' section within the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Under when outgoing option, select '''“ start the reply above the quote”''' option and under place my signature setting select '''“below the reply (above the quote)”''' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Once you have finished configuring your signature, click on the '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Font configuration ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Default font configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the default font in Thunderbird's mail client, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' menu at the top of the Thunderbird window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the dropdown menu, select '''&amp;quot;Preferences&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the Preferences or Settings window, locate the '''&amp;quot;Fonts &amp;amp; Colors&amp;quot;''' section. You can use the search bar to find it quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Within the Fonts &amp;amp; Colors section, click on the '''&amp;quot;Advanced&amp;quot;''' button. This will open a new window with additional font settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. In the Advanced Fonts window, look for the option that says '''&amp;quot;Allow messages to use other fonts&amp;quot;''' and make sure it is unchecked. This will ensure that Thunderbird uses the default font consistently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Once you have made the necessary changes, click '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Apply&amp;quot;''' to save the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can set the default font in Thunderbird's mail client. This will ensure that the mail client uses the specified font for all your emails, providing a consistent appearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Rewrap text =====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option in Thunderbird allows you to reformat the text of an email or a specific paragraph to fit within a specified line length. This is particularly useful when you want to adjust the formatting of your email to ensure it is visually appealing and easy to read.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are replying to the other emails or composing new email, select the text or paragraph that you want to rewrap. You can do this by clicking and dragging the cursor over the desired text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on the selected text and choose the '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option from the context menu. Alternatively, you can find the '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option in the Thunderbird menu bar under '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. It will automatically adjust the formatting of the selected text to fit within the specified line length, which is usually determined by the width of the email composition window.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Repeat the process if you need to rewrap additional paragraphs or sections of text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using the '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option, you can ensure that your text is properly formatted within the email, eliminating excessive line breaks and improving readability. It's a convenient feature to make your emails more visually appealing and professional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before sending the email make sure all your inserted links and tables are not effected with this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Using text editor external tool =====&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure your fonts remain intact when copying and pasting text into Thunderbird, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. If you need to copy text from other files or external sources, be aware that there is a chance it could disrupt the formatting of your email's fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. To avoid this issue, first copy the content from the source application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Open a text editor application such as Pluma or gedit, or any other notepad-style app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Paste the copied text into the text editor (this will remove the pre-formatted style with the text).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Once the text is pasted into the text editor, copy it again from there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Now, open Thunderbird and compose your email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Paste the text you copied from the text editor directly into your email in Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can prevent any  font style issues that may occur when copying and pasting text into Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: Tag email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Email tags will help you to organize your email messages by categories. You can tag your emails based on the projects or priority, personal, office and etc…  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To tag emails in Thunderbird, you can follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Navigate to the folder containing the message you want to tag (e.g., Inbox, Sent, or a custom folder).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Select the message you wish to tag by clicking on it. You can also select multiple messages by holding down the Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac) key and clicking on the desired messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Once the message(s) is selected, right-click on the message and choose '''&amp;quot;Tag&amp;quot;''' from the context menu (as shown in the above image ). Alternatively, you can also find the '''&amp;quot;Tag&amp;quot;''' option in the Thunderbird menu bar under '''&amp;quot;Message&amp;quot;''' or in the message toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. A list of available tags will be displayed. Click on the desired tag to apply it to the selected message(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. If the tag you want to use is not available, you can create a new tag. To do this, choose '''&amp;quot;Manage Tags&amp;quot;''' from the tag menu. In the '''&amp;quot;Tags&amp;quot;''' window, click on the '''&amp;quot;New&amp;quot;''' button and enter the name and color for the new tag. Click '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' to create the tag and then apply it to the selected message(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. The selected message(s) will now be tagged with the chosen tag, and the tag will be displayed next to the message in the message list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. Also, '''To remove a tag''', follow the same steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keyboard shortcut: See the numbers in the Tag menu, To quickly tag a email, press the respective number key. The email will be tagged with that tag. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can easily tag messages in Thunderbird, allowing you to organize and categorize your emails based on different criteria or priorities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: with Folders ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird folders help you to organize your emails in a hierarchical structure, making it easier to manage and locate specific emails quickly. You can create folders for different projects, categories, people, or any other criteria that suits your needs. By moving emails from your inbox to specific folders, you can keep your inbox clean. This allows you to focus on important emails and reduces the chances of missing any crucial messages.  To create folders in Thunderbird and move emails into them, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Thunderbird interface, locate the left-hand pane where your email accounts and folders are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on the email account or an existing folder where you want to create a new folder. A context menu will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the context menu, select '''&amp;quot;New Folder.&amp;quot;''' A dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the dialog box, enter a name for the new folder. Choose a descriptive name that reflects the purpose or category of the emails you plan to store in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Click '''&amp;quot;Create Folder&amp;quot;''' to create the new folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. The new folder will now appear in the left-hand pane, under the selected account or parent folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you create a folder, now you can move any emails into it using move option. To move emails manually into a folder:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Select the email or emails you want to move. You can do this by clicking on the email while holding down the Ctrl key to select multiple emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Right-click on the selected email(s) to open the context menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. From the context menu, hover over the '''&amp;quot;Move To&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Move&amp;quot;''' option. A sub-menu will appear with a list of folders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Click on the folder where you want to move the selected email(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. The selected email(s) will be moved to the chosen folder, and they will no longer appear in the original location (e.g., the inbox).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: with Message filtering ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird allows you to set up message filters based on various criteria such as sender, subject, or keywords. These filters can automatically move incoming emails to specific folders, helping you automate the organization process. Each account has its own set of filters. Filters can move emails to folders, delete them, forward them to other email addresses, and more. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First you need to create folder for moving these auto filter emails to it. Follow the '''“Managing Emails: with Folders”''' section instruction to create folder and then follow the below steps to create filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Go to Tools – Message filters option from the menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Click on '''New''' option from the Message filter dialog box. A Filter Rules dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the '''&amp;quot;Filter Name&amp;quot;''' field, type a name for your filter and Under '''&amp;quot;Apply filter when&amp;quot;''', check one of the options or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In most cases, you won’t want to change from the default '''“Getting New Mail”''' and '''“Manually Run”''' options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the '''&amp;quot;Getting New Mail: &amp;quot;''' dropdown menu, choose either Filter before Junk Classification or Filter after Junk Classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Choose a property, a test and a value for each rule you want to apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A property is a email element or characteristic such as '''“Subject”''' or '''“From”''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A test is a check on the property, such as '''“contains”''' or '''“is in my address book”''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A value completes the test with a specific detail, such as an email address or keyword&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Choose one or more actions for emails that meet those criteria (Note: To add another rule, click Add a new rule '''“+”''' at the end of the last rule. To delete a rule, click Remove this rule '''“-”'''), and Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. In the Message Filters dialog box, at the top line, select the account (from the dropdown list) that the filters are to apply to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   8. Click '''Run Now''' if you want the new filter to be applied to emails you’ve already received. The filter will automatically be applied to all new emails after it's saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE:Filters are executed in the order they appear in the list of filters, except when that order is not possible, in which case you will see the message Note: Filter actions will be run in a different order, and the link See execution order. If you click the link, you will see which order is used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Search emails: quick filter option ====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''“Quick Filter”''' toolbar helps you limit the number of emails that are displayed in the email list or quickly filter messages within the selected email folder. It can be used, for example, to only show emails from the specific sender, emails containing a specific word or emails with attachments. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Filter toolbar is displayed above the message lists. You can show or hide it by clicking the Filter icon '''Quick Filter''' button in your toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Quick Filter bar, click the Tag button. The emails list will be narrowed down to all emails that contain at least one tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Search emails : through Search emails option ====&lt;br /&gt;
Searching mail will help easy in find the required mail by applying the filter. To search a mail Go to '''“Edit→Find→Search Messages”''' or right click on the folder in which you want to search emails. A window will open as shown in below image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Select the '''Search for messages''' in drop-down menu to choose between All Mail, a specific address, or a folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Select the '''Subject''' drop-down list to choose the criteria for the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the next box, choose an operator (for example, '''contains, doesn't contain, or begins with''').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Type a search term in the text field and select '''Search'''. Your results appear in the box below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Saved search messages ====&lt;br /&gt;
A Saved Search is a special folder which shows a selection of emails which match your pre-defined search criteria. Saved Searches are a great way of saving time because instead of typing or recreating your most frequent searches again and again, you can just get immediate live results by looking at your Saved Search folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you create a Saved Search, you can choose criteria such as email addresses, subject words, tags, or dates. You can even choose different source folders from several accounts. Thunderbird then creates a folder which shows only matching emails. New matching emails from the specified source folders will automatically be shown in the Saved Search folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, you may want to view all emails from your supervisor in their own folder named '''“Supervisor”.''' Just add their email address to a Saved Search and their emails will automatically show up in the '''“supervisor”''' folder as they arrive. Yet the same emails will also still be shown in the source folders like your Inbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lets see how to do this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. From the File menu, click New, and then Saved Search from the sub-menu. The '''New Saved Search Folder''' dialog appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Change the Name for your Saved Search as you want to have it in the folder list. The folder that was selected when you opened the New Saved Search Folder dialog in step 1 will be displayed as the default name and location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click the Create as a subfolder of dropdown if you wish to change the parent folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. To select the folders to search, click the '''Choose''' button. A dialog will be displayed that contains a hierarchical view of all the folders in all of your accounts. Select the checkbox next to each folder you wish to include in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. If your emails are not stored on your local system for offline access (for example, if they are stored on a central IMAP server), check Search Online. This is only necessary if you are filtering based on the body of the email, as addresses and the subject line are stored locally even if you leave the email body on the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using Event and Task ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Thunderbird calendar option allows you to create, edit, and manage events, appointments, and tasks. You can set reminders, specify start and end times, add descriptions, invite attendees, and categories events for better organization. By default the calendar will not be enabled on the thunderbird. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the calendar you need to click on the calendar icon on the right side pane of the thunderbird window, then you will find the calendar tab. On the left side of the Thunderbird windows screen, you will find the option to '''“Enable”''' the calendar click on it. Once you click on it  '''“Event and Task”''' option will be enabled on the menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create events and tasks in Thunderbird's calendar, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird interface, click on the '''&amp;quot;Calendar&amp;quot;''' tab at the top to switch to the calendar view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the calendar view, select the specific calendar where you want to create the event or task. If you have multiple calendars, they will be listed on the left-hand side of the calendar view. Now click on the Event and Task option from the menu bar and select '''New Event''' or '''New Task''' as required, both has same template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. A pop-up window will appear to create the event. Here, enter the event title, start and end times, and any additional details such as location, description, or attendees.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Adjust any other settings or options as needed, such as reminders, recurrence (if the event repeats), or privacy settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Click on the attendances  and add the email Id of the people you to invite for the event (If it is task then attendances will not be available)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Click '''&amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' to create the event. It will now appear on the selected calendar at the specified date and time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit or modify events and tasks by selecting them from the calendar or task list and making changes in the event or task details window. To access the details, double-click on the event or task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird's calendar also allows you to set reminders for events and tasks. When creating or editing an event or task, you can specify the reminder time and choose the notification method (e.g., pop-up alert, sound, email).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using Add-on ====&lt;br /&gt;
Add-on will enrich your requirement of the mail client. To add the add-on Go to '''“Tools→ Add-on and Themes”''' you will get a new window as show in below image, click on the Extension option and search the required Add-on need to you like: '''Tbsyn, CalDAV and CardDAV, Lightning Calender, Mail Merge.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding required extensions on thunderbird&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the toggle option to enable and disable all the installed add-on’s .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Configure Next-cloud Calendar ====&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to Google calendar we have our own Cloud based calender called '''Next-cloud Calendar'''. To integrate the Nextcloud Calendar with Thunderbird mail client, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Make sure you have two necessary add-ons, Tbsyn and CalDAV and CardDAV, installed in Thunderbird. These add-ons facilitate the synchronization between the calendar and the mail client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. After adding the required add-ons, locate the Tbsyn settings by clicking on the spanner icon. This action will open a new window, as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. To configure the Nextcloud calendar, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Click on the '''&amp;quot;Account action&amp;quot;''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Select '''&amp;quot;Add new account&amp;quot;''' from the options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Click on '''&amp;quot;CalDAV &amp;amp; CardDAV.&amp;quot;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. A new tab will open, allowing you to enter the account information. Fill in the required details, such as the server address (cloud.itforchange.net), username (your nextcloud username), and password (Nextcloud login password) associated with your Nextcloud account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once you have entered the account information, click on '''&amp;quot;Next.&amp;quot;''' The Calendar selection window will appear, displaying the available calendars associated with your Nextcloud account. Select the desired calendars (Blr calendar, your team calendar and etc...) that you want to synchronise with Thunderbird calender.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. After selecting the calendar, click on '''&amp;quot;Synchronize now&amp;quot;''' to initiate the synchronization process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. The Nextcloud calendar is now configured in Thunderbird, and any updates or changes made to the nextcloud calendar will be notified within the mail client as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can successfully set up and synchronize the Nextcloud Calendar with Thunderbird, allowing you to manage your events and appointments seamlessly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== References ===&lt;br /&gt;
   1. https://support.mozilla.org/en-US/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. https://www.lifewire.com&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Thunderbird-new&amp;diff=14013</id>
		<title>Learn Thunderbird-new</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Thunderbird-new&amp;diff=14013"/>
		<updated>2023-08-11T11:36:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* References */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction ===&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird (TB) is a “Free and Open Source software (FOSS)” email client tool for managing your emails, new feeds and new mailing groups. This mail client tool will help you to access and store your emails in multiple devices. Generally to access your emails from the mail servers (like gmail, rediff or hotmail) you need an Internet connectivity, with this thunderbird email client you can configure email account to access your emails even when you are offline (without Internet connectivity) as well.  Thunderbird is an powerful email client tool with wide range of features like configuring multiple email accounts, filters, changing themes, add-ons and etc...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Thunderbird is a free and open-source software email client tool.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Latest version is 102&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|Kmail, Mailspring, Evaluation,  etc...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Thunderbird is not available on smartphones. There are some other apps available for smartphones such as K-9 mail, Blue Mail, Spark Email, Clean-fox etc&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://www.thunderbird.net/en-US/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird is an email client, which does the usual functions of mailing – receiving, sending and storing emails. Mails can be stored in folders and sub folders to categorize mails based on subjects or senders or time periods or a combination of these. Files can be attached and shared with others. Emails can be searched easily by providing information on different elements such as sender, receiver, date etc. Mail ids can be connected to form ‘mailing-lists’ (such as google groups), by which, mail sent to the list id will be sent to all members of the group, this is ideal to create ‘professional learning communities’ of teachers with a common interest or need. Thunderbird  consider one of the powerful tool to manage multiple email accounts and emails include accessing feeds and public channels. The application helps you to manage your office email account (s) to in one place to manage your work and organizing emails based on your priorities and projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Installation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Ubuntu OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# This application is included in Ubuntu and many other Linux-based operating systems.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you cannot find this tool on your Ubuntu computer, you can install the app using the terminal by following these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
## Open the terminal by clicking on '''&amp;quot;Applications/Menu → System Tools → Terminal&amp;quot;''' (or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+T).&lt;br /&gt;
## Type the following command in the terminal window:  '''sudo apt install thunderbird'''&lt;br /&gt;
## Press	the '''&amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot;''' key on your keyboard. To initiate the installation	process, you will be prompted to enter your system administrator	password (no text will appear as you type it).&lt;br /&gt;
## Press	the Enter key again to start the installation process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Windows OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
To download Thunderbird for Windows OS, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Visit the official Thunderbird website by clicking here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. On the website, locate the '''&amp;quot;Free Download&amp;quot;''' button and click on it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. After the download is complete, navigate to the location where the file was saved. Double-click on the downloaded file to initiate the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Follow the on-screen prompts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ When prompted to select a location, click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ If asked to choose a layout type, select your preferred option and click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once the installation process is finished, you will see a '''&amp;quot;Done&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot;''' button. Click on it to complete the installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For MAC OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
To download Thunderbird for mac OS from the official website, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click here to visit the official Thunderbird website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. On the website, locate and click on the '''&amp;quot;Free Download&amp;quot;''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. After the download is complete, locate the downloaded file and open it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Drag the Thunderbird application icon to your '''&amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot;''' folder to install it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once the installation is complete, navigate to your '''&amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot;''' folder and open the Thunderbird application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Follow the on-screen prompts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ When asked to select a location, click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ If prompted to choose a layout type, select your preferred option and click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. Once the installation is done, a '''&amp;quot;Done&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot;''' button will appear. Click on it to complete the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Smart phones =====&lt;br /&gt;
   1. For Android phones, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Unfortunately, Thunderbird is not available for phones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. However, you can use an alternative mobile-based FOSS (Free and Open-Source Software) tool called K9 on your phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click here to download and install K9 on your phone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
      Note: Please note that K9 is not available for iOS devices. iOS users can install the BlueMail app (which is not FOSS) instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Working with the Application ===&lt;br /&gt;
After installing the application on your computer, you can open it by following these steps on ubuntu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Navigate to the '''&amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot;''' menu on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Go to the '''&amp;quot;Internet&amp;quot;''' category and look for either '''&amp;quot;Thunderbird&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Mozilla Thunderbird&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click on the Thunderbird/Mozilla Thunderbird option to open the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Windows user can search the Thunderbird application from the application list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin using Thunderbird, you need to configure your email account(s) by providing your email ID and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Configuring email account ====&lt;br /&gt;
To configure email account follow the below steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the application screen, click on '''“Email”''' button to get the email configuration dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Provide your name, email address, and password in the respective fields (As per the details available on mail server).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Once you type all the required details, click on continue. (as shown in the below figure1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will check your login details with e mail server and in the next screen select '''“IMAP”''' (select POP3 only if you use single device to access emails) under the available configuration section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of commonly using email server connections which are IMAP and POP3. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   • IMAP: It allows multiple devices at a time to access and read the mails include inbox, sent, draft and all other folders created on a device. This is suitable to user who wants to access emails from the multiple devices like laptop, mobile phones and etc...)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   • POP3: It allows a single device at a time to access your emails through server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the required configuration method (IMAP/POP3), now click on '''Done/Finish''' (as shown in the above figure).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will take few minutes to connect to your email server and to check your login credentials. If all the given details are correct, thunderbird will start fetching the list of your folders and start synchronizing your mail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Enabling Menu Bar ====&lt;br /&gt;
The menu bar in any application is an essential section that grants access to all available features and settings. By default, the menubar in Thunderbird is hidden, but you can temporarily enable it by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Alt&amp;quot;''' key on your keyboard. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you prefer to have the menu bar displayed at all times in Thunderbird, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on an empty space within the tab strip of Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the pop-up menu that appears, check the option labelled '''&amp;quot;Menu bar.&amp;quot;''' (You may refer to the above image for guidance.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, the menu bar will be shown continuously in Thunderbird, allowing easy access to all its functionalities and settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Get Messages ====&lt;br /&gt;
When you initially set up your email accounts in Thunderbird, by default thunderbird connect to your email server and download all new emails and folders from your webmail server. Additionally, Thunderbird will automatically check for new emails each time you start the application and at intervals of ten minutes (you can modify this interval under email account settings).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manually check for new emails, you can click on the '''&amp;quot;Get Messages&amp;quot;''' button. This button serves two purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. It fetches any new emails that are available on the mail server but have not been downloaded to your Thunderbird application yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. It helps you download emails that are still stored on the mail server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access the '''&amp;quot;Get Messages&amp;quot;''' button, look for it in the top left corner of the Thunderbird window. Clicking on this button will initiate the process of retrieving new emails and updating your Thunderbird inbox with the latest messages from your email server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Thunderbird Layout ====&lt;br /&gt;
The default layout in Thunderbird is the classic layout, but there are two additional layout options available: wide view and vertical view layout. To explore these layout options, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the '''&amp;quot;View&amp;quot;''' menu in Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the dropdown menu, select '''&amp;quot;Layout&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the submenu, you will find the options '''&amp;quot;View Classic&amp;quot;''', '''&amp;quot;View Wide&amp;quot;''', and '''&amp;quot;View Vertical&amp;quot;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Choose the layout that suits your preferences by selecting the corresponding option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Message List Columns ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird allows you to customize the columns displayed in the message list, providing flexibility in choosing the information you want to see for each email. Here are the steps to customize the message list columns in Thunderbird:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird interface, make sure you are in the Mail tab, where the message list is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Right-click on the column headers in the message list. The column headers are typically labels such as '''&amp;quot;From,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Subject,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Date,&amp;quot;''' etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. A context menu will appear, showing a list of available columns that you can display in the message list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the context menu, you can see a list of per-defined columns, such as '''&amp;quot;Sender,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Recipient,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Size,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Tags,&amp;quot;''' and more. These columns represent different information associated with the emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. To add a column, simply click on the checkbox next to the column name in the context menu. This will add the column to the message list, and the respective information will be displayed for each email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. By clicking on these each column heading the emails will be sorted accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. You can also rearrange the columns in the message list by clicking and dragging the column headers to your preferred positions. This allows you to customize the layout according to your preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Composing/sending new mail ====&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to replying to emails which you receive to your inbox, you can compose new emails using the '''&amp;quot;Compose Email&amp;quot;''' or '''“Write”''' feature in Thunderbird. To compose a new email, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the '''&amp;quot;Write&amp;quot;''' button located in the top left corner of the thunderbird window. This will open a new email composition window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the &amp;quot;From&amp;quot; section, you can select the email account through which you want to send the email. (this is applicable only if your have multiple account been added in your thunderbird)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. When composing a new email, you will come across the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       a) '''&amp;quot;To&amp;quot;''': Enter the recipient's email address. You can add multiple recipients by separating their email addresses with commas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       b) '''&amp;quot;Cc&amp;quot;''': (Carbon Copy): If you want to send a copy of the email to additional recipients, enter their email addresses in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       c) '''&amp;quot;Bcc&amp;quot;''': (Blind Carbon Copy): If you want to send a copy of the email to recipients without disclosing their addresses to others, use this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       d) '''&amp;quot;Subject&amp;quot;''': Provide a descriptive subject line for your email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the main body of the email, type your message. If desired, you can format the text using the formatting options available in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. To attach files or documents, click on the paper-clip icon or select the '''&amp;quot;Attach&amp;quot;''' option from the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Once you have composed your email, click on the '''&amp;quot;Send&amp;quot;''' button to send it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird will send the email using the selected email account, and it will appear in the Sent folder as a record of your sent message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding Attachment to the email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Your attachments refer to files that are sent alongside in your email message. Thunderbird supports a wide range of file types, including videos, audios, pictures, and documents (However, there are certain limitations on attachments, such as file size restrictions and permissible file extensions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach files to your email in Thunderbird, please follow the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Compose a new email or click on  reply to an email you have received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. At the top right side of the Thunderbird screen, click on the '''&amp;quot;Attach&amp;quot;''' icon. This will open your computer's local folder location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Browse through your folders to locate the file(s) you wish to attach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Select the desired file and click '''&amp;quot;Open.&amp;quot;''' Repeat this step if you need to attach multiple files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you can use the drag-and-drop method to attach files. Simply locate the files you want to attach on your desktop or file explorer, and then drag and drop them into the compose window in Thunderbird. This method works with files from various applications as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding Signature to your email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Signatures allow users to include the information to be sent with every email, including name, contact details or a quote. To add a signature to your email in Thunderbird, follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird main window, click on the '''“edit”''' option from the menubar and then choose '''&amp;quot;Account Settings&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the Account Settings window, select the email account for which you want to add a signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Under the selected account, scroll down and find the '''&amp;quot;Signature Text&amp;quot;''' section on the right side pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Check the box next to '''&amp;quot;Attach the signature”'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Click on the '''&amp;quot;Choose...&amp;quot;''' button and browse your computer to select the file containing your desired signature in html format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you add a signature to your email account going forward all your outgoing mails will have signature at the end of the email thread. To change this option to add your  signature just about the quote and just below your email body, follow the below steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the same account setting window navigate to the '''&amp;quot;Composition &amp;amp; Addressing&amp;quot;''' tab. Look for the '''&amp;quot;composition&amp;quot;''' section within the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Under when outgoing option, select '''“ start the reply above the quote”''' option and under place my signature setting select '''“below the reply (above the quote)”''' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Once you have finished configuring your signature, click on the '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Font configuration ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Default font configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the default font in Thunderbird's mail client, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' menu at the top of the Thunderbird window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the dropdown menu, select '''&amp;quot;Preferences&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the Preferences or Settings window, locate the '''&amp;quot;Fonts &amp;amp; Colors&amp;quot;''' section. You can use the search bar to find it quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Within the Fonts &amp;amp; Colors section, click on the '''&amp;quot;Advanced&amp;quot;''' button. This will open a new window with additional font settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. In the Advanced Fonts window, look for the option that says '''&amp;quot;Allow messages to use other fonts&amp;quot;''' and make sure it is unchecked. This will ensure that Thunderbird uses the default font consistently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Once you have made the necessary changes, click '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Apply&amp;quot;''' to save the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can set the default font in Thunderbird's mail client. This will ensure that the mail client uses the specified font for all your emails, providing a consistent appearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Rewrap text =====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option in Thunderbird allows you to reformat the text of an email or a specific paragraph to fit within a specified line length. This is particularly useful when you want to adjust the formatting of your email to ensure it is visually appealing and easy to read.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are replying to the other emails or composing new email, select the text or paragraph that you want to rewrap. You can do this by clicking and dragging the cursor over the desired text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on the selected text and choose the '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option from the context menu. Alternatively, you can find the '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option in the Thunderbird menu bar under '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. It will automatically adjust the formatting of the selected text to fit within the specified line length, which is usually determined by the width of the email composition window.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Repeat the process if you need to rewrap additional paragraphs or sections of text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using the '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option, you can ensure that your text is properly formatted within the email, eliminating excessive line breaks and improving readability. It's a convenient feature to make your emails more visually appealing and professional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before sending the email make sure all your inserted links and tables are not effected with this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Using text editor external tool =====&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure your fonts remain intact when copying and pasting text into Thunderbird, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. If you need to copy text from other files or external sources, be aware that there is a chance it could disrupt the formatting of your email's fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. To avoid this issue, first copy the content from the source application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Open a text editor application such as Pluma or gedit, or any other notepad-style app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Paste the copied text into the text editor (this will remove the pre-formatted style with the text).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Once the text is pasted into the text editor, copy it again from there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Now, open Thunderbird and compose your email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Paste the text you copied from the text editor directly into your email in Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can prevent any  font style issues that may occur when copying and pasting text into Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: Tag email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Email tags will help you to organize your email messages by categories. You can tag your emails based on the projects or priority, personal, office and etc…  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To tag emails in Thunderbird, you can follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Navigate to the folder containing the message you want to tag (e.g., Inbox, Sent, or a custom folder).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Select the message you wish to tag by clicking on it. You can also select multiple messages by holding down the Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac) key and clicking on the desired messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Once the message(s) is selected, right-click on the message and choose '''&amp;quot;Tag&amp;quot;''' from the context menu (as shown in the above image ). Alternatively, you can also find the '''&amp;quot;Tag&amp;quot;''' option in the Thunderbird menu bar under '''&amp;quot;Message&amp;quot;''' or in the message toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. A list of available tags will be displayed. Click on the desired tag to apply it to the selected message(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. If the tag you want to use is not available, you can create a new tag. To do this, choose '''&amp;quot;Manage Tags&amp;quot;''' from the tag menu. In the '''&amp;quot;Tags&amp;quot;''' window, click on the '''&amp;quot;New&amp;quot;''' button and enter the name and color for the new tag. Click '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' to create the tag and then apply it to the selected message(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. The selected message(s) will now be tagged with the chosen tag, and the tag will be displayed next to the message in the message list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. Also, '''To remove a tag''', follow the same steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keyboard shortcut: See the numbers in the Tag menu, To quickly tag a email, press the respective number key. The email will be tagged with that tag. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can easily tag messages in Thunderbird, allowing you to organize and categorize your emails based on different criteria or priorities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: with Folders ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird folders help you to organize your emails in a hierarchical structure, making it easier to manage and locate specific emails quickly. You can create folders for different projects, categories, people, or any other criteria that suits your needs. By moving emails from your inbox to specific folders, you can keep your inbox clean. This allows you to focus on important emails and reduces the chances of missing any crucial messages.  To create folders in Thunderbird and move emails into them, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Thunderbird interface, locate the left-hand pane where your email accounts and folders are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on the email account or an existing folder where you want to create a new folder. A context menu will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the context menu, select '''&amp;quot;New Folder.&amp;quot;''' A dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the dialog box, enter a name for the new folder. Choose a descriptive name that reflects the purpose or category of the emails you plan to store in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Click '''&amp;quot;Create Folder&amp;quot;''' to create the new folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. The new folder will now appear in the left-hand pane, under the selected account or parent folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you create a folder, now you can move any emails into it using move option. To move emails manually into a folder:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Select the email or emails you want to move. You can do this by clicking on the email while holding down the Ctrl key to select multiple emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Right-click on the selected email(s) to open the context menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. From the context menu, hover over the '''&amp;quot;Move To&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Move&amp;quot;''' option. A sub-menu will appear with a list of folders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Click on the folder where you want to move the selected email(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. The selected email(s) will be moved to the chosen folder, and they will no longer appear in the original location (e.g., the inbox).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: with Message filtering ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird allows you to set up message filters based on various criteria such as sender, subject, or keywords. These filters can automatically move incoming emails to specific folders, helping you automate the organization process. Each account has its own set of filters. Filters can move emails to folders, delete them, forward them to other email addresses, and more. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First you need to create folder for moving these auto filter emails to it. Follow the '''“Managing Emails: with Folders”''' section instruction to create folder and then follow the below steps to create filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Go to Tools – Message filters option from the menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Click on '''New''' option from the Message filter dialog box. A Filter Rules dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the '''&amp;quot;Filter Name&amp;quot;''' field, type a name for your filter and Under '''&amp;quot;Apply filter when&amp;quot;''', check one of the options or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In most cases, you won’t want to change from the default '''“Getting New Mail”''' and '''“Manually Run”''' options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the '''&amp;quot;Getting New Mail: &amp;quot;''' dropdown menu, choose either Filter before Junk Classification or Filter after Junk Classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Choose a property, a test and a value for each rule you want to apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A property is a email element or characteristic such as '''“Subject”''' or '''“From”''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A test is a check on the property, such as '''“contains”''' or '''“is in my address book”''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A value completes the test with a specific detail, such as an email address or keyword&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Choose one or more actions for emails that meet those criteria (Note: To add another rule, click Add a new rule '''“+”''' at the end of the last rule. To delete a rule, click Remove this rule '''“-”'''), and Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. In the Message Filters dialog box, at the top line, select the account (from the dropdown list) that the filters are to apply to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   8. Click '''Run Now''' if you want the new filter to be applied to emails you’ve already received. The filter will automatically be applied to all new emails after it's saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE:Filters are executed in the order they appear in the list of filters, except when that order is not possible, in which case you will see the message Note: Filter actions will be run in a different order, and the link See execution order. If you click the link, you will see which order is used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Search emails: quick filter option ====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''“Quick Filter”''' toolbar helps you limit the number of emails that are displayed in the email list or quickly filter messages within the selected email folder. It can be used, for example, to only show emails from the specific sender, emails containing a specific word or emails with attachments. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Filter toolbar is displayed above the message lists. You can show or hide it by clicking the Filter icon '''Quick Filter''' button in your toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Quick Filter bar, click the Tag button. The emails list will be narrowed down to all emails that contain at least one tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Search emails : through Search emails option ====&lt;br /&gt;
Searching mail will help easy in find the required mail by applying the filter. To search a mail Go to '''“Edit→Find→Search Messages”''' or right click on the folder in which you want to search emails. A window will open as shown in below image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Select the '''Search for messages''' in drop-down menu to choose between All Mail, a specific address, or a folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Select the '''Subject''' drop-down list to choose the criteria for the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the next box, choose an operator (for example, '''contains, doesn't contain, or begins with''').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Type a search term in the text field and select '''Search'''. Your results appear in the box below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Saved search messages ====&lt;br /&gt;
A Saved Search is a special folder which shows a selection of emails which match your pre-defined search criteria. Saved Searches are a great way of saving time because instead of typing or recreating your most frequent searches again and again, you can just get immediate live results by looking at your Saved Search folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you create a Saved Search, you can choose criteria such as email addresses, subject words, tags, or dates. You can even choose different source folders from several accounts. Thunderbird then creates a folder which shows only matching emails. New matching emails from the specified source folders will automatically be shown in the Saved Search folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, you may want to view all emails from your supervisor in their own folder named '''“Supervisor”.''' Just add their email address to a Saved Search and their emails will automatically show up in the '''“supervisor”''' folder as they arrive. Yet the same emails will also still be shown in the source folders like your Inbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lets see how to do this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. From the File menu, click New, and then Saved Search from the sub-menu. The '''New Saved Search Folder''' dialog appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Change the Name for your Saved Search as you want to have it in the folder list. The folder that was selected when you opened the New Saved Search Folder dialog in step 1 will be displayed as the default name and location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click the Create as a subfolder of dropdown if you wish to change the parent folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. To select the folders to search, click the '''Choose''' button. A dialog will be displayed that contains a hierarchical view of all the folders in all of your accounts. Select the checkbox next to each folder you wish to include in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. If your emails are not stored on your local system for offline access (for example, if they are stored on a central IMAP server), check Search Online. This is only necessary if you are filtering based on the body of the email, as addresses and the subject line are stored locally even if you leave the email body on the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using Event and Task ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Thunderbird calendar option allows you to create, edit, and manage events, appointments, and tasks. You can set reminders, specify start and end times, add descriptions, invite attendees, and categories events for better organization. By default the calendar will not be enabled on the thunderbird. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the calendar you need to click on the calendar icon on the right side pane of the thunderbird window, then you will find the calendar tab. On the left side of the Thunderbird windows screen, you will find the option to '''“Enable”''' the calendar click on it. Once you click on it  '''“Event and Task”''' option will be enabled on the menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create events and tasks in Thunderbird's calendar, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird interface, click on the '''&amp;quot;Calendar&amp;quot;''' tab at the top to switch to the calendar view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the calendar view, select the specific calendar where you want to create the event or task. If you have multiple calendars, they will be listed on the left-hand side of the calendar view. Now click on the Event and Task option from the menu bar and select '''New Event''' or '''New Task''' as required, both has same template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. A pop-up window will appear to create the event. Here, enter the event title, start and end times, and any additional details such as location, description, or attendees.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Adjust any other settings or options as needed, such as reminders, recurrence (if the event repeats), or privacy settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Click on the attendances  and add the email Id of the people you to invite for the event (If it is task then attendances will not be available)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Click '''&amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' to create the event. It will now appear on the selected calendar at the specified date and time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit or modify events and tasks by selecting them from the calendar or task list and making changes in the event or task details window. To access the details, double-click on the event or task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird's calendar also allows you to set reminders for events and tasks. When creating or editing an event or task, you can specify the reminder time and choose the notification method (e.g., pop-up alert, sound, email).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using Add-on ====&lt;br /&gt;
Add-on will enrich your requirement of the mail client. To add the add-on Go to '''“Tools→ Add-on and Themes”''' you will get a new window as show in below image, click on the Extension option and search the required Add-on need to you like: '''Tbsyn, CalDAV and CardDAV, Lightning Calender, Mail Merge.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding required extensions on thunderbird&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the toggle option to enable and disable all the installed add-on’s .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Configure Next-cloud Calendar ====&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to Google calendar we have our own Cloud based calender called '''Next-cloud Calendar'''. To integrate the Nextcloud Calendar with Thunderbird mail client, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Make sure you have two necessary add-ons, Tbsyn and CalDAV and CardDAV, installed in Thunderbird. These add-ons facilitate the synchronization between the calendar and the mail client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. After adding the required add-ons, locate the Tbsyn settings by clicking on the spanner icon. This action will open a new window, as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. To configure the Nextcloud calendar, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Click on the '''&amp;quot;Account action&amp;quot;''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Select '''&amp;quot;Add new account&amp;quot;''' from the options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Click on '''&amp;quot;CalDAV &amp;amp; CardDAV.&amp;quot;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. A new tab will open, allowing you to enter the account information. Fill in the required details, such as the server address (cloud.itforchange.net), username (your nextcloud username), and password (Nextcloud login password) associated with your Nextcloud account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once you have entered the account information, click on '''&amp;quot;Next.&amp;quot;''' The Calendar selection window will appear, displaying the available calendars associated with your Nextcloud account. Select the desired calendars (Blr calendar, your team calendar and etc...) that you want to synchronise with Thunderbird calender.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. After selecting the calendar, click on '''&amp;quot;Synchronize now&amp;quot;''' to initiate the synchronization process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. The Nextcloud calendar is now configured in Thunderbird, and any updates or changes made to the nextcloud calendar will be notified within the mail client as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can successfully set up and synchronize the Nextcloud Calendar with Thunderbird, allowing you to manage your events and appointments seamlessly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== References ===&lt;br /&gt;
   1. https://support.mozilla.org/en-US/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. https://www.lifewire.com&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Thunderbird-new&amp;diff=14012</id>
		<title>Learn Thunderbird-new</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Thunderbird-new&amp;diff=14012"/>
		<updated>2023-08-11T11:28:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Adding Signature to your email */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction ===&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird (TB) is a “Free and Open Source software (FOSS)” email client tool for managing your emails, new feeds and new mailing groups. This mail client tool will help you to access and store your emails in multiple devices. Generally to access your emails from the mail servers (like gmail, rediff or hotmail) you need an Internet connectivity, with this thunderbird email client you can configure email account to access your emails even when you are offline (without Internet connectivity) as well.  Thunderbird is an powerful email client tool with wide range of features like configuring multiple email accounts, filters, changing themes, add-ons and etc...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Thunderbird is a free and open-source software email client tool.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Latest version is 102&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|Kmail, Mailspring, Evaluation,  etc...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Thunderbird is not available on smartphones. There are some other apps available for smartphones such as K-9 mail, Blue Mail, Spark Email, Clean-fox etc&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://www.thunderbird.net/en-US/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird is an email client, which does the usual functions of mailing – receiving, sending and storing emails. Mails can be stored in folders and sub folders to categorize mails based on subjects or senders or time periods or a combination of these. Files can be attached and shared with others. Emails can be searched easily by providing information on different elements such as sender, receiver, date etc. Mail ids can be connected to form ‘mailing-lists’ (such as google groups), by which, mail sent to the list id will be sent to all members of the group, this is ideal to create ‘professional learning communities’ of teachers with a common interest or need. Thunderbird  consider one of the powerful tool to manage multiple email accounts and emails include accessing feeds and public channels. The application helps you to manage your office email account (s) to in one place to manage your work and organizing emails based on your priorities and projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Installation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Ubuntu OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# This application is included in Ubuntu and many other Linux-based operating systems.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you cannot find this tool on your Ubuntu computer, you can install the app using the terminal by following these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
## Open the terminal by clicking on '''&amp;quot;Applications/Menu → System Tools → Terminal&amp;quot;''' (or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+T).&lt;br /&gt;
## Type the following command in the terminal window:  '''sudo apt install thunderbird'''&lt;br /&gt;
## Press	the '''&amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot;''' key on your keyboard. To initiate the installation	process, you will be prompted to enter your system administrator	password (no text will appear as you type it).&lt;br /&gt;
## Press	the Enter key again to start the installation process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Windows OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
To download Thunderbird for Windows OS, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Visit the official Thunderbird website by clicking here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. On the website, locate the '''&amp;quot;Free Download&amp;quot;''' button and click on it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. After the download is complete, navigate to the location where the file was saved. Double-click on the downloaded file to initiate the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Follow the on-screen prompts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ When prompted to select a location, click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ If asked to choose a layout type, select your preferred option and click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once the installation process is finished, you will see a '''&amp;quot;Done&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot;''' button. Click on it to complete the installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For MAC OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
To download Thunderbird for mac OS from the official website, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click here to visit the official Thunderbird website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. On the website, locate and click on the '''&amp;quot;Free Download&amp;quot;''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. After the download is complete, locate the downloaded file and open it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Drag the Thunderbird application icon to your '''&amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot;''' folder to install it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once the installation is complete, navigate to your '''&amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot;''' folder and open the Thunderbird application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Follow the on-screen prompts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ When asked to select a location, click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ If prompted to choose a layout type, select your preferred option and click on '''&amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. Once the installation is done, a '''&amp;quot;Done&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot;''' button will appear. Click on it to complete the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Smart phones =====&lt;br /&gt;
   1. For Android phones, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Unfortunately, Thunderbird is not available for phones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. However, you can use an alternative mobile-based FOSS (Free and Open-Source Software) tool called K9 on your phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click here to download and install K9 on your phone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
      Note: Please note that K9 is not available for iOS devices. iOS users can install the BlueMail app (which is not FOSS) instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Working with the Application ===&lt;br /&gt;
After installing the application on your computer, you can open it by following these steps on ubuntu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Navigate to the '''&amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot;''' menu on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Go to the '''&amp;quot;Internet&amp;quot;''' category and look for either '''&amp;quot;Thunderbird&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Mozilla Thunderbird&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click on the Thunderbird/Mozilla Thunderbird option to open the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Windows user can search the Thunderbird application from the application list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin using Thunderbird, you need to configure your email account(s) by providing your email ID and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Configuring email account ====&lt;br /&gt;
To configure email account follow the below steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the application screen, click on '''“Email”''' button to get the email configuration dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Provide your name, email address, and password in the respective fields (As per the details available on mail server).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Once you type all the required details, click on continue. (as shown in the below figure1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will check your login details with e mail server and in the next screen select '''“IMAP”''' (select POP3 only if you use single device to access emails) under the available configuration section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of commonly using email server connections which are IMAP and POP3. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   • IMAP: It allows multiple devices at a time to access and read the mails include inbox, sent, draft and all other folders created on a device. This is suitable to user who wants to access emails from the multiple devices like laptop, mobile phones and etc...)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   • POP3: It allows a single device at a time to access your emails through server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the required configuration method (IMAP/POP3), now click on '''Done/Finish''' (as shown in the above figure).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will take few minutes to connect to your email server and to check your login credentials. If all the given details are correct, thunderbird will start fetching the list of your folders and start synchronizing your mail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Enabling Menu Bar ====&lt;br /&gt;
The menu bar in any application is an essential section that grants access to all available features and settings. By default, the menubar in Thunderbird is hidden, but you can temporarily enable it by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Alt&amp;quot;''' key on your keyboard. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you prefer to have the menu bar displayed at all times in Thunderbird, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on an empty space within the tab strip of Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the pop-up menu that appears, check the option labelled '''&amp;quot;Menu bar.&amp;quot;''' (You may refer to the above image for guidance.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, the menu bar will be shown continuously in Thunderbird, allowing easy access to all its functionalities and settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Get Messages ====&lt;br /&gt;
When you initially set up your email accounts in Thunderbird, by default thunderbird connect to your email server and download all new emails and folders from your webmail server. Additionally, Thunderbird will automatically check for new emails each time you start the application and at intervals of ten minutes (you can modify this interval under email account settings).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manually check for new emails, you can click on the '''&amp;quot;Get Messages&amp;quot;''' button. This button serves two purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. It fetches any new emails that are available on the mail server but have not been downloaded to your Thunderbird application yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. It helps you download emails that are still stored on the mail server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access the '''&amp;quot;Get Messages&amp;quot;''' button, look for it in the top left corner of the Thunderbird window. Clicking on this button will initiate the process of retrieving new emails and updating your Thunderbird inbox with the latest messages from your email server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Thunderbird Layout ====&lt;br /&gt;
The default layout in Thunderbird is the classic layout, but there are two additional layout options available: wide view and vertical view layout. To explore these layout options, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the '''&amp;quot;View&amp;quot;''' menu in Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the dropdown menu, select '''&amp;quot;Layout&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the submenu, you will find the options '''&amp;quot;View Classic&amp;quot;''', '''&amp;quot;View Wide&amp;quot;''', and '''&amp;quot;View Vertical&amp;quot;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Choose the layout that suits your preferences by selecting the corresponding option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Message List Columns ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird allows you to customize the columns displayed in the message list, providing flexibility in choosing the information you want to see for each email. Here are the steps to customize the message list columns in Thunderbird:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird interface, make sure you are in the Mail tab, where the message list is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Right-click on the column headers in the message list. The column headers are typically labels such as '''&amp;quot;From,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Subject,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Date,&amp;quot;''' etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. A context menu will appear, showing a list of available columns that you can display in the message list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the context menu, you can see a list of per-defined columns, such as '''&amp;quot;Sender,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Recipient,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Size,&amp;quot;''' '''&amp;quot;Tags,&amp;quot;''' and more. These columns represent different information associated with the emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. To add a column, simply click on the checkbox next to the column name in the context menu. This will add the column to the message list, and the respective information will be displayed for each email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. By clicking on these each column heading the emails will be sorted accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. You can also rearrange the columns in the message list by clicking and dragging the column headers to your preferred positions. This allows you to customize the layout according to your preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Composing/sending new mail ====&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to replying to emails which you receive to your inbox, you can compose new emails using the '''&amp;quot;Compose Email&amp;quot;''' or '''“Write”''' feature in Thunderbird. To compose a new email, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the '''&amp;quot;Write&amp;quot;''' button located in the top left corner of the thunderbird window. This will open a new email composition window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the &amp;quot;From&amp;quot; section, you can select the email account through which you want to send the email. (this is applicable only if your have multiple account been added in your thunderbird)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. When composing a new email, you will come across the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       a) '''&amp;quot;To&amp;quot;''': Enter the recipient's email address. You can add multiple recipients by separating their email addresses with commas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       b) '''&amp;quot;Cc&amp;quot;''': (Carbon Copy): If you want to send a copy of the email to additional recipients, enter their email addresses in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       c) '''&amp;quot;Bcc&amp;quot;''': (Blind Carbon Copy): If you want to send a copy of the email to recipients without disclosing their addresses to others, use this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       d) '''&amp;quot;Subject&amp;quot;''': Provide a descriptive subject line for your email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the main body of the email, type your message. If desired, you can format the text using the formatting options available in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. To attach files or documents, click on the paper-clip icon or select the '''&amp;quot;Attach&amp;quot;''' option from the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Once you have composed your email, click on the '''&amp;quot;Send&amp;quot;''' button to send it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird will send the email using the selected email account, and it will appear in the Sent folder as a record of your sent message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding Attachment to the email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Your attachments refer to files that are sent alongside in your email message. Thunderbird supports a wide range of file types, including videos, audios, pictures, and documents (However, there are certain limitations on attachments, such as file size restrictions and permissible file extensions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach files to your email in Thunderbird, please follow the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Compose a new email or click on  reply to an email you have received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. At the top right side of the Thunderbird screen, click on the '''&amp;quot;Attach&amp;quot;''' icon. This will open your computer's local folder location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Browse through your folders to locate the file(s) you wish to attach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Select the desired file and click '''&amp;quot;Open.&amp;quot;''' Repeat this step if you need to attach multiple files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you can use the drag-and-drop method to attach files. Simply locate the files you want to attach on your desktop or file explorer, and then drag and drop them into the compose window in Thunderbird. This method works with files from various applications as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding Signature to your email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Signatures allow users to include the information to be sent with every email, including name, contact details or a quote. To add a signature to your email in Thunderbird, follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird main window, click on the '''“edit”''' option from the menubar and then choose '''&amp;quot;Account Settings&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the Account Settings window, select the email account for which you want to add a signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Under the selected account, scroll down and find the '''&amp;quot;Signature Text&amp;quot;''' section on the right side pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Check the box next to '''&amp;quot;Attach the signature”'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Click on the '''&amp;quot;Choose...&amp;quot;''' button and browse your computer to select the file containing your desired signature in html format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you add a signature to your email account going forward all your outgoing mails will have signature at the end of the email thread. To change this option to add your  signature just about the quote and just below your email body, follow the below steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the same account setting window navigate to the '''&amp;quot;Composition &amp;amp; Addressing&amp;quot;''' tab. Look for the '''&amp;quot;composition&amp;quot;''' section within the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Under when outgoing option, select '''“ start the reply above the quote”''' option and under place my signature setting select '''“below the reply (above the quote)”''' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Once you have finished configuring your signature, click on the '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Font configuration ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Default font configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the default font in Thunderbird's mail client, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' menu at the top of the Thunderbird window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the dropdown menu, select '''&amp;quot;Preferences&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the Preferences or Settings window, locate the '''&amp;quot;Fonts &amp;amp; Colors&amp;quot;''' section. You can use the search bar to find it quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Within the Fonts &amp;amp; Colors section, click on the '''&amp;quot;Advanced&amp;quot;''' button. This will open a new window with additional font settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. In the Advanced Fonts window, look for the option that says '''&amp;quot;Allow messages to use other fonts&amp;quot;''' and make sure it is unchecked. This will ensure that Thunderbird uses the default font consistently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Once you have made the necessary changes, click '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Apply&amp;quot;''' to save the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can set the default font in Thunderbird's mail client. This will ensure that the mail client uses the specified font for all your emails, providing a consistent appearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Rewrap text =====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option in Thunderbird allows you to reformat the text of an email or a specific paragraph to fit within a specified line length. This is particularly useful when you want to adjust the formatting of your email to ensure it is visually appealing and easy to read.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are replying to the other emails or composing new email, select the text or paragraph that you want to rewrap. You can do this by clicking and dragging the cursor over the desired text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on the selected text and choose the '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option from the context menu. Alternatively, you can find the '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option in the Thunderbird menu bar under '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. It will automatically adjust the formatting of the selected text to fit within the specified line length, which is usually determined by the width of the email composition window.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Repeat the process if you need to rewrap additional paragraphs or sections of text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using the '''&amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot;''' option, you can ensure that your text is properly formatted within the email, eliminating excessive line breaks and improving readability. It's a convenient feature to make your emails more visually appealing and professional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before sending the email make sure all your inserted links and tables are not effected with this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Using text editor external tool =====&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure your fonts remain intact when copying and pasting text into Thunderbird, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. If you need to copy text from other files or external sources, be aware that there is a chance it could disrupt the formatting of your email's fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. To avoid this issue, first copy the content from the source application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Open a text editor application such as Pluma or gedit, or any other notepad-style app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Paste the copied text into the text editor (this will remove the pre-formatted style with the text).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Once the text is pasted into the text editor, copy it again from there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Now, open Thunderbird and compose your email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Paste the text you copied from the text editor directly into your email in Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can prevent any  font style issues that may occur when copying and pasting text into Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: Tag email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Email tags will help you to organize your email messages by categories. You can tag your emails based on the projects or priority, personal, office and etc…  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To tag emails in Thunderbird, you can follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Navigate to the folder containing the message you want to tag (e.g., Inbox, Sent, or a custom folder).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Select the message you wish to tag by clicking on it. You can also select multiple messages by holding down the Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac) key and clicking on the desired messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Once the message(s) is selected, right-click on the message and choose '''&amp;quot;Tag&amp;quot;''' from the context menu (as shown in the above image ). Alternatively, you can also find the '''&amp;quot;Tag&amp;quot;''' option in the Thunderbird menu bar under '''&amp;quot;Message&amp;quot;''' or in the message toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. A list of available tags will be displayed. Click on the desired tag to apply it to the selected message(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. If the tag you want to use is not available, you can create a new tag. To do this, choose '''&amp;quot;Manage Tags&amp;quot;''' from the tag menu. In the '''&amp;quot;Tags&amp;quot;''' window, click on the '''&amp;quot;New&amp;quot;''' button and enter the name and color for the new tag. Click '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' to create the tag and then apply it to the selected message(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. The selected message(s) will now be tagged with the chosen tag, and the tag will be displayed next to the message in the message list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. Also, '''To remove a tag''', follow the same steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keyboard shortcut: See the numbers in the Tag menu, To quickly tag a email, press the respective number key. The email will be tagged with that tag. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can easily tag messages in Thunderbird, allowing you to organize and categorize your emails based on different criteria or priorities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: with Folders ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird folders help you to organize your emails in a hierarchical structure, making it easier to manage and locate specific emails quickly. You can create folders for different projects, categories, people, or any other criteria that suits your needs. By moving emails from your inbox to specific folders, you can keep your inbox clean. This allows you to focus on important emails and reduces the chances of missing any crucial messages.  To create folders in Thunderbird and move emails into them, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Thunderbird interface, locate the left-hand pane where your email accounts and folders are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on the email account or an existing folder where you want to create a new folder. A context menu will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the context menu, select '''&amp;quot;New Folder.&amp;quot;''' A dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the dialog box, enter a name for the new folder. Choose a descriptive name that reflects the purpose or category of the emails you plan to store in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Click '''&amp;quot;Create Folder&amp;quot;''' to create the new folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. The new folder will now appear in the left-hand pane, under the selected account or parent folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you create a folder, now you can move any emails into it using move option. To move emails manually into a folder:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Select the email or emails you want to move. You can do this by clicking on the email while holding down the Ctrl key to select multiple emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Right-click on the selected email(s) to open the context menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. From the context menu, hover over the '''&amp;quot;Move To&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;Move&amp;quot;''' option. A sub-menu will appear with a list of folders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Click on the folder where you want to move the selected email(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. The selected email(s) will be moved to the chosen folder, and they will no longer appear in the original location (e.g., the inbox).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: with Message filtering ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird allows you to set up message filters based on various criteria such as sender, subject, or keywords. These filters can automatically move incoming emails to specific folders, helping you automate the organization process. Each account has its own set of filters. Filters can move emails to folders, delete them, forward them to other email addresses, and more. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First you need to create folder for moving these auto filter emails to it. Follow the '''“Managing Emails: with Folders”''' section instruction to create folder and then follow the below steps to create filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Go to Tools – Message filters option from the menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Click on '''New''' option from the Message filter dialog box. A Filter Rules dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the '''&amp;quot;Filter Name&amp;quot;''' field, type a name for your filter and Under '''&amp;quot;Apply filter when&amp;quot;''', check one of the options or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In most cases, you won’t want to change from the default '''“Getting New Mail”''' and '''“Manually Run”''' options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the '''&amp;quot;Getting New Mail: &amp;quot;''' dropdown menu, choose either Filter before Junk Classification or Filter after Junk Classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Choose a property, a test and a value for each rule you want to apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A property is a email element or characteristic such as '''“Subject”''' or '''“From”''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A test is a check on the property, such as '''“contains”''' or '''“is in my address book”''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A value completes the test with a specific detail, such as an email address or keyword&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Choose one or more actions for emails that meet those criteria (Note: To add another rule, click Add a new rule '''“+”''' at the end of the last rule. To delete a rule, click Remove this rule '''“-”'''), and Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. In the Message Filters dialog box, at the top line, select the account (from the dropdown list) that the filters are to apply to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   8. Click '''Run Now''' if you want the new filter to be applied to emails you’ve already received. The filter will automatically be applied to all new emails after it's saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE:Filters are executed in the order they appear in the list of filters, except when that order is not possible, in which case you will see the message Note: Filter actions will be run in a different order, and the link See execution order. If you click the link, you will see which order is used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Search emails: quick filter option ====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''“Quick Filter”''' toolbar helps you limit the number of emails that are displayed in the email list or quickly filter messages within the selected email folder. It can be used, for example, to only show emails from the specific sender, emails containing a specific word or emails with attachments. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Filter toolbar is displayed above the message lists. You can show or hide it by clicking the Filter icon '''Quick Filter''' button in your toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Quick Filter bar, click the Tag button. The emails list will be narrowed down to all emails that contain at least one tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Search emails : through Search emails option ====&lt;br /&gt;
Searching mail will help easy in find the required mail by applying the filter. To search a mail Go to '''“Edit→Find→Search Messages”''' or right click on the folder in which you want to search emails. A window will open as shown in below image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Select the '''Search for messages''' in drop-down menu to choose between All Mail, a specific address, or a folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Select the '''Subject''' drop-down list to choose the criteria for the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the next box, choose an operator (for example, '''contains, doesn't contain, or begins with''').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Type a search term in the text field and select '''Search'''. Your results appear in the box below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Saved search messages ====&lt;br /&gt;
A Saved Search is a special folder which shows a selection of emails which match your pre-defined search criteria. Saved Searches are a great way of saving time because instead of typing or recreating your most frequent searches again and again, you can just get immediate live results by looking at your Saved Search folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you create a Saved Search, you can choose criteria such as email addresses, subject words, tags, or dates. You can even choose different source folders from several accounts. Thunderbird then creates a folder which shows only matching emails. New matching emails from the specified source folders will automatically be shown in the Saved Search folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, you may want to view all emails from your supervisor in their own folder named '''“Supervisor”.''' Just add their email address to a Saved Search and their emails will automatically show up in the '''“supervisor”''' folder as they arrive. Yet the same emails will also still be shown in the source folders like your Inbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lets see how to do this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. From the File menu, click New, and then Saved Search from the sub-menu. The '''New Saved Search Folder''' dialog appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Change the Name for your Saved Search as you want to have it in the folder list. The folder that was selected when you opened the New Saved Search Folder dialog in step 1 will be displayed as the default name and location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click the Create as a subfolder of dropdown if you wish to change the parent folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. To select the folders to search, click the '''Choose''' button. A dialog will be displayed that contains a hierarchical view of all the folders in all of your accounts. Select the checkbox next to each folder you wish to include in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. If your emails are not stored on your local system for offline access (for example, if they are stored on a central IMAP server), check Search Online. This is only necessary if you are filtering based on the body of the email, as addresses and the subject line are stored locally even if you leave the email body on the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using Event and Task ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Thunderbird calendar option allows you to create, edit, and manage events, appointments, and tasks. You can set reminders, specify start and end times, add descriptions, invite attendees, and categories events for better organization. By default the calendar will not be enabled on the thunderbird. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the calendar you need to click on the calendar icon on the right side pane of the thunderbird window, then you will find the calendar tab. On the left side of the Thunderbird windows screen, you will find the option to '''“Enable”''' the calendar click on it. Once you click on it  '''“Event and Task”''' option will be enabled on the menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create events and tasks in Thunderbird's calendar, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird interface, click on the '''&amp;quot;Calendar&amp;quot;''' tab at the top to switch to the calendar view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the calendar view, select the specific calendar where you want to create the event or task. If you have multiple calendars, they will be listed on the left-hand side of the calendar view. Now click on the Event and Task option from the menu bar and select '''New Event''' or '''New Task''' as required, both has same template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. A pop-up window will appear to create the event. Here, enter the event title, start and end times, and any additional details such as location, description, or attendees.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Adjust any other settings or options as needed, such as reminders, recurrence (if the event repeats), or privacy settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Click on the attendances  and add the email Id of the people you to invite for the event (If it is task then attendances will not be available)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Click '''&amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;''' or '''&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;''' to create the event. It will now appear on the selected calendar at the specified date and time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit or modify events and tasks by selecting them from the calendar or task list and making changes in the event or task details window. To access the details, double-click on the event or task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird's calendar also allows you to set reminders for events and tasks. When creating or editing an event or task, you can specify the reminder time and choose the notification method (e.g., pop-up alert, sound, email).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using Add-on ====&lt;br /&gt;
Add-on will enrich your requirement of the mail client. To add the add-on Go to '''“Tools→ Add-on and Themes”''' you will get a new window as show in below image, click on the Extension option and search the required Add-on need to you like: '''Tbsyn, CalDAV and CardDAV, Lightning Calender, Mail Merge.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding required extensions on thunderbird&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the toggle option to enable and disable all the installed add-on’s .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Configure Next-cloud Calendar ====&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to Google calendar we have our own Cloud based calender called '''Next-cloud Calendar'''. To integrate the Nextcloud Calendar with Thunderbird mail client, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Make sure you have two necessary add-ons, Tbsyn and CalDAV and CardDAV, installed in Thunderbird. These add-ons facilitate the synchronization between the calendar and the mail client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. After adding the required add-ons, locate the Tbsyn settings by clicking on the spanner icon. This action will open a new window, as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. To configure the Nextcloud calendar, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Click on the '''&amp;quot;Account action&amp;quot;''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Select '''&amp;quot;Add new account&amp;quot;''' from the options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Click on '''&amp;quot;CalDAV &amp;amp; CardDAV.&amp;quot;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. A new tab will open, allowing you to enter the account information. Fill in the required details, such as the server address (cloud.itforchange.net), username (your nextcloud username), and password (Nextcloud login password) associated with your Nextcloud account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once you have entered the account information, click on '''&amp;quot;Next.&amp;quot;''' The Calendar selection window will appear, displaying the available calendars associated with your Nextcloud account. Select the desired calendars (Blr calendar, your team calendar and etc...) that you want to synchronise with Thunderbird calender.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. After selecting the calendar, click on '''&amp;quot;Synchronize now&amp;quot;''' to initiate the synchronization process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. The Nextcloud calendar is now configured in Thunderbird, and any updates or changes made to the nextcloud calendar will be notified within the mail client as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can successfully set up and synchronize the Nextcloud Calendar with Thunderbird, allowing you to manage your events and appointments seamlessly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== References ====&lt;br /&gt;
   1. https://support.mozilla.org/en-US/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. https://www.lifewire.com&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Thunderbird-new&amp;diff=14011</id>
		<title>Learn Thunderbird-new</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Thunderbird-new&amp;diff=14011"/>
		<updated>2023-08-11T11:00:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Composing/sending new mail */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction ===&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird (TB) is a “Free and Open Source software (FOSS)” email client tool for managing your emails, new feeds and new mailing groups. This mail client tool will help you to access and store your emails in multiple devices. Generally to access your emails from the mail servers (like gmail, rediff or hotmail) you need an Internet connectivity, with this thunderbird email client you can configure email account to access your emails even when you are offline (without Internet connectivity) as well.  Thunderbird is an powerful email client tool with wide range of features like configuring multiple email accounts, filters, changing themes, add-ons and etc...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Thunderbird is a free and open-source software email client tool.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Latest version is 102&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|Kmail, Mailspring, Evaluation,  etc...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Thunderbird is not available on smartphones. There are some other apps available for smartphones such as K-9 mail, Blue Mail, Spark Email, Clean-fox etc&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://www.thunderbird.net/en-US/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird is an email client, which does the usual functions of mailing – receiving, sending and storing emails. Mails can be stored in folders and sub folders to categorize mails based on subjects or senders or time periods or a combination of these. Files can be attached and shared with others. Emails can be searched easily by providing information on different elements such as sender, receiver, date etc. Mail ids can be connected to form ‘mailing-lists’ (such as google groups), by which, mail sent to the list id will be sent to all members of the group, this is ideal to create ‘professional learning communities’ of teachers with a common interest or need. Thunderbird  consider one of the powerful tool to manage multiple email accounts and emails include accessing feeds and public channels. The application helps you to manage your office email account (s) to in one place to manage your work and organizing emails based on your priorities and projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Installation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Ubuntu OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# This application is included in Ubuntu and many other Linux-based operating systems.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you cannot find this tool on your Ubuntu computer, you can install the app using the terminal by following these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
## Open the terminal by clicking on Applications/Menu → System Tools → Terminal (or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+T).&lt;br /&gt;
## Type the following command in the terminal window:  sudo apt install thunderbird&lt;br /&gt;
## Press	the Enter key on your keyboard. To initiate the installation	process, you will be prompted to enter your system administrator	password (no text will appear as you type it).&lt;br /&gt;
## Press	the Enter key again to start the installation process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Windows OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
To download Thunderbird for Windows OS, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Visit the official Thunderbird website by clicking here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. On the website, locate the &amp;quot;Free Download&amp;quot; button and click on it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. After the download is complete, navigate to the location where the file was saved. Double-click on the downloaded file to initiate the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Follow the on-screen prompts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ When prompted to select a location, click on &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ If asked to choose a layout type, select your preferred option and click on &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once the installation process is finished, you will see a &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot; button. Click on it to complete the installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For MAC OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
To download Thunderbird for mac OS from the official website, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click here to visit the official Thunderbird website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. On the website, locate and click on the &amp;quot;Free Download&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. After the download is complete, locate the downloaded file and open it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Drag the Thunderbird application icon to your &amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot; folder to install it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once the installation is complete, navigate to your &amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot; folder and open the Thunderbird application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Follow the on-screen prompts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ When asked to select a location, click on &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ If prompted to choose a layout type, select your preferred option and click on &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. Once the installation is done, a &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot; button will appear. Click on it to complete the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Smart phones =====&lt;br /&gt;
   1. For Android phones, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Unfortunately, Thunderbird is not available for phones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. However, you can use an alternative mobile-based FOSS (Free and Open-Source Software) tool called K9 on your phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click here to download and install K9 on your phone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
      Note: Please note that K9 is not available for iOS devices. iOS users can install the BlueMail app (which is not FOSS) instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Working with the Application ===&lt;br /&gt;
After installing the application on your computer, you can open it by following these steps on ubuntu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Navigate to the &amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot; menu on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Go to the &amp;quot;Internet&amp;quot; category and look for either &amp;quot;Thunderbird&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Mozilla Thunderbird&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click on the Thunderbird/Mozilla Thunderbird option to open the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Windows user can search the Thunderbird application from the application list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin using Thunderbird, you need to configure your email account(s) by providing your email ID and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Configuring email account ====&lt;br /&gt;
To configure email account follow the below steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the application screen, click on “Email” button to get the email configuration dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Provide your name, email address, and password in the respective fields (As per the details available on mail server).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Once you type all the required details, click on continue. (as shown in the below figure1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will check your login details with e mail server and in the next screen select “IMAP” (select POP3 only if you use single device to access emails) under the available configuration section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of commonly using email server connections which are IMAP and POP3. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   • IMAP: It allows multiple devices at a time to access and read the mails include inbox, sent, draft and all other folders created on a device. This is suitable to user who wants to access emails from the multiple devices like laptop, mobile phones and etc...)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   • POP3: It allows a single device at a time to access your emails through server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the required configuration method (IMAP/POP3), now click on '''Done/Finish''' (as shown in the above figure).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will take few minutes to connect to your email server and to check your login credentials. If all the given details are correct, thunderbird will start fetching the list of your folders and start synchronizing your mail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Enabling Menu Bar ====&lt;br /&gt;
The menu bar in any application is an essential section that grants access to all available features and settings. By default, the menubar in Thunderbird is hidden, but you can temporarily enable it by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Alt&amp;quot;''' key on your keyboard. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you prefer to have the menu bar displayed at all times in Thunderbird, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on an empty space within the tab strip of Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the pop-up menu that appears, check the option labelled &amp;quot;Menu bar.&amp;quot; (You may refer to the above image for guidance.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, the menu bar will be shown continuously in Thunderbird, allowing easy access to all its functionalities and settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Get Messages ====&lt;br /&gt;
When you initially set up your email accounts in Thunderbird, by default thunderbird connect to your email server and download all new emails and folders from your webmail server. Additionally, Thunderbird will automatically check for new emails each time you start the application and at intervals of ten minutes (you can modify this interval under email account settings).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manually check for new emails, you can click on the &amp;quot;Get Messages&amp;quot; button. This button serves two purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. It fetches any new emails that are available on the mail server but have not been downloaded to your Thunderbird application yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. It helps you download emails that are still stored on the mail server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access the &amp;quot;Get Messages&amp;quot; button, look for it in the top left corner of the Thunderbird window. Clicking on this button will initiate the process of retrieving new emails and updating your Thunderbird inbox with the latest messages from your email server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Thunderbird Layout ====&lt;br /&gt;
The default layout in Thunderbird is the classic layout, but there are two additional layout options available: wide view and vertical view layout. To explore these layout options, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the &amp;quot;View&amp;quot; menu in Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the dropdown menu, select &amp;quot;Layout&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the submenu, you will find the options &amp;quot;View Classic&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;View Wide&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;View Vertical&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Choose the layout that suits your preferences by selecting the corresponding option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Message List Columns ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird allows you to customize the columns displayed in the message list, providing flexibility in choosing the information you want to see for each email. Here are the steps to customize the message list columns in Thunderbird:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird interface, make sure you are in the Mail tab, where the message list is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Right-click on the column headers in the message list. The column headers are typically labels such as &amp;quot;From,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Subject,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Date,&amp;quot; etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. A context menu will appear, showing a list of available columns that you can display in the message list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the context menu, you can see a list of per-defined columns, such as &amp;quot;Sender,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Recipient,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Size,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Tags,&amp;quot; and more. These columns represent different information associated with the emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. To add a column, simply click on the checkbox next to the column name in the context menu. This will add the column to the message list, and the respective information will be displayed for each email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. By clicking on these each column heading the emails will be sorted accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. You can also rearrange the columns in the message list by clicking and dragging the column headers to your preferred positions. This allows you to customize the layout according to your preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Composing/sending new mail ====&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to replying to emails which you receive to your inbox, you can compose new emails using the &amp;quot;Compose Email&amp;quot; or “Write” feature in Thunderbird. To compose a new email, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the &amp;quot;Write&amp;quot; button located in the top left corner of the thunderbird window. This will open a new email composition window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the &amp;quot;From&amp;quot; section, you can select the email account through which you want to send the email. (this is applicable only if your have multiple account been added in your thunderbird)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. When composing a new email, you will come across the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       a) &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;: Enter the recipient's email address. You can add multiple recipients by separating their email addresses with commas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       b) &amp;quot;Cc&amp;quot; (Carbon Copy): If you want to send a copy of the email to additional recipients, enter their email addresses in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       c) &amp;quot;Bcc&amp;quot; (Blind Carbon Copy): If you want to send a copy of the email to recipients without disclosing their addresses to others, use this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       d) &amp;quot;Subject&amp;quot;: Provide a descriptive subject line for your email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the main body of the email, type your message. If desired, you can format the text using the formatting options available in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. To attach files or documents, click on the paper-clip icon or select the &amp;quot;Attach&amp;quot; option from the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Once you have composed your email, click on the &amp;quot;Send&amp;quot; button to send it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird will send the email using the selected email account, and it will appear in the Sent folder as a record of your sent message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding Attachment to the email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Your attachments refer to files that are sent alongside in your email message. Thunderbird supports a wide range of file types, including videos, audios, pictures, and documents (However, there are certain limitations on attachments, such as file size restrictions and permissible file extensions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach files to your email in Thunderbird, please follow the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Compose a new email or click on  reply to an email you have received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. At the top right side of the Thunderbird screen, click on the &amp;quot;Attach&amp;quot; icon. This will open your computer's local folder location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Browse through your folders to locate the file(s) you wish to attach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Select the desired file and click &amp;quot;Open.&amp;quot; Repeat this step if you need to attach multiple files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you can use the drag-and-drop method to attach files. Simply locate the files you want to attach on your desktop or file explorer, and then drag and drop them into the compose window in Thunderbird. This method works with files from various applications as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding Signature to your email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Signatures allow users to include the information to be sent with every email, including name, contact details or a quote. To add a signature to your email in Thunderbird, follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird main window, click on the “edit” option from the menubar and then choose &amp;quot;Account Settings&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the Account Settings window, select the email account for which you want to add a signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Under the selected account, scroll down and find the &amp;quot;Signature Text&amp;quot; section on the right side pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Check the box next to &amp;quot;Attach the signature”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Click on the &amp;quot;Choose...&amp;quot; button and browse your computer to select the file containing your desired signature in html format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you add a signature to your email account going forward all your outgoing mails will have signature at the end of the email thread. To change this option to add your  signature just about the quote and just below your email body, follow the below steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the same account setting window navigate to the &amp;quot;Composition &amp;amp; Addressing&amp;quot; tab. Look for the &amp;quot;composition&amp;quot; section within the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Under when outgoing option, select “ start the reply above the quote” option and under place my signature setting select “below the reply (above the quote)” option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Once you have finished configuring your signature, click on the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Font configuration ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Default font configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the default font in Thunderbird's mail client, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; menu at the top of the Thunderbird window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the dropdown menu, select &amp;quot;Preferences&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the Preferences or Settings window, locate the &amp;quot;Fonts &amp;amp; Colors&amp;quot; section. You can use the search bar to find it quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Within the Fonts &amp;amp; Colors section, click on the &amp;quot;Advanced&amp;quot; button. This will open a new window with additional font settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. In the Advanced Fonts window, look for the option that says &amp;quot;Allow messages to use other fonts&amp;quot; and make sure it is unchecked. This will ensure that Thunderbird uses the default font consistently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Once you have made the necessary changes, click &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Apply&amp;quot; to save the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can set the default font in Thunderbird's mail client. This will ensure that the mail client uses the specified font for all your emails, providing a consistent appearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Rewrap text =====&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot; option in Thunderbird allows you to reformat the text of an email or a specific paragraph to fit within a specified line length. This is particularly useful when you want to adjust the formatting of your email to ensure it is visually appealing and easy to read.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are replying to the other emails or composing new email, select the text or paragraph that you want to rewrap. You can do this by clicking and dragging the cursor over the desired text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on the selected text and choose the &amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot; option from the context menu. Alternatively, you can find the &amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot; option in the Thunderbird menu bar under &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. It will automatically adjust the formatting of the selected text to fit within the specified line length, which is usually determined by the width of the email composition window.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Repeat the process if you need to rewrap additional paragraphs or sections of text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using the &amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot; option, you can ensure that your text is properly formatted within the email, eliminating excessive line breaks and improving readability. It's a convenient feature to make your emails more visually appealing and professional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before sending the email make sure all your inserted links and tables are not effected with this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Using text editor external tool =====&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure your fonts remain intact when copying and pasting text into Thunderbird, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. If you need to copy text from other files or external sources, be aware that there is a chance it could disrupt the formatting of your email's fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. To avoid this issue, first copy the content from the source application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Open a text editor application such as Pluma or gedit, or any other notepad-style app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Paste the copied text into the text editor (this will remove the preformatted style with the text).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Once the text is pasted into the text editor, copy it again from there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Now, open Thunderbird and compose your email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Paste the text you copied from the text editor directly into your email in Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can prevent any  font style issues that may occur when copying and pasting text into Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: Tag email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Email tags will help you to organise your email messages by categories. You can tag your emails based on the projects or priority, personal, office and etc…  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To tag emails in Thunderbird, you can follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Navigate to the folder containing the message you want to tag (e.g., Inbox, Sent, or a custom folder).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Select the message you wish to tag by clicking on it. You can also select multiple messages by holding down the Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac) key and clicking on the desired messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Once the message(s) is selected, right-click on the message and choose &amp;quot;Tag&amp;quot; from the context menu (as shown in the above image ). Alternatively, you can also find the &amp;quot;Tag&amp;quot; option in the Thunderbird menu bar under &amp;quot;Message&amp;quot; or in the message toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. A list of available tags will be displayed. Click on the desired tag to apply it to the selected message(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. If the tag you want to use is not available, you can create a new tag. To do this, choose &amp;quot;Manage Tags&amp;quot; from the tag menu. In the &amp;quot;Tags&amp;quot; window, click on the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; button and enter the name and color for the new tag. Click &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to create the tag and then apply it to the selected message(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. The selected message(s) will now be tagged with the chosen tag, and the tag will be displayed next to the message in the message list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. Also, '''To remove a tag''', follow the same steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keyboard shortcut: See the numbers in the Tag menu, To quickly tag a email, press the respective number key. The email will be tagged with that tag. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can easily tag messages in Thunderbird, allowing you to organise and categorize your emails based on different criteria or priorities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: with Folders ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird folders help you to organise your emails in a hierarchical structure, making it easier to manage and locate specific emails quickly. You can create folders for different projects, categories, people, or any other criteria that suits your needs. By moving emails from your inbox to specific folders, you can keep your inbox clean. This allows you to focus on important emails and reduces the chances of missing any crucial messages.  To create folders in Thunderbird and move emails into them, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Thunderbird interface, locate the left-hand pane where your email accounts and folders are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on the email account or an existing folder where you want to create a new folder. A context menu will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the context menu, select &amp;quot;New Folder.&amp;quot; A dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the dialog box, enter a name for the new folder. Choose a descriptive name that reflects the purpose or category of the emails you plan to store in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Click &amp;quot;Create Folder&amp;quot; to create the new folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. The new folder will now appear in the left-hand pane, under the selected account or parent folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you create a folder, now you can move any emails into it using move option. To move emails manually into a folder:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Select the email or emails you want to move. You can do this by clicking on the email while holding down the Ctrl key to select multiple emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Right-click on the selected email(s) to open the context menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. From the context menu, hover over the &amp;quot;Move To&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Move&amp;quot; option. A submenu will appear with a list of folders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Click on the folder where you want to move the selected email(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. The selected email(s) will be moved to the chosen folder, and they will no longer appear in the original location (e.g., the inbox).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: with Message filtering ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird allows you to set up message filters based on various criteria such as sender, subject, or keywords. These filters can automatically move incoming emails to specific folders, helping you automate the organisation process. Each account has its own set of filters. Filters can move emails to folders, delete them, forward them to other email addresses, and more. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First you need to create folder for moving these auto filter emails to it. Follow the “Managing Emails: with Folders” section instruction to create folder and then follow the below steps to create filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Go to Tools – Message filters option from the menubar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Click on '''New''' option from the Message filter dialog box. A Filter Rules dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the &amp;quot;Filter Name&amp;quot; field, type a name for your filter and Under &amp;quot;Apply filter when&amp;quot;, check one of the options or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In most cases, you won’t want to change from the default “Getting New Mail” and “Manually Run” options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the &amp;quot;Getting New Mail: &amp;quot; dropdown menu, choose either Filter before Junk Classification or Filter after Junk Classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Choose a property, a test and a value for each rule you want to apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A property is a email element or characteristic such as “Subject” or “From” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A test is a check on the property, such as “contains” or “is in my address book” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A value completes the test with a specific detail, such as an email address or keyword&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Choose one or more actions for emails that meet those criteria (Note: To add another rule, click Add a new rule “+” at the end of the last rule. To delete a rule, click Remove this rule “-”), and Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. In the Message Filters dialog box, at the top line, select the account (from the dropdown list) that the filters are to apply to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   8. Click '''Run Now''' if you want the new filter to be applied to emails you’ve already received. The filter will automatically be applied to all new emails after it's saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE:Filters are executed in the order they appear in the list of filters, except when that order is not possible, in which case you will see the message Note: Filter actions will be run in a different order, and the link See execution order. If you click the link, you will see which order is used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Search emails: quick filter option ====&lt;br /&gt;
The “Quick Filter” toolbar helps you limit the number of emails that are displayed in the email list or quickly filter messages within the selected email folder. It can be used, for example, to only show emails from the specific sender, emails containing a specific word or emails with attachments. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Filter toolbar is displayed above the message lists. You can show or hide it by clicking the Filter icon '''Quick Filter''' button in your toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Quick Filter bar, click the Tag button. The emails list will be narrowed down to all emails that contain at least one tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Search emails : through Search emails option ====&lt;br /&gt;
Searching mail will help easy in find the required mail by applying the filter. To search a mail Go to '''“Edit→Find→Search Messages”''' or right click on the folder in which you want to search emails. A window will open as shown in below image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Select the '''Search for messages''' in drop-down menu to choose between All Mail, a specific address, or a folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Select the '''Subject''' drop-down list to choose the criteria for the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the next box, choose an operator (for example, '''contains, doesn't contain, or begins with''').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Type a search term in the text field and select '''Search'''. Your results appear in the box below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Saved search messages ====&lt;br /&gt;
A Saved Search is a special folder which shows a selection of emails which match your pre-defined search criteria. Saved Searches are a great way of saving time because instead of typing or recreating your most frequent searches again and again, you can just get immediate live results by looking at your Saved Search folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you create a Saved Search, you can choose criteria such as email addresses, subject words, tags, or dates. You can even choose different source folders from several accounts. Thunderbird then creates a folder which shows only matching emails. New matching emails from the specified source folders will automatically be shown in the Saved Search folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, you may want to view all emails from your supervisor in their own folder named “Supervisor”. Just add their email address to a Saved Search and their emails will automatically show up in the “supervisor” folder as they arrive. Yet the same emails will also still be shown in the source folders like your Inbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lets see how to do this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. From the File menu, click New, and then Saved Search from the sub-menu. The '''New Saved Search Folder''' dialog appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Change the Name for your Saved Search as you want to have it in the folder list. The folder that was selected when you opened the New Saved Search Folder dialog in step 1 will be displayed as the default name and location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click the Create as a subfolder of dropdown if you wish to change the parent folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. To select the folders to search, click the '''Choose''' button. A dialog will be displayed that contains a hierarchical view of all the folders in all of your accounts. Select the checkbox next to each folder you wish to include in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. If your emails are not stored on your local system for offline access (for example, if they are stored on a central IMAP server), check Search Online. This is only necessary if you are filtering based on the body of the email, as addresses and the subject line are stored locally even if you leave the email body on the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using Event and Task ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Thunderbird calendar option allows you to create, edit, and manage events, appointments, and tasks. You can set reminders, specify start and end times, add descriptions, invite attendees, and categories events for better organisation.  By default the calendar will not be enabled on the thunderbird. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the calendar you need to click on the calendar icon on the right side pane of the thunderbird window, then you will find the calendar tab. On the left side of the Thunderbird windows screen, you will find the option to “Enable” the calendar click on it. Once you click on it  “Event and Task” option will be enabled on the menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create events and tasks in Thunderbird's calendar, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird interface, click on the &amp;quot;Calendar&amp;quot; tab at the top to switch to the calendar view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the calendar view, select the specific calendar where you want to create the event or task. If you have multiple calendars, they will be listed on the left-hand side of the calendar view. Now click on the Event and Task option from the menu bar and select '''New Event''' or '''New Task''' as required, both has same template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. A pop-up window will appear to create the event. Here, enter the event title, start and end times, and any additional details such as location, description, or attendees.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Adjust any other settings or options as needed, such as reminders, recurrence (if the event repeats), or privacy settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Click on the attendances  and add the email Id of the people you to invite for the event (If it is task then attendances will not be available)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Click &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to create the event. It will now appear on the selected calendar at the specified date and time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit or modify events and tasks by selecting them from the calendar or task list and making changes in the event or task details window. To access the details, double-click on the event or task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird's calendar also allows you to set reminders for events and tasks. When creating or editing an event or task, you can specify the reminder time and choose the notification method (e.g., pop-up alert, sound, email).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using Add-on ====&lt;br /&gt;
Add-on will enrich your requirement of the mail client. To add the add-on Go to '''“Tools→ Add-on and Themes”''' you will get a new window as show in below image, click on the Extension option and search the required Add-on need to you like: '''Tbsyn, CalDAV and CardDAV, Lightning Calender, Mail Merge.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding required extensions on thunderbird&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the toggle option to enable and disable all the installed add-on’s .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Configure Next-cloud Calendar ====&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to Google calendar we have our own Cloud based calender called '''Next-cloud Calendar'''. To integrate the Nextcloud Calendar with Thunderbird mail client, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Make sure you have two necessary add-ons, Tbsyn and CalDAV and CardDAV, installed in Thunderbird. These add-ons facilitate the synchronization between the calendar and the mail client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. After adding the required add-ons, locate the Tbsyn settings by clicking on the spanner icon. This action will open a new window, as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. To configure the Nextcloud calendar, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Click on the &amp;quot;Account action&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Select &amp;quot;Add new account&amp;quot; from the options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Click on &amp;quot;CalDAV &amp;amp; CardDAV.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. A new tab will open, allowing you to enter the account information. Fill in the required details, such as the server address (cloud.itforchange.net), username (your nextcloud username), and password (Nextcloud login password) associated with your Nextcloud account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once you have entered the account information, click on &amp;quot;Next.&amp;quot; The Calendar selection window will appear, displaying the available calendars associated with your Nextcloud account. Select the desired calendars (Blr calendar, your team calendar and etc...) that you want to synchronise with Thunderbird calender.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. After selecting the calendar, click on &amp;quot;Synchronize now&amp;quot; to initiate the synchronization process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. The Nextcloud calendar is now configured in Thunderbird, and any updates or changes made to the nextcloud calendar will be notified within the mail client as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can successfully set up and synchronize the Nextcloud Calendar with Thunderbird, allowing you to manage your events and appointments seamlessly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== References ====&lt;br /&gt;
   1. https://support.mozilla.org/en-US/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. https://www.lifewire.com&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Thunderbird-new&amp;diff=14010</id>
		<title>Learn Thunderbird-new</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Thunderbird-new&amp;diff=14010"/>
		<updated>2023-08-11T10:29:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Working with the Application */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction ===&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird (TB) is a “Free and Open Source software (FOSS)” email client tool for managing your emails, new feeds and new mailing groups. This mail client tool will help you to access and store your emails in multiple devices. Generally to access your emails from the mail servers (like gmail, rediff or hotmail) you need an Internet connectivity, with this thunderbird email client you can configure email account to access your emails even when you are offline (without Internet connectivity) as well.  Thunderbird is an powerful email client tool with wide range of features like configuring multiple email accounts, filters, changing themes, add-ons and etc...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Thunderbird is a free and open-source software email client tool.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Latest version is 102&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|Kmail, Mailspring, Evaluation,  etc...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Thunderbird is not available on smartphones. There are some other apps available for smartphones such as K-9 mail, Blue Mail, Spark Email, Clean-fox etc&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://www.thunderbird.net/en-US/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird is an email client, which does the usual functions of mailing – receiving, sending and storing emails. Mails can be stored in folders and sub folders to categorize mails based on subjects or senders or time periods or a combination of these. Files can be attached and shared with others. Emails can be searched easily by providing information on different elements such as sender, receiver, date etc. Mail ids can be connected to form ‘mailing-lists’ (such as google groups), by which, mail sent to the list id will be sent to all members of the group, this is ideal to create ‘professional learning communities’ of teachers with a common interest or need. Thunderbird  consider one of the powerful tool to manage multiple email accounts and emails include accessing feeds and public channels. The application helps you to manage your office email account (s) to in one place to manage your work and organizing emails based on your priorities and projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Installation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Ubuntu OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# This application is included in Ubuntu and many other Linux-based operating systems.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you cannot find this tool on your Ubuntu computer, you can install the app using the terminal by following these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
## Open the terminal by clicking on Applications/Menu → System Tools → Terminal (or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+T).&lt;br /&gt;
## Type the following command in the terminal window:  sudo apt install thunderbird&lt;br /&gt;
## Press	the Enter key on your keyboard. To initiate the installation	process, you will be prompted to enter your system administrator	password (no text will appear as you type it).&lt;br /&gt;
## Press	the Enter key again to start the installation process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Windows OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
To download Thunderbird for Windows OS, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Visit the official Thunderbird website by clicking here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. On the website, locate the &amp;quot;Free Download&amp;quot; button and click on it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. After the download is complete, navigate to the location where the file was saved. Double-click on the downloaded file to initiate the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Follow the on-screen prompts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ When prompted to select a location, click on &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ If asked to choose a layout type, select your preferred option and click on &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once the installation process is finished, you will see a &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot; button. Click on it to complete the installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For MAC OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
To download Thunderbird for mac OS from the official website, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click here to visit the official Thunderbird website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. On the website, locate and click on the &amp;quot;Free Download&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. After the download is complete, locate the downloaded file and open it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Drag the Thunderbird application icon to your &amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot; folder to install it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once the installation is complete, navigate to your &amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot; folder and open the Thunderbird application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Follow the on-screen prompts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ When asked to select a location, click on &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ If prompted to choose a layout type, select your preferred option and click on &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. Once the installation is done, a &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot; button will appear. Click on it to complete the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Smart phones =====&lt;br /&gt;
   1. For Android phones, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Unfortunately, Thunderbird is not available for phones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. However, you can use an alternative mobile-based FOSS (Free and Open-Source Software) tool called K9 on your phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click here to download and install K9 on your phone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
      Note: Please note that K9 is not available for iOS devices. iOS users can install the BlueMail app (which is not FOSS) instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Working with the Application ===&lt;br /&gt;
After installing the application on your computer, you can open it by following these steps on ubuntu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Navigate to the &amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot; menu on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Go to the &amp;quot;Internet&amp;quot; category and look for either &amp;quot;Thunderbird&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Mozilla Thunderbird&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click on the Thunderbird/Mozilla Thunderbird option to open the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Windows user can search the Thunderbird application from the application list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin using Thunderbird, you need to configure your email account(s) by providing your email ID and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Configuring email account ====&lt;br /&gt;
To configure email account follow the below steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the application screen, click on “Email” button to get the email configuration dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Provide your name, email address, and password in the respective fields (As per the details available on mail server).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Once you type all the required details, click on continue. (as shown in the below figure1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will check your login details with e mail server and in the next screen select “IMAP” (select POP3 only if you use single device to access emails) under the available configuration section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of commonly using email server connections which are IMAP and POP3. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   • IMAP: It allows multiple devices at a time to access and read the mails include inbox, sent, draft and all other folders created on a device. This is suitable to user who wants to access emails from the multiple devices like laptop, mobile phones and etc...)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   • POP3: It allows a single device at a time to access your emails through server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the required configuration method (IMAP/POP3), now click on '''Done/Finish''' (as shown in the above figure).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will take few minutes to connect to your email server and to check your login credentials. If all the given details are correct, thunderbird will start fetching the list of your folders and start synchronizing your mail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Enabling Menu Bar ====&lt;br /&gt;
The menu bar in any application is an essential section that grants access to all available features and settings. By default, the menubar in Thunderbird is hidden, but you can temporarily enable it by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Alt&amp;quot;''' key on your keyboard. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you prefer to have the menu bar displayed at all times in Thunderbird, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on an empty space within the tab strip of Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the pop-up menu that appears, check the option labelled &amp;quot;Menu bar.&amp;quot; (You may refer to the above image for guidance.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, the menu bar will be shown continuously in Thunderbird, allowing easy access to all its functionalities and settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Get Messages ====&lt;br /&gt;
When you initially set up your email accounts in Thunderbird, by default thunderbird connect to your email server and download all new emails and folders from your webmail server. Additionally, Thunderbird will automatically check for new emails each time you start the application and at intervals of ten minutes (you can modify this interval under email account settings).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manually check for new emails, you can click on the &amp;quot;Get Messages&amp;quot; button. This button serves two purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. It fetches any new emails that are available on the mail server but have not been downloaded to your Thunderbird application yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. It helps you download emails that are still stored on the mail server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access the &amp;quot;Get Messages&amp;quot; button, look for it in the top left corner of the Thunderbird window. Clicking on this button will initiate the process of retrieving new emails and updating your Thunderbird inbox with the latest messages from your email server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Thunderbird Layout ====&lt;br /&gt;
The default layout in Thunderbird is the classic layout, but there are two additional layout options available: wide view and vertical view layout. To explore these layout options, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the &amp;quot;View&amp;quot; menu in Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the dropdown menu, select &amp;quot;Layout&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the submenu, you will find the options &amp;quot;View Classic&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;View Wide&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;View Vertical&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Choose the layout that suits your preferences by selecting the corresponding option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Message List Columns ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird allows you to customize the columns displayed in the message list, providing flexibility in choosing the information you want to see for each email. Here are the steps to customize the message list columns in Thunderbird:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird interface, make sure you are in the Mail tab, where the message list is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Right-click on the column headers in the message list. The column headers are typically labels such as &amp;quot;From,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Subject,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Date,&amp;quot; etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. A context menu will appear, showing a list of available columns that you can display in the message list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the context menu, you can see a list of per-defined columns, such as &amp;quot;Sender,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Recipient,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Size,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Tags,&amp;quot; and more. These columns represent different information associated with the emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. To add a column, simply click on the checkbox next to the column name in the context menu. This will add the column to the message list, and the respective information will be displayed for each email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. By clicking on these each column heading the emails will be sorted accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. You can also rearrange the columns in the message list by clicking and dragging the column headers to your preferred positions. This allows you to customize the layout according to your preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Composing/sending new mail ====&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to replying to emails which you receive to your inbox, you can compose new emails using the &amp;quot;Compose Email&amp;quot; or “Write” feature in Thunderbird. To compose a new email, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the &amp;quot;Write&amp;quot; button located in the top left corner of the thunderbird window. This will open a new email composition window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the &amp;quot;From&amp;quot; section, you can select the email account through which you want to send the email. (this is applicable only if your have multiple account been added in your thunderbird)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. When composing a new email, you will come across the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       a) &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;: Enter the recipient's email address. You can add multiple recipients by separating their email addresses with commas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       b) &amp;quot;Cc&amp;quot; (Carbon Copy): If you want to send a copy of the email to additional recipients, enter their email addresses in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       c) &amp;quot;Bcc&amp;quot; (Blind Carbon Copy): If you want to send a copy of the email to recipients without disclosing their addresses to others, use this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       d) &amp;quot;Subject&amp;quot;: Provide a descriptive subject line for your email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the main body of the email, type your message. If desired, you can format the text using the formatting options available in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. To attach files or documents, click on the paper-clip icon or select the &amp;quot;Attach&amp;quot; option from the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Once you have composed your email, click on the &amp;quot;Send&amp;quot; button to send it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird will send the email using the selected email account, and it will appear in the Sent folder as a record of your sent message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding Attachment to the email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Your attachments refer to files that are sent alongside in your email message. Thunderbird supports a wide range of file types, including videos, audios, pictures, and documents (However, there are certain limitations on attachments, such as file size restrictions and permissible file extensions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach files to your email in Thunderbird, please follow the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Compose a new email or click on  reply to an email you have received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. At the top right side of the Thunderbird screen, click on the &amp;quot;Attach&amp;quot; icon. This will open your computer's local folder location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Browse through your folders to locate the file(s) you wish to attach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Select the desired file and click &amp;quot;Open.&amp;quot; Repeat this step if you need to attach multiple files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you can use the drag-and-drop method to attach files. Simply locate the files you want to attach on your desktop or file explorer, and then drag and drop them into the compose window in Thunderbird. This method works with files from various applications as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding Signature to your email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Signatures allow users to include the information to be sent with every email, including name, contact details or a quote. To add a signature to your email in Thunderbird, follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird main window, click on the “edit” option from the menubar and then choose &amp;quot;Account Settings&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the Account Settings window, select the email account for which you want to add a signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Under the selected account, scroll down and find the &amp;quot;Signature Text&amp;quot; section on the right side pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Check the box next to &amp;quot;Attach the signature”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Click on the &amp;quot;Choose...&amp;quot; button and browse your computer to select the file containing your desired signature in html format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you add a signature to your email account going forward all your outgoing mails will have signature at the end of the email thread. To change this option to add your  signature just about the quote and just below your email body, follow the below steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the same account setting window navigate to the &amp;quot;Composition &amp;amp; Addressing&amp;quot; tab. Look for the &amp;quot;composition&amp;quot; section within the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Under when outgoing option, select “ start the reply above the quote” option and under place my signature setting select “below the reply (above the quote)” option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Once you have finished configuring your signature, click on the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Font configuration ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Default font configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the default font in Thunderbird's mail client, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click on the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; menu at the top of the Thunderbird window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the dropdown menu, select &amp;quot;Preferences&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the Preferences or Settings window, locate the &amp;quot;Fonts &amp;amp; Colors&amp;quot; section. You can use the search bar to find it quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Within the Fonts &amp;amp; Colors section, click on the &amp;quot;Advanced&amp;quot; button. This will open a new window with additional font settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. In the Advanced Fonts window, look for the option that says &amp;quot;Allow messages to use other fonts&amp;quot; and make sure it is unchecked. This will ensure that Thunderbird uses the default font consistently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Once you have made the necessary changes, click &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Apply&amp;quot; to save the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can set the default font in Thunderbird's mail client. This will ensure that the mail client uses the specified font for all your emails, providing a consistent appearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Rewrap text =====&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot; option in Thunderbird allows you to reformat the text of an email or a specific paragraph to fit within a specified line length. This is particularly useful when you want to adjust the formatting of your email to ensure it is visually appealing and easy to read.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are replying to the other emails or composing new email, select the text or paragraph that you want to rewrap. You can do this by clicking and dragging the cursor over the desired text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on the selected text and choose the &amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot; option from the context menu. Alternatively, you can find the &amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot; option in the Thunderbird menu bar under &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. It will automatically adjust the formatting of the selected text to fit within the specified line length, which is usually determined by the width of the email composition window.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Repeat the process if you need to rewrap additional paragraphs or sections of text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using the &amp;quot;Rewrap&amp;quot; option, you can ensure that your text is properly formatted within the email, eliminating excessive line breaks and improving readability. It's a convenient feature to make your emails more visually appealing and professional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before sending the email make sure all your inserted links and tables are not effected with this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Using text editor external tool =====&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure your fonts remain intact when copying and pasting text into Thunderbird, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. If you need to copy text from other files or external sources, be aware that there is a chance it could disrupt the formatting of your email's fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. To avoid this issue, first copy the content from the source application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Open a text editor application such as Pluma or gedit, or any other notepad-style app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Paste the copied text into the text editor (this will remove the preformatted style with the text).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Once the text is pasted into the text editor, copy it again from there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Now, open Thunderbird and compose your email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Paste the text you copied from the text editor directly into your email in Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can prevent any  font style issues that may occur when copying and pasting text into Thunderbird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: Tag email ====&lt;br /&gt;
Email tags will help you to organise your email messages by categories. You can tag your emails based on the projects or priority, personal, office and etc…  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To tag emails in Thunderbird, you can follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Navigate to the folder containing the message you want to tag (e.g., Inbox, Sent, or a custom folder).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Select the message you wish to tag by clicking on it. You can also select multiple messages by holding down the Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac) key and clicking on the desired messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Once the message(s) is selected, right-click on the message and choose &amp;quot;Tag&amp;quot; from the context menu (as shown in the above image ). Alternatively, you can also find the &amp;quot;Tag&amp;quot; option in the Thunderbird menu bar under &amp;quot;Message&amp;quot; or in the message toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. A list of available tags will be displayed. Click on the desired tag to apply it to the selected message(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. If the tag you want to use is not available, you can create a new tag. To do this, choose &amp;quot;Manage Tags&amp;quot; from the tag menu. In the &amp;quot;Tags&amp;quot; window, click on the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; button and enter the name and color for the new tag. Click &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to create the tag and then apply it to the selected message(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. The selected message(s) will now be tagged with the chosen tag, and the tag will be displayed next to the message in the message list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. Also, '''To remove a tag''', follow the same steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keyboard shortcut: See the numbers in the Tag menu, To quickly tag a email, press the respective number key. The email will be tagged with that tag. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can easily tag messages in Thunderbird, allowing you to organise and categorize your emails based on different criteria or priorities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: with Folders ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird folders help you to organise your emails in a hierarchical structure, making it easier to manage and locate specific emails quickly. You can create folders for different projects, categories, people, or any other criteria that suits your needs. By moving emails from your inbox to specific folders, you can keep your inbox clean. This allows you to focus on important emails and reduces the chances of missing any crucial messages.  To create folders in Thunderbird and move emails into them, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Thunderbird interface, locate the left-hand pane where your email accounts and folders are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Right-click on the email account or an existing folder where you want to create a new folder. A context menu will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. From the context menu, select &amp;quot;New Folder.&amp;quot; A dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the dialog box, enter a name for the new folder. Choose a descriptive name that reflects the purpose or category of the emails you plan to store in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Click &amp;quot;Create Folder&amp;quot; to create the new folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. The new folder will now appear in the left-hand pane, under the selected account or parent folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you create a folder, now you can move any emails into it using move option. To move emails manually into a folder:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Select the email or emails you want to move. You can do this by clicking on the email while holding down the Ctrl key to select multiple emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Right-click on the selected email(s) to open the context menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. From the context menu, hover over the &amp;quot;Move To&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Move&amp;quot; option. A submenu will appear with a list of folders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Click on the folder where you want to move the selected email(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. The selected email(s) will be moved to the chosen folder, and they will no longer appear in the original location (e.g., the inbox).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing Emails: with Message filtering ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird allows you to set up message filters based on various criteria such as sender, subject, or keywords. These filters can automatically move incoming emails to specific folders, helping you automate the organisation process. Each account has its own set of filters. Filters can move emails to folders, delete them, forward them to other email addresses, and more. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First you need to create folder for moving these auto filter emails to it. Follow the “Managing Emails: with Folders” section instruction to create folder and then follow the below steps to create filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Go to Tools – Message filters option from the menubar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Click on '''New''' option from the Message filter dialog box. A Filter Rules dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the &amp;quot;Filter Name&amp;quot; field, type a name for your filter and Under &amp;quot;Apply filter when&amp;quot;, check one of the options or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In most cases, you won’t want to change from the default “Getting New Mail” and “Manually Run” options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. In the &amp;quot;Getting New Mail: &amp;quot; dropdown menu, choose either Filter before Junk Classification or Filter after Junk Classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Choose a property, a test and a value for each rule you want to apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A property is a email element or characteristic such as “Subject” or “From” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A test is a check on the property, such as “contains” or “is in my address book” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ A value completes the test with a specific detail, such as an email address or keyword&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Choose one or more actions for emails that meet those criteria (Note: To add another rule, click Add a new rule “+” at the end of the last rule. To delete a rule, click Remove this rule “-”), and Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. In the Message Filters dialog box, at the top line, select the account (from the dropdown list) that the filters are to apply to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   8. Click '''Run Now''' if you want the new filter to be applied to emails you’ve already received. The filter will automatically be applied to all new emails after it's saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE:Filters are executed in the order they appear in the list of filters, except when that order is not possible, in which case you will see the message Note: Filter actions will be run in a different order, and the link See execution order. If you click the link, you will see which order is used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Search emails: quick filter option ====&lt;br /&gt;
The “Quick Filter” toolbar helps you limit the number of emails that are displayed in the email list or quickly filter messages within the selected email folder. It can be used, for example, to only show emails from the specific sender, emails containing a specific word or emails with attachments. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Filter toolbar is displayed above the message lists. You can show or hide it by clicking the Filter icon '''Quick Filter''' button in your toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Quick Filter bar, click the Tag button. The emails list will be narrowed down to all emails that contain at least one tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Search emails : through Search emails option ====&lt;br /&gt;
Searching mail will help easy in find the required mail by applying the filter. To search a mail Go to '''“Edit→Find→Search Messages”''' or right click on the folder in which you want to search emails. A window will open as shown in below image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Select the '''Search for messages''' in drop-down menu to choose between All Mail, a specific address, or a folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Select the '''Subject''' drop-down list to choose the criteria for the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. In the next box, choose an operator (for example, '''contains, doesn't contain, or begins with''').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Type a search term in the text field and select '''Search'''. Your results appear in the box below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Saved search messages ====&lt;br /&gt;
A Saved Search is a special folder which shows a selection of emails which match your pre-defined search criteria. Saved Searches are a great way of saving time because instead of typing or recreating your most frequent searches again and again, you can just get immediate live results by looking at your Saved Search folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you create a Saved Search, you can choose criteria such as email addresses, subject words, tags, or dates. You can even choose different source folders from several accounts. Thunderbird then creates a folder which shows only matching emails. New matching emails from the specified source folders will automatically be shown in the Saved Search folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, you may want to view all emails from your supervisor in their own folder named “Supervisor”. Just add their email address to a Saved Search and their emails will automatically show up in the “supervisor” folder as they arrive. Yet the same emails will also still be shown in the source folders like your Inbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lets see how to do this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. From the File menu, click New, and then Saved Search from the sub-menu. The '''New Saved Search Folder''' dialog appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Change the Name for your Saved Search as you want to have it in the folder list. The folder that was selected when you opened the New Saved Search Folder dialog in step 1 will be displayed as the default name and location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click the Create as a subfolder of dropdown if you wish to change the parent folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. To select the folders to search, click the '''Choose''' button. A dialog will be displayed that contains a hierarchical view of all the folders in all of your accounts. Select the checkbox next to each folder you wish to include in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. If your emails are not stored on your local system for offline access (for example, if they are stored on a central IMAP server), check Search Online. This is only necessary if you are filtering based on the body of the email, as addresses and the subject line are stored locally even if you leave the email body on the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using Event and Task ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Thunderbird calendar option allows you to create, edit, and manage events, appointments, and tasks. You can set reminders, specify start and end times, add descriptions, invite attendees, and categories events for better organisation.  By default the calendar will not be enabled on the thunderbird. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the calendar you need to click on the calendar icon on the right side pane of the thunderbird window, then you will find the calendar tab. On the left side of the Thunderbird windows screen, you will find the option to “Enable” the calendar click on it. Once you click on it  “Event and Task” option will be enabled on the menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create events and tasks in Thunderbird's calendar, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. In the Thunderbird interface, click on the &amp;quot;Calendar&amp;quot; tab at the top to switch to the calendar view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. In the calendar view, select the specific calendar where you want to create the event or task. If you have multiple calendars, they will be listed on the left-hand side of the calendar view. Now click on the Event and Task option from the menu bar and Sselect New Event or New Task as required, both has same template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. A pop-up window will appear to create the event. Here, enter the event title, start and end times, and any additional details such as location, description, or attendees.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Adjust any other settings or options as needed, such as reminders, recurrence (if the event repeats), or privacy settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Click on the attendances  and add the email Id of the people you to invite for the event (If it is task then attendances will not be available)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Click &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to create the event. It will now appear on the selected calendar at the specified date and time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit or modify events and tasks by selecting them from the calendar or task list and making changes in the event or task details window. To access the details, double-click on the event or task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird's calendar also allows you to set reminders for events and tasks. When creating or editing an event or task, you can specify the reminder time and choose the notification method (e.g., pop-up alert, sound, email).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using Add-on ====&lt;br /&gt;
Add-on will enrich your requirement of the mail client. To add the add-on Go to “Tools→ Add-on and Themes” you will get a new window as show in below image, click on the Extension option and search the required Add-on need to you like: Tbsyn, CalDAV and CardDAV, Lightning Calender, Mail Merge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding required extensions on thunderbird&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the toggle option to enable and disable all the installed add-on’s .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.18 Configure Next-cloud Calendar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to Google calendar we have our own Cloud based calender called Next-cloud Calendar. To integrate the Nextcloud Calendar with Thunderbird mail client, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Make sure you have two necessary add-ons, Tbsyn and CalDAV and CardDAV, installed in Thunderbird. These add-ons facilitate the synchronization between the calendar and the mail client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
      &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. After adding the required add-ons, locate the Tbsyn settings by clicking on the spanner icon. This action will open a new window, as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. To configure the Nextcloud calendar, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Click on the &amp;quot;Account action&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Select &amp;quot;Add new account&amp;quot; from the options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ Click on &amp;quot;CalDAV &amp;amp; CardDAV.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. A new tab will open, allowing you to enter the account information. Fill in the required details, such as the server address (cloud.itforchange.net), username (your nextcloud username), and password (Nextcloud login password) associated with your Nextcloud account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
      &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once you have entered the account information, click on &amp;quot;Next.&amp;quot; The Calendar selection window will appear, displaying the available calendars associated with your Nextcloud account. Select the desired calendars (Blr calendar, your team calendar and etc...) that you want to synchronise with Thunderbird calender.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
      &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. After selecting the calendar, click on &amp;quot;Synchronize now&amp;quot; to initiate the synchronization process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. The Nextcloud calendar is now configured in Thunderbird, and any updates or changes made to the nextcloud calendar will be notified within the mail client as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By following these steps, you can successfully set up and synchronize the Nextcloud Calendar with Thunderbird, allowing you to manage your events and appointments seamlessly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
References&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://support.mozilla.org/en-US/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://www.lifewire.com&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Thunderbird-new&amp;diff=14009</id>
		<title>Learn Thunderbird-new</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Thunderbird-new&amp;diff=14009"/>
		<updated>2023-08-11T09:44:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction ===&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird (TB) is a “Free and Open Source software (FOSS)” email client tool for managing your emails, new feeds and new mailing groups. This mail client tool will help you to access and store your emails in multiple devices. Generally to access your emails from the mail servers (like gmail, rediff or hotmail) you need an Internet connectivity, with this thunderbird email client you can configure email account to access your emails even when you are offline (without Internet connectivity) as well.  Thunderbird is an powerful email client tool with wide range of features like configuring multiple email accounts, filters, changing themes, add-ons and etc...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Thunderbird is a free and open-source software email client tool.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Latest version is 102&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|Kmail, Mailspring, Evaluation,  etc...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Thunderbird is not available on smartphones. There are some other apps available for smartphones such as K-9 mail, Blue Mail, Spark Email, Clean-fox etc&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://www.thunderbird.net/en-US/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Thunderbird is an email client, which does the usual functions of mailing – receiving, sending and storing emails. Mails can be stored in folders and sub folders to categorize mails based on subjects or senders or time periods or a combination of these. Files can be attached and shared with others. Emails can be searched easily by providing information on different elements such as sender, receiver, date etc. Mail ids can be connected to form ‘mailing-lists’ (such as google groups), by which, mail sent to the list id will be sent to all members of the group, this is ideal to create ‘professional learning communities’ of teachers with a common interest or need. Thunderbird  consider one of the powerful tool to manage multiple email accounts and emails include accessing feeds and public channels. The application helps you to manage your office email account (s) to in one place to manage your work and organizing emails based on your priorities and projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Installation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Ubuntu OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# This application is included in Ubuntu and many other Linux-based operating systems.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you cannot find this tool on your Ubuntu computer, you can install the app using the terminal by following these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
## Open the terminal by clicking on Applications/Menu → System Tools → Terminal (or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+T).&lt;br /&gt;
## Type the following command in the terminal window:  sudo apt install thunderbird&lt;br /&gt;
## Press	the Enter key on your keyboard. To initiate the installation	process, you will be prompted to enter your system administrator	password (no text will appear as you type it).&lt;br /&gt;
## Press	the Enter key again to start the installation process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Windows OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
To download Thunderbird for Windows OS, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Visit the official Thunderbird website by clicking here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. On the website, locate the &amp;quot;Free Download&amp;quot; button and click on it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. After the download is complete, navigate to the location where the file was saved. Double-click on the downloaded file to initiate the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Follow the on-screen prompts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ When prompted to select a location, click on &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ If asked to choose a layout type, select your preferred option and click on &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once the installation process is finished, you will see a &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot; button. Click on it to complete the installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For MAC OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
To download Thunderbird for mac OS from the official website, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Click here to visit the official Thunderbird website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. On the website, locate and click on the &amp;quot;Free Download&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. After the download is complete, locate the downloaded file and open it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   4. Drag the Thunderbird application icon to your &amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot; folder to install it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   5. Once the installation is complete, navigate to your &amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot; folder and open the Thunderbird application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   6. Follow the on-screen prompts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ When asked to select a location, click on &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
       ◦ If prompted to choose a layout type, select your preferred option and click on &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   7. Once the installation is done, a &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot; button will appear. Click on it to complete the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== For Smart phones =====&lt;br /&gt;
   1. For Android phones, please follow these instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Unfortunately, Thunderbird is not available for phones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. However, you can use an alternative mobile-based FOSS (Free and Open-Source Software) tool called K9 on your phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click here to download and install K9 on your phone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
      Note: Please note that K9 is not available for iOS devices. iOS users can install the BlueMail app (which is not FOSS) instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Working with the Application ===&lt;br /&gt;
After installing the application on your computer, you can open it by following these steps on ubuntu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   1. Navigate to the &amp;quot;Applications&amp;quot; menu on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   2. Go to the &amp;quot;Internet&amp;quot; category and look for either &amp;quot;Thunderbird&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Mozilla Thunderbird&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   3. Click on the Thunderbird/Mozilla Thunderbird option to open the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Windows user can search the Thunderbird application from the application list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin using Thunderbird, you need to configure your email account(s) by providing your email ID and password.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=File:Installation_on_ubuntu.png&amp;diff=14008</id>
		<title>File:Installation on ubuntu.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=File:Installation_on_ubuntu.png&amp;diff=14008"/>
		<updated>2023-08-11T09:31:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;a&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_H5P&amp;diff=13990</id>
		<title>Learn H5P</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_H5P&amp;diff=13990"/>
		<updated>2023-06-14T10:37:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction ===&lt;br /&gt;
H5P is short for HTML5 Package and is a simple way to create and share rich and interactive web content. H5P is modular and consists of several content types and applications. This H5P will allow to teachers to create interactive learning contents and students can use those contents through computers, mobiles and tablets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|It is a generic interactive content resource creation and editing tool.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|This tool can be used to create interactive content combining multiple resources like text, images, audio and video.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|NA&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://explorabl.es/tutorials/ Explorable Explanations]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Any latest web browser can open play and edit h5p content.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://h5p.org/about-the-project H5P Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
H5P makes it easy to create, share and reuse the content and applications. H5P empowers everyone to create rich and interactive web experiences more efficiently. H5P content is responsive and mobile friendly, which means that users will experience the same rich, interactive content on computers, smartphones and tablets alike. With H5P we can create and edit interactive videos, presentations, games, advertisements and more. It is a completely free and open technology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
H5P can be accessed in two ways&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Through installing customized [https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Learn_Ubuntu Ubuntu 20.04] in your laptop/system.&lt;br /&gt;
* After [https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Learn_Ubuntu Ubuntu] installation, Go to &amp;quot;Applications --&amp;gt; Other --&amp;gt; H5P. The H5P will be opened in the Firefox browser. &lt;br /&gt;
* You can log in using the credentials. Username: h5p Password: h5p&lt;br /&gt;
2. Another method for creating any interactive content in H5P is, you need to sign up on the [https://h5p.org/testdrive-h5p H5P] website &amp;amp; access available content types.[[File:H5p Main Page.png|center|frameless|593x593px]]{{Note}} We strongly recommend to use H5P in local host hence you can use the variety of content types which are limited in [https://h5p.org/testdrive-h5p H5P].&lt;br /&gt;
=== Working with application ===&lt;br /&gt;
To use any content type in H5P localhost click on &amp;quot;Add content --&amp;gt; Interactive content&amp;quot; and you will get a lot of content types. There are different kinds of contents you can create and here are some important ones are explained in detail in the following sections.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Course presentation ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Course presentation content type allows you to create a slide-based interactive presentation of your learning material. Elements such as text, images, audios and videos. By combining any of these resources you can create resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, this presentation content type allow users to add multiple choice, fill in the blanks, texts and other types of interactions with in their presentations. Presentations can be accompanied with formative self-assessments in the form of short quizzes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Steps to create course presentation :'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Getting Started: &lt;br /&gt;
* Open new Creative Content Page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose Course Presentation from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Course Presentation Editor will open. It should look like this :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:H5p Course Presentation Editor.png|center|thumb|569x569px|H5p Course Presentation Editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Adding Key Words :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be used to recognize slides and navigate between slides.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the     [[File:Keyword Button.png]]   Button .      &lt;br /&gt;
* Click on &amp;quot;Add Keyword&amp;quot;, using this we can add multiple key words for each slide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Adding Pictures :  &lt;br /&gt;
* We add the pictures by using the     [[File:Add Image Button.png]]   Button.&lt;br /&gt;
* Either click on it or drag the icon and place it at the location where you want to insert the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
* A dialogue box appears. Click on the plus sign to add image.&lt;br /&gt;
* Alternative text is a text that is displayed if server can’t load the image. This has to be entered in the box for Alternative text.&lt;br /&gt;
* We can also add hover text, which is the text displayed when the viewer places his mouse pointer on the image.&lt;br /&gt;
* Similarly comments can be added, opacity of the image can be varied and we can display the image as a button as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; when finished inserting the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Adding text : &lt;br /&gt;
* We add text using  [[File:Add Text Button.png]]   Tool.&lt;br /&gt;
* Either click on it or drag it to the location where you want to place a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
* A dialogue box will appear inside which we can enter text.&lt;br /&gt;
* Similarly comments can be added, opacity of the image can be varied and we can display the image as a button as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; when finished inserting the text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Adding new slides :&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on the   [[File:Add new slide.png]]   Button on the bottom right corner of the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* New slide will appear on which we can create content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Adding Links :&lt;br /&gt;
* To add links we use the  [[File:Link Button.png]]   Button.&lt;br /&gt;
* On clicking it, a dialogue box appears. We can type the display text for the link in the title or select the text we want to convert into a link before clicking on the link icon.&lt;br /&gt;
* Select suitable protocol for your link, it is usually http:// or https://.&lt;br /&gt;
* Type the URL to which the text is to be linked.&lt;br /&gt;
* We can add comments and press done when finished inserting the text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Adding Videos :&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on  [[File:Adding Video.png]]  Icon to insert videos.&lt;br /&gt;
* A dialogue box appears.&lt;br /&gt;
* Videos can be inserted in the same way we do it for images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Inserting Questions : When we choose a certain question type, a dialogue box appears, where we can enter the question and all its features. Then the question is added by clicking on done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Question types :&lt;br /&gt;
* Fill in the blanks - [[File:Fill in the Blanks.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Single Choice Set - [[File:Single Choice Set.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Multiple Choice - [[File:Multiple Choice Button.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* True or False - [[File:True or False Type.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Drag and Drop - [[File:Drag and Drop type.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. Licensing : Make sure all the items you take from the internet is Open Resource File meant for reuse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content you create can also have licensing set, by setting it in the dialogue boxes of the object you create.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Dialog Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Dialog cards content type enables you to create a set of cards with corresponding words or expressions on either side of the cards. Dialog cards can be used as a drill to help learners memorize words, expressions or sentences. They provide a prompt on one side of the card, and a corresponding answer on the other side. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now lets start creating dialog cards by selecting this option from the content types. The Dialog cards editor should now appear. The top part of the editor looks like this:[[File:Dialog Card Editor.png|center|thumb|386x386px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Title : This will be displayed to the learner throughout the set of cards&lt;br /&gt;
* Task description: In this field we can give elaborate instructions to the learner. The &amp;quot;Task description&amp;quot; is displayed throughout the entire set of cards, below the &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;. Insert the following text.&lt;br /&gt;
* Dialogs : Press the &amp;quot;Add dialog&amp;quot; button to add the first card. Here, &amp;quot;Text&amp;quot; means you need to type the question or any word which learning should think and answer.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dialogue Card 1.png|center|frameless|362x362px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &amp;quot;Answer&amp;quot; field, we provide the correct answer (this will come with the other face of the cards). Additionally  you can add image and audio file under the &amp;quot;Image and audio&amp;quot; section (this is optional).&lt;br /&gt;
* By clicking and &amp;quot;Add dialog&amp;quot; you can keep creating dialog cards like this in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; the node/article when you're satisfied to view your final set of Flashcards. &lt;br /&gt;
Dialog card [https://h5p.org/tutorial-dialog-cards#example example file]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Choice question ====&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple Choice questions can use it for testing well-defined skills related to a certain topic. Multiple Choice questions can be an effective assessment tool when they are created properly and the learner is given immediate feedback on own performance. The H5P Multiple Choice questions can have a single or multiple correct options per question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Getting Started : Open H5P, open new content and give a title, and then select content type as multiple choice question. On choosing the Multiple Choice type, Multiple Choice Question editor opens. It should look like this :[[File:Multiple Choice Editor.png|center|700x700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
2) Inserting Media :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Media Option is Meant for adding Images or videos to the question. Select Media type from the drop-down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inserting Media.png|center|frameless|592x592px]]&lt;br /&gt;
After this the video or image to be used can be uploaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) The Question : The question has to be typed in the box provided for the question. This is the question for which multiple answer options are given.[[File:The Question.png|center|thumb|615x615px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4) The Options : Options are choices of answers for the question. By default there are two option boxes where the text for the options can be typed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional options can be inserted by clicking on add options. The correct answer can be selected by checking the correct answer checkbox.[[File:The Options.png|center|thumb|486x486px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Tips and Feedback is used to display text to the user while selecting options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip Text is a hint for the user before the user checks their answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Message displayed if answer is selected is used to display text when the user selects this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Message displayed if answer is not selected is used to display text when the user does not select this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5) Feedback : Multiple Choice allows the learner to get feedback on selected answering options. Feedback can be given for multiple ranges of score. Additional ranges can be added by clicking on Add Range. The Ranges can distributed into equal ranges by clicking on distribute evenly.[[File:The Feedback.png|center|thumb|479x479px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6) Behavioral Settings : This allows us to decide the way the question and the feedback. Various options exist in this. The question type option is set to automatic by default. This means the question type depends on the number of correct answers chosen. But it can be set to multiple or single choice type. The rest of the options can also be chosen based on our requirement.[[File:Behavioural Settings.png|center|499x499px|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7) Text overrides and translations : This is used to set translations on the interface for questions and options and also to determine the text of the dialogues appearing for retry and confirmation.[[File:Text overrides.png|center|494x494px|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; and the Multiple Choice Question is ready for use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Fill in the Blanks  ====&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the blanks questions are questions where a word or a phrase is missing from text, the user is asked to fill them in. Fill in the blanks can be used to test the learner's ability to reproduce facts or mathematical inferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Getting Started : Open H5P, open new content and give a &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, and then select content type as &amp;quot;Fill in the Blanks&amp;quot;. On choosing the Fill in the Blank type, Fill in the Blank editor opens. It should look like this :[[File:Fill in the Blanks 1.png|center|frameless|416x416px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the Blanks Editor has two sections &amp;quot;Task description&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Text Blocks&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Task description : In the Task description field we give the learner basic instructions or introduce the problem to be solved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Text Blocks : Under Text blocks we add our sentences and define which words are to be remove for the learner to identify.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When we enter text in the block ,Blanks are added with an asterisk (*) in front and behind the correct word/phrase. Alternative answers are separated with a forward slash (/). You may add a textual tip, using a colon (:) in front of the tip.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new Text blocks, click on [[File:Add Text Block.png|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overall Feedback, Behavioral Settings and Text overrides and translation can be set the same way as in multiple choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Drag and Drop  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drag and drop type allows the user to create questions where one can make questions which can be answered by dragging text or images and dropping them in zones that match. Drag and drop enables the learner to associate two or more elements and to make logical connections in a visual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Getting Started : Open H5P, open new content and give a title, and then select content type as &amp;quot;Drag and Drop question&amp;quot;. On choosing the &amp;quot;Drag and Drop type&amp;quot;, Drag and Drop editor opens. It will look like this :[[File:Drag and Drop 1.png|center|frameless|507x507px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The editor has two windows, &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; tab and &amp;quot;Task&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) Settings tab : The &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, is the title of the the question to be displayed only when generating summaries and statistics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Background image can be added by clicking on  [[File:Add Background Image.png|frameless]] which sets the background image of the question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Task Size sets the size of the question area&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Task Size.png|center|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
3) Task tab : The task tab is the area where we make the Drag and Drop question. The toolbar on top is what we use to create the questions,.There are 3 buttons on the toolbar,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Dropzones :  Dropzones are regions where draggable text and images can be dropped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drag the dropzone icon [[File:Dropzone.png|frameless]]and place it in the location where you want a dropzone. The instant we place the dropzone, the dropzone settings appear. Which will look like this:[[File:Dropzone Settings.png|center|frameless|469x469px]]&lt;br /&gt;
We can set the &amp;quot;Label&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Opacity&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Dropzone restrictions&amp;quot; using this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Text[[File:Text.png|frameless]] :  This is the icon we use to add text. Dragging this icon and placing it in the location where you want to insert the text, opens the text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Text Image .png|center|frameless|488x488px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Where setting of the text and dropzones it can be placed in will be done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Image[[File:Image 1.png|frameless]] : This is used to add images to the question. Dragging this icon and placing it in the location where you want the image to be, an image editor appears. It will look like this :[[File:Image editor.png|center|frameless|488x488px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here we can set image settings and the dropzones it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4) Feedback : The feedback pane works the same way we used it for the multiple choice questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Timeline ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Timeline content type allows you to place a sequence of events in chronological order. For each event, you may add images and texts. You may also include assets from Twitter, YouTube, Flickr, Vimeo, Google Maps and SoundCloud.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a timeline, click on create a content type and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Timeline&amp;quot; from the list of Content types:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, timeline editor will appear. It consists of three main parts &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Timeline&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Dates&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Title''' : Enter the &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, then expand the timeline section to add a &amp;quot;Headline&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Body Text&amp;quot;. Example &amp;quot;Prime ministers of india&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. Time line title details.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;{{Note}} If there is an online image, video or other media that you would like to display when the timeline is first seen, expand the '''Assets''' section. Add the link to '''Media''' – this is the URL to the image, video, audio or map. Add '''Credits''' and a '''Caption'''.)&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Timeline:''' This part consists of content for a starting slide and some overall settings for the entire timeline.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. Details about the time line.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Dates:''' This section the most important where you add events in time as a '''Date'''. An event “date” can be any period of time from a single day to a number of years. Start in the '''Dates''' section, by adding the '''Start date''', '''End date''', '''Headline''' and '''Body text''' of the first event that you would like to display to your timeline.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. Add details about each slide.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Your timeline with the first slide is ready now, You can check how the timeline is working using the '''Save''' button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Adding event details : =====&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking an '''add event''' you will add more events details to your timeline. Each event need to fill the following details :&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Start date''': Event start date&lt;br /&gt;
# '''End date''': Event End date &lt;br /&gt;
# '''Headline''': Heading for the event&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Body text''': Detail about the event&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;290px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Add event details to your timeline&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:3. Add details about each slide.png| Adding dates, headlines and bodytext&lt;br /&gt;
File:5. Adding media to the slide.png|Adding media for the timeline&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under '''Asset'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Media''': Upload your file, or copy paste any OER media links&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Credit :''' Enter the author/website link of the media.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6. click add item to add more slides for your screen.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Add more events with dates as required to your timeline with the '''Add Item''' button. In the same way, fill in all the other dates with the following content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== True or False Questions ====&lt;br /&gt;
True or False type of questions are popular when it comes about a decision on a statement. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:True or False question1.png|Adding True or False Question &lt;br /&gt;
File:Question True or False2.png|True or False question look&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To create a True or False question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose True/False Question from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question in &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Type your question in Question. Format the question if required.&lt;br /&gt;
# Mark the &amp;quot;Correct Answer&amp;quot; to either of True or False.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Drag the Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
Drag the words is a kind of matching the answer questions where you will be given different questions with various answers. You have to drag and drop it on a blank which you think is the answer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Drag and Drop1.png|Adding Drag and Drop question&lt;br /&gt;
File:Drag and Drop2.png|Drag and Drop question look&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Drag the words question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose Drag the words question from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe your question in &amp;quot;Task Description&amp;quot;. Format the description if required.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;, type your questions with answers enclosed within two asterisks (*) as mentioned in the image.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Hotspots ====&lt;br /&gt;
In an image multiple spots can be located based on user's requirement. Multiple questions with multiple answers or single question expecting multiple answers can be spotted in Multiple hotspots.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspot1.png|Giving the title and uploading the image&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspots2.png|Choosing the number of correct hotspots and marking them&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspot3.png|Marked Hotspots&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspots4.png|Result &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Multiple Hotspot question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Multiple Hotspot&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Write the question in &amp;quot;The title of this question&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the Image. Click on Next Step (? Hotspots)&lt;br /&gt;
# In the next page, type the task description.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the value in &amp;quot;Number of correct hotspots that need to be found for question completion&amp;quot; (For example if you need the user to find 3 spots on an Image enter it as 3)&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Hotspots&amp;quot; click on the circle or rectangle icon. Place and drag them on wherever required (The portion that is considered to be as the answer).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Image Hotspots ====&lt;br /&gt;
An Image hotspot is used to create a hotspot which may reveal some textual, image or video information regarding that.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:ImageHotspot1.png|Uploading background image&lt;br /&gt;
File:ImageHotspot2.png|Positioning the hotspot&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:ImageHotspot3.png|Adding text for a hotspot&lt;br /&gt;
File:Image hotspot answer.png|Result of Image hotspot&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Image Hotspot question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Image hotspot&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the image in the &amp;quot;Background Image&amp;quot;. You can change hotspot icon, predefined icon, hotspot color if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Popup content&amp;quot; select the variety of content need to be shown when a user click on that hotspot (text, image or video). Feed the relevant content. For example, if you want to give the description for a hotspot you can enter the detailed text in the &amp;quot;Text&amp;quot; box. For &amp;quot;video&amp;quot; you can either upload the video that you already have in your system or can paste the URL of Youtube. For &amp;quot;Image&amp;quot; you can simply upload the image.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once done with one hotspot you can &amp;quot;Add Hotspot&amp;quot; to spot one more item in the image and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Flashcards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Flashcards are a set of stylish images that are paired with questions and answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Flashcard question.png|Adding the Card&lt;br /&gt;
File:Flashcard result.png|Flashcard result&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a flashcard question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Flashcard&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the Task description.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the question that is related to Image if required.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the answer.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the Image.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on Save. &lt;br /&gt;
# To add one more image, click on &amp;quot;Add Card&amp;quot; and follow the same steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Interactive video ====&lt;br /&gt;
Interactive video adds interactivity to your video with explanations, extra pictures, tables, Fill in the Blank and multiple choice questions. They make your videos more informative and communicative.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Interactive Video1.png|Adding the Interactive video question&lt;br /&gt;
File:Interactive video 2.png|Choosing Button or Poster&lt;br /&gt;
File:Interactive video 3.png|Appearance of text in the video&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an interactive video type of question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Interactive video&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding Interactive video to your page involves three steps, Upload or embed the video, Add interactions, Summary task.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the first step, video should be uploaded or embedded. If you have the copy of video then choose Upload option, link the Youtube address otherwise. Click on &amp;quot;Add Interactions&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the next page, you can choose the element you want to add in between the video. Available elements are Label, Text, Table, Link, Image etc. Various question types can also be included in this stage. Usually the added interaction is visible as plus mark inside the circle. Here you have two options, Button and Poster. If you choose button option, the element will be triggered if and only if you click on the Circle Plus symbol. Poster makes the element to appear directly on the video. In case of button option, you can move the Circle plus symbol so to avoid this symbol hiding your background video. Once you done with this page click on &amp;quot;Summary Task&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you have a question at the end of the video you can mention that in this section. You can add an &amp;quot;Introduction Text&amp;quot; with the set of statements in the &amp;quot;Summary&amp;quot; section. While giving the statements make sure that the first statement itself is the answer. Later the statements will be automatically shuffled. Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Ideas for Resource creation ====&lt;br /&gt;
Using this tool you can create varieties of resources by attaching it to a video. You can have interactive session by putting questions of different types wherever required. You can conduct quizzes for students related to a topic of your subject. This tool also helps the students to memorize the things quickly. &lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional references ===&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://h5p.org/documentation/for-authors/tutorials Handout for content authors]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_H5P&amp;diff=13989</id>
		<title>Learn H5P</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_H5P&amp;diff=13989"/>
		<updated>2023-06-14T10:37:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction ===&lt;br /&gt;
H5P is short for HTML5 Package and is a simple way to create and share rich and interactive web content. H5P is modular and consists of several content types and applications. This H5P will allow to teachers to create interactive learning contents and students can use those contents through computers, mobiles and tablets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|It is a generic interactive content resource creation and editing tool.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|This tool can be used to create interactive content combining multiple resources like text, images, audio and video.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|NA&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://explorabl.es/tutorials/ Explorable Explanations]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Any latest web browser can open play and edit h5p content.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://h5p.org/about-the-project H5P Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
H5P makes it easy to create, share and reuse the content and applications. H5P empowers everyone to create rich and interactive web experiences more efficiently. H5P content is responsive and mobile friendly, which means that users will experience the same rich, interactive content on computers, smartphones and tablets alike. With H5P we can create and edit interactive videos, presentations, games, advertisements and more. It is a completely free and open technology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
H5P can be accessed in two ways&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Through installing customized [https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Learn_Ubuntu Ubuntu 20.04] in your laptop/system.&lt;br /&gt;
* After [https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Learn_Ubuntu Ubuntu] installation, Go to &amp;quot;Applications --&amp;gt; Other --&amp;gt; H5P. The H5P will be opened in the Firefox browser. &lt;br /&gt;
* You can log in using the credentials. Username: h5p Password: h5p&lt;br /&gt;
2. Another method for creating any interactive content in H5P is, you need to sign up on the [https://h5p.org/testdrive-h5p H5P] website &amp;amp; access available content types.[[File:H5p Main Page.png|center|frameless|593x593px]]{{Note}} We strongly recommend to use H5P in local host hence you can use the variety of content types which are limited in [https://h5p.org/testdrive-h5p H5P].&lt;br /&gt;
=== Working with application ===&lt;br /&gt;
To use any content type in H5P localhost click on &amp;quot;Add content --&amp;gt; Interactive content&amp;quot; and you will get a lot of content types. There are different kinds of contents you can create and here are some important ones are explained in detail in the following sections.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Course presentation ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Course presentation content type allows you to create a slide-based interactive presentation of your learning material. Elements such as text, images, audios and videos. By combining any of these resources you can create resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, this presentation content type allow users to add multiple choice, fill in the blanks, texts and other types of interactions with in their presentations. Presentations can be accompanied with formative self-assessments in the form of short quizzes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Steps to create course presentation :'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Getting Started: &lt;br /&gt;
* Open new Creative Content Page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose Course Presentation from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Course Presentation Editor will open. It should look like this :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:H5p Course Presentation Editor.png|center|thumb|569x569px|H5p Course Presentation Editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Adding Key Words :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be used to recognize slides and navigate between slides.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the     [[File:Keyword Button.png]]   Button .      &lt;br /&gt;
* Click on &amp;quot;Add Keyword&amp;quot;, using this we can add multiple key words for each slide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Adding Pictures :  &lt;br /&gt;
* We add the pictures by using the     [[File:Add Image Button.png]]   Button.&lt;br /&gt;
* Either click on it or drag the icon and place it at the location where you want to insert the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
* A dialogue box appears. Click on the plus sign to add image.&lt;br /&gt;
* Alternative text is a text that is displayed if server can’t load the image. This has to be entered in the box for Alternative text.&lt;br /&gt;
* We can also add hover text, which is the text displayed when the viewer places his mouse pointer on the image.&lt;br /&gt;
* Similarly comments can be added, opacity of the image can be varied and we can display the image as a button as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; when finished inserting the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Adding text : &lt;br /&gt;
* We add text using  [[File:Add Text Button.png]]   Tool.&lt;br /&gt;
* Either click on it or drag it to the location where you want to place a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
* A dialogue box will appear inside which we can enter text.&lt;br /&gt;
* Similarly comments can be added, opacity of the image can be varied and we can display the image as a button as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; when finished inserting the text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Adding new slides :&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on the   [[File:Add new slide.png]]   Button on the bottom right corner of the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* New slide will appear on which we can create content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Adding Links :&lt;br /&gt;
* To add links we use the  [[File:Link Button.png]]   Button.&lt;br /&gt;
* On clicking it, a dialogue box appears. We can type the display text for the link in the title or select the text we want to convert into a link before clicking on the link icon.&lt;br /&gt;
* Select suitable protocol for your link, it is usually http:// or https://.&lt;br /&gt;
* Type the URL to which the text is to be linked.&lt;br /&gt;
* We can add comments and press done when finished inserting the text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Adding Videos :&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on  [[File:Adding Video.png]]  Icon to insert videos.&lt;br /&gt;
* A dialogue box appears.&lt;br /&gt;
* Videos can be inserted in the same way we do it for images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Inserting Questions : When we choose a certain question type, a dialogue box appears, where we can enter the question and all its features. Then the question is added by clicking on done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Question types :&lt;br /&gt;
* Fill in the blanks - [[File:Fill in the Blanks.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Single Choice Set - [[File:Single Choice Set.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Multiple Choice - [[File:Multiple Choice Button.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* True or False - [[File:True or False Type.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Drag and Drop - [[File:Drag and Drop type.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. Licensing : Make sure all the items you take from the internet is Open Resource File meant for reuse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content you create can also have licensing set, by setting it in the dialogue boxes of the object you create.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Dialog Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Dialog cards content type enables you to create a set of cards with corresponding words or expressions on either side of the cards. Dialog cards can be used as a drill to help learners memorize words, expressions or sentences. They provide a prompt on one side of the card, and a corresponding answer on the other side. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now lets start creating dialog cards by selecting this option from the content types. The Dialog cards editor should now appear. The top part of the editor looks like this:[[File:Dialog Card Editor.png|center|thumb|386x386px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Title : This will be displayed to the learner throughout the set of cards&lt;br /&gt;
* Task description: In this field we can give elaborate instructions to the learner. The &amp;quot;Task description&amp;quot; is displayed throughout the entire set of cards, below the &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;. Insert the following text.&lt;br /&gt;
* Dialogs : Press the &amp;quot;Add dialog&amp;quot; button to add the first card. Here, &amp;quot;Text&amp;quot; means you need to type the question or any word which learning should think and answer.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dialogue Card 1.png|center|frameless|362x362px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &amp;quot;Answer&amp;quot; field, we provide the correct answer (this will come with the other face of the cards). Additionally  you can add image and audio file under the &amp;quot;Image and audio&amp;quot; section (this is optional).&lt;br /&gt;
* By clicking and &amp;quot;Add dialog&amp;quot; you can keep creating dialog cards like this in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; the node/article when you're satisfied to view your final set of Flashcards. &lt;br /&gt;
Dialog card [https://h5p.org/tutorial-dialog-cards#example example file]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Choice question ====&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple Choice questions can use it for testing well-defined skills related to a certain topic. Multiple Choice questions can be an effective assessment tool when they are created properly and the learner is given immediate feedback on own performance. The H5P Multiple Choice questions can have a single or multiple correct options per question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Getting Started : Open H5P, open new content and give a title, and then select content type as multiple choice question. On choosing the Multiple Choice type, Multiple Choice Question editor opens. It should look like this :[[File:Multiple Choice Editor.png|center|700x700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
2) Inserting Media :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Media Option is Meant for adding Images or videos to the question. Select Media type from the drop-down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inserting Media.png|center|frameless|592x592px]]&lt;br /&gt;
After this the video or image to be used can be uploaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) The Question : The question has to be typed in the box provided for the question. This is the question for which multiple answer options are given.[[File:The Question.png|center|thumb|615x615px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4) The Options : Options are choices of answers for the question. By default there are two option boxes where the text for the options can be typed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional options can be inserted by clicking on add options. The correct answer can be selected by checking the correct answer checkbox.[[File:The Options.png|center|thumb|486x486px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Tips and Feedback is used to display text to the user while selecting options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip Text is a hint for the user before the user checks their answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Message displayed if answer is selected is used to display text when the user selects this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Message displayed if answer is not selected is used to display text when the user does not select this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5) Feedback : Multiple Choice allows the learner to get feedback on selected answering options. Feedback can be given for multiple ranges of score. Additional ranges can be added by clicking on Add Range. The Ranges can distributed into equal ranges by clicking on distribute evenly.[[File:The Feedback.png|center|thumb|479x479px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6) Behavioral Settings : This allows us to decide the way the question and the feedback. Various options exist in this. The question type option is set to automatic by default. This means the question type depends on the number of correct answers chosen. But it can be set to multiple or single choice type. The rest of the options can also be chosen based on our requirement.[[File:Behavioural Settings.png|center|499x499px|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7) Text overrides and translations : This is used to set translations on the interface for questions and options and also to determine the text of the dialogues appearing for retry and confirmation.[[File:Text overrides.png|center|494x494px|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; and the Multiple Choice Question is ready for use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Fill in the Blanks  ====&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the blanks questions are questions where a word or a phrase is missing from text, the user is asked to fill them in. Fill in the blanks can be used to test the learner's ability to reproduce facts or mathematical inferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Getting Started : Open H5P, open new content and give a &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, and then select content type as &amp;quot;Fill in the Blanks&amp;quot;. On choosing the Fill in the Blank type, Fill in the Blank editor opens. It should look like this :[[File:Fill in the Blanks 1.png|center|frameless|416x416px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the Blanks Editor has two sections &amp;quot;Task description&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Text Blocks&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Task description : In the Task description field we give the learner basic instructions or introduce the problem to be solved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Text Blocks : Under Text blocks we add our sentences and define which words are to be remove for the learner to identify.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When we enter text in the block ,Blanks are added with an asterisk (*) in front and behind the correct word/phrase. Alternative answers are separated with a forward slash (/). You may add a textual tip, using a colon (:) in front of the tip.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new Text blocks, click on [[File:Add Text Block.png|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overall Feedback, Behavioral Settings and Text overrides and translation can be set the same way as in multiple choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Drag and Drop  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drag and drop type allows the user to create questions where one can make questions which can be answered by dragging text or images and dropping them in zones that match. Drag and drop enables the learner to associate two or more elements and to make logical connections in a visual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Getting Started : Open H5P, open new content and give a title, and then select content type as &amp;quot;Drag and Drop question&amp;quot;. On choosing the &amp;quot;Drag and Drop type&amp;quot;, Drag and Drop editor opens. It will look like this :[[File:Drag and Drop 1.png|center|frameless|507x507px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The editor has two windows, &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; tab and &amp;quot;Task&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) Settings tab : The &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, is the title of the the question to be displayed only when generating summaries and statistics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Background image can be added by clicking on  [[File:Add Background Image.png|frameless]] which sets the background image of the question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Task Size sets the size of the question area&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Task Size.png|center|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
3) Task tab : The task tab is the area where we make the Drag and Drop question. The toolbar on top is what we use to create the questions,.There are 3 buttons on the toolbar,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Dropzones :  Dropzones are regions where draggable text and images can be dropped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drag the dropzone icon [[File:Dropzone.png|frameless]]and place it in the location where you want a dropzone. The instant we place the dropzone, the dropzone settings appear. Which will look like this:[[File:Dropzone Settings.png|center|frameless|469x469px]]&lt;br /&gt;
We can set the &amp;quot;Label&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Opacity&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Dropzone restrictions&amp;quot; using this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Text[[File:Text.png|frameless]] :  This is the icon we use to add text. Dragging this icon and placing it in the location where you want to insert the text, opens the text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Text Image .png|center|frameless|488x488px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Where setting of the text and dropzones it can be placed in will be done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Image[[File:Image 1.png|frameless]] : This is used to add images to the question. Dragging this icon and placing it in the location where you want the image to be, an image editor appears. It will look like this :[[File:Image editor.png|center|frameless|488x488px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here we can set image settings and the dropzones it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4) Feedback : The feedback pane works the same way we used it for the multiple choice questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Timeline ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Timeline content type allows you to place a sequence of events in chronological order. For each event, you may add images and texts. You may also include assets from Twitter, YouTube, Flickr, Vimeo, Google Maps and SoundCloud.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a timeline, click on create a content type and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Timeline&amp;quot; from the list of Content types:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, timeline editor will appear. It consists of three main parts &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Timeline&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Dates&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Title''' : Enter the &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, then expand the timeline section to add a &amp;quot;Headline&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Body Text&amp;quot;. Example &amp;quot;Prime ministers of india&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. Time line title details.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;{{Note}} If there is an online image, video or other media that you would like to display when the timeline is first seen, expand the '''Assets''' section. Add the link to '''Media''' – this is the URL to the image, video, audio or map. Add '''Credits''' and a '''Caption'''.)&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Timeline:''' This part consists of content for a starting slide and some overall settings for the entire timeline.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. Details about the time line.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Dates:''' This section the most important where you add events in time as a '''Date'''. An event “date” can be any period of time from a single day to a number of years. Start in the '''Dates''' section, by adding the '''Start date''', '''End date''', '''Headline''' and '''Body text''' of the first event that you would like to display to your timeline.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. Add details about each slide.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Your timeline with the first slide is ready now, You can check how the timeline is working using the '''Save''' button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Adding event details : =====&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking an '''add event''' you will add more events details to your timeline. Each event need to fill the following details :&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Start date''': Event start date&lt;br /&gt;
# '''End date''': Event End date &lt;br /&gt;
# '''Headline''': Heading for the event&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Body text''': Detail about the event&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;290px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Add event details to your timeline&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:3. Add details about each slide.png| Adding dates, headlines and bodytext&lt;br /&gt;
File:5. Adding media to the slide.png|Adding media for the timeline&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under '''Asset'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Media''': Upload your file, or copy paste any OER media links&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Credit :''' Enter the author/website link of the media.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6. click add item to add more slides for your screen.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Add more events with dates as required to your timeline with the '''Add Item''' button. In the same way, fill in all the other dates with the following content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== True or False Questions ====&lt;br /&gt;
True or False type of questions are popular when it comes about a decision on a statement. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:True or False question1.png|Adding True or False Question &lt;br /&gt;
File:Question True or False2.png|True or False question look&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To create a True or False question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose True/False Question from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question in &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Type your question in Question. Format the question if required.&lt;br /&gt;
# Mark the &amp;quot;Correct Answer&amp;quot; to either of True or False.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Drag the Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
Drag the words is a kind of matching the answer questions where you will be given different questions with various answers. You have to drag and drop it on a blank which you think is the answer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Drag and Drop1.png|Adding Drag and Drop question&lt;br /&gt;
File:Drag and Drop2.png|Drag and Drop question look&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Drag the words question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose Drag the words question from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe your question in &amp;quot;Task Description&amp;quot;. Format the description if required.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;, type your questions with answers enclosed within two asterisks (*) as mentioned in the image.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Hotspots ====&lt;br /&gt;
In an image multiple spots can be located based on user's requirement. Multiple questions with multiple answers or single question expecting multiple answers can be spotted in Multiple hotspots.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspot1.png|Giving the title and uploading the image&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspots2.png|Choosing the number of correct hotspots and marking them&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspot3.png|Marked Hotspots&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspots4.png|Result &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Multiple Hotspot question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Multiple Hotspot&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Write the question in &amp;quot;The title of this question&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the Image. Click on Next Step (? Hotspots)&lt;br /&gt;
# In the next page, type the task description.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the value in &amp;quot;Number of correct hotspots that need to be found for question completion&amp;quot; (For example if you need the user to find 3 spots on an Image enter it as 3)&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Hotspots&amp;quot; click on the circle or rectangle icon. Place and drag them on wherever required (The portion that is considered to be as the answer).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Image Hotspots ====&lt;br /&gt;
An Image hotspot is used to create a hotspot which may reveal some textual, image or video information regarding that.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:ImageHotspot1.png|Uploading background image&lt;br /&gt;
File:ImageHotspot2.png|Positioning the hotspot&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:ImageHotspot3.png|Adding text for a hotspot&lt;br /&gt;
File:Image hotspot answer.png|Result of Image hotspot&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Image Hotspot question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Image hotspot&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the image in the &amp;quot;Background Image&amp;quot;. You can change hotspot icon, predefined icon, hotspot color if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Popup content&amp;quot; select the variety of content need to be shown when a user click on that hotspot (text, image or video). Feed the relevant content. For example, if you want to give the description for a hotspot you can enter the detailed text in the &amp;quot;Text&amp;quot; box. For &amp;quot;video&amp;quot; you can either upload the video that you already have in your system or can paste the URL of Youtube. For &amp;quot;Image&amp;quot; you can simply upload the image.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once done with one hotspot you can &amp;quot;Add Hotspot&amp;quot; to spot one more item in the image and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Flashcards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Flashcards are a set of stylish images that are paired with questions and answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Flashcard question.png|Adding the Card&lt;br /&gt;
File:Flashcard result.png|Flashcard result&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a flashcard question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Flashcard&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the Task description.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the question that is related to Image if required.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the answer.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the Image.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on Save. &lt;br /&gt;
# To add one more image, click on &amp;quot;Add Card&amp;quot; and follow the same steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Interactive video ====&lt;br /&gt;
Interactive video adds interactivity to your video with explanations, extra pictures, tables, Fill in the Blank and multiple choice questions. They make your videos more informative and communicative.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Interactive Video1.png|Adding the Interactive video question&lt;br /&gt;
File:Interactive video 2.png|Choosing Button or Poster&lt;br /&gt;
File:Interactive video 3.png|Appearance of text in the video&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an interactive video type of question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Interactive video&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding Interactive video to your page involves three steps, Upload or embed the video, Add interactions, Summary task.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the first step, video should be uploaded or embedded. If you have the copy of video then choose Upload option, link the Youtube address otherwise. Click on &amp;quot;Add Interactions&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the next page, you can choose the element you want to add in between the video. Available elements are Label, Text, Table, Link, Image etc. Various question types can also be included in this stage. Usually the added interaction is visible as plus mark inside the circle. Here you have two options, Button and Poster. If you choose button option, the element will be triggered if and only if you click on the Circle Plus symbol. Poster makes the element to appear directly on the video. In case of button option, you can move the Circle plus symbol so to avoid this symbol hiding your background video. Once you done with this page click on &amp;quot;Summary Task&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you have a question at the end of the video you can mention that in this section. You can add an &amp;quot;Introduction Text&amp;quot; with the set of statements in the &amp;quot;Summary&amp;quot; section. While giving the statements make sure that the first statement itself is the answer. Later the statements will be automatically shuffled. Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Ideas for Resource creation ====&lt;br /&gt;
Using this tool you can create varieties of resources by attaching it to a video. You can have interactive session by putting questions of different types wherever required. You can conduct quizzes for students related to a topic of your subject. This tool also helps the students to memorize the things quickly. &lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional references ===&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://h5p.org/documentation/for-authors/tutorials Handout for content authors]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{&amp;quot;embedTypes&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;iframe&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;language&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;en&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;defaultLanguage&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;en&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;license&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;U&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;extraTitle&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;TIIE&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;title&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;TIIE&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;mainLibrary&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;H5P.Timeline&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;preloadedDependencies&amp;quot;:[{&amp;quot;machineName&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;TimelineJS&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;majorVersion&amp;quot;:1,&amp;quot;minorVersion&amp;quot;:1},{&amp;quot;machineName&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;H5P.Timeline&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;majorVersion&amp;quot;:1,&amp;quot;minorVersion&amp;quot;:1}]}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_H5P&amp;diff=13988</id>
		<title>Learn H5P</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_H5P&amp;diff=13988"/>
		<updated>2023-06-14T09:48:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction ===&lt;br /&gt;
H5P is short for HTML5 Package and is a simple way to create and share rich and interactive web content. H5P is modular and consists of several content types and applications. This H5P will allow to teachers to create interactive learning contents and students can use those contents through computers, mobiles and tablets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|It is a generic interactive content resource creation and editing tool.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|This tool can be used to create interactive content combining multiple resources like text, images, audio and video.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|NA&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://explorabl.es/tutorials/ Explorable Explanations]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Any latest web browser can open play and edit h5p content.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://h5p.org/about-the-project H5P Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
H5P makes it easy to create, share and reuse the content and applications. H5P empowers everyone to create rich and interactive web experiences more efficiently. H5P content is responsive and mobile friendly, which means that users will experience the same rich, interactive content on computers, smartphones and tablets alike. With H5P we can create and edit interactive videos, presentations, games, advertisements and more. It is a completely free and open technology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
H5P can be accessed in two ways&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Through installing customized [https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Learn_Ubuntu Ubuntu 20.04] in your laptop/system.&lt;br /&gt;
* After [https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Learn_Ubuntu Ubuntu] installation, Go to &amp;quot;Applications --&amp;gt; Other --&amp;gt; H5P. The H5P will be opened in the Firefox browser. &lt;br /&gt;
* You can log in using the credentials. Username: h5p Password: h5p&lt;br /&gt;
2. Another method for creating any interactive content in H5P is, you need to sign up on the [https://h5p.org/testdrive-h5p H5P] website &amp;amp; access available content types.[[File:H5p Main Page.png|center|frameless|593x593px]]{{Note}} We strongly recommend to use H5P in local host hence you can use the variety of content types which are limited in [https://h5p.org/testdrive-h5p H5P].&lt;br /&gt;
=== Working with application ===&lt;br /&gt;
To use any content type in H5P localhost click on &amp;quot;Add content --&amp;gt; Interactive content&amp;quot; and you will get a lot of content types. There are different kinds of contents you can create and here are some important ones are explained in detail in the following sections.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Course presentation ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Course presentation content type allows you to create a slide-based interactive presentation of your learning material. Elements such as text, images, audios and videos. By combining any of these resources you can create resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, this presentation content type allow users to add multiple choice, fill in the blanks, texts and other types of interactions with in their presentations. Presentations can be accompanied with formative self-assessments in the form of short quizzes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Steps to create course presentation :'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Getting Started: &lt;br /&gt;
* Open new Creative Content Page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose Course Presentation from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Course Presentation Editor will open. It should look like this :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:H5p Course Presentation Editor.png|center|thumb|569x569px|H5p Course Presentation Editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Adding Key Words :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be used to recognize slides and navigate between slides.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the     [[File:Keyword Button.png]]   Button .      &lt;br /&gt;
* Click on &amp;quot;Add Keyword&amp;quot;, using this we can add multiple key words for each slide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Adding Pictures :  &lt;br /&gt;
* We add the pictures by using the     [[File:Add Image Button.png]]   Button.&lt;br /&gt;
* Either click on it or drag the icon and place it at the location where you want to insert the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
* A dialogue box appears. Click on the plus sign to add image.&lt;br /&gt;
* Alternative text is a text that is displayed if server can’t load the image. This has to be entered in the box for Alternative text.&lt;br /&gt;
* We can also add hover text, which is the text displayed when the viewer places his mouse pointer on the image.&lt;br /&gt;
* Similarly comments can be added, opacity of the image can be varied and we can display the image as a button as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; when finished inserting the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Adding text : &lt;br /&gt;
* We add text using  [[File:Add Text Button.png]]   Tool.&lt;br /&gt;
* Either click on it or drag it to the location where you want to place a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
* A dialogue box will appear inside which we can enter text.&lt;br /&gt;
* Similarly comments can be added, opacity of the image can be varied and we can display the image as a button as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; when finished inserting the text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Adding new slides :&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on the   [[File:Add new slide.png]]   Button on the bottom right corner of the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* New slide will appear on which we can create content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Adding Links :&lt;br /&gt;
* To add links we use the  [[File:Link Button.png]]   Button.&lt;br /&gt;
* On clicking it, a dialogue box appears. We can type the display text for the link in the title or select the text we want to convert into a link before clicking on the link icon.&lt;br /&gt;
* Select suitable protocol for your link, it is usually http:// or https://.&lt;br /&gt;
* Type the URL to which the text is to be linked.&lt;br /&gt;
* We can add comments and press done when finished inserting the text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Adding Videos :&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on  [[File:Adding Video.png]]  Icon to insert videos.&lt;br /&gt;
* A dialogue box appears.&lt;br /&gt;
* Videos can be inserted in the same way we do it for images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Inserting Questions : When we choose a certain question type, a dialogue box appears, where we can enter the question and all its features. Then the question is added by clicking on done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Question types :&lt;br /&gt;
* Fill in the blanks - [[File:Fill in the Blanks.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Single Choice Set - [[File:Single Choice Set.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Multiple Choice - [[File:Multiple Choice Button.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* True or False - [[File:True or False Type.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Drag and Drop - [[File:Drag and Drop type.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. Licensing : Make sure all the items you take from the internet is Open Resource File meant for reuse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content you create can also have licensing set, by setting it in the dialogue boxes of the object you create.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Dialog Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Dialog cards content type enables you to create a set of cards with corresponding words or expressions on either side of the cards. Dialog cards can be used as a drill to help learners memorize words, expressions or sentences. They provide a prompt on one side of the card, and a corresponding answer on the other side. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now lets start creating dialog cards by selecting this option from the content types. The Dialog cards editor should now appear. The top part of the editor looks like this:[[File:Dialog Card Editor.png|center|thumb|386x386px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Title : This will be displayed to the learner throughout the set of cards&lt;br /&gt;
* Task description: In this field we can give elaborate instructions to the learner. The &amp;quot;Task description&amp;quot; is displayed throughout the entire set of cards, below the &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;. Insert the following text.&lt;br /&gt;
* Dialogs : Press the &amp;quot;Add dialog&amp;quot; button to add the first card. Here, &amp;quot;Text&amp;quot; means you need to type the question or any word which learning should think and answer.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dialogue Card 1.png|center|frameless|362x362px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &amp;quot;Answer&amp;quot; field, we provide the correct answer (this will come with the other face of the cards). Additionally  you can add image and audio file under the &amp;quot;Image and audio&amp;quot; section (this is optional).&lt;br /&gt;
* By clicking and &amp;quot;Add dialog&amp;quot; you can keep creating dialog cards like this in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; the node/article when you're satisfied to view your final set of Flashcards. &lt;br /&gt;
Dialog card [https://h5p.org/tutorial-dialog-cards#example example file]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Choice question ====&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple Choice questions can use it for testing well-defined skills related to a certain topic. Multiple Choice questions can be an effective assessment tool when they are created properly and the learner is given immediate feedback on own performance. The H5P Multiple Choice questions can have a single or multiple correct options per question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Getting Started : Open H5P, open new content and give a title, and then select content type as multiple choice question. On choosing the Multiple Choice type, Multiple Choice Question editor opens. It should look like this :[[File:Multiple Choice Editor.png|center|700x700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
2) Inserting Media :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Media Option is Meant for adding Images or videos to the question. Select Media type from the drop-down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inserting Media.png|center|frameless|592x592px]]&lt;br /&gt;
After this the video or image to be used can be uploaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) The Question : The question has to be typed in the box provided for the question. This is the question for which multiple answer options are given.[[File:The Question.png|center|thumb|615x615px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4) The Options : Options are choices of answers for the question. By default there are two option boxes where the text for the options can be typed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional options can be inserted by clicking on add options. The correct answer can be selected by checking the correct answer checkbox.[[File:The Options.png|center|thumb|486x486px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Tips and Feedback is used to display text to the user while selecting options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip Text is a hint for the user before the user checks their answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Message displayed if answer is selected is used to display text when the user selects this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Message displayed if answer is not selected is used to display text when the user does not select this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5) Feedback : Multiple Choice allows the learner to get feedback on selected answering options. Feedback can be given for multiple ranges of score. Additional ranges can be added by clicking on Add Range. The Ranges can distributed into equal ranges by clicking on distribute evenly.[[File:The Feedback.png|center|thumb|479x479px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6) Behavioral Settings : This allows us to decide the way the question and the feedback. Various options exist in this. The question type option is set to automatic by default. This means the question type depends on the number of correct answers chosen. But it can be set to multiple or single choice type. The rest of the options can also be chosen based on our requirement.[[File:Behavioural Settings.png|center|499x499px|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7) Text overrides and translations : This is used to set translations on the interface for questions and options and also to determine the text of the dialogues appearing for retry and confirmation.[[File:Text overrides.png|center|494x494px|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; and the Multiple Choice Question is ready for use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Fill in the Blanks  ====&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the blanks questions are questions where a word or a phrase is missing from text, the user is asked to fill them in. Fill in the blanks can be used to test the learner's ability to reproduce facts or mathematical inferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Getting Started : Open H5P, open new content and give a &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, and then select content type as &amp;quot;Fill in the Blanks&amp;quot;. On choosing the Fill in the Blank type, Fill in the Blank editor opens. It should look like this :[[File:Fill in the Blanks 1.png|center|frameless|416x416px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the Blanks Editor has two sections &amp;quot;Task description&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Text Blocks&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Task description : In the Task description field we give the learner basic instructions or introduce the problem to be solved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Text Blocks : Under Text blocks we add our sentences and define which words are to be remove for the learner to identify.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When we enter text in the block ,Blanks are added with an asterisk (*) in front and behind the correct word/phrase. Alternative answers are separated with a forward slash (/). You may add a textual tip, using a colon (:) in front of the tip.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new Text blocks, click on [[File:Add Text Block.png|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overall Feedback, Behavioral Settings and Text overrides and translation can be set the same way as in multiple choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Drag and Drop  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drag and drop type allows the user to create questions where one can make questions which can be answered by dragging text or images and dropping them in zones that match. Drag and drop enables the learner to associate two or more elements and to make logical connections in a visual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Getting Started : Open H5P, open new content and give a title, and then select content type as &amp;quot;Drag and Drop question&amp;quot;. On choosing the &amp;quot;Drag and Drop type&amp;quot;, Drag and Drop editor opens. It will look like this :[[File:Drag and Drop 1.png|center|frameless|507x507px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The editor has two windows, &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; tab and &amp;quot;Task&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) Settings tab : The &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, is the title of the the question to be displayed only when generating summaries and statistics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Background image can be added by clicking on  [[File:Add Background Image.png|frameless]] which sets the background image of the question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Task Size sets the size of the question area&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Task Size.png|center|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
3) Task tab : The task tab is the area where we make the Drag and Drop question. The toolbar on top is what we use to create the questions,.There are 3 buttons on the toolbar,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Dropzones :  Dropzones are regions where draggable text and images can be dropped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drag the dropzone icon [[File:Dropzone.png|frameless]]and place it in the location where you want a dropzone. The instant we place the dropzone, the dropzone settings appear. Which will look like this:[[File:Dropzone Settings.png|center|frameless|469x469px]]&lt;br /&gt;
We can set the &amp;quot;Label&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Opacity&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Dropzone restrictions&amp;quot; using this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Text[[File:Text.png|frameless]] :  This is the icon we use to add text. Dragging this icon and placing it in the location where you want to insert the text, opens the text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Text Image .png|center|frameless|488x488px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Where setting of the text and dropzones it can be placed in will be done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Image[[File:Image 1.png|frameless]] : This is used to add images to the question. Dragging this icon and placing it in the location where you want the image to be, an image editor appears. It will look like this :[[File:Image editor.png|center|frameless|488x488px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here we can set image settings and the dropzones it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4) Feedback : The feedback pane works the same way we used it for the multiple choice questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Timeline ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Timeline content type allows you to place a sequence of events in chronological order. For each event, you may add images and texts. You may also include assets from Twitter, YouTube, Flickr, Vimeo, Google Maps and SoundCloud.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a timeline, click on create a content type and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Timeline&amp;quot; from the list of Content types:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, timeline editor will appear. It consists of three main parts &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Timeline&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Dates&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Title''' : Enter the &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, then expand the timeline section to add a &amp;quot;Headline&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Body Text&amp;quot;. Example &amp;quot;Prime ministers of india&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. Time line title details.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;{{Note}} If there is an online image, video or other media that you would like to display when the timeline is first seen, expand the '''Assets''' section. Add the link to '''Media''' – this is the URL to the image, video, audio or map. Add '''Credits''' and a '''Caption'''.)&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Timeline:''' This part consists of content for a starting slide and some overall settings for the entire timeline.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. Details about the time line.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Dates:''' This section the most important where you add events in time as a '''Date'''. An event “date” can be any period of time from a single day to a number of years. Start in the '''Dates''' section, by adding the '''Start date''', '''End date''', '''Headline''' and '''Body text''' of the first event that you would like to display to your timeline.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. Add details about each slide.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Your timeline with the first slide is ready now, You can check how the timeline is working using the '''Save''' button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Adding event details : =====&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking an '''add event''' you will add more events details to your timeline. Each event need to fill the following details :&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Start date''': Event start date&lt;br /&gt;
# '''End date''': Event End date &lt;br /&gt;
# '''Headline''': Heading for the event&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Body text''': Detail about the event&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;290px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Add event details to your timeline&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:3. Add details about each slide.png| Adding dates, headlines and bodytext&lt;br /&gt;
File:5. Adding media to the slide.png|Adding media for the timeline&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under '''Asset'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Media''': Upload your file, or copy paste any OER media links&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Credit :''' Enter the author/website link of the media.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6. click add item to add more slides for your screen.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Add more events with dates as required to your timeline with the '''Add Item''' button. In the same way, fill in all the other dates with the following content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== True or False Questions ====&lt;br /&gt;
True or False type of questions are popular when it comes about a decision on a statement. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:True or False question1.png|Adding True or False Question &lt;br /&gt;
File:Question True or False2.png|True or False question look&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To create a True or False question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose True/False Question from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question in &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Type your question in Question. Format the question if required.&lt;br /&gt;
# Mark the &amp;quot;Correct Answer&amp;quot; to either of True or False.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Drag the Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
Drag the words is a kind of matching the answer questions where you will be given different questions with various answers. You have to drag and drop it on a blank which you think is the answer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Drag and Drop1.png|Adding Drag and Drop question&lt;br /&gt;
File:Drag and Drop2.png|Drag and Drop question look&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Drag the words question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose Drag the words question from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe your question in &amp;quot;Task Description&amp;quot;. Format the description if required.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;, type your questions with answers enclosed within two asterisks (*) as mentioned in the image.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Hotspots ====&lt;br /&gt;
In an image multiple spots can be located based on user's requirement. Multiple questions with multiple answers or single question expecting multiple answers can be spotted in Multiple hotspots.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspot1.png|Giving the title and uploading the image&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspots2.png|Choosing the number of correct hotspots and marking them&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspot3.png|Marked Hotspots&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspots4.png|Result &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Multiple Hotspot question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Multiple Hotspot&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Write the question in &amp;quot;The title of this question&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the Image. Click on Next Step (? Hotspots)&lt;br /&gt;
# In the next page, type the task description.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the value in &amp;quot;Number of correct hotspots that need to be found for question completion&amp;quot; (For example if you need the user to find 3 spots on an Image enter it as 3)&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Hotspots&amp;quot; click on the circle or rectangle icon. Place and drag them on wherever required (The portion that is considered to be as the answer).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Image Hotspots ====&lt;br /&gt;
An Image hotspot is used to create a hotspot which may reveal some textual, image or video information regarding that.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:ImageHotspot1.png|Uploading background image&lt;br /&gt;
File:ImageHotspot2.png|Positioning the hotspot&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:ImageHotspot3.png|Adding text for a hotspot&lt;br /&gt;
File:Image hotspot answer.png|Result of Image hotspot&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Image Hotspot question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Image hotspot&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the image in the &amp;quot;Background Image&amp;quot;. You can change hotspot icon, predefined icon, hotspot color if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Popup content&amp;quot; select the variety of content need to be shown when a user click on that hotspot (text, image or video). Feed the relevant content. For example, if you want to give the description for a hotspot you can enter the detailed text in the &amp;quot;Text&amp;quot; box. For &amp;quot;video&amp;quot; you can either upload the video that you already have in your system or can paste the URL of Youtube. For &amp;quot;Image&amp;quot; you can simply upload the image.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once done with one hotspot you can &amp;quot;Add Hotspot&amp;quot; to spot one more item in the image and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Flashcards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Flashcards are a set of stylish images that are paired with questions and answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Flashcard question.png|Adding the Card&lt;br /&gt;
File:Flashcard result.png|Flashcard result&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a flashcard question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Flashcard&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the Task description.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the question that is related to Image if required.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the answer.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the Image.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on Save. &lt;br /&gt;
# To add one more image, click on &amp;quot;Add Card&amp;quot; and follow the same steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Interactive video ====&lt;br /&gt;
Interactive video adds interactivity to your video with explanations, extra pictures, tables, Fill in the Blank and multiple choice questions. They make your videos more informative and communicative.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Interactive Video1.png|Adding the Interactive video question&lt;br /&gt;
File:Interactive video 2.png|Choosing Button or Poster&lt;br /&gt;
File:Interactive video 3.png|Appearance of text in the video&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an interactive video type of question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Interactive video&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding Interactive video to your page involves three steps, Upload or embed the video, Add interactions, Summary task.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the first step, video should be uploaded or embedded. If you have the copy of video then choose Upload option, link the Youtube address otherwise. Click on &amp;quot;Add Interactions&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the next page, you can choose the element you want to add in between the video. Available elements are Label, Text, Table, Link, Image etc. Various question types can also be included in this stage. Usually the added interaction is visible as plus mark inside the circle. Here you have two options, Button and Poster. If you choose button option, the element will be triggered if and only if you click on the Circle Plus symbol. Poster makes the element to appear directly on the video. In case of button option, you can move the Circle plus symbol so to avoid this symbol hiding your background video. Once you done with this page click on &amp;quot;Summary Task&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you have a question at the end of the video you can mention that in this section. You can add an &amp;quot;Introduction Text&amp;quot; with the set of statements in the &amp;quot;Summary&amp;quot; section. While giving the statements make sure that the first statement itself is the answer. Later the statements will be automatically shuffled. Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Ideas for Resource creation ====&lt;br /&gt;
Using this tool you can create varieties of resources by attaching it to a video. You can have interactive session by putting questions of different types wherever required. You can conduct quizzes for students related to a topic of your subject. This tool also helps the students to memorize the things quickly. &lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional references ===&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://h5p.org/documentation/for-authors/tutorials Handout for content authors]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_H5P&amp;diff=13987</id>
		<title>Learn H5P</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_H5P&amp;diff=13987"/>
		<updated>2023-06-14T09:47:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction ===&lt;br /&gt;
H5P is short for HTML5 Package and is a simple way to create and share rich and interactive web content. H5P is modular and consists of several content types and applications. This H5P will allow to teachers to create interactive learning contents and students can use those contents through computers, mobiles and tablets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|It is a generic interactive content resource creation and editing tool.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|This tool can be used to create interactive content combining multiple resources like text, images, audio and video.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|NA&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://explorabl.es/tutorials/ Explorable Explanations]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Any latest web browser can open play and edit h5p content.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://h5p.org/about-the-project H5P Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
H5P makes it easy to create, share and reuse the content and applications. H5P empowers everyone to create rich and interactive web experiences more efficiently. H5P content is responsive and mobile friendly, which means that users will experience the same rich, interactive content on computers, smartphones and tablets alike. With H5P we can create and edit interactive videos, presentations, games, advertisements and more. It is a completely free and open technology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
H5P can be accessed in two ways&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Through installing customized [https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Learn_Ubuntu Ubuntu 20.04] in your laptop/system.&lt;br /&gt;
* After [https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Learn_Ubuntu Ubuntu] installation, Go to &amp;quot;Applications --&amp;gt; Other --&amp;gt; H5P. The H5P will be opened in the Firefox browser. &lt;br /&gt;
* You can log in using the credentials. Username: h5p Password: h5p&lt;br /&gt;
2. Another method for creating any interactive content in H5P is, you need to sign up on the [https://h5p.org/testdrive-h5p H5P] website &amp;amp; access available content types.[[File:H5p Main Page.png|center|frameless|593x593px]]{{Note}} We strongly recommend to use H5P in local host hence you can use the variety of content types which are limited in [https://h5p.org/testdrive-h5p H5P].&lt;br /&gt;
=== Working with application ===&lt;br /&gt;
To use any content type in H5P localhost click on &amp;quot;Add content --&amp;gt; Interactive content&amp;quot; and you will get a lot of content types. There are different kinds of contents you can create and here are some important ones are explained in detail in the following sections.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Course presentation ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Course presentation content type allows you to create a slide-based interactive presentation of your learning material. Elements such as text, images, audios and videos. By combining any of these resources you can create resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, this presentation content type allow users to add multiple choice, fill in the blanks, texts and other types of interactions with in their presentations. Presentations can be accompanied with formative self-assessments in the form of short quizzes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Steps to create course presentation :'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Getting Started: &lt;br /&gt;
* Open new Creative Content Page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose Course Presentation from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Course Presentation Editor will open. It should look like this :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:H5p Course Presentation Editor.png|center|thumb|569x569px|H5p Course Presentation Editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Adding Key Words :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be used to recognize slides and navigate between slides.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the     [[File:Keyword Button.png]]   Button .      &lt;br /&gt;
* Click on &amp;quot;Add Keyword&amp;quot;, using this we can add multiple key words for each slide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Adding Pictures :  &lt;br /&gt;
* We add the pictures by using the     [[File:Add Image Button.png]]   Button.&lt;br /&gt;
* Either click on it or drag the icon and place it at the location where you want to insert the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
* A dialogue box appears. Click on the plus sign to add image.&lt;br /&gt;
* Alternative text is a text that is displayed if server can’t load the image. This has to be entered in the box for Alternative text.&lt;br /&gt;
* We can also add hover text, which is the text displayed when the viewer places his mouse pointer on the image.&lt;br /&gt;
* Similarly comments can be added, opacity of the image can be varied and we can display the image as a button as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; when finished inserting the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Adding text : &lt;br /&gt;
* We add text using  [[File:Add Text Button.png]]   Tool.&lt;br /&gt;
* Either click on it or drag it to the location where you want to place a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
* A dialogue box will appear inside which we can enter text.&lt;br /&gt;
* Similarly comments can be added, opacity of the image can be varied and we can display the image as a button as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; when finished inserting the text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Adding new slides :&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on the   [[File:Add new slide.png]]   Button on the bottom right corner of the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* New slide will appear on which we can create content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Adding Links :&lt;br /&gt;
* To add links we use the  [[File:Link Button.png]]   Button.&lt;br /&gt;
* On clicking it, a dialogue box appears. We can type the display text for the link in the title or select the text we want to convert into a link before clicking on the link icon.&lt;br /&gt;
* Select suitable protocol for your link, it is usually http:// or https://.&lt;br /&gt;
* Type the URL to which the text is to be linked.&lt;br /&gt;
* We can add comments and press done when finished inserting the text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Adding Videos :&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on  [[File:Adding Video.png]]  Icon to insert videos.&lt;br /&gt;
* A dialogue box appears.&lt;br /&gt;
* Videos can be inserted in the same way we do it for images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Inserting Questions : When we choose a certain question type, a dialogue box appears, where we can enter the question and all its features. Then the question is added by clicking on done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Question types :&lt;br /&gt;
* Fill in the blanks - [[File:Fill in the Blanks.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Single Choice Set - [[File:Single Choice Set.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Multiple Choice - [[File:Multiple Choice Button.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* True or False - [[File:True or False Type.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Drag and Drop - [[File:Drag and Drop type.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. Licensing : Make sure all the items you take from the internet is Open Resource File meant for reuse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content you create can also have licensing set, by setting it in the dialogue boxes of the object you create.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Dialog Cards ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Dialog cards content type enables you to create a set of cards with corresponding words or expressions on either side of the cards. Dialog cards can be used as a drill to help learners memorize words, expressions or sentences. They provide a prompt on one side of the card, and a corresponding answer on the other side. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now lets start creating dialog cards by selecting this option from the content types. The Dialog cards editor should now appear. The top part of the editor looks like this:[[File:Dialog Card Editor.png|center|thumb|386x386px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Title : This will be displayed to the learner throughout the set of cards&lt;br /&gt;
* Task description: In this field we can give elaborate instructions to the learner. The &amp;quot;Task description&amp;quot; is displayed throughout the entire set of cards, below the &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;. Insert the following text.&lt;br /&gt;
* Dialogs : Press the &amp;quot;Add dialog&amp;quot; button to add the first card. Here, &amp;quot;Text&amp;quot; means you need to type the question or any word which learning should think and answer.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dialogue Card 1.png|center|frameless|362x362px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &amp;quot;Answer&amp;quot; field, we provide the correct answer (this will come with the other face of the cards). Additionally  you can add image and audio file under the &amp;quot;Image and audio&amp;quot; section (this is optional).&lt;br /&gt;
* By clicking and &amp;quot;Add dialog&amp;quot; you can keep creating dialog cards like this in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; the node/article when you're satisfied to view your final set of Flashcards. &lt;br /&gt;
Dialog card [https://h5p.org/tutorial-dialog-cards#example example file]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Choice question ====&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple Choice questions can use it for testing well-defined skills related to a certain topic. Multiple Choice questions can be an effective assessment tool when they are created properly and the learner is given immediate feedback on own performance. The H5P Multiple Choice questions can have a single or multiple correct options per question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Getting Started : Open H5P, open new content and give a title, and then select content type as multiple choice question. On choosing the Multiple Choice type, Multiple Choice Question editor opens. It should look like this :[[File:Multiple Choice Editor.png|center|700x700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
2) Inserting Media :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Media Option is Meant for adding Images or videos to the question. Select Media type from the drop-down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inserting Media.png|center|frameless|592x592px]]&lt;br /&gt;
After this the video or image to be used can be uploaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) The Question : The question has to be typed in the box provided for the question. This is the question for which multiple answer options are given.[[File:The Question.png|center|thumb|615x615px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4) The Options : Options are choices of answers for the question. By default there are two option boxes where the text for the options can be typed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional options can be inserted by clicking on add options. The correct answer can be selected by checking the correct answer checkbox.[[File:The Options.png|center|thumb|486x486px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Tips and Feedback is used to display text to the user while selecting options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip Text is a hint for the user before the user checks their answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Message displayed if answer is selected is used to display text when the user selects this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Message displayed if answer is not selected is used to display text when the user does not select this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5) Feedback : Multiple Choice allows the learner to get feedback on selected answering options. Feedback can be given for multiple ranges of score. Additional ranges can be added by clicking on Add Range. The Ranges can distributed into equal ranges by clicking on distribute evenly.[[File:The Feedback.png|center|thumb|479x479px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6) Behavioral Settings : This allows us to decide the way the question and the feedback. Various options exist in this. The question type option is set to automatic by default. This means the question type depends on the number of correct answers chosen. But it can be set to multiple or single choice type. The rest of the options can also be chosen based on our requirement.[[File:Behavioural Settings.png|center|499x499px|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7) Text overrides and translations : This is used to set translations on the interface for questions and options and also to determine the text of the dialogues appearing for retry and confirmation.[[File:Text overrides.png|center|494x494px|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; and the Multiple Choice Question is ready for use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Fill in the Blanks  ====&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the blanks questions are questions where a word or a phrase is missing from text, the user is asked to fill them in. Fill in the blanks can be used to test the learner's ability to reproduce facts or mathematical inferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Getting Started : Open H5P, open new content and give a &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, and then select content type as &amp;quot;Fill in the Blanks&amp;quot;. On choosing the Fill in the Blank type, Fill in the Blank editor opens. It should look like this :[[File:Fill in the Blanks 1.png|center|frameless|416x416px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the Blanks Editor has two sections &amp;quot;Task description&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Text Blocks&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Task description : In the Task description field we give the learner basic instructions or introduce the problem to be solved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Text Blocks : Under Text blocks we add our sentences and define which words are to be remove for the learner to identify.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When we enter text in the block ,Blanks are added with an asterisk (*) in front and behind the correct word/phrase. Alternative answers are separated with a forward slash (/). You may add a textual tip, using a colon (:) in front of the tip.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new Text blocks, click on [[File:Add Text Block.png|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overall Feedback, Behavioral Settings and Text overrides and translation can be set the same way as in multiple choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Drag and Drop  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drag and drop type allows the user to create questions where one can make questions which can be answered by dragging text or images and dropping them in zones that match. Drag and drop enables the learner to associate two or more elements and to make logical connections in a visual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Getting Started : Open H5P, open new content and give a title, and then select content type as &amp;quot;Drag and Drop question&amp;quot;. On choosing the &amp;quot;Drag and Drop type&amp;quot;, Drag and Drop editor opens. It will look like this :[[File:Drag and Drop 1.png|center|frameless|507x507px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The editor has two windows, &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; tab and &amp;quot;Task&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) Settings tab : The &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, is the title of the the question to be displayed only when generating summaries and statistics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Background image can be added by clicking on  [[File:Add Background Image.png|frameless]] which sets the background image of the question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Task Size sets the size of the question area&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Task Size.png|center|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
3) Task tab : The task tab is the area where we make the Drag and Drop question. The toolbar on top is what we use to create the questions,.There are 3 buttons on the toolbar,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Dropzones :  Dropzones are regions where draggable text and images can be dropped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drag the dropzone icon [[File:Dropzone.png|frameless]]and place it in the location where you want a dropzone. The instant we place the dropzone, the dropzone settings appear. Which will look like this:[[File:Dropzone Settings.png|center|frameless|469x469px]]&lt;br /&gt;
We can set the &amp;quot;Label&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Opacity&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Dropzone restrictions&amp;quot; using this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Text[[File:Text.png|frameless]] :  This is the icon we use to add text. Dragging this icon and placing it in the location where you want to insert the text, opens the text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Text Image .png|center|frameless|488x488px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Where setting of the text and dropzones it can be placed in will be done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Image[[File:Image 1.png|frameless]] : This is used to add images to the question. Dragging this icon and placing it in the location where you want the image to be, an image editor appears. It will look like this :[[File:Image editor.png|center|frameless|488x488px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here we can set image settings and the dropzones it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4) Feedback : The feedback pane works the same way we used it for the multiple choice questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Timeline ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Timeline content type allows you to place a sequence of events in chronological order. For each event, you may add images and texts. You may also include assets from Twitter, YouTube, Flickr, Vimeo, Google Maps and SoundCloud.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a timeline, click on create a content type and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Timeline&amp;quot; from the list of Content types:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, timeline editor will appear. It consists of three main parts &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Timeline&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Dates&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Title''' : Enter the &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, then expand the timeline section to add a &amp;quot;Headline&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Body Text&amp;quot;. Example &amp;quot;Prime ministers of india&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. Time line title details.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;{{Note}} If there is an online image, video or other media that you would like to display when the timeline is first seen, expand the '''Assets''' section. Add the link to '''Media''' – this is the URL to the image, video, audio or map. Add '''Credits''' and a '''Caption'''.)&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Timeline:''' This part consists of content for a starting slide and some overall settings for the entire timeline.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. Details about the time line.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Dates:''' This section the most important where you add events in time as a '''Date'''. An event “date” can be any period of time from a single day to a number of years. Start in the '''Dates''' section, by adding the '''Start date''', '''End date''', '''Headline''' and '''Body text''' of the first event that you would like to display to your timeline.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. Add details about each slide.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Your timeline with the first slide is ready now, You can check how the timeline is working using the '''Save''' button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Adding event details : =====&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking an '''add event''' you will add more events details to your timeline. Each event need to fill the following details :&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Start date''': Event start date&lt;br /&gt;
# '''End date''': Event End date &lt;br /&gt;
# '''Headline''': Heading for the event&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Body text''': Detail about the event&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;290px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Add event details to your timeline&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:3. Add details about each slide.png| Adding dates, headlines and bodytext&lt;br /&gt;
File:5. Adding media to the slide.png|Adding media for the timeline&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under '''Asset'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Media''': Upload your file, or copy paste any OER media links&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Credit :''' Enter the author/website link of the media.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6. click add item to add more slides for your screen.png|600px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Add more events with dates as required to your timeline with the '''Add Item''' button. In the same way, fill in all the other dates with the following content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== True or False Questions ====&lt;br /&gt;
True or False type of questions are popular when it comes about a decision on a statement. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:True or False question1.png|Adding True or False Question &lt;br /&gt;
File:Question True or False2.png|True or False question look&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To create a True or False question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose True/False Question from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question in &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Type your question in Question. Format the question if required.&lt;br /&gt;
# Mark the &amp;quot;Correct Answer&amp;quot; to either of True or False.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Drag the Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
Drag the words is a kind of matching the answer questions where you will be given different questions with various answers. You have to drag and drop it on a blank which you think is the answer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Drag and Drop1.png|Adding Drag and Drop question&lt;br /&gt;
File:Drag and Drop2.png|Drag and Drop question look&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Drag the words question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose Drag the words question from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe your question in &amp;quot;Task Description&amp;quot;. Format the description if required.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;, type your questions with answers enclosed within two asterisks (*) as mentioned in the image.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Hotspots ====&lt;br /&gt;
In an image multiple spots can be located based on user's requirement. Multiple questions with multiple answers or single question expecting multiple answers can be spotted in Multiple hotspots.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspot1.png|Giving the title and uploading the image&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspots2.png|Choosing the number of correct hotspots and marking them&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspot3.png|Marked Hotspots&lt;br /&gt;
File:Multiple Hotspots4.png|Result &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Multiple Hotspot question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Multiple Hotspot&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Write the question in &amp;quot;The title of this question&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the Image. Click on Next Step (? Hotspots)&lt;br /&gt;
# In the next page, type the task description.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the value in &amp;quot;Number of correct hotspots that need to be found for question completion&amp;quot; (For example if you need the user to find 3 spots on an Image enter it as 3)&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Hotspots&amp;quot; click on the circle or rectangle icon. Place and drag them on wherever required (The portion that is considered to be as the answer).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Image Hotspots ====&lt;br /&gt;
An Image hotspot is used to create a hotspot which may reveal some textual, image or video information regarding that.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:ImageHotspot1.png|Uploading background image&lt;br /&gt;
File:ImageHotspot2.png|Positioning the hotspot&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:ImageHotspot3.png|Adding text for a hotspot&lt;br /&gt;
File:Image hotspot answer.png|Result of Image hotspot&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Image Hotspot question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Image hotspot&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the image in the &amp;quot;Background Image&amp;quot;. You can change hotspot icon, predefined icon, hotspot color if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Popup content&amp;quot; select the variety of content need to be shown when a user click on that hotspot (text, image or video). Feed the relevant content. For example, if you want to give the description for a hotspot you can enter the detailed text in the &amp;quot;Text&amp;quot; box. For &amp;quot;video&amp;quot; you can either upload the video that you already have in your system or can paste the URL of Youtube. For &amp;quot;Image&amp;quot; you can simply upload the image.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once done with one hotspot you can &amp;quot;Add Hotspot&amp;quot; to spot one more item in the image and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Flashcards ====&lt;br /&gt;
Flashcards are a set of stylish images that are paired with questions and answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Flashcard question.png|Adding the Card&lt;br /&gt;
File:Flashcard result.png|Flashcard result&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a flashcard question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Flashcard&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the title for your question.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the Task description.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the question that is related to Image if required.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the answer.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the Image.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on Save. &lt;br /&gt;
# To add one more image, click on &amp;quot;Add Card&amp;quot; and follow the same steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Interactive video ====&lt;br /&gt;
Interactive video adds interactivity to your video with explanations, extra pictures, tables, Fill in the Blank and multiple choice questions. They make your videos more informative and communicative.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Interactive Video1.png|Adding the Interactive video question&lt;br /&gt;
File:Interactive video 2.png|Choosing Button or Poster&lt;br /&gt;
File:Interactive video 3.png|Appearance of text in the video&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an interactive video type of question, click on &amp;quot;Create a content type&amp;quot; and select the &amp;quot;New content&amp;quot; option and choose &amp;quot;Interactive video&amp;quot; from the list of Content types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding Interactive video to your page involves three steps, Upload or embed the video, Add interactions, Summary task.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the first step, video should be uploaded or embedded. If you have the copy of video then choose Upload option, link the Youtube address otherwise. Click on &amp;quot;Add Interactions&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the next page, you can choose the element you want to add in between the video. Available elements are Label, Text, Table, Link, Image etc. Various question types can also be included in this stage. Usually the added interaction is visible as plus mark inside the circle. Here you have two options, Button and Poster. If you choose button option, the element will be triggered if and only if you click on the Circle Plus symbol. Poster makes the element to appear directly on the video. In case of button option, you can move the Circle plus symbol so to avoid this symbol hiding your background video. Once you done with this page click on &amp;quot;Summary Task&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you have a question at the end of the video you can mention that in this section. You can add an &amp;quot;Introduction Text&amp;quot; with the set of statements in the &amp;quot;Summary&amp;quot; section. While giving the statements make sure that the first statement itself is the answer. Later the statements will be automatically shuffled. Click on &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Ideas for Resource creation ====&lt;br /&gt;
Using this tool you can create varieties of resources by attaching it to a video. You can have interactive session by putting questions of different types wherever required. You can conduct quizzes for students related to a topic of your subject. This tool also helps the students to memorize the things quickly. &lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional references ===&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://h5p.org/documentation/for-authors/tutorials Handout for content authors]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[&amp;lt;iframe src=&amp;quot;file:///home/amit/Desktop/itfc.html?embed=true&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;1324&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;793&amp;quot; frameborder=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; allowfullscreen=&amp;quot;allowfullscreen&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/iframe&amp;gt;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Google_Drive&amp;diff=13796</id>
		<title>Learn Google Drive</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Google_Drive&amp;diff=13796"/>
		<updated>2023-03-30T09:41:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Animation on how to share your google drive folders/files */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;''[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%97%E0%B3%82%E0%B2%97%E0%B2%B2%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%A1%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%88%E0%B2%B5%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]''&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Google Drive is a cloud storage service that lets you save various files and folders you create and which are shared with you by others. To access your drive from different devices, you need to sign in to your Google Account (which is created when you open your [[Learn Gmail|Gmail account]]).&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Google Drive is a application for storing and accessing resources.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|You can store all your data here by uploading existing file, folders and also can create new files and folders. And you can share your data with your peers to view, edit and comment. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Version - Not Applicable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements but Internet connection is needed  to use this application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://nextcloud.com/ Nextcloud] [https://www.dropbox.com/?landing=cntl Dropbox]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Android phones will have inbuilt Google Drive option. You need to switch on the synchronizing option to get all your mobile camera photos to upload to your google drive photos automatically. This enable all your important event photos will be saved safely in Google Drive.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.google.com/drive/ Google] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features====&lt;br /&gt;
# Google allows 15GB of free Google online storage space on cloud, this includes your photos (Google photos), emails (Gmail), stories, drawings, recordings, video (Drive files). &lt;br /&gt;
# Your files in Drive can be accessed from any smart phone, tablet, or computer.&lt;br /&gt;
# You can invite others to view, download, and collaborate on all the files of you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
It is a web based application, there is no installation needed. To access google drive, you have to sign in to [[www.drive.google.com]] site by using your google login details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
====Accessing Google Drive ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The above images show you how to access Google Drive. You need to access a browser (Mozilla Firefox) for this. On your computer with Ubuntu custom distribution, to open web browser go to (Applications → Internet→ Firefox web browser), as shown in the first image.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Youtube_1_Option_Menu_to_Open.png|Opening a browser&lt;br /&gt;
File:Gmail 1 Main Window.png|Login to Gmail account&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. If you are using windows or any other operating system open web browsers like Google, Mozilla, Safari etc…&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. You have to sign in to [https://drive.google.com/drive/ www.drive.google.com]  site by using your Gmail user (email) ID and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The google drive page will open and will look like the below image.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Photos_1_App_Of_Google.png|Google Apps, select Drive&lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Drive_2_Main_Window.png|Google Drive main page&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating / uploading and sharing files and folder====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create your local files or folders to Google Drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on “New” icon on left side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you want to create a folder, click on &amp;quot;Folder&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; Give folder name --&amp;gt; Click on &amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Inside this folder, you can create new files such as documents, spreadsheet and slides. Google Drive has Open Document Format (odt, odp, ods) viewer and can open any .odf files, doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx are the supported file formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Drive_3_New_Files_Uploads.png|New files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===== Upload your files to google drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
#To upload your local files, click on &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; select &amp;quot;file upload&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; select file -&amp;gt; click open.&lt;br /&gt;
#This upload time is completely depending on your file size, once it uploads it will show you the right mark (green colour). &lt;br /&gt;
#Google drive will allow you to upload any kind of files like image, audio, video, text files etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Upload your folder to google drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
# To upload your local folder, click on &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; select &amp;quot;folder upload&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; select folder --&amp;gt; click open.&lt;br /&gt;
# By doing this you can directly upload folder from local storage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Sharing your google drive files and folders =====&lt;br /&gt;
In google drive you can share your folder/files in two way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== '''Share with other person's email ID :''' =====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know the email address of everyone with whom you are sharing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on the file/folder --&amp;gt; click on 'Share' --&amp;gt; in the pop-up window, Under 'share with people', type the email address of the person or Google group you want to share with, copy the link by clicking on &amp;quot;copy link&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== '''Share files/folders with others to see the files through the link :''' =====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you don’t know everyone’s email address, aren’t sure if they all have a Google account, or simply want a document to be more widely available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Right click on the file/folders which you are going share, select on &amp;quot;Share&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:1. Google drive - right click and select get sharable link.png|Right click and select get sharable link&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the pop-up window, under &amp;quot;Get link&amp;quot; option&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:2. Google drive - Select any one with this link.png|click on '''change''' option under '''get link''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click on &amp;quot;change&amp;quot; (to decide what people can do with your file when you share it), select Viewer or Editor. Choose viewer option to access your files.&lt;br /&gt;
4. Finally you pop windows details should as shown below image.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:3. Google drive - give view option to just others to see your file.png|Give view option to just others to see your file&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5. Click Copy link --&amp;gt; Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Copy and paste the link in an email or any place you want to share it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:4. Google drive - Copy your google drive file link.png|Copy your google drive file link&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples: in the step 3, If you want to give access to edit, select &amp;quot;editor&amp;quot; option, similarly you can select &amp;quot;viewer&amp;quot; option to just give option (here they can also download your files).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Animation on how to share your google drive folders/files ====&lt;br /&gt;
 You can share your google drive folders and files using your computer browser or mobile app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Through computer browser !! Through Google drive mobile app&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:How_to_share_google_drivefolders_and_files_with_others11.gif|link=Special:FilePath/How_to_share_google_drive_folders_and_files_with_others.gif]]||[[File:How_to_share_google_drivefolders_and_files_with_others_through_phone22.gif|400px]]|link=Special:FilePath/How_to_share_google_drive_folders_and_files_with_others_through_phone2.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving the files and formats====&lt;br /&gt;
When you start working on Google Drive documents, it will save automatically with given file name. Or else it will save as &amp;quot;Untitled&amp;quot; file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
# You can create simple drawings on &amp;quot;Google Drawing Page&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
# You can allow others to access your documents ('sharing' documents with them) and give their comments and feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ideas for resource creation===&lt;br /&gt;
All the documents like photos , important files and text resources can be saved in the drive. You can share these resources with your peers to view, edit and comment to make it more effective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=References=&lt;br /&gt;
Google Drive [http://www.coosbaylibrary.org/sites/default/files/GoogleDriveHandout.pdf Tutorial] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.google.com/drive/ Google Drive page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=File:How_to_share_google_drivefolders_and_files_with_others_through_phone22.gif&amp;diff=13795</id>
		<title>File:How to share google drivefolders and files with others through phone22.gif</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=File:How_to_share_google_drivefolders_and_files_with_others_through_phone22.gif&amp;diff=13795"/>
		<updated>2023-03-30T09:41:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=File:How_to_share_google_drivefolders_and_files_with_others11.gif&amp;diff=13794</id>
		<title>File:How to share google drivefolders and files with others11.gif</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=File:How_to_share_google_drivefolders_and_files_with_others11.gif&amp;diff=13794"/>
		<updated>2023-03-30T09:39:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Google_Drive&amp;diff=13793</id>
		<title>Learn Google Drive</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Google_Drive&amp;diff=13793"/>
		<updated>2023-03-30T09:23:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;''[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%97%E0%B3%82%E0%B2%97%E0%B2%B2%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%A1%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%88%E0%B2%B5%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]''&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Google Drive is a cloud storage service that lets you save various files and folders you create and which are shared with you by others. To access your drive from different devices, you need to sign in to your Google Account (which is created when you open your [[Learn Gmail|Gmail account]]).&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Google Drive is a application for storing and accessing resources.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|You can store all your data here by uploading existing file, folders and also can create new files and folders. And you can share your data with your peers to view, edit and comment. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Version - Not Applicable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements but Internet connection is needed  to use this application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://nextcloud.com/ Nextcloud] [https://www.dropbox.com/?landing=cntl Dropbox]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Android phones will have inbuilt Google Drive option. You need to switch on the synchronizing option to get all your mobile camera photos to upload to your google drive photos automatically. This enable all your important event photos will be saved safely in Google Drive.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.google.com/drive/ Google] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features====&lt;br /&gt;
# Google allows 15GB of free Google online storage space on cloud, this includes your photos (Google photos), emails (Gmail), stories, drawings, recordings, video (Drive files). &lt;br /&gt;
# Your files in Drive can be accessed from any smart phone, tablet, or computer.&lt;br /&gt;
# You can invite others to view, download, and collaborate on all the files of you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
It is a web based application, there is no installation needed. To access google drive, you have to sign in to [[www.drive.google.com]] site by using your google login details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
====Accessing Google Drive ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The above images show you how to access Google Drive. You need to access a browser (Mozilla Firefox) for this. On your computer with Ubuntu custom distribution, to open web browser go to (Applications → Internet→ Firefox web browser), as shown in the first image.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Youtube_1_Option_Menu_to_Open.png|Opening a browser&lt;br /&gt;
File:Gmail 1 Main Window.png|Login to Gmail account&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. If you are using windows or any other operating system open web browsers like Google, Mozilla, Safari etc…&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. You have to sign in to [https://drive.google.com/drive/ www.drive.google.com]  site by using your Gmail user (email) ID and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The google drive page will open and will look like the below image.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Photos_1_App_Of_Google.png|Google Apps, select Drive&lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Drive_2_Main_Window.png|Google Drive main page&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating / uploading and sharing files and folder====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create your local files or folders to Google Drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on “New” icon on left side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you want to create a folder, click on &amp;quot;Folder&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; Give folder name --&amp;gt; Click on &amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Inside this folder, you can create new files such as documents, spreadsheet and slides. Google Drive has Open Document Format (odt, odp, ods) viewer and can open any .odf files, doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx are the supported file formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Drive_3_New_Files_Uploads.png|New files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===== Upload your files to google drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
#To upload your local files, click on &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; select &amp;quot;file upload&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; select file -&amp;gt; click open.&lt;br /&gt;
#This upload time is completely depending on your file size, once it uploads it will show you the right mark (green colour). &lt;br /&gt;
#Google drive will allow you to upload any kind of files like image, audio, video, text files etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Upload your folder to google drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
# To upload your local folder, click on &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; select &amp;quot;folder upload&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; select folder --&amp;gt; click open.&lt;br /&gt;
# By doing this you can directly upload folder from local storage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Sharing your google drive files and folders =====&lt;br /&gt;
In google drive you can share your folder/files in two way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== '''Share with other person's email ID :''' =====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know the email address of everyone with whom you are sharing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on the file/folder --&amp;gt; click on 'Share' --&amp;gt; in the pop-up window, Under 'share with people', type the email address of the person or Google group you want to share with, copy the link by clicking on &amp;quot;copy link&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== '''Share files/folders with others to see the files through the link :''' =====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you don’t know everyone’s email address, aren’t sure if they all have a Google account, or simply want a document to be more widely available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Right click on the file/folders which you are going share, select on &amp;quot;Share&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:1. Google drive - right click and select get sharable link.png|Right click and select get sharable link&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the pop-up window, under &amp;quot;Get link&amp;quot; option&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:2. Google drive - Select any one with this link.png|click on '''change''' option under '''get link''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click on &amp;quot;change&amp;quot; (to decide what people can do with your file when you share it), select Viewer or Editor. Choose viewer option to access your files.&lt;br /&gt;
4. Finally you pop windows details should as shown below image.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:3. Google drive - give view option to just others to see your file.png|Give view option to just others to see your file&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5. Click Copy link --&amp;gt; Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Copy and paste the link in an email or any place you want to share it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:4. Google drive - Copy your google drive file link.png|Copy your google drive file link&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples: in the step 3, If you want to give access to edit, select &amp;quot;editor&amp;quot; option, similarly you can select &amp;quot;viewer&amp;quot; option to just give option (here they can also download your files).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Animation on how to share your google drive folders/files ====&lt;br /&gt;
 You can share your google drive folders and files using your computer browser or mobile app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Through computer browser !! Through Google drive mobile app&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:How to share google drive folders and files with others.gif|link=Special:FilePath/How_to_share_google_drive_folders_and_files_with_others.gif]]||[[File:How to share google drive folders and files with others through phone2.gif|link=Special:FilePath/How_to_share_google_drive_folders_and_files_with_others_through_phone2.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving the files and formats====&lt;br /&gt;
When you start working on Google Drive documents, it will save automatically with given file name. Or else it will save as &amp;quot;Untitled&amp;quot; file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
# You can create simple drawings on &amp;quot;Google Drawing Page&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
# You can allow others to access your documents ('sharing' documents with them) and give their comments and feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ideas for resource creation===&lt;br /&gt;
All the documents like photos , important files and text resources can be saved in the drive. You can share these resources with your peers to view, edit and comment to make it more effective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=References=&lt;br /&gt;
Google Drive [http://www.coosbaylibrary.org/sites/default/files/GoogleDriveHandout.pdf Tutorial] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.google.com/drive/ Google Drive page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Google_Drive&amp;diff=13786</id>
		<title>Learn Google Drive</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Google_Drive&amp;diff=13786"/>
		<updated>2023-03-30T07:18:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Share files/folders with others to see the files through the link : */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;''[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%97%E0%B3%82%E0%B2%97%E0%B2%B2%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%A1%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%88%E0%B2%B5%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]''&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Google Drive is a cloud storage service that lets you save various files and folders you create and which are shared with you by others. To access your drive from different devices, you need to sign in to your Google Account (which is created when you open your [[Learn Gmail|Gmail account]]).&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Google Drive is a application for storing and accessing resources.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|You can store all your data here by uploading existing file, folders and also can create new files and folders. And you can share your data with your peers to view, edit and comment. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Version - Not Applicable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements but Internet connection is needed  to use this application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://nextcloud.com/ Nextcloud] [https://www.dropbox.com/?landing=cntl Dropbox]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Android phones will have inbuilt Google Drive option. You need to switch on the synchronizing option to get all your mobile camera photos to upload to your google drive photos automatically. This enable all your important event photos will be saved safely in Google Drive.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.google.com/drive/ Google] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features====&lt;br /&gt;
# Google allows 15GB of free Google online storage space on cloud, this includes your photos (Google photos), emails (Gmail), stories, drawings, recordings, video (Drive files). &lt;br /&gt;
# Your files in Drive can be access from any smart phone, tablet, or computer. &lt;br /&gt;
# You can invite others to view, download, and collaborate on all the files of you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
It is a web based application, there is no installation needed. To access google drive, you have to sign in to www.drive.google.com site by using your google login details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
====Accessing Google Drive ====&lt;br /&gt;
# The above images show you how to access Google Drive. You need to access a browser (Mozilla Firefox) for this. On your computer with Ubuntu custom distribution, to open web browser go to (Applications → Internet→ Firefox web browser), as shown in the first image. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening Google Drive&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Youtube_1_Option_Menu_to_Open.png|Opening a browser&lt;br /&gt;
File:Gmail 1 Main Window.png|Login to Gmail account&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;2. If you are using windows or any other operating system open web browsers like Google, Mozilla, Safari etc…&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. You have to sign in to [https://drive.google.com/drive/ www.drive.google.com]  site by using your Gmail user (email) ID and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The google drive page will open and will look like the below image.&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Photos_1_App_Of_Google.png|Google Apps, select Drive&lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Drive_2_Main_Window.png|Google Drive main page&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating / uploading and sharing files and folder==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create your local files or folders to Google Drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on “New” icon on left side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you want to create a folder, click on “Folder” --&amp;gt; Give folder name --&amp;gt; Click on “Create”.&lt;br /&gt;
#Inside this folder, you can create new files such as documents, spreadsheet and slides. Google Drive has Open Document Format (odt, odp, ods) viewer and can open any .odf files, doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx are the supported file formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating/Uploading&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Drive_3_New_Files_Uploads.png|New files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===== Upload your files to google drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
#To upload your local files, click on &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;file upload&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; select file -&amp;gt; click open. &lt;br /&gt;
#This upload time is completely depending on your file size, once it uploads it will show you the right mark (green colour). &lt;br /&gt;
#Google drive will allow you to upload any kind of files like image, audio, video, text files etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Upload your folder to google drive ====&lt;br /&gt;
# To upload your local folder, click on &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;folder upload&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; select folder -&amp;gt; click open.&lt;br /&gt;
# By doing this you can directly upload folder from local storage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sharing your google drive files and folders ==&lt;br /&gt;
In google drive you can share your folder/files in two way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Share with other person email ID :''' ====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know the email address of everyone with whom you are sharing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on the file/folder -&amp;gt; click on '''&amp;quot;Share&amp;quot;''' -&amp;gt; in the pop-up window, Under &amp;quot;share with people&amp;quot;, type the email address of the person or Google Group you want to share with, the copy the link by clicking on &amp;quot;copy link&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Share files/folders with others to see the files through the link :''' ====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you don’t know everyone’s email address, aren’t sure if they all have a Google account, or simply want a document to be more widely available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Right click on the file/folders which you are going share, select on &amp;quot;Share&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Sharing file&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:1. Google drive - right click and select get sharable link.png|Right click and select get sharable link&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;2. In the pop-up window, under &amp;quot;'''Get link'''&amp;quot; option,&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Sharing file&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:2. Google drive - Select any one with this link.png|click on '''change''' option under '''get link''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;3. Click on &amp;quot;'''change'''&amp;quot; (to decide what people can do with your file when you share it), select '''Viewer''' or '''Editor'''. Chose viewer option to access your files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Finally you pop windows details should as shown below image.&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Sharing file&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:3. Google drive - give view option to just others to see your file.png|Give view option to just others to see your file&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;5. Click '''Copy link''' -&amp;gt; '''Done'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Copy and paste the link in an email or any place you want to share it.&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Sharing file&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:4. Google drive - Copy your google drive file link.png|Copy your google drive file link&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples: in the 3rd step: If you want to give access to edit , select “editor” option, similarly you can select &amp;quot;viewer&amp;quot; option to just give option (here they can also download your files).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Animation on how to share your google drive folders/files ====&lt;br /&gt;
 You can share your google drive folders and files using your computer browser or mobile app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Through computer browser !! Through Google drive mobile app&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:How to share google drivefolders and files with others.gif]] || [[File:How to share google drivefolders and files with others through phone2.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving the files and formats====&lt;br /&gt;
When you start working on Google Drive documents, it will save automatically with given file name. Or else it will save as &amp;quot;Untitled&amp;quot; file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
# You can create simple drawings on &amp;quot;Google Drawing Page&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
# You can allow others to access your documents ('sharing' documents with them) and give their comments and feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ideas for resource creation===&lt;br /&gt;
All the documents like photos , important files and text resources can be saved in the drive. You can share these resources with your peers to view, edit and comment to make it more effective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=References=&lt;br /&gt;
Google Drive [http://www.coosbaylibrary.org/sites/default/files/GoogleDriveHandout.pdf Tutorial] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.google.com/drive/ Google Drive page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Google_Drive&amp;diff=13785</id>
		<title>Learn Google Drive</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Google_Drive&amp;diff=13785"/>
		<updated>2023-03-30T07:16:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Share files/folders with others to see the files through the link : */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;''[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%97%E0%B3%82%E0%B2%97%E0%B2%B2%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%A1%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%88%E0%B2%B5%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]''&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Google Drive is a cloud storage service that lets you save various files and folders you create and which are shared with you by others. To access your drive from different devices, you need to sign in to your Google Account (which is created when you open your [[Learn Gmail|Gmail account]]).&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Google Drive is a application for storing and accessing resources.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|You can store all your data here by uploading existing file, folders and also can create new files and folders. And you can share your data with your peers to view, edit and comment. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Version - Not Applicable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements but Internet connection is needed  to use this application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://nextcloud.com/ Nextcloud] [https://www.dropbox.com/?landing=cntl Dropbox]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Android phones will have inbuilt Google Drive option. You need to switch on the synchronizing option to get all your mobile camera photos to upload to your google drive photos automatically. This enable all your important event photos will be saved safely in Google Drive.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.google.com/drive/ Google] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features====&lt;br /&gt;
# Google allows 15GB of free Google online storage space on cloud, this includes your photos (Google photos), emails (Gmail), stories, drawings, recordings, video (Drive files). &lt;br /&gt;
# Your files in Drive can be access from any smart phone, tablet, or computer. &lt;br /&gt;
# You can invite others to view, download, and collaborate on all the files of you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
It is a web based application, there is no installation needed. To access google drive, you have to sign in to www.drive.google.com site by using your google login details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
====Accessing Google Drive ====&lt;br /&gt;
# The above images show you how to access Google Drive. You need to access a browser (Mozilla Firefox) for this. On your computer with Ubuntu custom distribution, to open web browser go to (Applications → Internet→ Firefox web browser), as shown in the first image. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening Google Drive&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Youtube_1_Option_Menu_to_Open.png|Opening a browser&lt;br /&gt;
File:Gmail 1 Main Window.png|Login to Gmail account&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;2. If you are using windows or any other operating system open web browsers like Google, Mozilla, Safari etc…&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. You have to sign in to [https://drive.google.com/drive/ www.drive.google.com]  site by using your Gmail user (email) ID and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The google drive page will open and will look like the below image.&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Photos_1_App_Of_Google.png|Google Apps, select Drive&lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Drive_2_Main_Window.png|Google Drive main page&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating / uploading and sharing files and folder==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create your local files or folders to Google Drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on “New” icon on left side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you want to create a folder, click on “Folder” --&amp;gt; Give folder name --&amp;gt; Click on “Create”.&lt;br /&gt;
#Inside this folder, you can create new files such as documents, spreadsheet and slides. Google Drive has Open Document Format (odt, odp, ods) viewer and can open any .odf files, doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx are the supported file formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating/Uploading&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Drive_3_New_Files_Uploads.png|New files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===== Upload your files to google drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
#To upload your local files, click on &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;file upload&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; select file -&amp;gt; click open. &lt;br /&gt;
#This upload time is completely depending on your file size, once it uploads it will show you the right mark (green colour). &lt;br /&gt;
#Google drive will allow you to upload any kind of files like image, audio, video, text files etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Upload your folder to google drive ====&lt;br /&gt;
# To upload your local folder, click on &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;folder upload&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; select folder -&amp;gt; click open.&lt;br /&gt;
# By doing this you can directly upload folder from local storage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sharing your google drive files and folders ==&lt;br /&gt;
In google drive you can share your folder/files in two way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Share with other person email ID :''' ====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know the email address of everyone with whom you are sharing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on the file/folder -&amp;gt; click on '''&amp;quot;Share&amp;quot;''' -&amp;gt; in the pop-up window, Under &amp;quot;share with people&amp;quot;, type the email address of the person or Google Group you want to share with, the copy the link by clicking on &amp;quot;copy link&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Share files/folders with others to see the files through the link :''' ====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you don’t know everyone’s email address, aren’t sure if they all have a Google account, or simply want a document to be more widely available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Right click on the file/folders which you are going share, select on &amp;quot;Share&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Sharing file&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:1. Google drive - right click and select get sharable link.png|Right click and select get sharable link&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#In the pop-up window, under &amp;quot;'''Get link'''&amp;quot; option, &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Sharing file&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:2. Google drive - Select any one with this link.png|click on '''change''' option under '''get link''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;'''change'''&amp;quot; (to decide what people can do with your file when you share it), select '''Viewer''' or '''Editor'''. Chose viewer option to access your files.&lt;br /&gt;
#Finally you pop windows details should as shown below image.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Sharing file&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:3. Google drive - give view option to just others to see your file.png|Give view option to just others to see your file&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Copy link''' -&amp;gt; '''Done'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy and paste the link in an email or any place you want to share it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Sharing file&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:4. Google drive - Copy your google drive file link.png|Copy your google drive file link&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples: in the 3rd step: If you want to give access to edit , select “editor” option, similarly you can select &amp;quot;viewer&amp;quot; option to just give option (here they can also download your files).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Animation on how to share your google drive folders/files =====&lt;br /&gt;
 You can share your google drive folders and files using your computer browser or mobile app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Through computer browser !! Through Google drive mobile app&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:How to share google drivefolders and files with others.gif]] || [[File:How to share google drivefolders and files with others through phone2.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving the files and formats====&lt;br /&gt;
When you start working on Google Drive documents, it will save automatically with given file name. Or else it will save as &amp;quot;Untitled&amp;quot; file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
# You can create simple drawings on &amp;quot;Google Drawing Page&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
# You can allow others to access your documents ('sharing' documents with them) and give their comments and feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ideas for resource creation===&lt;br /&gt;
All the documents like photos , important files and text resources can be saved in the drive. You can share these resources with your peers to view, edit and comment to make it more effective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=References=&lt;br /&gt;
Google Drive [http://www.coosbaylibrary.org/sites/default/files/GoogleDriveHandout.pdf Tutorial] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.google.com/drive/ Google Drive page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Google_Drive&amp;diff=13784</id>
		<title>Learn Google Drive</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Google_Drive&amp;diff=13784"/>
		<updated>2023-03-30T07:10:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Accessing Google Drive */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;''[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%97%E0%B3%82%E0%B2%97%E0%B2%B2%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%A1%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%88%E0%B2%B5%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]''&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Google Drive is a cloud storage service that lets you save various files and folders you create and which are shared with you by others. To access your drive from different devices, you need to sign in to your Google Account (which is created when you open your [[Learn Gmail|Gmail account]]).&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Google Drive is a application for storing and accessing resources.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|You can store all your data here by uploading existing file, folders and also can create new files and folders. And you can share your data with your peers to view, edit and comment. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Version - Not Applicable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements but Internet connection is needed  to use this application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://nextcloud.com/ Nextcloud] [https://www.dropbox.com/?landing=cntl Dropbox]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Android phones will have inbuilt Google Drive option. You need to switch on the synchronizing option to get all your mobile camera photos to upload to your google drive photos automatically. This enable all your important event photos will be saved safely in Google Drive.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.google.com/drive/ Google] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features====&lt;br /&gt;
# Google allows 15GB of free Google online storage space on cloud, this includes your photos (Google photos), emails (Gmail), stories, drawings, recordings, video (Drive files). &lt;br /&gt;
# Your files in Drive can be access from any smart phone, tablet, or computer. &lt;br /&gt;
# You can invite others to view, download, and collaborate on all the files of you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
It is a web based application, there is no installation needed. To access google drive, you have to sign in to www.drive.google.com site by using your google login details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
====Accessing Google Drive ====&lt;br /&gt;
# The above images show you how to access Google Drive. You need to access a browser (Mozilla Firefox) for this. On your computer with Ubuntu custom distribution, to open web browser go to (Applications → Internet→ Firefox web browser), as shown in the first image. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening Google Drive&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Youtube_1_Option_Menu_to_Open.png|Opening a browser&lt;br /&gt;
File:Gmail 1 Main Window.png|Login to Gmail account&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;2. If you are using windows or any other operating system open web browsers like Google, Mozilla, Safari etc…&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. You have to sign in to [https://drive.google.com/drive/ www.drive.google.com]  site by using your Gmail user (email) ID and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The google drive page will open and will look like the below image.&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Photos_1_App_Of_Google.png|Google Apps, select Drive&lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Drive_2_Main_Window.png|Google Drive main page&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating / uploading and sharing files and folder==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create your local files or folders to Google Drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on “New” icon on left side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you want to create a folder, click on “Folder” --&amp;gt; Give folder name --&amp;gt; Click on “Create”.&lt;br /&gt;
#Inside this folder, you can create new files such as documents, spreadsheet and slides. Google Drive has Open Document Format (odt, odp, ods) viewer and can open any .odf files, doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx are the supported file formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating/Uploading&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Drive_3_New_Files_Uploads.png|New files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===== Upload your files to google drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
#To upload your local files, click on &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;file upload&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; select file -&amp;gt; click open. &lt;br /&gt;
#This upload time is completely depending on your file size, once it uploads it will show you the right mark (green colour). &lt;br /&gt;
#Google drive will allow you to upload any kind of files like image, audio, video, text files etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Upload your folder to google drive ====&lt;br /&gt;
# To upload your local folder, click on &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;folder upload&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; select folder -&amp;gt; click open.&lt;br /&gt;
# By doing this you can directly upload folder from local storage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sharing your google drive files and folders ==&lt;br /&gt;
In google drive you can share your folder/files in two way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Share with other person email ID :''' ====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know the email address of everyone with whom you are sharing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on the file/folder -&amp;gt; click on '''&amp;quot;Share&amp;quot;''' -&amp;gt; in the pop-up window, Under &amp;quot;share with people&amp;quot;, type the email address of the person or Google Group you want to share with, the copy the link by clicking on &amp;quot;copy link&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Share files/folders with others to see the files through the link :''' ====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you don’t know everyone’s email address, aren’t sure if they all have a Google account, or simply want a document to be more widely available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Sharing file&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:1. Google drive - right click and select get sharable link.png|Right click and select get sharable link&lt;br /&gt;
File:2. Google drive - Select any one with this link.png|click on '''change''' option under '''get link''' &lt;br /&gt;
File:3. Google drive - give view option to just others to see your file.png|Give view option to just others to see your file&lt;br /&gt;
File:4. Google drive - Copy your google drive file link.png|Copy your google drive file link&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Right click on the file/folders which you are going share, select on &amp;quot;Share&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#In the pop-up window, under &amp;quot;'''Get link'''&amp;quot; option, &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;'''change'''&amp;quot; (to decide what people can do with your file when you share it), select '''Viewer''' or '''Editor'''. Chose viewer option to access your files.&lt;br /&gt;
#Finally you pop windows details should as shown above image4.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Copy link''' -&amp;gt; '''Done'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy and paste the link in an email or any place you want to share it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples: in the 3rd step: If you want to give access to edit , select “editor” option, similarly you can select &amp;quot;viewer&amp;quot; option to just give option (here they can also download your files).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Animation on how to share your google drive folders/files =====&lt;br /&gt;
 You can share your google drive folders and files using your computer browser or mobile app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Through computer browser !! Through Google drive mobile app&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:How to share google drivefolders and files with others.gif]] || [[File:How to share google drivefolders and files with others through phone2.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving the files and formats====&lt;br /&gt;
When you start working on Google Drive documents, it will save automatically with given file name. Or else it will save as &amp;quot;Untitled&amp;quot; file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
# You can create simple drawings on &amp;quot;Google Drawing Page&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
# You can allow others to access your documents ('sharing' documents with them) and give their comments and feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ideas for resource creation===&lt;br /&gt;
All the documents like photos , important files and text resources can be saved in the drive. You can share these resources with your peers to view, edit and comment to make it more effective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=References=&lt;br /&gt;
Google Drive [http://www.coosbaylibrary.org/sites/default/files/GoogleDriveHandout.pdf Tutorial] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.google.com/drive/ Google Drive page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Google_Drive&amp;diff=13783</id>
		<title>Learn Google Drive</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Google_Drive&amp;diff=13783"/>
		<updated>2023-03-30T07:03:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Creating / uploading and sharing files and folder */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;''[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%97%E0%B3%82%E0%B2%97%E0%B2%B2%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%A1%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%88%E0%B2%B5%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]''&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Google Drive is a cloud storage service that lets you save various files and folders you create and which are shared with you by others. To access your drive from different devices, you need to sign in to your Google Account (which is created when you open your [[Learn Gmail|Gmail account]]).&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Google Drive is a application for storing and accessing resources.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|You can store all your data here by uploading existing file, folders and also can create new files and folders. And you can share your data with your peers to view, edit and comment. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Version - Not Applicable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements but Internet connection is needed  to use this application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://nextcloud.com/ Nextcloud] [https://www.dropbox.com/?landing=cntl Dropbox]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Android phones will have inbuilt Google Drive option. You need to switch on the synchronizing option to get all your mobile camera photos to upload to your google drive photos automatically. This enable all your important event photos will be saved safely in Google Drive.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.google.com/drive/ Google] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features====&lt;br /&gt;
# Google allows 15GB of free Google online storage space on cloud, this includes your photos (Google photos), emails (Gmail), stories, drawings, recordings, video (Drive files). &lt;br /&gt;
# Your files in Drive can be access from any smart phone, tablet, or computer. &lt;br /&gt;
# You can invite others to view, download, and collaborate on all the files of you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
It is a web based application, there is no installation needed. To access google drive, you have to sign in to www.drive.google.com site by using your google login details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
====Accessing Google Drive ====&lt;br /&gt;
# The above images show you how to access Google Drive. You need to access a browser (Mozilla Firefox) for this. On your computer with Ubuntu custom distribution, to open web browser go to (Applications → Internet→ Firefox web browser), as shown in the first image. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening Google Drive&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Youtube_1_Option_Menu_to_Open.png|Opening a browser&lt;br /&gt;
File:Gmail 1 Main Window.png|Login to Gmail account&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#If you are using windows or any other operating system open web browsers like Google, Mozilla, Safari etc… &lt;br /&gt;
#You have to sign in to www.drive.google.com  site by using your Gmail user (email) ID and password. &lt;br /&gt;
#The google drive page will open and will look like the below image.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Photos_1_App_Of_Google.png|Google Apps, select Drive&lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Drive_2_Main_Window.png|Google Drive main page&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating / uploading and sharing files and folder==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create your local files or folders to Google Drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on “New” icon on left side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you want to create a folder, click on “Folder” --&amp;gt; Give folder name --&amp;gt; Click on “Create”.&lt;br /&gt;
#Inside this folder, you can create new files such as documents, spreadsheet and slides. Google Drive has Open Document Format (odt, odp, ods) viewer and can open any .odf files, doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx are the supported file formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating/Uploading&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Drive_3_New_Files_Uploads.png|New files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===== Upload your files to google drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
#To upload your local files, click on &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;file upload&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; select file -&amp;gt; click open. &lt;br /&gt;
#This upload time is completely depending on your file size, once it uploads it will show you the right mark (green colour). &lt;br /&gt;
#Google drive will allow you to upload any kind of files like image, audio, video, text files etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Upload your folder to google drive ====&lt;br /&gt;
# To upload your local folder, click on &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;folder upload&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; select folder -&amp;gt; click open.&lt;br /&gt;
# By doing this you can directly upload folder from local storage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Sharing your google drive files and folders =====&lt;br /&gt;
In google drive you can share your folder/files in two way:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Share with other person email ID :''' &lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know the email address of everyone with whom you are sharing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on the file/folder -&amp;gt; click on '''&amp;quot;Share&amp;quot;''' -&amp;gt; in the pop-up window, Under &amp;quot;share with people&amp;quot;, type the email address of the person or Google Group you want to share with, the copy the link by clicking on &amp;quot;copy link&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Share files/folders with others to see the files through the link :'''&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you don’t know everyone’s email address, aren’t sure if they all have a Google account, or simply want a document to be more widely available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Sharing file&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:1. Google drive - right click and select get sharable link.png|Right click and select get sharable link&lt;br /&gt;
File:2. Google drive - Select any one with this link.png|click on '''change''' option under '''get link''' &lt;br /&gt;
File:3. Google drive - give view option to just others to see your file.png|Give view option to just others to see your file&lt;br /&gt;
File:4. Google drive - Copy your google drive file link.png|Copy your google drive file link&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Right click on the file/folders which you are going share, select on &amp;quot;Share&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#In the pop-up window, under &amp;quot;'''Get link'''&amp;quot; option, &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;'''change'''&amp;quot; (to decide what people can do with your file when you share it), select '''Viewer''' or '''Editor'''. Chose viewer option to access your files.&lt;br /&gt;
#Finally you pop windows details should as shown above image4.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Copy link''' -&amp;gt; '''Done'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy and paste the link in an email or any place you want to share it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples: in the 3rd step: If you want to give access to edit , select “editor” option, similarly you can select &amp;quot;viewer&amp;quot; option to just give option (here they can also download your files).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Animation on how to share your google drive folders/files =====&lt;br /&gt;
 You can share your google drive folders and files using your computer browser or mobile app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Through computer browser !! Through Google drive mobile app&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:How to share google drivefolders and files with others.gif]] || [[File:How to share google drivefolders and files with others through phone2.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving the files and formats====&lt;br /&gt;
When you start working on Google Drive documents, it will save automatically with given file name. Or else it will save as &amp;quot;Untitled&amp;quot; file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
# You can create simple drawings on &amp;quot;Google Drawing Page&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
# You can allow others to access your documents ('sharing' documents with them) and give their comments and feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ideas for resource creation===&lt;br /&gt;
All the documents like photos , important files and text resources can be saved in the drive. You can share these resources with your peers to view, edit and comment to make it more effective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=References=&lt;br /&gt;
Google Drive [http://www.coosbaylibrary.org/sites/default/files/GoogleDriveHandout.pdf Tutorial] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.google.com/drive/ Google Drive page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Google_Drive&amp;diff=13782</id>
		<title>Learn Google Drive</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Google_Drive&amp;diff=13782"/>
		<updated>2023-03-30T06:46:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;''[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%97%E0%B3%82%E0%B2%97%E0%B2%B2%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%A1%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%88%E0%B2%B5%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]''&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Google Drive is a cloud storage service that lets you save various files and folders you create and which are shared with you by others. To access your drive from different devices, you need to sign in to your Google Account (which is created when you open your [[Learn Gmail|Gmail account]]).&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Google Drive is a application for storing and accessing resources.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|You can store all your data here by uploading existing file, folders and also can create new files and folders. And you can share your data with your peers to view, edit and comment. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Version - Not Applicable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements but Internet connection is needed  to use this application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://nextcloud.com/ Nextcloud] [https://www.dropbox.com/?landing=cntl Dropbox]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|Android phones will have inbuilt Google Drive option. You need to switch on the synchronizing option to get all your mobile camera photos to upload to your google drive photos automatically. This enable all your important event photos will be saved safely in Google Drive.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.google.com/drive/ Google] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features====&lt;br /&gt;
# Google allows 15GB of free Google online storage space on cloud, this includes your photos (Google photos), emails (Gmail), stories, drawings, recordings, video (Drive files). &lt;br /&gt;
# Your files in Drive can be access from any smart phone, tablet, or computer. &lt;br /&gt;
# You can invite others to view, download, and collaborate on all the files of you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
It is a web based application, there is no installation needed. To access google drive, you have to sign in to www.drive.google.com site by using your google login details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
====Accessing Google Drive ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening Google Drive&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Youtube_1_Option_Menu_to_Open.png|Opening a browser&lt;br /&gt;
File:Gmail 1 Main Window.png|Login to Gmail account&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Photos_1_App_Of_Google.png|Google Apps, select Drive&lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Drive_2_Main_Window.png|Google Drive main page&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The above images show you how to access Google Drive. You need to access a browser (Mozilla Firefox) for this. On your computer with Ubuntu custom distribution, to open web browser go to (Applications → Internet→ Firefox web browser), as shown in the first image. &lt;br /&gt;
#If you are using windows or any other operating system open web browsers like Google, Mozilla, Safari etc… &lt;br /&gt;
#You have to sign in to www.drive.google.com  site by using your Gmail user (email) ID and password. &lt;br /&gt;
#The google drive page will open and will look like the above image (last image).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating / uploading and sharing files and folder====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create your local files or folders to Google Drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on “New” icon on left side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you want to create a folder, click on “Folder” --&amp;gt; Give folder name --&amp;gt; Click on “Create”.&lt;br /&gt;
#Inside this folder, you can create new files such as documents, spreadsheet and slides. Google Drive has Open Document Format (odt, odp, ods) viewer and can open any .odf files, doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx are the supported file formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating/Uploading&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Google_Drive_3_New_Files_Uploads.png|New files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===== Upload your files to google drive =====&lt;br /&gt;
#To upload your local files, click on &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;file upload&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; select file -&amp;gt; click open. &lt;br /&gt;
#This upload time is completely depending on your file size, once it uploads it will show you the right mark (green colour). &lt;br /&gt;
#Google drive will allow you to upload any kind of files like image, audio, video, text files etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Upload your folder to google drive ====&lt;br /&gt;
# To upload your local folder, click on &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;folder upload&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; select folder -&amp;gt; click open.&lt;br /&gt;
# By doing this you can directly upload folder from local storage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Sharing your google drive files and folders =====&lt;br /&gt;
In google drive you can share your folder/files in two way:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Share with other person email ID :''' &lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know the email address of everyone with whom you are sharing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on the file/folder -&amp;gt; click on '''&amp;quot;Share&amp;quot;''' -&amp;gt; in the pop-up window, Under &amp;quot;share with people&amp;quot;, type the email address of the person or Google Group you want to share with, the copy the link by clicking on &amp;quot;copy link&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Share files/folders with others to see the files through the link :'''&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you don’t know everyone’s email address, aren’t sure if they all have a Google account, or simply want a document to be more widely available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Sharing file&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:1. Google drive - right click and select get sharable link.png|Right click and select get sharable link&lt;br /&gt;
File:2. Google drive - Select any one with this link.png|click on '''change''' option under '''get link''' &lt;br /&gt;
File:3. Google drive - give view option to just others to see your file.png|Give view option to just others to see your file&lt;br /&gt;
File:4. Google drive - Copy your google drive file link.png|Copy your google drive file link&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Right click on the file/folders which you are going share, select on &amp;quot;Share&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#In the pop-up window, under &amp;quot;'''Get link'''&amp;quot; option, &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;'''change'''&amp;quot; (to decide what people can do with your file when you share it), select '''Viewer''' or '''Editor'''. Chose viewer option to access your files.&lt;br /&gt;
#Finally you pop windows details should as shown above image4.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Copy link''' -&amp;gt; '''Done'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy and paste the link in an email or any place you want to share it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples: in the 3rd step: If you want to give access to edit , select “editor” option, similarly you can select &amp;quot;viewer&amp;quot; option to just give option (here they can also download your files).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Animation on how to share your google drive folders/files =====&lt;br /&gt;
 You can share your google drive folders and files using your computer browser or mobile app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Through computer browser !! Through Google drive mobile app&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:How to share google drivefolders and files with others.gif]] || [[File:How to share google drivefolders and files with others through phone2.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving the files and formats====&lt;br /&gt;
When you start working on Google Drive documents, it will save automatically with given file name. Or else it will save as &amp;quot;Untitled&amp;quot; file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
# You can create simple drawings on &amp;quot;Google Drawing Page&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
# You can allow others to access your documents ('sharing' documents with them) and give their comments and feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ideas for resource creation===&lt;br /&gt;
All the documents like photos , important files and text resources can be saved in the drive. You can share these resources with your peers to view, edit and comment to make it more effective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=References=&lt;br /&gt;
Google Drive [http://www.coosbaylibrary.org/sites/default/files/GoogleDriveHandout.pdf Tutorial] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.google.com/drive/ Google Drive page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_GIMP&amp;diff=13756</id>
		<title>Learn GIMP</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_GIMP&amp;diff=13756"/>
		<updated>2023-03-21T10:04:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Basic information */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;''[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%9C%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%82%E0%B2%AA%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%87%E0%B2%AE%E0%B3%87%E0%B2%9C%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%8E%E0%B2%A1%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%9F%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;noprint&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;float:right; border:1px solid blue;width:300px;background-color:#F5F5F5;padding:2px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Book.jpg|none|80px|Book image]]&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;padding-left:2px;&amp;quot; | Go back to &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[ICT student textbook]] &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; [[ICT teacher handbook]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|It is a tool for generic resource creation, used to edit images.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|GIMP can be used for multiple kind of image editing and it's a FOSS tool so there will no payment or subscription needed it can be used in education sector to teach children about image editing.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Version - 2.10.34&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|Its GIMP is part of the Ubuntu distribution. This can be opened from Applications  → graphics → GIMP.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets                                                                                                            &lt;br /&gt;
|[https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=org.dandroidmobile.xgimp&amp;amp;hl=en_IN&amp;amp;gl=US xgimp]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.gimp.org/ The GIMP Development Team]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview of Features==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Tools used to perform image editing can be accessed via the toolbox, They include filters and brushes, as well as transformation, selection, layer and masking tools.&lt;br /&gt;
*GIMP selection tools include a rectangular and circular selection tool, free select tool.&lt;br /&gt;
*There are many tools that can be used for editing images in GIMP. The more common tools include a paint brush, pencil, airbrush, eraser and ink tools used to create new or blended pixels&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== For Ubuntu OS ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The application is part of the Ubuntu custom distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
# In case you do not find it on your computer, you can install by typing GIMP on top search bar in Software Centre(App Grid).&lt;br /&gt;
# If you would like to install through the terminal follow these steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
## Open terminal by clicking Applications-&amp;gt;System Tools-&amp;gt;Terminal or through Keyboard shortcut &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ctrl+Alt+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## In the terminal window, type below command and press enter to start the installation by providing your machine password:&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo apt-get install gimp&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== For Windows OS ====&lt;br /&gt;
To install and use GIMP on your Windows computer, you need to install GIMP in your Windows computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the gimp-2.YtZWkPvy.10.34-setup.exe from [https://www.gimp.org/downloads/ this link]. You can save this executable (.exe for windows/.dmg for MAC) files to your desktop or any other location in your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you download the file, double-click on &amp;quot;gimp-2.YtZWkPvy.10.34-setup.exe/dmg&amp;quot; file to begin the installation.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; if it ask your permission to allow this program make change to the computer, Keep clicking on &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot; button to continue and complete the installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== For MAC OS ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the installation file from [https://download.gimp.org/gimp/v2.10/macos/gimp-2.10.34-x86_64.dmg this link].&lt;br /&gt;
# When the download is complete, find the downloaded .dmg file and double click on it and follow the above steps mentioned for windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Working with the application=&lt;br /&gt;
==Functionalities==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:GIMP_1_Main_Window.png|200px]] [[File:Opening an image file using GIMP.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:GIMP_2_Select_Tool.png|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 1 - '''Open GIMP'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Select File → New → select which size want to edit image  → OK&lt;br /&gt;
# If you didn't get side toolbox please click on Windows then click Tool box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert image – select File → Open → Select image.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, You can also open GIMP through image. Select image which you want to edit, and right click choose Open with &amp;gt; GIMP Image Editor. It will open with image to edit. &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 2 - '''Select Tools''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Rectangle select tool''' : Select a rectangular Tool&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Ellipse select tool''' : Select an elliptical region &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Free select tool''' : Select a hand-drawn region with free with polygonal segments &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:Crop to selection of an image, using GIMP.png|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:Scaling an image using GIMP.png|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 3 -  '''Crop'''&lt;br /&gt;
Select the area that you would like to retain. The area can be extended or reduced by selecting one of the sides. Once your desired area is selected (the remaining area will turn grey or darker), then double click inside the desired area. The photo will be cropped to that size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The tool is used:&lt;br /&gt;
# To reduce the size of large images. &lt;br /&gt;
# To remove unnecessary areas in a photo.&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 4 - '''Scale''': Select the image. Go to the menu bar on top and click on the 'Image' option. Then click on 'Scale image...'This would show you options of 'width and height' along with 'X resolution' and 'Y resolution'. Enter in 72 pixels in both X and Y spaces. This would help reduce the file to a small size. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The tool is used:&lt;br /&gt;
* To reduce resolution which helps in file size.&lt;br /&gt;
* To make photos for uploading on websites (should not be used for printing).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:GIMP_5_Move.png|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:GIMP_6_Add_Text.png|200px]] [[File:Entering text on an image using GIMP.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 5 - '''Move'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; After scaling an image, if you want to add another image to the frame, you would have to move the first image to the side. This can be done using the move tool. Select the move tool. Select the image. Click and drag to a suitable location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The tool is used:&lt;br /&gt;
* When there is more than one element in the window you are working on&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 6 - ''' Add Text'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Select the Text tool (a capital A). Now, drag the tool to were you want to insert text. A tiny box pops up. Type your text in the box. The size, colour, style of the text can be changed in the settings below the tool box. The length of the text box can be adjusted after you finishing typing your text by selecting the corners and dragging.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The tool is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To add a title or caption explaining the text is useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==File formats for creation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Saving the file==&lt;br /&gt;
Like in most applications, a file can be saved using the FILE – SAVE AS command, or by the shortcut key CTRL+S. Always give a meaningful file name, reading which you should get an idea of the file contents. Its saving in '''.xcf'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export and publishing files==&lt;br /&gt;
After your edits, final output file can be export from here by using the FILE – Export AS command. Always give a meaningful file name, reading which you should get an idea of the file contents. You can export the image to various formats, including  .PNG .JPEG .JPG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Advanced features==&lt;br /&gt;
#Customizable Interface- Each task requires a different environment and GIMP allows you to customize the view and behavior the way you like it. Starting from the widget theme, allowing you to change colors, widget spacing and icon sizes to custom tool sets in the toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
#Photo Enhancement- Numerous digital photo imperfections can be easily compensated for using GIMP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Ideas for resource creation=&lt;br /&gt;
Modify pictures hight, width, size, etc and creating resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=References=&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://www.gimp.org/ GIMP Official Website]&lt;br /&gt;
# https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GIMP GIMP Wikipedia&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_GIMP&amp;diff=13755</id>
		<title>Learn GIMP</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_GIMP&amp;diff=13755"/>
		<updated>2023-03-21T09:48:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;''[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%9C%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%82%E0%B2%AA%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%87%E0%B2%AE%E0%B3%87%E0%B2%9C%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%8E%E0%B2%A1%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%9F%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;noprint&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;float:right; border:1px solid blue;width:300px;background-color:#F5F5F5;padding:2px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Book.jpg|none|80px|Book image]]&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;padding-left:2px;&amp;quot; | Go back to &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[ICT student textbook]] &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; [[ICT teacher handbook]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Freeplane is a free and open source software application that helps you create and edit concept map, as a generic resource. For the purpose of this section, we can treat 'concept mapping' as nearly synonymous with 'mind mapping'.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|Making concept maps can support thinking, brainstorming, sharing information and documenting meetings and group processes. &lt;br /&gt;
Educators consider that concept mapping is a good approach for building skills in students for ideating and organizing ideas; they also find it a great asset for teaching. It is a great tool for students to help them organize their thought processes when writing. Teachers and students can use this application to collaboratively or individually create concept maps on an idea or explore a problem.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Version - 1.10.2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|This tool has no specific configuration requirements. It is available as a part of Ubuntu custom distribution. &lt;br /&gt;
Freeplane is part of the Ubuntu GNU/Linux operating system. It is also available for download on [https://sourceforge.net/projects/freeplane/ Windows] and Mac operating systems as well. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://freemind.sourceforge.net/wiki/index.php/Main_Page Freemind]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets                                                                                                            &lt;br /&gt;
|[https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.cryptobees.mimind&amp;amp;hl=en_IN&amp;amp;gl=US MiMind]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.freeplane.org/ Freeplane website]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features====&lt;br /&gt;
Freeplane helps you to create a textual OER with possibilities for linking to additional resources (on your computer as well as on the web), adding annotations as well as images. It allows you to organize and order ideas into a hierarchy connected by lines (edges). Freeplane is a tool to create concept map that can be organized graphically, in the form of a map or tree of ideas. It provides a pictorial overview of the concepts, related concepts / sub-concepts for a topic. Nodes can also be linked with free lines (connectors) and labels. The concept map can be exported as an image as well as a text document.&lt;br /&gt;
=Introduction=&lt;br /&gt;
GIMP is a cross-platform image editor available for GNU/Linux, OS X, Windows and more operating systems. It is a free software.&lt;br /&gt;
==ICT Competency==&lt;br /&gt;
It is a tool for generic resource creation, used to edit images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Educational application and relevance==&lt;br /&gt;
==Version==&lt;br /&gt;
Stable release 	2.8.20 (February 1, 2017)&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
Its GIMP is part of the Ubuntu distribution. This can be opened from Applications  → graphics → GIMP.  &lt;br /&gt;
==Overview of Features==&lt;br /&gt;
#Tools used to perform image editing can be accessed via the toolbox, They include filters and brushes, as well as transformation, selection, layer and masking tools.&lt;br /&gt;
#GIMP selection tools include a rectangular and circular selection tool, free select tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#There are many tools that can be used for editing images in GIMP. The more common tools include a paint brush, pencil, airbrush, eraser and ink tools used to create new or blended pixels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== For Ubuntu OS ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The application is part of the Ubuntu custom distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
# In case you do not find it on your computer, you can install by typing GIMP on top search bar in Software Centre(App Grid).&lt;br /&gt;
# If you would like to install through the terminal follow these steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
## Open terminal by clicking Applications-&amp;gt;System Tools-&amp;gt;Terminal or through Keyboard shortcut &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ctrl+Alt+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## In the terminal window, type below command and press enter to start the installation by providing your machine password:&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo apt-get install gimp&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== For Windows OS ====&lt;br /&gt;
To install and use GIMP on your Windows computer, you need to install GIMP in your Windows computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the gimp-2.YtZWkPvy.10.34-setup.exe from [https://www.gimp.org/downloads/ this link]. You can save this executable (.exe for windows/.dmg for MAC) files to your desktop or any other location in your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you download the file, double-click on &amp;quot;gimp-2.YtZWkPvy.10.34-setup.exe/dmg&amp;quot; file to begin the installation.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; if it ask your permission to allow this program make change to the computer, Keep clicking on &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot; button to continue and complete the installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== For MAC OS ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the installation file from [https://download.gimp.org/gimp/v2.10/macos/gimp-2.10.34-x86_64.dmg this link].&lt;br /&gt;
# When the download is complete, find the downloaded .dmg file and double click on it and follow the above steps mentioned for windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Other similar applications==&lt;br /&gt;
GIMP Inkscape , XGimp image editor, etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Development and community help==&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.gimp.org/ The GIMP Development Team]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Working with the application=&lt;br /&gt;
==Functionalities==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:GIMP_1_Main_Window.png|200px]] [[File:Opening an image file using GIMP.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:GIMP_2_Select_Tool.png|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 1 - '''Open GIMP'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Select File → New → select which size want to edit image  → OK&lt;br /&gt;
# If you didn't get side toolbox please click on Windows then click Tool box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert image – select File → Open → Select image.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, You can also open GIMP through image. Select image which you want to edit, and right click choose Open with &amp;gt; GIMP Image Editor. It will open with image to edit. &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 2 - '''Select Tools''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Rectangle select tool''' : Select a rectangular Tool&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Ellipse select tool''' : Select an elliptical region &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Free select tool''' : Select a hand-drawn region with free with polygonal segments &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:Crop to selection of an image, using GIMP.png|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:Scaling an image using GIMP.png|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 3 -  '''Crop'''&lt;br /&gt;
Select the area that you would like to retain. The area can be extended or reduced by selecting one of the sides. Once your desired area is selected (the remaining area will turn grey or darker), then double click inside the desired area. The photo will be cropped to that size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The tool is used:&lt;br /&gt;
# To reduce the size of large images. &lt;br /&gt;
# To remove unnecessary areas in a photo.&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 4 - '''Scale''': Select the image. Go to the menu bar on top and click on the 'Image' option. Then click on 'Scale image...'This would show you options of 'width and height' along with 'X resolution' and 'Y resolution'. Enter in 72 pixels in both X and Y spaces. This would help reduce the file to a small size. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The tool is used:&lt;br /&gt;
* To reduce resolution which helps in file size.&lt;br /&gt;
* To make photos for uploading on websites (should not be used for printing).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:GIMP_5_Move.png|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:GIMP_6_Add_Text.png|200px]] [[File:Entering text on an image using GIMP.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 5 - '''Move'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; After scaling an image, if you want to add another image to the frame, you would have to move the first image to the side. This can be done using the move tool. Select the move tool. Select the image. Click and drag to a suitable location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The tool is used:&lt;br /&gt;
* When there is more than one element in the window you are working on&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 6 - ''' Add Text'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Select the Text tool (a capital A). Now, drag the tool to were you want to insert text. A tiny box pops up. Type your text in the box. The size, colour, style of the text can be changed in the settings below the tool box. The length of the text box can be adjusted after you finishing typing your text by selecting the corners and dragging.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The tool is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To add a title or caption explaining the text is useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==File formats for creation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Saving the file==&lt;br /&gt;
Like in most applications, a file can be saved using the FILE – SAVE AS command, or by the shortcut key CTRL+S. Always give a meaningful file name, reading which you should get an idea of the file contents. Its saving in '''.xcf'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export and publishing files==&lt;br /&gt;
After your edits, final output file can be export from here by using the FILE – Export AS command. Always give a meaningful file name, reading which you should get an idea of the file contents. You can export the image to various formats, including  .PNG .JPEG .JPG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Advanced features==&lt;br /&gt;
#Customizable Interface- Each task requires a different environment and GIMP allows you to customize the view and behavior the way you like it. Starting from the widget theme, allowing you to change colors, widget spacings and icon sizes to custom tool sets in the toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
#Photo Enhancement- Numerous digital photo imperfections can be easily compensated for using GIMP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Installation=&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Method of installation !! Steps&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| From Ubuntu Software Centre || Type GIMP in software search box, select GIMP from the result and install&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| From Terminal || Open terminal from Application system tools and type '''sudo apt-get install gimp''' and press Enter key. Type your password and press Enter to complete installation.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| From the web || -&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Web based registration || -&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The application on mobiles and tablets=&lt;br /&gt;
Currently there is no GIMP app but alternative many image editing App available at an Android play store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Ideas for resource creation=&lt;br /&gt;
Modify pictures hight, width, size, etc and creating resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=References=&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://www.gimp.org/ GIMP Official Website]&lt;br /&gt;
# https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GIMP GIMP Wikipedia&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_GIMP&amp;diff=13754</id>
		<title>Learn GIMP</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_GIMP&amp;diff=13754"/>
		<updated>2023-03-21T09:46:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Overview of Features */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;''[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%9C%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%82%E0%B2%AA%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%87%E0%B2%AE%E0%B3%87%E0%B2%9C%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%8E%E0%B2%A1%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%9F%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;noprint&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;float:right; border:1px solid blue;width:300px;background-color:#F5F5F5;padding:2px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Book.jpg|none|80px|Book image]]&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;padding-left:2px;&amp;quot; | Go back to &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[ICT student textbook]] &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; [[ICT teacher handbook]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=Introduction=&lt;br /&gt;
GIMP is a cross-platform image editor available for GNU/Linux, OS X, Windows and more operating systems. It is a free software.&lt;br /&gt;
==ICT Competency==&lt;br /&gt;
It is a tool for generic resource creation, used to edit images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Educational application and relevance==&lt;br /&gt;
==Version==&lt;br /&gt;
Stable release 	2.8.20 (February 1, 2017)&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
Its GIMP is part of the Ubuntu distribution. This can be opened from Applications  → graphics → GIMP.  &lt;br /&gt;
==Overview of Features==&lt;br /&gt;
#Tools used to perform image editing can be accessed via the toolbox, They include filters and brushes, as well as transformation, selection, layer and masking tools.&lt;br /&gt;
#GIMP selection tools include a rectangular and circular selection tool, free select tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#There are many tools that can be used for editing images in GIMP. The more common tools include a paint brush, pencil, airbrush, eraser and ink tools used to create new or blended pixels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== For Ubuntu OS ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The application is part of the Ubuntu custom distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
# In case you do not find it on your computer, you can install by typing GIMP on top search bar in Software Centre(App Grid).&lt;br /&gt;
# If you would like to install through the terminal follow these steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
## Open terminal by clicking Applications-&amp;gt;System Tools-&amp;gt;Terminal or through Keyboard shortcut &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ctrl+Alt+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## In the terminal window, type below command and press enter to start the installation by providing your machine password:&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo apt-get install gimp&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== For Windows OS ====&lt;br /&gt;
To install and use GIMP on your Windows computer, you need to install GIMP in your Windows computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the gimp-2.YtZWkPvy.10.34-setup.exe from [https://www.gimp.org/downloads/ this link]. You can save this executable (.exe for windows/.dmg for MAC) files to your desktop or any other location in your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you download the file, double-click on &amp;quot;gimp-2.YtZWkPvy.10.34-setup.exe/dmg&amp;quot; file to begin the installation.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; if it ask your permission to allow this program make change to the computer, Keep clicking on &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot; button to continue and complete the installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== For MAC OS ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the installation file from [https://download.gimp.org/gimp/v2.10/macos/gimp-2.10.34-x86_64.dmg this link].&lt;br /&gt;
# When the download is complete, find the downloaded .dmg file and double click on it and follow the above steps mentioned for windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Other similar applications==&lt;br /&gt;
GIMP Inkscape , XGimp image editor, etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Development and community help==&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.gimp.org/ The GIMP Development Team]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Working with the application=&lt;br /&gt;
==Functionalities==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:GIMP_1_Main_Window.png|200px]] [[File:Opening an image file using GIMP.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:GIMP_2_Select_Tool.png|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 1 - '''Open GIMP'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Select File → New → select which size want to edit image  → OK&lt;br /&gt;
# If you didn't get side toolbox please click on Windows then click Tool box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert image – select File → Open → Select image.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, You can also open GIMP through image. Select image which you want to edit, and right click choose Open with &amp;gt; GIMP Image Editor. It will open with image to edit. &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 2 - '''Select Tools''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Rectangle select tool''' : Select a rectangular Tool&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Ellipse select tool''' : Select an elliptical region &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Free select tool''' : Select a hand-drawn region with free with polygonal segments &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:Crop to selection of an image, using GIMP.png|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:Scaling an image using GIMP.png|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 3 -  '''Crop'''&lt;br /&gt;
Select the area that you would like to retain. The area can be extended or reduced by selecting one of the sides. Once your desired area is selected (the remaining area will turn grey or darker), then double click inside the desired area. The photo will be cropped to that size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The tool is used:&lt;br /&gt;
# To reduce the size of large images. &lt;br /&gt;
# To remove unnecessary areas in a photo.&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 4 - '''Scale''': Select the image. Go to the menu bar on top and click on the 'Image' option. Then click on 'Scale image...'This would show you options of 'width and height' along with 'X resolution' and 'Y resolution'. Enter in 72 pixels in both X and Y spaces. This would help reduce the file to a small size. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The tool is used:&lt;br /&gt;
* To reduce resolution which helps in file size.&lt;br /&gt;
* To make photos for uploading on websites (should not be used for printing).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:GIMP_5_Move.png|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |[[File:GIMP_6_Add_Text.png|200px]] [[File:Entering text on an image using GIMP.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 5 - '''Move'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; After scaling an image, if you want to add another image to the frame, you would have to move the first image to the side. This can be done using the move tool. Select the move tool. Select the image. Click and drag to a suitable location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The tool is used:&lt;br /&gt;
* When there is more than one element in the window you are working on&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 50%;&amp;quot; |Step 6 - ''' Add Text'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Select the Text tool (a capital A). Now, drag the tool to were you want to insert text. A tiny box pops up. Type your text in the box. The size, colour, style of the text can be changed in the settings below the tool box. The length of the text box can be adjusted after you finishing typing your text by selecting the corners and dragging.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The tool is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To add a title or caption explaining the text is useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==File formats for creation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Saving the file==&lt;br /&gt;
Like in most applications, a file can be saved using the FILE – SAVE AS command, or by the shortcut key CTRL+S. Always give a meaningful file name, reading which you should get an idea of the file contents. Its saving in '''.xcf'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export and publishing files==&lt;br /&gt;
After your edits, final output file can be export from here by using the FILE – Export AS command. Always give a meaningful file name, reading which you should get an idea of the file contents. You can export the image to various formats, including  .PNG .JPEG .JPG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Advanced features==&lt;br /&gt;
#Customizable Interface- Each task requires a different environment and GIMP allows you to customize the view and behavior the way you like it. Starting from the widget theme, allowing you to change colors, widget spacings and icon sizes to custom tool sets in the toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
#Photo Enhancement- Numerous digital photo imperfections can be easily compensated for using GIMP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Installation=&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Method of installation !! Steps&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| From Ubuntu Software Centre || Type GIMP in software search box, select GIMP from the result and install&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| From Terminal || Open terminal from Application system tools and type '''sudo apt-get install gimp''' and press Enter key. Type your password and press Enter to complete installation.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| From the web || -&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Web based registration || -&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The application on mobiles and tablets=&lt;br /&gt;
Currently there is no GIMP app but alternative many image editing App available at an Android play store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Ideas for resource creation=&lt;br /&gt;
Modify pictures hight, width, size, etc and creating resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=References=&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://www.gimp.org/ GIMP Official Website]&lt;br /&gt;
# https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GIMP GIMP Wikipedia&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13735</id>
		<title>Learn Diagrams (Draw.io)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13735"/>
		<updated>2022-10-17T11:53:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* References */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Diagrams or Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams or charts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams. The diagrams can be Flowcharts, Use case diagrams, Block diagrams, Cycle diagrams, Cluster diagrams, Ladder diagrams, Tree diagrams etc to represent the user data.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|Educators can use these diagrams to explain the concepts in a pictorial format. It can represent the idea of an entire concept in an attractive and conveyable way.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|20.2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape], [https://creately.com Creately]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|You can install [https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.lucidchart.android.chart&amp;amp;hl=en_IN&amp;amp;gl=US Lucidchart]&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use the web based platform of Draw.io here [https://app.diagrams.net]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://drawio-app.com/ Draw.io]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Draw.io can be used to generate variety of diagrams or in a better term called as &amp;quot;charts&amp;quot;, that may represent any form data. With Draw.io you can drag and drop variety of symbols, shapes, flowchart icons, Entity relations, UML diagrams in the canvas. There is a huge collection of other symbols that are helpful in implementing the required diagrams. It also focuses on arrangement of symbols, spelling checking, It contains a ready-to-apply set of styles making the entire diagrams more attractive and readable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Installation====&lt;br /&gt;
====For Ubuntu OS====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to install Draw.io in your Ubuntu OS, follow the below steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open terminal by clicking &amp;quot;Applications-&amp;gt;System Tools-&amp;gt;Terminal&amp;quot; or through keyboard shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+Alt+T&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the terminal window, type below command and press enter key.&lt;br /&gt;
#* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt; sudo snap install drawio &amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter your Administrator password to install and press &amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====For Windows OS====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# If you are using Windows OS, [https://github.com/jgraph/drawio-desktop/releases/tag/v20.2.8 click here] to download the &amp;quot;Windows Installer&amp;quot; file.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the downloaded Installer file. A Window appears and asks to choose the Destination folder to install the application.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose the Destination --&amp;gt; Click &amp;quot;Install&amp;quot;. Check the option &amp;quot;Run Draw.io&amp;quot; if you want to run the application and click &amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====For MAC OS====&lt;br /&gt;
If you using MAC OS, [https://github.com/jgraph/drawio-desktop/releases/download/v20.2.8/draw.io-universal-20.2.8.dmg Click here]. This link downloads the .dmg file into your system, double click on the downloaded .dmg file. This will install the application on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
Draw.io allows the user to drag and drop the various drawing elements present in the software. Its interface is such a user friendly that any person with very little knowledge can also use this application efficiently and can generate the diagrams. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Getting familiar with application====&lt;br /&gt;
Once you open the Draw.io application, the first page shows you an option to choose either of the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Create new diagram : This option lets you to create a new diagram by redirecting you to a fresh page. When you choose this option, it shows you a number of  predefined templates that makes your task much easier. You can choose any of the required template if you are sure of the outcome. In case if you are unsure, choose the &amp;quot;Blank Diagram&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Open Existing Diagram : Choose this when you already have existing diagram prepared partially or any other diagram in the supported formats. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating new diagram====&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an idea of what needs to be done and what ways the things needs to be done then based on your requirement you can choose the template. The templates provided here not only gives you the structure of diagram but also gives you more idea of how your final outcome may look like. If you are not having an idea of how your diagram should look like then it would be better to choose &amp;quot;Blank Diagram--&amp;gt;Create&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Important elements in the application====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=400&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Drawio interface.png|Diagram interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Shape Panel : Shape panel shows you variety of shapes arranged under their category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Format Panel: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Diagram Tab : It shows the properties related to the Diagram &lt;br /&gt;
* Style Tab : It shows the predefined colorful styles that can be applied to the entire diagram.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Toolbar : Some basic tools required is listed here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Page Tab : It shows the worksheet names.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Search Shapes : It searches for a particular shape entered by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a Shape to the workspace====&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on your requirement you can insert shape to the workspace.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To insert a shape, you can type the shape name in the &amp;quot;Search Shapes&amp;quot; box or click on the appropriate tab if you are sure of. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* There are General, Basic, Arrows, Entity Relations and many other tabs that allows you to drop the respective shapes to the workspace. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=250&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Dragging shapes.jpg|Dragging the shapes&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding text to Shapes.jpg|Writing text inside a shape&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you simply click on a shape, it will be put into the workspace where you can expand or shrink the size of the shape by simply dragging the points. Whenever it shows &amp;quot;Hand&amp;quot; when the cursor is highlighted on the shape, you can simply drag and drop the shape wherever required. * If you want to type text inside any shapes double click inside the shape. When you choose a particular shape, the properties related to that shape will appear in the Format Panel window. Color, border thickness, style for the shape such as Shadow, Sketch can be set here. &lt;br /&gt;
* If you have entered some text inside the text, Format Panel shows you Font related settings where you can format the font. &amp;quot;Arrange&amp;quot; tab shows you how you can arrange or placements related to that shape in your workspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding more Shapes====&lt;br /&gt;
If you could not find the proper shape for your diagram then you can search and locate those as well. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Searchingforshapes.jpg|Adding more shapes to Shapes toolbox&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, Click on &amp;quot;More Shapes&amp;quot; option present in the left bottom of the application. Choose the required tool from the left side pane --&amp;gt; Click Apply. You can find the shapes related to the selected tool will be available in the Shapes pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Freehand Drawing====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:UsingFreehandtool.jpg|Using Freehand option&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to draw something in a freehand you can do so in Draw. To do this, Click on &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar and choose &amp;quot;Freehand&amp;quot; option. Alternatively you can press 'x' on the keyboard as shortcut. You can choose the size of the brush and can freely move the cursor on the sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding Notes and Images====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding notes.jpg|Notes added to the diagrams&lt;br /&gt;
File:Addingimage1.jpg|Adding the Image&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note can be added in the worksheet to give a description to the node. Note can be resized according to your requirement. Once you add the note to the workspace you can move it wherever required. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Addingimage3.jpg|Image added to the diagram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image can also be added to the workspace to make it more attractive and informative. Like shape and Note, Image can also be added resized. If you want to resize click on the image and click and drag the points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Applying Styles to the workspace====&lt;br /&gt;
Styles make your workspace much attractive and readable. This involves a simple step of choosing a style and applying the same. Some styles may only have the styles applied to the nodes whereas some other have styles to the background also. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Addingstyles.jpg|Style added to the diagram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, Click on the &amp;quot;Format Panel --&amp;gt; Workspace&amp;quot; on the right, choose the style from the list. If you simply click on the style, that style will be added to the workspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Selecting the paper size====&lt;br /&gt;
* If your plan is to print the chart on a paper and use it for some purpose then better if you select the page size at the starting. There is an option in the diagram panel to change the default Paper size. &lt;br /&gt;
* Click on the drop down menu present in Page size. You will get number of options that you can select for your requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Making Rough works====&lt;br /&gt;
* You can draw and design few elements and put it in Scratchpad for future use. You can drop number of works to the scratchpad and access those later. This helps when you are experimenting on an element and want to preserve the work you are done so far. &lt;br /&gt;
* To do this, you can drag the element you want to move to Scratchpad and drop it in that section. A small icon of what your element looks like is visible in the scratchpad section. As you require the element you just need to click on that element so that it appears in the worksheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving and exporting the Diagrams====&lt;br /&gt;
* To save your project click on &amp;quot;File--&amp;gt;Save&amp;quot;. Enter the proper filename for the file, it stores the file in .Draw.io format. --&amp;gt; Click Save. &lt;br /&gt;
* You can also export your diagrams into pdf, png, jpg, svg and other formats. You can do this by clicking on File--&amp;gt; Export As option. This shows a list of file extensions with which you can save your work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Advanced features===&lt;br /&gt;
# Shape library is a huge collection of shapes that are having specific way of representing the data.   &lt;br /&gt;
# Explore Swim lane diagrams to use it for official purposes. Swim lane usually shows the responsibility or works needs to be done for each step or a process. This is in-built feature in Draw.io.&lt;br /&gt;
# Templates are ready-to-use syntax that can be inserted into a diagram for more convenience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ideas for resource creation===&lt;br /&gt;
* With Draw.io you can create any kind of tables, charts, diagrams that takes less time and more specific to your requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Diagrams.net Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.diagrams.net/ Diagrams]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://app.diagrams.net/ Draw.io]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13708</id>
		<title>Learn Diagrams (Draw.io)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13708"/>
		<updated>2022-10-17T08:56:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Important elements in the application: */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Diagrams or Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams or charts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams. The diagrams can be Flowcharts, Use case diagrams, Block diagrams, Cycle diagrams, Cluster diagrams, Ladder diagrams, Tree diagrams etc to represent the user data.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|Educators can use these diagrams to explain the concepts in a pictorial format. It can represent the idea of an entire concept in an attractive and conveyable way.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|20.2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape], [https://creately.com Creately]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|You can install [https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.lucidchart.android.chart&amp;amp;hl=en_IN&amp;amp;gl=US Lucidchart]&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use the web based platform of Draw.io here [https://app.diagrams.net]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://drawio-app.com/ Draw.io]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features: ====&lt;br /&gt;
Draw.io can be used to generate variety of diagrams or in a better term called as &amp;quot;charts&amp;quot;, that may represent any form data. With Draw.io you can drag and drop variety of symbols, shapes, flowchart icons, Entity relations, UML diagrams in the canvas. There is a huge collection of other symbols that are helpful in implementing the required diagrams. It also focuses on arrangement of symbols, spelling checking, It contains a ready-to-apply set of styles making the entire diagrams more attractive and readable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation:==&lt;br /&gt;
====For Ubuntu OS====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to install Draw.io in your Ubuntu OS, follow the below steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Open terminal by clicking &amp;quot;Applications-&amp;gt;System Tools-&amp;gt;Terminal&amp;quot; or through keyboard shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+Alt+T&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the terminal window, type below command and press enter key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
sudo snap install drawio&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Enter your Administrator password to install and press &amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====For Windows OS====&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using Windows OS, [https://github.com/jgraph/drawio-desktop/releases/tag/v20.2.8 click here] Download the &amp;quot;Windows Installer&amp;quot; file Click on the downloaded Installer file A Window appears and asks to choose the Destination folder to install the &amp;quot;Application --&amp;gt; Choose the Destination --&amp;gt; Click Install&amp;quot; Tick the option &amp;quot;Run Draw.io&amp;quot; if you want to run the application and click &amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====For MAC OS====&lt;br /&gt;
If you using MAC OS, [https://github.com/jgraph/drawio-desktop/releases/download/v20.2.8/draw.io-universal-20.2.8.dmg Click here]. This link downloads the .dmg file into your system, click on the downloaded .dmg file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
Draw.io allows the user to drag and drop the various drawing elements present in the software. Its interface is such a user friendly that any person with very little knowledge can also use this application efficiently and can generate the diagrams. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Getting familiar with application:====&lt;br /&gt;
Once you open the Draw.io application, the first page shows you an option to choose either of the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Create new diagram : This option lets you to create a new diagram by redirecting you to a fresh page. When you choose this option, it shows you a number of  predefined templates that makes your task much easier. You can choose any of the required template if you are sure of the outcome. In case if you are unsure, choose the &amp;quot;Blank Diagram&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Open Existing Diagram : Choose this when you already have existing diagram prepared partially or any other diagram in the supported formats. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating new diagram:====&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an idea of what needs to be done and what ways the things needs to be done then based on your requirement you can choose the template. The templates provided here not only gives you the structure of diagram but also gives you more idea of how your final outcome may look like. If you are not having an idea of how your diagram should look like then it would be better to choose &amp;quot;Blank Diagram--&amp;gt;Create&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Important elements in the application:====&lt;br /&gt;
1. Shape Panel : Shape panel shows you variety of shapes arranged under their category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Format Panel: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*   Diagram Tab : It shows the properties related to the Diagram &lt;br /&gt;
* Style Tab : It shows the predefined colorful styles that can be applied to the entire diagram.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Toolbar : Some basic tools required is listed here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Page Tab : It shows the worksheet names.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Search Shapes : It searches for a particular shape entered by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a Shape to the workspace:====&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on your requirement you can insert shape to the workspace. To insert a shape, you can type the shape name in the &amp;quot;Search Shapes&amp;quot; box or click on the appropriate tab if you are sure of. There are General, Basic, Arrows, Entity Relations and many other tabs that allows you to drop the respective shapes to the workspace. If you simply click on a shape, it will be put into the workspace where you can expand or shrink the size of the shape by simply dragging the points. Whenever it shows &amp;quot;Hand&amp;quot; when the cursor is highlighted on the shape, you can simply drag and drop the shape wherever required. If you want to type text inside any shapes double click inside the shape. When you choose a particular shape, the properties related to that shape will appear in the Format Panel window. Color, border thickness, style for the shape such as Shadow, Sketch can be set here. If you have entered some text inside the text, Format Panel shows you Font related settings where you can format the font. &amp;quot;Arrange&amp;quot; tab shows you how you can arrange or placements related to that shape in your workspace. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding more Shapes:====&lt;br /&gt;
If you could not find the proper shape for your diagram then you can search and locate those as well. TO do this, Click on &amp;quot;More Shapes&amp;quot; option present in the left bottom of the application. Choose the required tool from the left side pane --&amp;gt; Click Apply. You can find the shapes related to the selected tool will be available in the Shapes pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Freehand Drawing:====&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to draw something in a freehand you can do so in Draw. To do this, Click on &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar and choose &amp;quot;Freehand&amp;quot; option. Alternatively you can press 'x' on the keyboard as shortcut. You can choose the size of the brush and can freely move the cursor on the sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding Notes and Images:====&lt;br /&gt;
Note can be added in the worksheet to give a description to the node. Note can be resized according to your requirement. Once you add the note to the workspace you can move it wherever required. Image can also be added to the workspace to make it more attractive and informative. Like shape and Note, Image can also be added resized. If you want to resize click on the image and click and drag the points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Applying Styles to the workspace:====&lt;br /&gt;
Styles make your workspace much attractive and readable. This involves a simple step of choosing a style and applying the same. Some styles may only have the styles applied to the nodes whereas some other have styles to the background also. To do this, Click on the &amp;quot;Format Panel --&amp;gt;workspace&amp;quot; on the right, choose the style from the list. If you simply click on the style, that style will be added to the workspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Selecting the paper size:====&lt;br /&gt;
If your plan is to print the chart on a paper and use it for some purpose then better if you select the page size at the starting. There is an option in the diagram panel to change the default Paper size. Click on the drop down menu present in Page size. You will get number of options that you can select for your requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Making Rough works:====&lt;br /&gt;
You can draw and design few elements and put it in Scratchpad for future use. You can drop number of works to the scratchpad and access those later. This helps when you are experimenting on an element and want to preserve the work you are done so far. To do this, you can drag the element you want to move to Scratchpad and drop it in that section. A small icon of what your element looks like is visible in the scratchpad section. As you require the element you just need to click on that element so that it appears in the worksheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving your Diagrams:====&lt;br /&gt;
To save your project click on &amp;quot;File--&amp;gt;Save&amp;quot;. Enter the proper filename for the file, it stores the file in .Draw.io format. --&amp;gt; Click Save. You can also export your diagrams into pdf, png, jpg, svg and other formats. You can do this by clicking on File--&amp;gt; Export As option. This shows a list of file extensions with which you can save your work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features:====&lt;br /&gt;
1. Shape library is a huge collection of shapes that are having specific way of representing the data.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Explore Swim lane diagrams to use it for official purposes. Swim lane usually shows the responsibility or works needs to be done for each step or a process. This is in-built feature in Draw.io.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Templates are ready-to-use syntax that can be inserted into a diagram for more convenience.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Ideas for resource creation:====&lt;br /&gt;
* With Draw.io you can create any kind of tables, charts, diagrams that takes less time and more specific to your requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====References:====&lt;br /&gt;
[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Diagrams.net Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.diagrams.net/ Diagrams]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://app.diagrams.net/ Draw.io]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13707</id>
		<title>Learn Diagrams (Draw.io)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13707"/>
		<updated>2022-10-17T07:32:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* For MAC OS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Diagrams or Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams or charts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams. The diagrams can be Flowcharts, Use case diagrams, Block diagrams, Cycle diagrams, Cluster diagrams, Ladder diagrams, Tree diagrams etc to represent the user data.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|Educators can use these diagrams to explain the concepts in a pictorial format. It can represent the idea of an entire concept in an attractive and conveyable way.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|20.2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape], [https://creately.com Creately]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|You can install [https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.lucidchart.android.chart&amp;amp;hl=en_IN&amp;amp;gl=US Lucidchart]&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use the web based platform of Draw.io here [https://app.diagrams.net]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://drawio-app.com/ Draw.io]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features: ====&lt;br /&gt;
Draw.io can be used to generate variety of diagrams or in a better term called as &amp;quot;charts&amp;quot;, that may represent any form data. With Draw.io you can drag and drop variety of symbols, shapes, flowchart icons, Entity relations, UML diagrams in the canvas. There is a huge collection of other symbols that are helpful in implementing the required diagrams. It also focuses on arrangement of symbols, spelling checking, It contains a ready-to-apply set of styles making the entire diagrams more attractive and readable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation:==&lt;br /&gt;
====For Ubuntu OS====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to install Draw.io in your Ubuntu OS, follow the below steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Open terminal by clicking &amp;quot;Applications-&amp;gt;System Tools-&amp;gt;Terminal&amp;quot; or through keyboard shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+Alt+T&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the terminal window, type below command and press enter key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
sudo snap install drawio&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Enter your Administrator password to install and press &amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====For Windows OS====&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using Windows OS, [https://github.com/jgraph/drawio-desktop/releases/tag/v20.2.8 click here] Download the &amp;quot;Windows Installer&amp;quot; file Click on the downloaded Installer file A Window appears and asks to choose the Destination folder to install the &amp;quot;Application --&amp;gt; Choose the Destination --&amp;gt; Click Install&amp;quot; Tick the option &amp;quot;Run Draw.io&amp;quot; if you want to run the application and click &amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====For MAC OS====&lt;br /&gt;
If you using MAC OS, [https://github.com/jgraph/drawio-desktop/releases/download/v20.2.8/draw.io-universal-20.2.8.dmg Click here]. This link downloads the .dmg file into your system, click on the downloaded .dmg file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
Draw.io allows the user to drag and drop the various drawing elements present in the software. Its interface is such a user friendly that any person with very little knowledge can also use this application efficiently and can generate the diagrams. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Getting familiar with application:====&lt;br /&gt;
Once you open the Draw.io application, the first page shows you an option to choose either of the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Create new diagram : This option lets you to create a new diagram by redirecting you to a fresh page. When you choose this option, it shows you a number of  predefined templates that makes your task much easier. You can choose any of the required template if you are sure of the outcome. In case if you are unsure, choose the &amp;quot;Blank Diagram&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Open Existing Diagram : Choose this when you already have existing diagram prepared partially or any other diagram in the supported formats. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating new diagram:====&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an idea of what needs to be done and what ways the things needs to be done then based on your requirement you can choose the template. The templates provided here not only gives you the structure of diagram but also gives you more idea of how your final outcome may look like. If you are not having an idea of how your diagram should look like then it would be better to choose &amp;quot;Blank Diagram--&amp;gt;Create&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Important elements in the application:====&lt;br /&gt;
1. Shape Panel : Shape panel shows you variety of shapes arranged under their category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Format Panel: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*   Diagram Tab : It shows the properties related to the Diagram &lt;br /&gt;
* Style Tab : It shows the predefined colorful styles that can be applied to the entire diagram.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Toolbar : Some basic tools required is listed here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Page Tab : It shows the worksheet names.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Search Shapes : It searches for a particular shape entered by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a Shape to the workspace:====&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on your requirement you can insert shape to the workspace. To insert a shape, you can type the shape name in the &amp;quot;Search Shapes&amp;quot; box or click on the appropriate tab if you are sure of. There are General, Basic, Arrows, Entity Relations and many other tabs that allows you to drop the respective shapes to the workspace. If you simply click on a shape, it will be put into the workspace where you can expand or shrink the size of the shape by simply dragging the points. Whenever it shows &amp;quot;Hand&amp;quot; when the cursor is highlighted on the shape, you can simply drag and drop the shape wherever required. If you want to type text inside any shapes double click inside the shape. When you choose a particular shape, the properties related to that shape will appear in the Format Panel window. Color, border thickness, style for the shape such as Shadow, Sketch can be set here. If you have entered some text inside the text, Format Panel shows you Font related settings where you can format the font. &amp;quot;Arrange&amp;quot; tab shows you how you can arrange or placements related to that shape in your workspace. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding more Shapes:====&lt;br /&gt;
If you could not find the proper shape for your diagram then you can search and locate those as well. TO do this, Click on &amp;quot;More Shapes&amp;quot; option present in the left bottom of the application. Choose the required tool from the left side pane --&amp;gt; Click Apply. You can find the shapes related to the selected tool will be available in the Shapes pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Freehand Drawing:====&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to draw something in a freehand you can do so in Draw. To do this, Click on &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar and choose &amp;quot;Freehand&amp;quot; option. Alternatively you can press 'x' on the keyboard as shortcut. You can choose the size of the brush and can freely move the cursor on the sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding Notes and Images:====&lt;br /&gt;
Note can be added in the worksheet to give a description to the node. Note can be resized according to your requirement. Once you add the note to the workspace you can move it wherever required. Image can also be added to the workspace to make it more attractive and informative. Like shape and Note, Image can also be added resized. If you want to resize click on the image and click and drag the points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Applying Styles to the workspace:====&lt;br /&gt;
Styles make your workspace much attractive and readable. This involves a simple step of choosing a style and applying the same. Some styles may only have the styles applied to the nodes whereas some other have styles to the background also. To do this, Click on the workspace --&amp;gt; In the &amp;quot;Format Panel&amp;quot; on the right, choose the style from the list. If you simply click on the style, that style will be added to the workspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Selecting the paper size:====&lt;br /&gt;
If your plan is to print the chart on a paper and use it for some purpose then better if you select the page size at the starting. There is an option in the diagram panel to change the default Paper size. Click on the drop down menu present in Page size. You will get number of options that you can select for your requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Making Rough works:====&lt;br /&gt;
You can draw and design few elements and put it in Scratchpad for future use. You can drop number of works to the scratchpad and access those later. This helps when you are experimenting on an element and want to preserve the work you are done so far. To do this, you can drag the element you want to move to Scratchpad and drop it in that section. A small icon of what your element looks like is visible in the scratchpad section. As you require the element you just need to click on that element so that it appears in the worksheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving your Diagrams:====&lt;br /&gt;
To save your project click on &amp;quot;File--&amp;gt;Save&amp;quot;. Enter the proper filename for the file, it stores the file in .Draw.io format. --&amp;gt; Click Save. You can also export your diagrams into pdf, png, jpg, svg and other formats. You can do this by clicking on File--&amp;gt; Export As option. This shows a list of file extensions with which you can save your work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features:====&lt;br /&gt;
1. Shape library is a huge collection of shapes that are having specific way of representing the data.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Explore Swim lane diagrams to use it for official purposes. Swim lane usually shows the responsibility or works needs to be done for each step or a process. This is in-built feature in Draw.io.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Templates are ready-to-use syntax that can be inserted into a diagram for more convenience.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Ideas for resource creation:====&lt;br /&gt;
* With Draw.io you can create any kind of tables, charts, diagrams that takes less time and more specific to your requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====References:====&lt;br /&gt;
[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Diagrams.net Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.diagrams.net/ Diagrams]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://app.diagrams.net/ Draw.io]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13706</id>
		<title>Learn Diagrams (Draw.io)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13706"/>
		<updated>2022-10-17T07:14:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Diagrams or Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams or charts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams. The diagrams can be Flowcharts, Use case diagrams, Block diagrams, Cycle diagrams, Cluster diagrams, Ladder diagrams, Tree diagrams etc to represent the user data.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|Educators can use these diagrams to explain the concepts in a pictorial format. It can represent the idea of an entire concept in an attractive and conveyable way.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|20.2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape], [https://creately.com Creately]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|You can install [https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.lucidchart.android.chart&amp;amp;hl=en_IN&amp;amp;gl=US Lucidchart]&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use the web based platform of Draw.io here [https://app.diagrams.net]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://drawio-app.com/ Drawio]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features: ====&lt;br /&gt;
Drawio can be used to generate variety of diagrams or in a better term called as &amp;quot;charts&amp;quot;, that may represent any form data. With Drawio you can drag and drop variety of symbols, shapes, flowchart icons, Entity relations, UML diagrams in the canvas. There is a huge collection of other symbols that are helpful in implementing the required diagrams. It also focuses on arrangement of symbols, spelling checking, It contains a ready-to-apply set of styles making the entire diagrams more attractive and readable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation:==&lt;br /&gt;
====For Ubuntu OS====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to install Draw.io in your Ubuntu OS, follow the below steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Open terminal by clicking Applications-&amp;gt;System Tools-&amp;gt;Terminal or through keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+T&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the terminal window, type below command and press enter key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
sudo snap install drawio&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Enter your Administrator password to install and press Enter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====For Windows OS====&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using Windows OS, click here [https://github.com/jgraph/drawio-desktop/releases/tag/v20.2.8]&lt;br /&gt;
Download the &amp;quot;Windows Installer&amp;quot; file &lt;br /&gt;
Click on the downloaded Installer file&lt;br /&gt;
A Window appears and asks to choose the Destination folder to install the application --&amp;gt; Choose the Destination --&amp;gt; Click Install&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the option &amp;quot;Run Draw.io&amp;quot; if you want to run the application and click Finish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====For MAC OS====&lt;br /&gt;
If you using MAC OS, Click here [https://github.com/jgraph/drawio-desktop/releases/download/v20.2.8/draw.io-universal-20.2.8.dmg].&lt;br /&gt;
This link downloads the .dmg file onto your system&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Downloaded .dmg file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
Draw.io allows the user to drag and drop the various drawing elements present in the software. Its interface is such a user friendly that any person with very little knowledge can also use this application efficiently and can generate the diagrams. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Getting familiar with application:====&lt;br /&gt;
Once you open the Draw.io application, the first page shows you an option to choose either of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
1. Create new diagram : This option lets you to create a new diagram by redirecting you to a fresh page. When you choose this option, it shows you a number of  predefined templates that makes your task much easier. You can choose any of the required template if you are sure of the outcome. Incase if you are unsure, choose the &amp;quot;Blank Diagram&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
2. Open Existing Diagram : Choose this when you already have existing diagram prepared partially or any other diagram in the supported formats. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating new diagram:====&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an idea of what needs to be done and what ways the things needs to be done then based on your requirement you can choose the template. The templates provided here not only gives you the structure of diagram but also gives you more idea of how your final outcome may look like. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are not having an idea of how your diagram should look like then it would be better to choose &amp;quot;Blank Diagram&amp;quot;--&amp;gt;Create.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Important elements in the application:====&lt;br /&gt;
1. Shape Panel : Shape panel shows you variety of shapes arranged under their category.&lt;br /&gt;
2. Format Panel: &lt;br /&gt;
   Diagram Tab : It shows the properties related to the Diagram&lt;br /&gt;
   Style Tab : It shows the predefined colorful styles that can be applied to the entire diagram. &lt;br /&gt;
3. Toolbar : Some basic tools required is listed here.&lt;br /&gt;
4. Page Tab : It shows the worksheet names.&lt;br /&gt;
5. Search Shapes : It searches for a particular shape entered by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a Shape to the workspace:====&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on your requirement you can insert shape to the workspace. &lt;br /&gt;
To insert a shape, you can type the shape name in the &amp;quot;Search Shapes&amp;quot; box or click on the appropriate tab if you are sure of.&lt;br /&gt;
There are General, Basic, Arrows, Entity Relations and many other tabs that allows you to drop the respective shapes to the workspace.&lt;br /&gt;
If you simply click on a shape, it will be put into the workspace where you can expand or shrink the size of the shape by simply dragging the points. Whenever it shows &amp;quot;Hand&amp;quot; when the cursor is highlighted on the shape, you can simply drag and drop the shape wherever required. If you want to type text inside any shapes double click inside the shape.&lt;br /&gt;
When you choose a particular shape, the properties related to that shape will appear in the Format Panel window. Color, border thickness, style for the shape such as Shadow, Sketch can be set here. &lt;br /&gt;
If you have entered some text inside the text, Format Panel shows you Font related settings where you can format the font. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Arrange&amp;quot; tab shows you how you can arrange or placements related to that shape in your workspace. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding more Shapes:====&lt;br /&gt;
If you could not find the proper shape for your diagram then you can search and locate those as well.&lt;br /&gt;
TO do this,&lt;br /&gt;
Click on &amp;quot;More Shapes&amp;quot; option present in the left bottom of the application. Choose the required tool from the left side pane --&amp;gt; Click Apply.&lt;br /&gt;
You can find the shapes related to the selected tool will be available in the Shapes pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Freehand Drawing:====&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to draw something in a freehand you can do so in Draw. &lt;br /&gt;
To do this, Click on &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar and choose &amp;quot;Freehand&amp;quot; option. Alternatively you can press 'x' on the keyboard as shortcut.&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the size of the brush and can freely move the cursor on the sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding Notes and Images:====&lt;br /&gt;
Note can be added in the worksheet to give a description to the node. Note can be resized according to your requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
Once you add the note to the workspace you can move it wherever required.&lt;br /&gt;
Image can also be added to the workspace to make it more attractive and informative.&lt;br /&gt;
Like shape and Note, Image can also be added resized. If you want to resize click on the image and click and drag the points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Applying Styles to the workspace:====&lt;br /&gt;
Styles make your workspace much attractive and readable. This involves a simple step of choosing a style and applying the same. Some styles may only have the styles applied to the nodes whereas some other have styles to the background also.&lt;br /&gt;
To do this,&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the workspace --&amp;gt; In the &amp;quot;Format Panel&amp;quot; on the right, choose the style from the list. If you simply click on the style, that style will be added to the workspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Selecting the paper size:====&lt;br /&gt;
If your plan is to print the chart on a paper and use it for some purpose then better if you select the page size at the starting. &lt;br /&gt;
There is an option in the diagram panel to change the default Paper size. Click on the drop down menu present in Page size. You will get number of options that you can select for your requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Making Rough works:====&lt;br /&gt;
You can draw and design few elements and put it in Scratchpad for future use. You can drop number of works to the scratchpad and access those later. This helps when you are experimenting on an element and want to preserve the work you are done so far. &lt;br /&gt;
To do this, you can drag the element you want to move to Scratchpad and drop it in that section. A small icon of what your element looks like is visible in the scratchpad section. As you require the element you just need to click on that element so that it appears in the worksheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving your Diagrams:====&lt;br /&gt;
To save your project click on &amp;quot;File--&amp;gt;Save&amp;quot;. Enter the proper filename for the file, it stores the file in .drawio format. --&amp;gt; Click Save.&lt;br /&gt;
You can also export your diagrams into pdf, png, jpg, svg and other formats. You can do this by clicking on File--&amp;gt; Export As option. This shows a list of file extensions with which you can save your work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features:====&lt;br /&gt;
1. Shape library is a huge collection of shapes that are having specific way of representing the data. &lt;br /&gt;
2. Explore Swimlane diagrams to use it for official purposes. Swimlane usually shows the responsibility or works needs to be done for each step or a process. This is in-built feature in drawio.&lt;br /&gt;
3. Templates are ready-to-use syntax that can be inserted into a diagram for more convenience.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Ideas for resource creation:====&lt;br /&gt;
* With Draw.io you can create any kind of tables, charts, diagrams that takes less time and more specific to your requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====References:====&lt;br /&gt;
[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Diagrams.net Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.diagrams.net/ Diagrams]&lt;br /&gt;
[https://app.diagrams.net/ Draw.io]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13705</id>
		<title>Learn Diagrams (Draw.io)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13705"/>
		<updated>2022-10-17T07:00:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Installation: */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Diagrams or Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams or charts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams. The diagrams can be Flowcharts, Use case diagrams, Block diagrams, Cycle diagrams, Cluster diagrams, Ladder diagrams, Tree diagrams etc to represent the user data.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|Educators can use these diagrams to explain the concepts in a pictorial format. It can represent the idea of an entire concept in an attractive and conveyable way.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|20.2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape], [https://creately.com Creately]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|You can install [https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.lucidchart.android.chart&amp;amp;hl=en_IN&amp;amp;gl=US Lucidchart]&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use the web based platform of Draw.io here [https://app.diagrams.net]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://drawio-app.com/ Drawio]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features: ====&lt;br /&gt;
Drawio can be used to generate variety of diagrams or in a better term called as &amp;quot;charts&amp;quot;, that may represent any form data. With Drawio you can drag and drop variety of symbols, shapes, flowchart icons, Entity relations, UML diagrams in the canvas. There is a huge collection of other symbols that are helpful in implementing the required diagrams. It also focuses on arrangement of symbols, spelling checking, It contains a ready-to-apply set of styles making the entire diagrams more attractive and readable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation:==&lt;br /&gt;
====For Ubuntu OS====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to install Draw.io in your Ubuntu OS, follow the below steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Open terminal by clicking Applications-&amp;gt;System Tools-&amp;gt;Terminal or through keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+T&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the terminal window, type below command and press enter key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
sudo snap install drawio&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Enter your Administrator password to install and press Enter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====For Windows OS====&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using Windows OS, click here [https://github.com/jgraph/drawio-desktop/releases/tag/v20.2.8]&lt;br /&gt;
Download the &amp;quot;Windows Installer&amp;quot; file &lt;br /&gt;
Click on the downloaded Installer file&lt;br /&gt;
A Window appears and asks to choose the Destination folder to install the application --&amp;gt; Choose the Destination --&amp;gt; Click Install&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the option &amp;quot;Run Draw.io&amp;quot; if you want to run the application and click Finish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====For MAC OS====&lt;br /&gt;
If you using MAC OS, Click here [https://github.com/jgraph/drawio-desktop/releases/download/v20.2.8/draw.io-universal-20.2.8.dmg].&lt;br /&gt;
This link downloads the .dmg file onto your system&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Downloaded .dmg file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
Draw.io allows the user to drag and drop the various drawing elements present in the software. Its interface is such a user friendly that any person with very little knowledge can also use this application efficiently and can generate the diagrams. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Getting familiar with application:====&lt;br /&gt;
Once you open the Draw.io application, the first page shows you an option to choose either of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
1. Create new diagram : This option lets you to create a new diagram by redirecting you to a fresh page. When you choose this option, it shows you a number of  predefined templates that makes your task much easier. You can choose any of the required template if you are sure of the outcome. Incase if you are unsure, choose the &amp;quot;Blank Diagram&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
2. Open Existing Diagram : Choose this when you already have existing diagram prepared partially or any other diagram in the supported formats. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating new diagram:====&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an idea of what needs to be done and what ways the things needs to be done then based on your requirement you can choose the template. The templates provided here not only gives you the structure of diagram but also gives you more idea of how your final outcome may look like. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are not having an idea of how your diagram should look like then it would be better to choose &amp;quot;Blank Diagram&amp;quot;--&amp;gt;Create.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Important elements in the application:====&lt;br /&gt;
1. Shape Panel : Shape panel shows you variety of shapes arranged under their category.&lt;br /&gt;
2. Format Panel: &lt;br /&gt;
    Diagram Tab : It shows the properties related to the Diagram&lt;br /&gt;
    Style Tab: It shows the predefined colorful styles that can be applied to the entire diagram. &lt;br /&gt;
4. Toolbar : Some basic tools required is listed here.&lt;br /&gt;
5. Page Tab : It shows the worksheet names.&lt;br /&gt;
6. Search Shapes : It searches for a particular shape entered by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a Shape to the workspace:====&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on your requirement you can insert shape to the workspace. &lt;br /&gt;
To insert a shape, you can type the shape name in the &amp;quot;Search Shapes&amp;quot; box or click on the appropriate tab if you are sure of.&lt;br /&gt;
There are General, Basic, Arrows, Entity Relations and many other tabs that allows you to drop the respective shapes to the workspace.&lt;br /&gt;
If you simply click on a shape, it will be put into the workspace where you can expand or shrink the size of the shape by simply dragging the points. Whenever it shows &amp;quot;Hand&amp;quot; when the cursor is highlighted on the shape, you can simply drag and drop the shape wherever required. If you want to type text inside any shapes double click inside the shape.&lt;br /&gt;
When you choose a particular shape, the properties related to that shape will appear in the Format Panel window. Color, border thickness, style for the shape such as Shadow, Sketch can be set here. &lt;br /&gt;
If you have entered some text inside the text, Format Panel shows you Font related settings where you can format the font. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Arrange&amp;quot; tab shows you how you can arrange or placements related to that shape in your workspace. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding more Shapes:====&lt;br /&gt;
If you could not find the proper shape for your diagram then you can search and locate those as well.&lt;br /&gt;
TO do this,&lt;br /&gt;
Click on &amp;quot;More Shapes&amp;quot; option present in the left bottom of the application. Choose the required tool from the left side pane --&amp;gt; Click Apply.&lt;br /&gt;
You can find the shapes related to the selected tool will be available in the Shapes pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Freehand Drawing:====&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to draw something in a freehand you can do so in Draw. &lt;br /&gt;
To do this, Click on &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar and choose &amp;quot;Freehand&amp;quot; option. Alternatively you can press 'x' on the keyboard as shortcut.&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the size of the brush and can freely move the cursor on the sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding Notes and Images:====&lt;br /&gt;
Note can be added in the worksheet to give a description to the node. Note can be resized according to your requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
Once you add the note to the workspace you can move it wherever required.&lt;br /&gt;
Image can also be added to the workspace to make it more attractive and informative.&lt;br /&gt;
Like shape and Note, Image can also be added resized. If you want to resize click on the image and click and drag the points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Applying Styles to the workspace:====&lt;br /&gt;
Styles make your workspace much attractive and readable. This involves a simple step of choosing a style and applying the same. Some styles may only have the styles applied to the nodes whereas some other have styles to the background also.&lt;br /&gt;
To do this,&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the workspace --&amp;gt; In the &amp;quot;Format Panel&amp;quot; on the right, choose the style from the list. If you simply click on the style, that style will be added to the workspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Selecting the paper size:====&lt;br /&gt;
If your plan is to print the chart on a paper and use it for some purpose then better if you select the page size at the starting. &lt;br /&gt;
There is an option in the diagram panel to change the default Paper size. Click on the drop down menu present in Page size. You will get number of options that you can select for your requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Making Rough works:====&lt;br /&gt;
You can draw and design few elements and put it in Scratchpad for future use. You can drop number of works to the scratchpad and access those later. This helps when you are experimenting on an element and want to preserve the work you are done so far. &lt;br /&gt;
To do this, you can drag the element you want to move to Scratchpad and drop it in that section. A small icon of what your element looks like is visible in the scratchpad section. As you require the element you just need to click on that element so that it appears in the worksheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving your Diagrams:====&lt;br /&gt;
To save your project click on &amp;quot;File--&amp;gt;Save&amp;quot;. Enter the proper filename for the file, it stores the file in .drawio format. --&amp;gt; Click Save.&lt;br /&gt;
You can also export your diagrams into pdf, png, jpg, svg and other formats. You can do this by clicking on File--&amp;gt; Export As option. This shows a list of file extensions with which you can save your work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features:====&lt;br /&gt;
1. Shape library is a huge collection of shapes that are having specific way of representing the data. &lt;br /&gt;
2. Explore Swimlane diagrams to use it for official purposes. Swimlane usually shows the responsibility or works needs to be done for each step or a process. This is in-built feature in drawio.&lt;br /&gt;
3. Templates are ready-to-use syntax that can be inserted into a diagram for more convenience.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Ideas for resource creation:====&lt;br /&gt;
* With Draw.io you can create any kind of tables, charts, diagrams that takes less time and more specific to your requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====References:====&lt;br /&gt;
[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Diagrams.net Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.diagrams.net/ Diagrams]&lt;br /&gt;
[https://app.diagrams.net/ Draw.io]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13704</id>
		<title>Learn Diagrams (Draw.io)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13704"/>
		<updated>2022-10-17T06:46:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Diagrams or Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams or charts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams. The diagrams can be Flowcharts, Use case diagrams, Block diagrams, Cycle diagrams, Cluster diagrams, Ladder diagrams, Tree diagrams etc to represent the user data.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|Educators can use these diagrams to explain the concepts in a pictorial format. It can represent the idea of an entire concept in an attractive and conveyable way.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|20.2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape], [https://creately.com Creately]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|You can install [https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.lucidchart.android.chart&amp;amp;hl=en_IN&amp;amp;gl=US Lucidchart]&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use the web based platform of Draw.io here [https://app.diagrams.net]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://drawio-app.com/ Drawio]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features: ====&lt;br /&gt;
Drawio can be used to generate variety of diagrams or in a better term called as &amp;quot;charts&amp;quot;, that may represent any form data. With Drawio you can drag and drop variety of symbols, shapes, flowchart icons, Entity relations, UML diagrams in the canvas. There is a huge collection of other symbols that are helpful in implementing the required diagrams. It also focuses on arrangement of symbols, spelling checking, It contains a ready-to-apply set of styles making the entire diagrams more attractive and readable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Installation:====&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13703</id>
		<title>Learn Diagrams (Draw.io)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13703"/>
		<updated>2022-10-17T06:42:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Diagrams or Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams or charts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams. The diagrams can be Flowcharts, Use case diagrams, Block diagrams, Cycle diagrams, Cluster diagrams, Ladder diagrams, Tree diagrams etc to represent the user data.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|Educators can use these diagrams to explain the concepts in a pictorial format. It can represent the idea of an entire concept in an attractive and conveyable way.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|20.2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape], [https://creately.com Creately]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|You can install [https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.lucidchart.android.chart&amp;amp;hl=en_IN&amp;amp;gl=US Lucidchart]&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use the web based platform of Draw.io here [https://app.diagrams.net]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://drawio-app.com/ Drawio]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features:====&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13702</id>
		<title>Learn Diagrams (Draw.io)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Diagrams_(Draw.io)&amp;diff=13702"/>
		<updated>2022-10-17T06:42:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Basic information */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Diagrams or Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams or charts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Draw.io is a diagram generator which allows the user to create and share diagrams. The diagrams can be Flowcharts, Use case diagrams, Block diagrams, Cycle diagrams, Cluster diagrams, Ladder diagrams, Tree diagrams etc to represent the user data.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|Educators can use these diagrams to explain the concepts in a pictorial format. It can represent the idea of an entire concept in an attractive and conveyable way.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|20.2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape], [https://creately.com Creately]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|You can install [https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.lucidchart.android.chart&amp;amp;hl=en_IN&amp;amp;gl=US Lucidchart]&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use the web based platform of Draw.io here [https://app.diagrams.net]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://drawio-app.com/ Drawio]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Overview of Features:===&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_LibreOffice_Math&amp;diff=13700</id>
		<title>Learn LibreOffice Math</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_LibreOffice_Math&amp;diff=13700"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T11:36:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Installation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%B2%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%AC%E0%A4%B0%E0%A5%87%E0%A4%91%E0%A4%AB%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%B8_%E0%A4%AE%E0%A5%88%E0%A4%A5_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%AF%E0%A5%87 हिंदी]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction ===&lt;br /&gt;
LibreOffice Math ('Math' hereafter)  is a free and open-source formula editing application of the LibreOffice software package. Math can be invoked in your text documents, spreadsheets, presentations and drawings, enabling you to insert well formatted mathematical and scientific formulas. Your formulas can include a wide range of elements, from fractions, terms with exponents and indices, integrals, and mathematical functions, to inequalities, systems of equations, and matrices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can start Math either as a stand-alone application directly from the LibreOffice Start Center or directly from within other LibreOffice applications such as Writer, Calc, Impress and Draw.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT for creating Mathematical resources&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|LibreOffice Math is a software used for creating (including writing, editing, formatting, type setting and printing) mathematical formulae. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1.6.2&lt;br /&gt;
LibreOffice Writer is also available on the Windows and Macintosh operating systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tool has no specific configuration requirements but in this application you can use many extra features by installing [https://extensions.libreoffice.org/extensions extensions]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.fxsolver.com/ FxSolver], [http://www.dessci.com/en/products/mathtype/ MathType],   &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|You can download https://www.libreoffice.org/download/android-viewer. There are text editors on the mobile / tablet platform like &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;''&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;quot;OpenDocumentReader&amp;quot; App and WPS Office App.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|The Document Foundation&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/community-support/ Community help]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of features====&lt;br /&gt;
LibreOffice Math lets you type and format mathematical formulae that can include signs and symbols. In this application you can save the documents in a variety of formats, including the standardized Open Document Format (ODF) or MathML Format (mml). Here you can easily export your document to the Portable Document Format(PDF). Math treats formulae as objects and does not perform any computation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Installation====&lt;br /&gt;
Please click on the below link to learn about LibreOffice Installation &amp;amp; Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/LibreOffice_Installation_and_Configuration Click here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Working with the application ===&lt;br /&gt;
Using the Formula Editor, you can insert formulas directly into a document using LibreOffice Writer, Calc, Impress, or Draw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Formulas in LibreOffice documents ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LibreOffice Writer includes insertion of mathematical expressions in documents. A special feature. LibreOffice Math is an application that assists in insertion of mathematic or scientific formulas of a wide range is a part of LibreOffice writer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LibreOffice Writer treats formulae as objects. For insertion of an expression at any point in the document go to '''Insert (in menu bar) → Object → Formula.''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Formula Window appears on the left hand-side, it has a variety of operations, functions and attributes that can be included in the document. The top drop down menu helps us toggle between different operations. Selecting the operations  from the drop down box displays all the mathematical notations under each category. Clicking on the required mathematical notation inserts the notation in the document. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit this object or to insert numbers and variables in the expression double click on the object/ right click on the object to select '''edit''' from the options.  &lt;br /&gt;
# A dialogue box on the bottom part of the screen allows us to edit the the formula structure and also enter data. &lt;br /&gt;
# The text or numbers in the formula structure can also be inserted by clicking on the specific place holders in the expression. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;It is important to note that once we move the cursor away from the formula the formula window closes and to insert another formula we have to follow the steps to insert formula again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inserting Formulae in LibreOffice Writer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The links to the formulae open the GIFs in your browser, to download the GIF save the page after opening the link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Introduction ====&lt;br /&gt;
1) Navigating Menus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Master for formulae.gif|frameless|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/f/f0/Master_for_formulae.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) Exemplar Formula&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permutation.gif|frameless|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/6/6f/Permutation.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Simple Arithmetic Operators ====&lt;br /&gt;
1) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;a=\pm{5}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;b\neq\pm6&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/2/26/Equals_not_equals_plus_or_minus.gif Link]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''(if you click on the [https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/2/26/Equals_not_equals_plus_or_minus.gif Link], it will open the gif in your web browser. You can see it and also save it on your computer using the File -&amp;gt; Save As option. You can also download the file by 'right-clicking' the [https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/2/26/Equals_not_equals_plus_or_minus.gif Link] and  choosing 'Save link as' option).''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;a+0=a, a\times0=a, a+(-a)=0, a\div a=1&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/d/d3/Arithematic_1.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) [[File:Simplearithmetic11.png|frameless]]&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;{a\over b }, a/b, &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;[[File:Simplearithmetic10.png|frameless]], &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;a.{1 \over a}= 1 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/5/55/Arithmetic_2_Final.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Relational Operators ====&lt;br /&gt;
1) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;v&amp;lt;u &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;x\geq y, p\gg q, |a+b|\leq |a| + |b| &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/1/16/Relational_operators.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;e\approx f, i\eqsim j, m\propto n, n!  &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/c/c0/More_mathematical_operators.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Geometric Operators ====&lt;br /&gt;
1) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;AB || PQ, \bigtriangleup ABC = \bigtriangleup EFG, AB \perp PQ, \angle \alpha = 180^{0}   &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/7/7d/Geometric_Symbols_Final.gif Link] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\bar{AB}, \vec{AB}, \bar{AB},   &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;[[File:Geomertysymbol.png|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/c/cc/Geometric_Representation.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Set Operators ====&lt;br /&gt;
1) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\emptyset\subset A   &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/0/03/Set_1.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;(A\cup B)' = A' \cap B'   &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/4/4a/Set_2.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;A' = \{ x|x \in A \ and \  x\in B\}   &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/1/12/Set_3.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;A\times B = \{  (x, y) | x\in A \ and \ x\not\in B \}   &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/1/19/Set_4.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Permutation and Combination ====&lt;br /&gt;
1) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;{}^nC_4 = {n! \over k! ( n-k )!}   &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/e/ef/Combinations.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exponents and Powers ====&lt;br /&gt;
1) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;{a^m \over b^n} = a ^{m-n}   &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/8/8f/Powers1.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;(a^m)^n=a^mn   &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/c/c0/Power_2.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;a^{m \over n}= \sqrt[n]{a^m}   &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/a/a5/Power_3.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;{{1} \over { \sqrt[n]{a} }} ={ {\sqrt[n]{a^{n-1}}}\over{a}}; a\neq 0   &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/e/e0/Powers_4.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sqrt{a \pm \sqrt {b}} = \sqrt { {a + \sqrt{a^2 - b}} \over {2}} \pm \sqrt { {a-\sqrt{a^2-b}}\over{2}}    &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/1/10/Powers_5.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Binomial Theorem ====&lt;br /&gt;
1) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;(a-b)^n = {}^nC_0a^n+{}^nC_1a^{n-1}b.......{}^nCab^{n-1}+{}^nC_nb^n    &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/4/4c/Binomial_Theorem.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logarithms ====&lt;br /&gt;
1) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\log _{0} {a}=\{ - \infty \ if \ a&amp;gt;1\ \ +\infty if a&amp;lt;1 \}    &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/e/ea/Logarithms_1.gif Link] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\log (1000) = 3    &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/5/5a/Logarithms_2.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Trigonometry ====&lt;br /&gt;
1) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sin {( \alpha + \beta )} = \sin{(\alpha)} \cos{(\beta)} + \cos{(\alpha)}\sin{(\beta)}    &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/3/3c/Trigonometry_2.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;{\sin}^2 (\theta) + {\cos}^2 (\theta)=1     &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/0/03/Triginometry_1.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Integer Series ====&lt;br /&gt;
1) &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sum_{1}^N n^{2} = 1 + 2+ 3+ ...... +N^2 = {N(N+1)(2N+1) \over 6}    &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/a/a1/Integer_Series.gif Link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Advanced Features : ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Formulas as separate documents or files ====&lt;br /&gt;
To create a formula as a separate document or file, use one of the following methods to open an empty formula document in LibreOffice Math :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• On the menu bar, go to '''File &amp;gt; New &amp;gt; Formula'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• From the Start Center, click '''Math Formula'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•On the Standard toolbar, click the triangle to the right of the '''New''' icon and select '''Formula''' from the context menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•In Math, use the keyboard shortcut '''Ctrl+N'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•Use command Import '''MathML''' from the clipboard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you enter the markup language in the Formula Editor, the formula will appear in the Preview window during and after input of the markup. The Elements window to the left of the Preview window may also appear, if it has been selected in View on the menu bar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserting short cut for formula window in the main menu ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click on '''Tools  →  Customize''', the customization window appears. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, in tool-bar select '''Standard'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tool-bar content scroll down and click on the check box for '''formula'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press '''Enter''' , this provides a short cut for formula insertion in the standard menu bar  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on it opens the same formula window which we can use to insert and edit formulae.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Mathematics]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_LibreOffice_Impress&amp;diff=13699</id>
		<title>Learn LibreOffice Impress</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_LibreOffice_Impress&amp;diff=13699"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T11:33:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Installation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%B2%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%AC%E0%A5%8D%E0%A4%B0%E0%A5%87_%E0%A4%91%E0%A4%AB%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%B8_%E0%A4%87%E0%A4%82%E0%A4%AA%E0%A5%8D%E0%A4%B0%E0%A5%87%E0%A4%B8_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A5%87%E0%A4%82 हिंदी मे देखिये] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AC%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%86_%E0%B2%86%E0%B2%AB%E0%B3%80%E0%B2%B8%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%87%E0%B2%82%E0%B2%AA%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%86%E0%B2%B8%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:Book-sidebar}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|LibreOffice Impress is a free and open source software (FOSS) application for creating generic resources, in the form of slide presentations.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|LibreOffice Impress can be used to create slides that contain many different elements  including text, lists, tables, charts, audio and video links etc. Slides are often used in training programs and in teaching to quickly and simply communicate ideas through points.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Version: 7.3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.onlyoffice.com/ OnlyOffice], [https://www.collaboraoffice.com/ Collabora Office], [https://www.freeoffice.com/en/ Free Office]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.onlyoffice.documents&amp;amp;hl=en_IN&amp;amp;gl=US Only Office for Android],&lt;br /&gt;
[https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.collabora.libreoffice Collabora Office for Android] and [https://www.libreoffice.org/download/android-and-ios/ for iOS]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use [https://deckdeckgo.com/ DeckDeckGo] for creating and sharing presentations online.  It is a FOSS alternative for Google Slides. Although there are similar full office-suite along with Google Drive storage service like NextCloud, this is simpler when you want to use a clean presentation tool. It works on mobile too.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|1. [http://www.libreoffice.org/ Official Website]&lt;br /&gt;
2. [https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/images/a/ac/IG40-ImpressGuideLO.pdf LibreOffice Impress help document]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Overview of Features====&lt;br /&gt;
LibreOffice Impress lets you create professional slide presentations that can include charts, drawing objects, text, multimedia and a variety of other items. On-screen slide shows, animation and slide transitions are a few of the techniques one can use to make presentation more appealing. Impress also includes a spelling checker, text styles and background styles, to communicate information in simple and powerful ways. Microsoft PowerPoint presentations can also be imported and modified.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
Please click on the below link to learn about LibreOffice Installation &amp;amp; Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/LibreOffice_Installation_and_Configuration Click here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opening a presentation slide ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO1 Introduction.png|LibreOffice Impress interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
# In Ubuntu LibreOffice Impress can be opened from &amp;quot;Applications --&amp;gt; Office --&amp;gt; LibreOffice Impress&amp;quot; and In windows double click on the LibreOffice desktop shortcut.  &lt;br /&gt;
# When you open the LibreOffice Impress application, it will show the window like this. You can click the cursor on &amp;quot;Click to add title&amp;quot; and type the title of the information you want to enter. And then you can click the cursor on &amp;quot;Click to add text&amp;quot; and type the information you want to present. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserting new slide (Add new slide, Duplicate slide, select slide layout) ====&lt;br /&gt;
* When you create a new presentation, Impress shows only one slide in the Slides pane and Workspace. You can add new slides or duplicate slides to your presentation as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
* A new slide is inserted into a presentation using one of the following methods:&lt;br /&gt;
** Go to &amp;quot;Slide --&amp;gt; New Slide&amp;quot; on the Menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
** Right-click in the Slides pane and select New Slide from the context menu.&lt;br /&gt;
** Use the keyboard shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+M&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Insert New slide.png|Insert new slide from menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Duplicate a slide'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To duplicate a slide, select the slide you want to duplicate in the Slides pane and use one of the following methods. A duplicate slide is inserted after the selected slide in the presentation.&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Duplicate slide.png|Duplicate slide&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Right-click on a slide in the Slides pane and select &amp;quot;Duplicate Slide&amp;quot; from the context menu.&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to &amp;quot;Slide Sorter&amp;quot; view in the Workspace, right-click on a slide and select &amp;quot;Duplicate Slide&amp;quot; from the context menu.&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to &amp;quot;Slide --&amp;gt; Duplicate Slide&amp;quot; on the Menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Changing slide layout'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Layout is structure of placing the various content in the presentation. Layouts contain one or more content boxes. Each of these boxes can be configured to contain one of the following elements: slide title, text, table, chart, image or audio/video,etc&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Slidelayout.png|Slide layout&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting a slide in your presentation, change the slide layout using one of the following methods:&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on the required layout in &amp;quot;Layouts&amp;quot; section of the Properties deck in the Sidebar&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to &amp;quot;Slide --&amp;gt; Layout&amp;quot; on the Menu bar and select the required layout from the drop down list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Right click on a slide in the Slides pane, select Layout from the context menu and select the required layout from the drop down list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on the &amp;quot;Slide Layout&amp;quot; icon on the Presentation toolbar and select a layout from the options available.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Slide Layout.png|Slide layout panel&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;[https://spoken-tutorial.org/watch/LibreOffice+Suite+Impress+6.3/Creating+a+presentation+in+Impress/English/ Watch this video to learn inserting slides and formatting slides]{{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Slide content type'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Basically the slide content can be of four type as shown in the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Slide content type.png|Slide content type&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert table : Table is a collection of rows and columns which each indicates a particular set of data.&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert chart : Chart is visual form of data which makes the content more understandable.&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert Image : An image can be added to the slide by which presentation can be done attractive.&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert video : Any related video to the presentation can be added that can graphically convey something to the viewer&lt;br /&gt;
 {{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding text ====&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways of adding text to a slide – contents box or text box.&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Insert textbox 2.png|Textbox&lt;br /&gt;
File:Insert textbox.png|Insert textbox from menubar&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Contents box –''' click on &amp;quot;Click to add text&amp;quot; in the contents box and type your text. Outline styles are automatically applied to the text as you insert it. You can change the outline level of each paragraph as well as its position within the contents box by using the arrow buttons on the Outline toolbar and Workspace Outline view.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text box –''' click on &amp;quot;Text&amp;quot; on the Standard toolbar or Drawing toolbar to select text mode, then click on your slide. A text box is created and the Text Formatting toolbar automatically opens. Type your text and click outside the text box to end text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Text Formatting  ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can format added text in the way you want it to be. To do that, go to &amp;quot;Sidebar settings&amp;quot; and click on &amp;quot;properties&amp;quot; as shown in the image (Image :Text formatting properties)&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Formatting text settings.png|Text formatting properties&lt;br /&gt;
File:Text Properties window.png|Text properies panel&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* To copy text from one place to another, or from one document to another, you can select the text, go to &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Copy&amp;quot; (Ctrl+C) and go to a different place in the document to paste it &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Paste&amp;quot; (Ctrl+V). The editing menu also has an important feature for searching selected words. You can use the &amp;quot;Edit--&amp;gt; Find&amp;quot; (Ctrl+F) the option for searching selected words.&lt;br /&gt;
* The format option is for changing the format of the text, changing the text font, text size, page format, and text wrapping options. many of these options can use short-cut icons from the formatting text toolbar, the letter &amp;quot;B&amp;quot; (Ctrl+B) and &amp;quot;I&amp;quot; (Ctrl+I) can be used to make the text bold and italics.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can type in text in different languages, not only in English. You can type a paragraph of text with words/sentences in different languages. The IBUS application allows you to type in most Indian languages. To type in Hindi or Kannada or Telugu or Tamil, visit the [https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Learn_Ubuntu#Adding_your_languages_to_type_in_Ubuntu this] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:1. formatting text.gif|Bold,Italic,Underline etc&lt;br /&gt;
File:2. Formatting text.gif| Alignment features &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using bullet and numbering features  ====&lt;br /&gt;
Bullets and numbering makes the presentation more clearer and helps the presenter to explain the things in a well structured manner.&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bullets.png|Add Bullets or Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
File:3. Formatting text.gif|Selecting bullets or numbers&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* An important feature of Impress is to enable you present your information through simple and short points ('bullet points').&lt;br /&gt;
* To add the bullets and numbers to text information, choose &amp;quot;Format --&amp;gt; Bullets and Numbering&amp;quot;. You can also select the different symbols of bullets here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For the selected text input that has been entered, go to &amp;quot;Format --&amp;gt; select Bullets and Numbering&amp;quot; and choose the numbering type that is needed.  You can create sub-numbered lists.&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserting images   ====&lt;br /&gt;
* By adding images, videos or any other media will make your presentation more informative and attractive. To add images, go to the &amp;quot;Insert&amp;quot; from the menu bar and click on the &amp;quot;Image&amp;quot; option and select the image which you want to insert from your local drive, select and click on &amp;quot;Open&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Add image.gif|Insert Image&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Alternatively after inserting a new slide, on the inserted new slide you can move the cursor around that, and it will show the option &amp;quot;Insert Image&amp;quot;. Along with image, you can insert table, video or graph.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Image editing.png|Edit Image&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Note=When resizing a graphic, right-click the picture. Select Position and Size from the context menu and make sure that Keep ratio is selected. Then adjust the height or width to the size you need. As you adjust one dimension, both dimensions will change to keep the width and height ratio the same, ensuring that the picture will not become distorted. Remember also that resizing a bitmap image will reduce its quality; it is better to create an image of the desired size outside of Impress.}} When resizing a graphic, right-click the picture. Select &amp;quot;Position and Size&amp;quot; from the context menu and make sure that &amp;quot;Keep ratio&amp;quot; is selected. Then adjust the height or width to the size you need. As you adjust one dimension, both dimensions will change to keep the width and height ratio the same, ensuring that the picture will not become distorted. Remember also that resizing a bitmap image will reduce its quality. It is better to create an image of the desired size outside of Impress.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the same way you can &amp;quot;Insert video&amp;quot; into the presentation. Go to &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Audio or Video&amp;quot;. Note that when you insert the video it does not play in the edit mode. If you want to know whether the inserted video is working Press &amp;quot;F5&amp;quot; to move to the presentation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Insert Hyperlinks  ====&lt;br /&gt;
* To insert Web link place the text cursor in the document at the point where you want to insert the hyperlink or select the text that you want to put the hyperlink on. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select &amp;quot;Hyperlink&amp;quot; command from the Insert menu.  When you present your slides (using 'Slide Show' from the Menu), you will be able to click this web link and open the web page with that address (you will need internet connectivity for this). You can also use this to link a file on your own computer, which can be opened in the same manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Insert hyperlink.png|Insert Hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
File:Insert hyperlink 2.png|Hyperlink wizard&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Insert Shapes====&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to &amp;quot;Insert--&amp;gt; Shape&amp;quot;. Choose the type of shape you need to draw on your presentation. Drag the shape on the surface of a slide.&lt;br /&gt;
* To change the properties of the shape you can go to &amp;quot;Area&amp;quot; tab in the &amp;quot;Properties&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Shapescreenshot.png|Inserting Shapes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Insert Table and table formatting ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Table&amp;quot; on the Menu bar, select the number of rows and columns required from the Insert Table dialog that opens. Don’t worry if you aren’t sure how many you will need at first, you can always edit the table later, but if you do know your needs, this is a good time to fill it in since it is more work to fix it later.&lt;br /&gt;
* Alternatively, click on &amp;quot;Table&amp;quot; icon on toolbar and select the number of rows and columns by dragging the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Tabletoolbar.png|Insert table from the insert menu&lt;br /&gt;
File:Table properties.png|Table design and Table properties&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* This will insert a default table into your slide with the number of rows and columns you specified. But if you look to the Sidebar on the right you will see that the &amp;quot;Properties&amp;quot; window has opened the &amp;quot;Table Design&amp;quot; section for you. You can do a lot from this toolbar, so let’s take a look at it. Under table design you can change into any predefined table designs. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} Remember that you can always read the name of the button by moving over it and reading the pop-up.{{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing the template using 'Master slide'  ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Impress comes with a collection of master slides which you can use for to change the slide background. Click on the &amp;quot;Master slide&amp;quot; section from task panel on right side of the working window, and click on the slide design which you want to apply for your slide.  &lt;br /&gt;
Basically there are two ways which can be applied for Master slides. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=250&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Impress Master slides all.png|Applying the same Master Slide for all slides&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Impress Master slides selected.png|Applying the Master Slide for selected slides&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* One, applying selected background for the   After you select background for your slide and to apply the same background to all the slides in your file, right click on the &amp;quot;Master slide&amp;quot; from side panel and select &amp;quot;Apply to all slides&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Second, applying the selected background for all the slides. After you select background for your slide if you want to apply the same background to all the slides in the presentation, right click on that master slide and click &amp;quot;Apply to selected slide&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding Header, Footer to slide ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Steps to add header and footer.png|Add header and footer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To add the header or footer go to &amp;quot;Insert&amp;quot; menu from the top menu bar and click on &amp;quot;Header Footer --&amp;gt; Add the header or footer&amp;quot; like fixed date , variable date , slide number etc. Check &amp;quot;Date and Time&amp;quot; and choose a time setting. Choose between &amp;quot;Update automatically&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Fixed&amp;quot; as a display type. If you choose &amp;quot;Fixed&amp;quot; type the date in the blank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Header and footer.gif| Add header and footer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Custom animation for presentation ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO_Impress_5_Custom_animation.png|Adding custom animation&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}Animation to text makes the viewer more curious about the topic presenter presenting. As the text comes and goes in an interesting way it also avoids all the text appearing once in a particular slide. On one way it contributes more to the visual appeal of the presentation, on the other side enhances the presenter and viewer's involvement in the presentation. You can have the text come in different speeds, in different ways, this makes it interesting for the viewer by providing visual relief.&lt;br /&gt;
# At first, select some portion of text in a particular slide. &lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Properties&amp;quot; window, click &amp;quot;Custom animation&amp;quot; that resides on right side of the working window. Alternatively choose &amp;quot;Slide&amp;quot; from Menu Bar and then click on &amp;quot;Custom Animation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Custom Animation&amp;quot; window, click &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; to add an effect. Select any effect of your choice to make it apply for the selected text.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you want to change the animation of a selected text click on the text in the custom animation window where you have already applied an effect, choose a different kind of effect to make it apply to the selected text.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Slide Transitions ====&lt;br /&gt;
Slide transition gives a professional look for any presentation. When you move from one slide to another, the way of movement can be given a particular style which is referred as Slide transition. Since Impress is a 'presentation' tool Slide Transition takes much weightage. There are a number of transitions available in Impress which you can select according to your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the slide transition wherein the transitions can be applied to the selected slide or the same transition can be applied to all the slides.&lt;br /&gt;
# In Normal view, select the slide that you want to add the transition effect to.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the Tasks pane, click &amp;quot;Slide Transition&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select a &amp;quot;slide transition&amp;quot; from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
To preview the transition effect for a slide, click the small icon underneath the slide on the Slides Pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:To work with slide transition.png|Click on slide transition&lt;br /&gt;
File:Slide transition.png|Slide transition panel&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To remove a transition effect'''&lt;br /&gt;
# In &amp;quot;Slide Sorter View&amp;quot;, select the slides that you want to remove the transition effect from.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &amp;quot;No Transition&amp;quot; in the listbox on the Tasks pane.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserting other objects ====&lt;br /&gt;
* You can add objects for presentation such as Formula, QR Code and other OLE object. You can also add some fields such as Date, Time, Slide number, title etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Object.png|Insert formula&lt;br /&gt;
File:Insert objects 2.png|Insert fields in slide like slide number ,title&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Running Sideshow ====&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=250&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Impress Slideshow.png|Running the slideshow&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* To run the slideshow go to the slideshow from the top menu bar, click on the &amp;quot;Slide Show&amp;quot; and click on &amp;quot;Start from First Slide&amp;quot; or use the keyboard shortcut key &amp;quot;F5&amp;quot; to start the presentation from the first slide of your presentation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The same way you start your slides presentation from the current slide which you are seeing on your screen by pressing &amp;quot;Shift+F5&amp;quot; keyboard shortcut keys or click on the &amp;quot;Slide Show&amp;quot; and click on &amp;quot;Start from Current Slide&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For an automatic change to the next slide, you must assign a slide transition to each slide. &lt;br /&gt;
# Open the &amp;quot;Slide Transition&amp;quot; sidebar deck.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Advanced slide area&amp;quot;, click &amp;quot;Automatically&amp;quot; after, and select a time duration.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;quot;Apply to All Slides&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving the files and formats====&lt;br /&gt;
*Like in most applications, a file can be saved using the &amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Save&amp;quot; command, or by the shortcut key &amp;quot;Ctrl+S&amp;quot;. Always give a meaningful file name, reading which you should get an idea of the file content.&lt;br /&gt;
*The files will be saved as &amp;quot;.odp&amp;quot;. If you want to save your file in .pptx format, you can click on File format and choose the option showing .pptx in bracket.&lt;br /&gt;
*The files can be exported to a PDF format which is useful when you only need to print the file and do not want any changes to it. By using this format you can also share the presentation with anybody through mail or phone since almost every device supports PDF format. &lt;br /&gt;
*You can export your presentation by clicking &amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Export as --&amp;gt; Export as PDF&amp;quot;. A window appears which lets you to change the default settings. Once you are done click &amp;quot;Export&amp;quot;. Another window opens where it asks for the path to save the PDF file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Export as PDF new.png|Export as PDF&lt;br /&gt;
File:SAVE AS PPT.png|Save as PPT&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can use custom animation in advanced ways to present text, audio, video and images in rich ways. &lt;br /&gt;
* You can add objects to a slide, for example QR code, formula such as unary/binary operators, relations, set operations, functions, brackets, attributes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Video tutorials ===&lt;br /&gt;
[https://spoken-tutorial.org/tutorial-search/?search_foss=LibreOffice+Suite+Impress+6.3&amp;amp;search_language=English Click here to see the video tutorials to learn LibreOffice Impress] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ideas for resource creation===&lt;br /&gt;
*You can organize and structure teaching ideas through slide presentations. You can animate your slides and combine text, image, audio and video elements for richer communication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/images/a/ac/IG40-ImpressGuideLO.pdf The Document Foundation] &lt;br /&gt;
#LibreOffice Impress Official [https://www.libreoffice.org/ Website] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_LibreOffice_Calc&amp;diff=13698</id>
		<title>Learn LibreOffice Calc</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_LibreOffice_Calc&amp;diff=13698"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T11:29:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Installation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[https://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AC%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%86_%E0%B2%86%E0%B2%AB%E0%B3%80%E0%B2%B8%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BE%E0%B2%B2%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%95%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%B2%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%AC%E0%A4%B0%E0%A5%87%E0%A4%91%E0%A4%AB%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%B8_%E0%A4%95%E0%A5%88%E0%A4%B2%E0%A5%8D%E0%A4%95_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%8F हिन्दी में देखिये]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:Book-sidebar}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
The spreadsheet is a sheet with a collection of columns and rows. It contains number of cells. A cell is a combination or intersection of a row and a column, in which information both text and numeric can be input. A sheet can be simply understood as an array of cells. Altogether Spreadsheets are useful for capturing and analyzing data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic information ===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|LibreOffice Calc is a free and open source application for creating generic resources.  Spreadsheet is used for handling numeric data, analyzing and publishing through tables and graphs.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|Data analysis is an important mathematical competency.  Spreadsheets can be very effective for introducing data analysis and statistics for students.  It can also be used to explore patterns as an introduction to algebraic thinking. The power of the digital spreadsheet is that many types of data processing can be done on the information entered. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|Version: 7.3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(LibreOffice Calc is also available on the Windows and Macintosh operating systems)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|No specific configuration requirements&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.onlyoffice.com/ OnlyOffice], [https://www.collaboraoffice.com/ Collabora Office], [https://www.freeoffice.com/en/ Free Office]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.onlyoffice.documents&amp;amp;hl=en_IN&amp;amp;gl=US OnlyOffice for Android]&lt;br /&gt;
[https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.collabora.libreoffice Collabora Office for Android] and [https://www.libreoffice.org/download/android-and-ios/ for iOS]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/images/2/2b/CG72-CalcGuide.pdf Calc Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/community-support/ Community help]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Overview of features ===&lt;br /&gt;
Spreadsheet application is used for recording, processing and analyzing data. It is also used for creating text and graphical outputs. The application has many arithmetical, statistical, text processing functions which make it a very powerful desktop tool. Data can be sorted, filtered and processed into outputs, including multi-variate tables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
Please click on the below link to learn about LibreOffice Installation &amp;amp; Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/LibreOffice_Installation_and_Configuration Click here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/9/96/REDUCED_MINIMUM_-_Learning_spreadsheet_-_Bangalore_South_3_Block_Schools_Dise_data_2015-16_March_2018.ods Download this file] to practice on a simple sample data sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://teacher-network.in/OER/images/1/1d/Bangalore_South_3_Block_Schools_Dise_data_2015-16_aided_September_2017.ods Download this file]  of additional sheets with analyses, reports etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Opening a spreadsheet====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Calc 1 viewing a spreadsheet.png|Basic spreadsheet interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* LibreOffice  Calc can be opened from &amp;quot;Applications  --&amp;gt; Office  --&amp;gt; LibreOffice Calc&amp;quot;. This opens a ‘work book’. A work book can have many ‘sheets’. When you open the LO Calc application,  it will show the window like as mentioned in the image above (Basic spreadsheet interface). The spreadsheet consists of rows and columns.  Each column-row intersection is a cell; this is the place you will enter data in a spreadsheet. You can click the cursor on any cell and type in the information you want to enter. &lt;br /&gt;
* Select Cell A1 and type “Name of city”, Hit enter. Next select cell B1 and type “Average annual rainfall (cms). Hit enter, and select cells of Column A to enter names of cities and Cells of Column B to enter annual average rainfall. &lt;br /&gt;
* You can click on the A1 and B1 cells and click on the BOLD function icon (or simply type Ctrl+B) to make the headings bold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like in the case of text document, you can use the File menu to save your spreadsheet.  The file will be saved with a .ods extension. ODS is the short form of Open Document Spreadsheet.&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Navigating a spreadsheet ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Cal step 2.png|Navigation from various sheets&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* You can move across cells using the arrow keys. You can also quickly go to the ends of the sheet using &amp;quot;Ctrl&amp;quot; Key, such as Ctrl+Home (go to Cell A1), Ctrl+End (bottom rightmost part of filled cells / entered data), Ctrl + Up Arrow (next cell in same column, before an empty cell) etc. &lt;br /&gt;
* It is useful to become comfortable using keyboard to move across the spreadsheet.&lt;br /&gt;
* Columns and rows can be inserted or deleted or hidden in a spreadsheet. You can right click anywhere on the spreadsheet and insert/ delete rows and columns. You can also go to Sheet menu and insert rows/ columns.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserting a new sheet ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Insert a sheet.png|Inserting a new sheet&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Calc Rename a sheet.png|Renaming a sheet&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sheets can be added or deleted from a work book using the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; symbol seen next to the sheet name.  Sheets can be named and renamed by right clicking on the name of the sheet visible in the bottom panel. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Formatting a spreadsheet ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Calc 6 Formatting numbers.png| Formatting in Calc&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
Formatting a spreadsheet involves two important formats. &lt;br /&gt;
* Text formatting : Text formatting involves making the text bold, italicized, increasing/reducing font size, font color etc. Data can also be formatted based on what it represents - date, time, currency, etc. The numeric information display format in terms of &amp;quot;000&amp;quot; separators or number of decimal places can be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Alignment of Text inside the cell : Since Calc gives much importance for cells, the text alignment inside the cell also needs to be taken care of. Such alignments can be Top, center and bottom. Wrap text option allows the text which gone out of the cell to be aligned within the cell boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
There are two useful options associated with cells known as Merge cell and Split cell.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=250&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Calc Merge Cell.png|Merging the cell&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Calc Split cell.png|Splitting the cell&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Merge cell&amp;quot; combines two or more cells together to make it as one. For example, If you want the main heading to be given in a particular column which is having two or more sub menus or subsections you can use this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
To merge cells, select two or more cells and right click on anyone of the selected cells and click on &amp;quot;merge cell&amp;quot;. For example, in the above image (Merging the cell) if you want to calculate the average rainfall of all the cities then you can merge the cells as shown in the image which indicates the calculated value is related to the entire column.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Split cell&amp;quot; is needed when you accidentally merged the cells which are no longer required and you want them to be the separate cells.&lt;br /&gt;
To Split a merged cell, right click on the merged cell and click &amp;quot;split cell&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Freeze or Unfreeze rows and columns ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter data for a large number of rows or columns, you will not be able to read the row/column headings. To be able to see the column (and row) headings, you should move your cursor to the cell above which (and to the left of which) you want to be able to see your headings and click on &amp;quot;View --&amp;gt; Freeze Cells --&amp;gt; Freeze Rows and Columns&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;320&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Calc 2 Freeze rows and columns.png|Freezing the cells&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserting formulae for computations====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Calc 3 Processing the data .png|Inserting the formula&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can do almost any kind of computation or processing with a spreadsheet.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, here you can calculate the total rainfall for the cities. You can go to the cell below last row with data in Column B, which has the rainfall information and simply type in &amp;quot;''=Sum(B2:B15)''&amp;quot;, assuming the data is in rows 2 through 15 of column B. Any computation or formula must begin with an &amp;quot;=&amp;quot; sign. Or you can simply use the shorthand icon on the menu bar “∑” where you will get various options like SUM, AVERAGE, MIN, MAX.  Choose &amp;quot;SUM&amp;quot; here and hit &amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot; and the application will insert the same formula.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When the cursor is on this cell, the formula will be seen in the ‘formula’ bar on top of the sheet, below the menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;All arithmetic operations, statistical operations are possible with spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
* You can ‘copy paste’ a formula from one cell to other cells in the same column, here ‘copy paste’ by default will copy paste the formula and not the content. This 'copy' and 'paste' of formula is not useful, when you want to 'fix' one value in our formula.&lt;br /&gt;
* For instance, if you are computing 'Percentage of total' in the example of Average annual rainfall (cms) then, You can input in column ''C2 &amp;quot;=B2*100/B16&amp;quot;''. If you copy this cell C2 to C3, Calc will change the formula to &amp;quot;''=B3*100/B17''&amp;quot;, since it will increment both numerator and denominator cells.&lt;br /&gt;
* However consider you want to fix the denominator to '''B16''&amp;lt;nowiki/&amp;gt;'. To 'fix' the reference, you should insert '$' before the cell reference. So you should give formula ''C2 &amp;quot;=B2*100/B$16''&amp;quot; since you want to fix the value in the 16th row. When you copy paste the formula to C3, it will copy as &amp;quot;''=B3*100/B$16''&amp;quot;, which is what you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Sorting the data ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;320&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO_Calc_4_Sorting_data.png|Sorting the Data&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can sort the data in anyway you want. You could sort it on the descending order of the rainfall (Column B) to see the data by the cities with the heaviest rainfall at the top. You can sort the data by cities (Column B).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} You should select the entire sheet (&amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Select All&amp;quot;, or simply Ctrl+ A) or keep the cursor on a single cell, else you may sort only the data selected which will be incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Preparing charts and graphs====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:LO_Calc_7_Inserting_a_chart.png|Selecting data for inserting charts&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Calc Data range.png|thumb|Selected Data Range&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Calc Dataranges.png|thumb|Renaming the Legend&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Calc finalchart.png|thumb|Chart showing the annual rainfall&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the data (columns A and B) and select &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Chart&amp;quot; option. You will get the chart wizard. You can select Bar chart to get a Bar chart of the rainfall. You should experiment with different graphical formats to learn about all the other charts.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the Data Range. In this example it is A2 to B15.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;Data series&amp;quot; column name on the left and on the right side modify the &amp;quot;Range for name&amp;quot; as done in the above image (Data Series image). At first it will show you the name of the column as &amp;quot;Column B&amp;quot;. But if you want to modify it as the name of the column as mentioned in the spreadsheet then click on the &amp;quot;Name&amp;quot; in the &amp;quot;Data Ranges&amp;quot; table. Click on small icon which says &amp;quot;Select Data Range&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; A small window appears where you must click on the Column B1. Automatically it will consider the clicked column as the name for that field. Click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Last window Give the title if you want it to be appeared on the top of the chart. Click &amp;quot;Finish&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Working with Pivot tables ====&lt;br /&gt;
The pivot table (formerly known as Data Pilot) allows you to combine, compare, and analyze large amounts of data. You can view different summaries of the source data, you can display the details of areas of interest, and you can create reports. A table that has been created as a pivot table is an interactive table. Data can be arranged, rearranged or summarized according to different points of view.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:1. LO Calc Pivot 1. data sheet.png|Data sheet&lt;br /&gt;
File:2. LO Calc Pivot 2. Inserting pivot.png|Inserting Pivot&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Position the cursor within a range of cells containing values, row and column headings. &lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Pivot Table --&amp;gt; Create&amp;quot;. The Select Source dialog appears. Choose Current selection and confirm with OK. &lt;br /&gt;
# The table headings are shown as buttons in the Pivot Table dialog. Drag these buttons as required and drop them into the layout areas &amp;quot;Page Fields&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Column Fields&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Row Fields&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Data Fields&amp;quot;. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drag the desired buttons into one of the four areas.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
File:3. LO Calc Data Pivot 3. Current Selection.png|Selection wizard &lt;br /&gt;
File:4. LO Calc Data Pivot 4. Pivot form.png|Pivot Table wizard &amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Drag a button to the &amp;quot;Page Fields&amp;quot; area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated pivot table. The listbox can be used to filter the pivot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated pivot table to use another page field as a filter. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Insert data, row and column fields.png|Insert data, row and column fields&lt;br /&gt;
File:Revising the data pilot for a new table.png|Revising the data pivot for a new table&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the button is dropped in the &amp;quot;Data Fields&amp;quot; area it will be given a caption that also shows the formula that will be used to calculate the data. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* By double-clicking on one of the fields in the &amp;quot;Data Fields&amp;quot; area you can call up the '''&amp;quot;'''Data Field&amp;quot; dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the &amp;quot;Data Field&amp;quot; dialog to select the calculations to be used for the data. To make a multiple selection, press the &amp;quot;Ctrl&amp;quot; key while clicking the desired calculation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Print Preview ====&lt;br /&gt;
Before printing any document you must make sure about the overall preview of the page. So get that you can click on &amp;quot;File--&amp;gt; Print Preview&amp;quot;. This gives user the broader idea of how the printed material looks like.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LO Calc Margin.png|thumb|Setting the margin ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on margin icon for the flexible movement of margins in the spreadsheet.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on &amp;quot;Format Page&amp;quot; option to get various options such as &amp;quot;Page settings&amp;quot; to get the orientation of the page, Page borders to choose the style of the border, Inserting Header, Footer and other settings can be done.&lt;br /&gt;
In the image dotted lines represent the margins. They can be adjusted according to the printing needs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before printing the document go through these tips:&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the &amp;quot;text wrap&amp;quot; feature to wrap all the text input in a cell so that it won’t overflow to the next cell.&lt;br /&gt;
# Increase or reduce the column width so that all columns you want to print are included.&lt;br /&gt;
# Delete (or hide) columns if you don’t want them in the printout.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use &amp;quot;Format --&amp;gt; Page&amp;quot; option to insert header / footer information, such as file name, page number etc. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use &amp;quot;Print preview&amp;quot; feature to keep checking if the formatting is satisfactory &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding Page Header or Footer ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Calc Header Footer.png|Header/Footer option in Print Preview&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Calc Header Footer2.png|Adding Header/Footer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;Header or Footers make the document a neat presentation. Text added to the top of the margin is a Header. Text added to the bottom of the margin is a Footer. Header can include the name of the Book, Chapter name etc, whereas Footer may indicate the page number. In the &amp;quot;Print Preview&amp;quot; option, there will be a &amp;quot;Header and Footer&amp;quot; option as shown in the above image (Header/Footer option in Print Preview).  Once clicked it gives you three areas where you can insert the Header, that is Left area, Center area and Right area. You can add the text at any area to apply it to all the pages. The same is applicable for Foote&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Saving the files and formats ====&lt;br /&gt;
# Like in most applications, a file can be saved using the File –-&amp;gt; Save command, or by the shortcut key Ctrl+S. Always give a meaningful file name, reading which you should get an idea of the file contents. This file has been named “''Rainfall information for cities in South India, October 2016.ods''”. Often adding the month-year information when the file was created can be useful later.&lt;br /&gt;
# The files will be saved as &amp;quot;.ods&amp;quot;. You can save a spreadsheet as a Microsoft Excel format also (&amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Save As&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
# Main difference between &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Save As&amp;quot; is that Save Saves the document whereas Save As saves the document with another name.&lt;br /&gt;
The file you worked with can be exported to a PDF format. This is useful when you only need to print the file and do not want any changes to it. All the settings need to be done in the LibreOffice Calc and can be converted to PDF format.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Calc Export to PDF.png|Exporting the file to PDF&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, &amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Export as PDF&amp;quot;. A window appears which lets you to change the default settings. You can do the required changes and click &amp;quot;Export&amp;quot;. In the next window it asks you to give the path where to export the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Advanced features ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Calc is a very sophisticated software application and can even be used as a database, by cross referring data across sheets and books. &lt;br /&gt;
* You can also generate multi-variate tables using the 'Pivot' feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* The 'functions' in Calc are many and can meet statistical, logical, textual, mathematical functions which can be useful for exploring topics in Mathematics and Statistics.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can use Calc to store contact information, which can be used along with the Thunderbird email client, to generate customized mass email messages (this functionality is called 'mail merge').&lt;br /&gt;
* User defined formulae can be created and added to make the application more relatable.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can repeat the column or row headings automatically across printed  pages (hint – define print area). You can refer the references section for learning these advanced features.&lt;br /&gt;
* Vlookup is an interesting feature with which you can query for a particular information using a simple syntax. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ideas for resource creation===&lt;br /&gt;
# Calc can be used for analyzing data sets generated by your students as part of projects. Large secondary data sets can also be analyzed.  Some of these project ideas include information about family members, houses in the area, crops / vegetation in the area, goods sold and prices in local shop and programs of the local government and budgets etc. The collected information can be analyzed and published in tabular cum graph formats. &lt;br /&gt;
# Spreadsheets are also useful for helping solving numeric puzzles by setting up formulas and extrapolating. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/LibreOffice_Calc Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://help.libreoffice.org/scalc/.uno:HelpIndex?Language=en-US&amp;amp;System=UNIX&amp;amp;Version=5.2 User manual for LO Calc] &lt;br /&gt;
#[https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/community-support Community support]&lt;br /&gt;
#Videos to learn LO Calc are available in English, Telugu and other Indian languages on the [http://spoken-tutorial.org/tutorial-search/?search_foss=LibreOffice+Suite+Calc&amp;amp;search_language=Telugu Spoken-tutorials] site, created by the NMEICT program of MHRD.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_LibreOffice_Writer&amp;diff=13697</id>
		<title>Learn LibreOffice Writer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_LibreOffice_Writer&amp;diff=13697"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T11:24:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Installation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%B2%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%AC%E0%A4%B0%E0%A5%87%E0%A4%91%E0%A4%AB%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%B8_%E0%A4%B0%E0%A4%BE%E0%A4%87%E0%A4%9F%E0%A4%B0_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%AF%E0%A5%87 हिंदी मे देखिये] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AC%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%86_%E0%B2%86%E0%B2%AB%E0%B3%80%E0%B2%B8%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%88%E0%B2%9F%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]'' &lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:Book-sidebar}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
LibreOffice Writer is the free and open-source text editor application of the LibreOffice software package. Writer is a text editor similar to Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT for creating generic resources&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|LibreOffice Writer is a software used for creating (including writing, editing, formatting, and possibly printing) text resources. Apart from entering and editing text, you can insert images and links also. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|LibreOffice Writer is also available on the Windows (visit [https://libreoffice.org/download/download/?type=win-x86_64&amp;amp;version=6.3.3&amp;amp;lang=en-US download LibreOffice on Windows] to install LibreOffice on a Windows system) and Macintosh operating systems.&lt;br /&gt;
This tool has no specific configuration requirements but in this application you can use many extra features by installing [https://extensions.libreoffice.org/extensions extensions]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://products.office.com/en-in/word Microsoft Word], [https://www.openoffice.org/product/writer.html OpenOffice writer], [https://www.google.co.in/docs/about/ Google Docs]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.collabora.libreoffice Collabora Office for Android] and [https://www.libreoffice.org/download/android-and-ios/ for iOS] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://documentation.libreoffice.org/assets/Uploads/Documentation/en/WG7.2/WG72-WriterGuide.pdf The Document Foundation]&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/community-support/ Community help]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of features ====&lt;br /&gt;
LibreOffice Writer lets you design and produce text documents that can include graphics, tables, or charts. In this application you can save the documents in a variety of formats, including the standardized Open Document Format (ODF), Microsoft Word format(.doc), or HTML. Here you can easily export your document to the Portable Document Format(PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
Please click on the below link to learn about LibreOffice Installation &amp;amp; Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/LibreOffice_Installation_and_Configuration Click here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Starting a new document ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== From the Start Center =====&lt;br /&gt;
You can start a new, blank document in Writer in several ways. If a document is already open in LibreOffice, the new document opens in a new window.&lt;br /&gt;
* From the Start Center&lt;br /&gt;
When LibreOffice is open but no document is open, the Start Center is shown. Click the Create: Writer Document button to create a new text document.&lt;br /&gt;
* From the operating system menu&lt;br /&gt;
You can open the LibreOffice Start Center or the Writer component from the operating system menu in the same way that you start other programs. When LibreOffice was installed on your computer, in most cases a menu entry for each component was added to the system menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LibreOfficeStartCenter.png|LibreOffice start center&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Opening an existing document =====&lt;br /&gt;
You can open an existing document in any of the following options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Option1: Choose '''&amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Open&amp;quot;''' on the Menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Option2: Press '''&amp;quot;Ctrl+O'''&amp;quot; on the keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Option3: Click on the &amp;quot;'''Open icon'''&amp;quot; on the Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
==== LibreOffice Writer interface ====&lt;br /&gt;
The LibreOffice menu bar has multiple options for file operations including saving, editing, viewing the document, inserting images, links, tables, etc in the document and formatting and defining styles in the document. The commonly used parts of the window are discussed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;LibreOffice Writer menu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Writer Menu Bar window.png|LibreOffice Writer (Parts of the window) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''1. Title bar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Title bar is located at the top of the Writer window. It shows the file name of the current document. When the document is not yet named, the document name will appear as Untitled X, where X is a number. Untitled documents are numbered in the order in which they are created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2. Menu bar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Menu bar is located just below the Title bar in Windows and Linux and at the top of the screen in macOS. When you select one of the menus, a sub menu drops down to show further options,including:&lt;br /&gt;
# Commands that directly cause an action, such as Close or Save, in the File menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Commands that open further sub menus.&lt;br /&gt;
'''3. Standard toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a default LibreOffice installation , the top toolbar, just under the Menu bar, is called the Standard toolbar. This gives quick access to different types of elements and tools to the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''4. Formatting toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second toolbar at the top is the Formatting toolbar. It is context-sensitive; that is, it shows the tools relevant to the current position of the cursor or the selected object. For example, when the cursor is in text, the Formatting toolbar provides tools for formatting text. When the cursor is on a graphic (image), the tools are for formatting images. Other toolbars are available at &amp;quot;View --&amp;gt; Toolbars&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''5. Rulers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The horizontal ruler across the top of the workspace is visible by default but the vertical ruler on the left is hidden by default. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the vertical ruler, choose &amp;quot;View --&amp;gt; Rulers --&amp;gt; Vertical Ruler&amp;quot; from the Menu bar, or choose &amp;quot;Tools --&amp;gt; Options --&amp;gt; LibreOffice Writer --&amp;gt; View&amp;quot;. To quickly show or hide both rulers, use the key combination &amp;quot;Ctrl+Shift+R&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Editing document====&lt;br /&gt;
You can start adding the text from where the cursor blinks. You can also reposition cursor as per the requirement in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Cursor&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Cursor blink.png|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing default fonts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing the Font settings in Writer.png|Changing the Font settings in Writer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* LibreOffice Writer has some of the fonts set by default which can be customized any point of time. &lt;br /&gt;
* To do this, Go to &amp;quot;Tools--&amp;gt;Options&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the left panel &amp;quot;Double click on LibreOffice Writer--&amp;gt; Click on Basic Fonts (Western)&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Right side panel shows you the things that are fonts setup for your software by default. It is further classified as Default, Heading, List, Caption and Index. Based on your requirement you can click the drop down on their respective options and change the Font. Also note that you can customize the font size. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you are done, &amp;quot;Click Apply--&amp;gt;OK&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Cut, copy, and paste text ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Using cut, copy and paste options are similar to any other applications. You can copy or move text, image or any other objects within a document, or between documents. These features can be used by dragging or by using keyboard shortcuts. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} You can also copy text from other sources such as Web pages and paste it into a text document.&lt;br /&gt;
* To move (drag and drop) selected text using the mouse, drag it to the new location and release it; the cursor changes shape while dragging. To copy selected text, hold down the Ctrl key while dragging. The text retains the formatting it had before dragging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To move (cut and paste) selected text, use &amp;quot;Ctrl+X&amp;quot; to cut the text, insert the cursor at the paste-in point and use &amp;quot;Ctrl+V&amp;quot; to paste. Alternatively, use the buttons on the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When you paste text, the result depends on the source of the text and how you paste it. If you click the Paste button, then the pasted text keeps its original formatting (such as bold or italics). Text pasted from Web sites and other sources may be placed automatically into frames or tables as part of the format when you paste. If you do not like the results, click the Undo button or press &amp;quot;Ctrl+Z&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
To make the pasted text show the paragraph style at the insertion point:&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Paste Special&amp;quot;, or&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the arrow on the combination Paste button, or&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Paste&amp;quot; button without releasing the left mouse button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy text.png| Copy text&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy image.png|Copy image&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using text formatting ====&lt;br /&gt;
The format option is for changing the text styles like text font, text size and text color options. For many of these options, we can use shortcut icons from formatting toolbar as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Format features.png|Formatting properties&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
# Font name: Choose font name from dropdown &lt;br /&gt;
# Font size: Choose font size from the dropdown &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text '''Bold''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text ''Italic'' &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text strikethrough(Eg: &amp;lt;s&amp;gt;strikethrough&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text as superscript &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text as subscript &lt;br /&gt;
# Choose Font color from the dropdown &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text to highlight with color &lt;br /&gt;
# Change the background color &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Using Bulleting and Numbering''' ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Bullets and Numbering feature on the formatting toolbar can be used to create nested lists and access the Bullets and Numbering dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
# To add the bullets and numbers to text information, choose &amp;quot;Format --&amp;gt; Bullets and Numbering&amp;quot;. You can also select the different symbols of bullets and numbers here. You can also find the Bullets and Numbers in the formatting toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
# An important feature of Writer is to enable you present your information through simple and short points ('bullet points').&lt;br /&gt;
# For the selected text input that has been entered, go to &amp;quot;Format --&amp;gt; Select Bullets and Numbering&amp;quot; and choose the numbering type that is needed.  You can create sub-numbered lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bulleting numbering.png| Bulleting and Numbering &lt;br /&gt;
File:Bulleting.png|Bulleting Dialogue&lt;br /&gt;
File:Numbering.png|Numbering &amp;amp; Alphabetical Dialogue&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using paragraph formatting ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can apply many formats to paragraphs using the icons on the Formatting toolbar. Other formatting options are provided under the format option from the menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Formatting toolbar, the icons and formats include( As labeled in below paragraph properties image)&lt;br /&gt;
# Apply &amp;quot;Paragraph Style&amp;quot; from formatting toolbar .&lt;br /&gt;
# Align Left, Center Horizontally, Align Right, or Justified.&lt;br /&gt;
# Line Spacing (choose from 1, 1.15, 1.5, 2, or custom spacing. Line spacing refers to the distance from one baseline (the imaginary line at the bottom of a letter like “n” or “m”) to the next baseline. It is determined by the size of the font.&lt;br /&gt;
# Increase Paragraph Spacing, Decrease Paragraph Spacing. (Paragraph spacing refers to the vertical spacing between one paragraph and the paragraphs above and below it&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
# Increase Indent, Decrease Indent.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Paragraph properties.png|Paragraph properties&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserting &amp;amp; Formatting Images ====&lt;br /&gt;
#The insert menu option is for inserting images, hyperlinks, charts, page numbers, page breaks, formulas and etc...  &lt;br /&gt;
#To insert an image, Go to &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Image&amp;quot; This will open a folder from which images are to be inserted (Images need to be browsed from your computer local folders).&lt;br /&gt;
#The inserted image (triangle) will looks like below &amp;quot;Inserted Image View&amp;quot; image.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Insert images.png|Insert Menu&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO_Writer_9_Insert_image.png|Inserting Image&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO_Writer_10_Inserted_Image.png|Inserted Image View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After you insert any image if you want to resize (height*width), &amp;quot;Click on the image and select any of the dots on the corner of the image and drag to increase or decrease the size of the image&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Editing image =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Using the Crop tool: To use the Crop tool &amp;quot;Click on the Crop icon&amp;quot; as shown in Image1 or right-click on the image and select Crop from the context menu. Cropping handles appear at the corners and mid-points of the sides of the image. Drag a handle to cut off part of the image. Click outside the image to turn off cropping mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Compressing images (&amp;quot;Inserting Image&amp;quot; image)&lt;br /&gt;
* If you insert a large image in your document and resize it to fit into the layout of the page, the complete original image is stored in the document file to preserve its content, resulting in a large document file to store or send by mail.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you can accept some loss of quality of the image rendering, you can compress or resize the image object to reduce its data volume while preserving its display in the page layout. You probably don’t want to compress something that will be professionally printed. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Right-click to select the image and open the context menu&amp;quot;. Then choose &amp;quot;Compress&amp;quot; to open the Compress Image dialog. Click &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to apply the compression settings. If the resulting image is not acceptable, press &amp;quot;Ctrl+Z&amp;quot; to undo and choose another compression setting.&lt;br /&gt;
3. Transparency: set the transparency options for the image using this button as shown in Image1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Rotating images: Rotate images if required using button showed in Image1:Image Formatting features&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Image editng.png|Image1: Image Formatting features&lt;br /&gt;
File:Compress Image.png|Image 2: Image compressing window&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserting &amp;amp; Formatting Table ====&lt;br /&gt;
* To insert Table, go to &amp;quot;Table&amp;quot; from Menu bar and select &amp;quot;Insert Table&amp;quot;, in given window choose required number of rows and columns. Alternatively you can also insert table from standard toolbar, Click on &amp;quot;table grid&amp;quot; from toolbar and move the cursor over the grid until you highlight the number of columns and rows you want. Click and the table appears in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can format your table by selecting the options in 'Table'. Move your cursor inside the table and &amp;quot;Select --&amp;gt; Table&amp;quot;. You can then adjust the row and column widths (&amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Size&amp;quot;), add or remove borders (&amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Properties --&amp;gt; Borders&amp;quot;), split or merge cells (&amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Merge Cells&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Split Cells&amp;quot;) etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can also copy data from a spreadsheet. You can simply copy that data (in rows and columns) from the spreadsheet and paste into the document, it will create a copy of the spreadsheet in your document. If you do not want it as a spreadsheet, but only as a table, you need to select &amp;quot;Paste Special -&amp;gt; Formatted text option&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Inserting Table&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Inert table in LOW.png|Insert Table&lt;br /&gt;
File:Format Table in LOW.png|Select rows and columns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Table Formatting.png|Table Formatting&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Align text to the top, middle and to the bottom&lt;br /&gt;
# Apply Borders to cells and tables&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert caption for the table&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Finding and replacing text ====&lt;br /&gt;
Writer has two ways to find text within a document: The Find toolbar for fast searching and the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog. If the Find toolbar is not visible, you can display it by choosing &amp;quot;View --&amp;gt; Toolbars --&amp;gt; Find&amp;quot; from the Menu bar or by pressing &amp;quot;Ctrl+F&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Using the Find toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To use the &amp;quot;Find&amp;quot; toolbar, click in the text input box and type your search text, then press &amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot; to find the next occurrence of that term from the current cursor position. Click the &amp;quot;Find Next&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Find Previous&amp;quot; buttons as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the &amp;quot;Find All&amp;quot; button to select all instances of the search term within the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Using the Find toolbar.png|Using the Find toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Using the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To display the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog, use the keyboard shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+H&amp;quot;, or choose &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Find &amp;amp; Replace&amp;quot; from the Menu bar. Use the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog:&lt;br /&gt;
* Type the text you want to find in the Find box.&lt;br /&gt;
* To replace the text with different text, type the new text in the Replace box.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can select various options, such as matching the case or matching whole words only. The other options include searching only in selected text, searching from the current cursor position backwards toward the beginning of the document, searching for similar words, and searching in comments.&lt;br /&gt;
* When you have set up your search, click &amp;quot;Find Next&amp;quot;. As the document view moves to each found instance, replace the text by clicking &amp;quot;Replace&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Expanded Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog.png|Expanded Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating an automatic Table of Contents====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Often it is useful to create text documents which are organize into headings and sub headings to denote different sections.  This can be done in two ways,&lt;br /&gt;
##You can select the text you want to define as a heading and choose from the predefined headings style, by selecting from the first drop down box as shown in the first image.&lt;br /&gt;
##You can also define this from the Style menu by clicking on Style and selecting the given heading.  &lt;br /&gt;
##You can define the appearance of each heading under the Styles and formatting option by changing the default font colour, size, etc.  &lt;br /&gt;
#Once the headings are defined, you can insert the Table of Contents.  Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents. Choose &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Table of Contents and Index --&amp;gt; Index Entry&amp;quot;, just click on “OK”.  For updating table of content,  right click on the table of content and Update Index or Table of Contents. Note that if you add any headings in the document, it will not automatically update the Table of Contents, hence you will need to come to the Table of Contents and do the update manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Inserting Table of Content&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding paragrapgh style.png|Paragraph style for Table of Content&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding TOC into the document.png|Insert Table of Content&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding page header and footer ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# You can add a header and/or footer to your document. You could provide the name of the document (or any other static information) in the footer. You can also insert page number in the header or the footer, which will be dynamically generated by Writer. It is useful to have page number and name of your document on every page, this is specially useful if the reader wants to read a print copy. LibreOffice Writer allows you to easily insert this information at the bottom or top of each page. This can be done using &amp;quot;Insert---&amp;gt;Footer&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once a footer has been inserted, you can go to the bottom of the page and insert multiple fields of information using &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Fields&amp;quot;. You can type any text in this footer, it will come on all pages. Other than page number, other dynamic information you can provide is the date/time stamp of the document. A similar method can also be adopted for inserting a header as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LOWriter - Header and footers.png| Adding header and footers for the page&lt;br /&gt;
File:LOWriter adding fields.png| Inserting page fields&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Spelling check ====&lt;br /&gt;
#Spelling - By enabling &amp;quot;Automatic spell checking&amp;quot; under Tools, you can check spelling within your document. You will see a red underline below a word spelt wrongly. (If you see a green line below a word, it suggests a grammatical error). You can move your cursor to the word and right click to get suggestions for correcting the spelling. In case you are clear your word is correct, you can also &amp;quot;Add your word to the dictionary&amp;quot; so that the next time you use it, it will not be treated as a wrong spelling.&lt;br /&gt;
#You can also do a manual spelling and grammar checking of the document. Select the text and click on &amp;quot;spelling and grammar&amp;quot; under &amp;quot;Tools&amp;quot; option. it will start looking spelling and grammar for the document. It is a good habit to always run a spelling check on your document before sharing.&lt;br /&gt;
#To check the spelling and the grammar of a text, the appropriate dictionaries must be installed. You can have dictionaries for your own language (Telugu, Urdu etc) installed, apart from the one in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Formatting in LibreOffice Writer&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Auto spell checking LO writer .png|Auto spell checking  &lt;br /&gt;
File:Checking spelling and grammar by manually .png|Spelling and grammar checking&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Customizing the Toolbar ====&lt;br /&gt;
* LibreOffice is a Open source application and therefore it allows the users to customize the interface. &lt;br /&gt;
* Menu is most useful section of Writer and its structure must be familiar to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* The structure of menu and its items can be customized easily so that it becomes user friendly.&lt;br /&gt;
* To do this, go to &amp;quot;Tools--&amp;gt;Customize&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Customize window will be having all the &amp;quot;Available Command&amp;quot; list on the left side. &amp;quot;Assigned command&amp;quot; on the right. If you want to remove the already assigned command then click on that particular command on the Assigned command list and move it towards Available command by clicking the left arrow button.&lt;br /&gt;
* Similarly if you want an additional command to your menu then choose the command from the &amp;quot;Available command&amp;quot; list. Click right arrow button to move it to the &amp;quot;Assigned command&amp;quot; list.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can also change the name of a particular command  by clicking that command and click on &amp;quot;Modify --&amp;gt; Rename&amp;quot;. Give the new name to that menu and click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Checked and Unchecked Toolbar.png|Customizing Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* To customize Toolbar, click on &amp;quot;Toolbar&amp;quot; tab in Customize window. As explained earlier, &amp;quot;Assigned Commands&amp;quot; will be having list of tools. The checked tools are already there in the toolbar and unchecked ones are available to move them to the toolbar. If you want any particular tool to be easily accessible and move to the toolbar then just check mark those and click &amp;quot;Apply--&amp;gt;OK&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the way you can change or assign the Keyboard shortcuts. For this Click on Keyboard tab in the Customize window. You can choose a command and click on &amp;quot;Modify?&amp;quot; to change its shortcut or functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Tools Language select.png|Menubar tools&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO language interface language settings, user interface.jpg|Languages interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tracking changes to a document ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can use several methods to keep track of changes made to a document.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make your changes to a copy of the document (stored in a different folder, under a different name, or both), then use Writer to compare the two files and show the changes you made. This technique is particularly useful if you are the only person working on the document, as it avoids the increase in file size and complexity caused by the other methods.&lt;br /&gt;
* Save versions that are stored as part of the original file. However, this method can cause problems with large or complex documents, especially if you save a lot of versions. Avoid this method if you can.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use Writer’s change marks (often called “revision marks”) to show added or deleted material or changed formatting. Later, you or another person can review and accept or reject each change.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Preparing a document for review'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you send a document to someone else to review or edit, you may want to prepare it first so that the editor or reviewer does not have to remember to turn on the revision marks. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the document. Check whether it contains multiple versions by clicking &amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Versions&amp;quot;. If multiple versions are listed, save the current version as a separate document with a different name and use this new document as the review copy.&lt;br /&gt;
* With the review copy open, make sure that change recording is turned on. The &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Record Changes&amp;quot; menu item has a check mark next to it when recording is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
* To begin tracking (recording) changes, click &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Record Changes&amp;quot;. To show or hide the display of changes, click &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Show Changes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To stop recording changes, click &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Record Changes&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
The results of accepting or rejecting a change are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Accept: Incorporates the alteration into the document and removes the change indication marking.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reject: Reverts the document to its original state and removes the change indication marking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Page orientation within the document ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Create a New Style.png|Creating a new style&lt;br /&gt;
File:Giving a name for a style.png|Giving a name for a style&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing Page Orientation.png|Changing page orientation&lt;br /&gt;
File:Inserting a page break1.png|Inserting a page break &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* LibreOffice Writer allows you to change the page orientation in between the document as per your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
* For example, If you have a document having data of three pages you can make the second page landscape and rest two to remain as portrait orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
* To do this, first go to sidebar of Writer. Click on &amp;quot;Styles --&amp;gt; Page styles&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* On the Page style list page, &amp;quot;right click --&amp;gt; New&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the new page style window click on &amp;quot;Organizer tab --&amp;gt; Enter a new name to the style --&amp;gt; Choose the 'Default style' as Next style&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to the &amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; tab --&amp;gt; Change the orientation as Landscape&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click &amp;quot;Apply --&amp;gt; OK&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Place the position of the cursor to the place where you need to change the orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on Insert --&amp;gt; More Breaks --&amp;gt; Manual Break&amp;quot;. You will get a new window called &amp;quot;Insert Break&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* In this window, choose the type “Page break” and name of the style you have given earlier as the style name.&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes it may happen that your cursor point becomes Landscape but remaining pages also changes their orientation and become Landscape. The solution for this is,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Place the cursor from which you want your orientation to be Portrait. Click on Insert --&amp;gt; More Breaks --&amp;gt; Manual Break&amp;quot;. You will get a new window called &amp;quot;Insert Break&amp;quot;. In this window, choose the type “Page break” and name of the style as Default Style. (Usually this Default style will be having the page orientation as portrait. In this way your can make the rest of the pages again as Portrait. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving the file====&lt;br /&gt;
* Like in most applications, a file can be saved using the &amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Save&amp;quot; command, or by the shortcut key &amp;quot;Ctrl+S&amp;quot;. Always give a meaningful file name, reading which you should get an idea of the file contents. Often adding the month-year information when the file was created can be useful later File will save in .odt format, ODT is the short form of Open Document Text. ODT conforms to Open Document Format (ODF) which is recommended by the Government of India through its website [https://india.gov.in/policy-open-standards-e-governance Policy on open standards]””.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Like in most applications, a file can be exported to a PDF format. This is useful when you only need to print the file and do not want any changes to it. You can also export a document to a 'html' (web page) format, which can be opened by a web browser or MS word format which is supported by Windows operating system.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Save as odt.png| Save as ODT&lt;br /&gt;
File:Export as PDF.png|Export as PDF&lt;br /&gt;
File:Save as Doc.png| Save in MS word format&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://help.libreoffice.org/Common/Track_Changes Track changes] (Recording editing changes by another person in another colour in the document, which can be accepted or rejected by the author)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://help.libreoffice.org/Writer/Columns Multiple columns] (Useful for making newsletters and magazines) and other page layout functions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ideas for resource creation===&lt;br /&gt;
# You can use this application to create and edit text resources. You can insert images, web links, hyper links in the document and connect the text to other resource formats. You can insert and edit tables, create sections (with section headings) and format it in many ways to create a text document.   &lt;br /&gt;
# Infographics, posters, comic strips are some resources you can create using text editors in addition to making reports. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://help.libreoffice.org/Main_Page LibreOffice page]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/LibreOffice_Writer Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_LibreOffice_Writer&amp;diff=13696</id>
		<title>Learn LibreOffice Writer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_LibreOffice_Writer&amp;diff=13696"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T11:24:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%B2%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%AC%E0%A4%B0%E0%A5%87%E0%A4%91%E0%A4%AB%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%B8_%E0%A4%B0%E0%A4%BE%E0%A4%87%E0%A4%9F%E0%A4%B0_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%AF%E0%A5%87 हिंदी मे देखिये] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AC%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%86_%E0%B2%86%E0%B2%AB%E0%B3%80%E0%B2%B8%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%88%E0%B2%9F%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]'' &lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:Book-sidebar}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
LibreOffice Writer is the free and open-source text editor application of the LibreOffice software package. Writer is a text editor similar to Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT for creating generic resources&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|LibreOffice Writer is a software used for creating (including writing, editing, formatting, and possibly printing) text resources. Apart from entering and editing text, you can insert images and links also. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|LibreOffice Writer is also available on the Windows (visit [https://libreoffice.org/download/download/?type=win-x86_64&amp;amp;version=6.3.3&amp;amp;lang=en-US download LibreOffice on Windows] to install LibreOffice on a Windows system) and Macintosh operating systems.&lt;br /&gt;
This tool has no specific configuration requirements but in this application you can use many extra features by installing [https://extensions.libreoffice.org/extensions extensions]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://products.office.com/en-in/word Microsoft Word], [https://www.openoffice.org/product/writer.html OpenOffice writer], [https://www.google.co.in/docs/about/ Google Docs]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.collabora.libreoffice Collabora Office for Android] and [https://www.libreoffice.org/download/android-and-ios/ for iOS] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://documentation.libreoffice.org/assets/Uploads/Documentation/en/WG7.2/WG72-WriterGuide.pdf The Document Foundation]&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/community-support/ Community help]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of features ====&lt;br /&gt;
LibreOffice Writer lets you design and produce text documents that can include graphics, tables, or charts. In this application you can save the documents in a variety of formats, including the standardized Open Document Format (ODF), Microsoft Word format(.doc), or HTML. Here you can easily export your document to the Portable Document Format(PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
Please go through the below link to learn about LibreOffice installation &amp;amp; Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/LibreOffice_Installation_and_Configuration Click here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Starting a new document ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== From the Start Center =====&lt;br /&gt;
You can start a new, blank document in Writer in several ways. If a document is already open in LibreOffice, the new document opens in a new window.&lt;br /&gt;
* From the Start Center&lt;br /&gt;
When LibreOffice is open but no document is open, the Start Center is shown. Click the Create: Writer Document button to create a new text document.&lt;br /&gt;
* From the operating system menu&lt;br /&gt;
You can open the LibreOffice Start Center or the Writer component from the operating system menu in the same way that you start other programs. When LibreOffice was installed on your computer, in most cases a menu entry for each component was added to the system menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LibreOfficeStartCenter.png|LibreOffice start center&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Opening an existing document =====&lt;br /&gt;
You can open an existing document in any of the following options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Option1: Choose '''&amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Open&amp;quot;''' on the Menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Option2: Press '''&amp;quot;Ctrl+O'''&amp;quot; on the keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Option3: Click on the &amp;quot;'''Open icon'''&amp;quot; on the Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
==== LibreOffice Writer interface ====&lt;br /&gt;
The LibreOffice menu bar has multiple options for file operations including saving, editing, viewing the document, inserting images, links, tables, etc in the document and formatting and defining styles in the document. The commonly used parts of the window are discussed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;LibreOffice Writer menu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Writer Menu Bar window.png|LibreOffice Writer (Parts of the window) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''1. Title bar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Title bar is located at the top of the Writer window. It shows the file name of the current document. When the document is not yet named, the document name will appear as Untitled X, where X is a number. Untitled documents are numbered in the order in which they are created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2. Menu bar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Menu bar is located just below the Title bar in Windows and Linux and at the top of the screen in macOS. When you select one of the menus, a sub menu drops down to show further options,including:&lt;br /&gt;
# Commands that directly cause an action, such as Close or Save, in the File menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Commands that open further sub menus.&lt;br /&gt;
'''3. Standard toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a default LibreOffice installation , the top toolbar, just under the Menu bar, is called the Standard toolbar. This gives quick access to different types of elements and tools to the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''4. Formatting toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second toolbar at the top is the Formatting toolbar. It is context-sensitive; that is, it shows the tools relevant to the current position of the cursor or the selected object. For example, when the cursor is in text, the Formatting toolbar provides tools for formatting text. When the cursor is on a graphic (image), the tools are for formatting images. Other toolbars are available at &amp;quot;View --&amp;gt; Toolbars&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''5. Rulers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The horizontal ruler across the top of the workspace is visible by default but the vertical ruler on the left is hidden by default. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the vertical ruler, choose &amp;quot;View --&amp;gt; Rulers --&amp;gt; Vertical Ruler&amp;quot; from the Menu bar, or choose &amp;quot;Tools --&amp;gt; Options --&amp;gt; LibreOffice Writer --&amp;gt; View&amp;quot;. To quickly show or hide both rulers, use the key combination &amp;quot;Ctrl+Shift+R&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Editing document====&lt;br /&gt;
You can start adding the text from where the cursor blinks. You can also reposition cursor as per the requirement in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Cursor&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Cursor blink.png|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing default fonts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing the Font settings in Writer.png|Changing the Font settings in Writer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* LibreOffice Writer has some of the fonts set by default which can be customized any point of time. &lt;br /&gt;
* To do this, Go to &amp;quot;Tools--&amp;gt;Options&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the left panel &amp;quot;Double click on LibreOffice Writer--&amp;gt; Click on Basic Fonts (Western)&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Right side panel shows you the things that are fonts setup for your software by default. It is further classified as Default, Heading, List, Caption and Index. Based on your requirement you can click the drop down on their respective options and change the Font. Also note that you can customize the font size. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you are done, &amp;quot;Click Apply--&amp;gt;OK&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Cut, copy, and paste text ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Using cut, copy and paste options are similar to any other applications. You can copy or move text, image or any other objects within a document, or between documents. These features can be used by dragging or by using keyboard shortcuts. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} You can also copy text from other sources such as Web pages and paste it into a text document.&lt;br /&gt;
* To move (drag and drop) selected text using the mouse, drag it to the new location and release it; the cursor changes shape while dragging. To copy selected text, hold down the Ctrl key while dragging. The text retains the formatting it had before dragging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To move (cut and paste) selected text, use &amp;quot;Ctrl+X&amp;quot; to cut the text, insert the cursor at the paste-in point and use &amp;quot;Ctrl+V&amp;quot; to paste. Alternatively, use the buttons on the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When you paste text, the result depends on the source of the text and how you paste it. If you click the Paste button, then the pasted text keeps its original formatting (such as bold or italics). Text pasted from Web sites and other sources may be placed automatically into frames or tables as part of the format when you paste. If you do not like the results, click the Undo button or press &amp;quot;Ctrl+Z&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
To make the pasted text show the paragraph style at the insertion point:&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Paste Special&amp;quot;, or&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the arrow on the combination Paste button, or&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Paste&amp;quot; button without releasing the left mouse button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy text.png| Copy text&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy image.png|Copy image&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using text formatting ====&lt;br /&gt;
The format option is for changing the text styles like text font, text size and text color options. For many of these options, we can use shortcut icons from formatting toolbar as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Format features.png|Formatting properties&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
# Font name: Choose font name from dropdown &lt;br /&gt;
# Font size: Choose font size from the dropdown &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text '''Bold''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text ''Italic'' &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text strikethrough(Eg: &amp;lt;s&amp;gt;strikethrough&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text as superscript &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text as subscript &lt;br /&gt;
# Choose Font color from the dropdown &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text to highlight with color &lt;br /&gt;
# Change the background color &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Using Bulleting and Numbering''' ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Bullets and Numbering feature on the formatting toolbar can be used to create nested lists and access the Bullets and Numbering dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
# To add the bullets and numbers to text information, choose &amp;quot;Format --&amp;gt; Bullets and Numbering&amp;quot;. You can also select the different symbols of bullets and numbers here. You can also find the Bullets and Numbers in the formatting toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
# An important feature of Writer is to enable you present your information through simple and short points ('bullet points').&lt;br /&gt;
# For the selected text input that has been entered, go to &amp;quot;Format --&amp;gt; Select Bullets and Numbering&amp;quot; and choose the numbering type that is needed.  You can create sub-numbered lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bulleting numbering.png| Bulleting and Numbering &lt;br /&gt;
File:Bulleting.png|Bulleting Dialogue&lt;br /&gt;
File:Numbering.png|Numbering &amp;amp; Alphabetical Dialogue&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using paragraph formatting ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can apply many formats to paragraphs using the icons on the Formatting toolbar. Other formatting options are provided under the format option from the menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Formatting toolbar, the icons and formats include( As labeled in below paragraph properties image)&lt;br /&gt;
# Apply &amp;quot;Paragraph Style&amp;quot; from formatting toolbar .&lt;br /&gt;
# Align Left, Center Horizontally, Align Right, or Justified.&lt;br /&gt;
# Line Spacing (choose from 1, 1.15, 1.5, 2, or custom spacing. Line spacing refers to the distance from one baseline (the imaginary line at the bottom of a letter like “n” or “m”) to the next baseline. It is determined by the size of the font.&lt;br /&gt;
# Increase Paragraph Spacing, Decrease Paragraph Spacing. (Paragraph spacing refers to the vertical spacing between one paragraph and the paragraphs above and below it&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
# Increase Indent, Decrease Indent.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Paragraph properties.png|Paragraph properties&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserting &amp;amp; Formatting Images ====&lt;br /&gt;
#The insert menu option is for inserting images, hyperlinks, charts, page numbers, page breaks, formulas and etc...  &lt;br /&gt;
#To insert an image, Go to &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Image&amp;quot; This will open a folder from which images are to be inserted (Images need to be browsed from your computer local folders).&lt;br /&gt;
#The inserted image (triangle) will looks like below &amp;quot;Inserted Image View&amp;quot; image.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Insert images.png|Insert Menu&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO_Writer_9_Insert_image.png|Inserting Image&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO_Writer_10_Inserted_Image.png|Inserted Image View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After you insert any image if you want to resize (height*width), &amp;quot;Click on the image and select any of the dots on the corner of the image and drag to increase or decrease the size of the image&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Editing image =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Using the Crop tool: To use the Crop tool &amp;quot;Click on the Crop icon&amp;quot; as shown in Image1 or right-click on the image and select Crop from the context menu. Cropping handles appear at the corners and mid-points of the sides of the image. Drag a handle to cut off part of the image. Click outside the image to turn off cropping mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Compressing images (&amp;quot;Inserting Image&amp;quot; image)&lt;br /&gt;
* If you insert a large image in your document and resize it to fit into the layout of the page, the complete original image is stored in the document file to preserve its content, resulting in a large document file to store or send by mail.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you can accept some loss of quality of the image rendering, you can compress or resize the image object to reduce its data volume while preserving its display in the page layout. You probably don’t want to compress something that will be professionally printed. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Right-click to select the image and open the context menu&amp;quot;. Then choose &amp;quot;Compress&amp;quot; to open the Compress Image dialog. Click &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to apply the compression settings. If the resulting image is not acceptable, press &amp;quot;Ctrl+Z&amp;quot; to undo and choose another compression setting.&lt;br /&gt;
3. Transparency: set the transparency options for the image using this button as shown in Image1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Rotating images: Rotate images if required using button showed in Image1:Image Formatting features&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Image editng.png|Image1: Image Formatting features&lt;br /&gt;
File:Compress Image.png|Image 2: Image compressing window&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserting &amp;amp; Formatting Table ====&lt;br /&gt;
* To insert Table, go to &amp;quot;Table&amp;quot; from Menu bar and select &amp;quot;Insert Table&amp;quot;, in given window choose required number of rows and columns. Alternatively you can also insert table from standard toolbar, Click on &amp;quot;table grid&amp;quot; from toolbar and move the cursor over the grid until you highlight the number of columns and rows you want. Click and the table appears in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can format your table by selecting the options in 'Table'. Move your cursor inside the table and &amp;quot;Select --&amp;gt; Table&amp;quot;. You can then adjust the row and column widths (&amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Size&amp;quot;), add or remove borders (&amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Properties --&amp;gt; Borders&amp;quot;), split or merge cells (&amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Merge Cells&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Split Cells&amp;quot;) etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can also copy data from a spreadsheet. You can simply copy that data (in rows and columns) from the spreadsheet and paste into the document, it will create a copy of the spreadsheet in your document. If you do not want it as a spreadsheet, but only as a table, you need to select &amp;quot;Paste Special -&amp;gt; Formatted text option&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Inserting Table&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Inert table in LOW.png|Insert Table&lt;br /&gt;
File:Format Table in LOW.png|Select rows and columns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Table Formatting.png|Table Formatting&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Align text to the top, middle and to the bottom&lt;br /&gt;
# Apply Borders to cells and tables&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert caption for the table&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Finding and replacing text ====&lt;br /&gt;
Writer has two ways to find text within a document: The Find toolbar for fast searching and the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog. If the Find toolbar is not visible, you can display it by choosing &amp;quot;View --&amp;gt; Toolbars --&amp;gt; Find&amp;quot; from the Menu bar or by pressing &amp;quot;Ctrl+F&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Using the Find toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To use the &amp;quot;Find&amp;quot; toolbar, click in the text input box and type your search text, then press &amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot; to find the next occurrence of that term from the current cursor position. Click the &amp;quot;Find Next&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Find Previous&amp;quot; buttons as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the &amp;quot;Find All&amp;quot; button to select all instances of the search term within the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Using the Find toolbar.png|Using the Find toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Using the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To display the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog, use the keyboard shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+H&amp;quot;, or choose &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Find &amp;amp; Replace&amp;quot; from the Menu bar. Use the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog:&lt;br /&gt;
* Type the text you want to find in the Find box.&lt;br /&gt;
* To replace the text with different text, type the new text in the Replace box.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can select various options, such as matching the case or matching whole words only. The other options include searching only in selected text, searching from the current cursor position backwards toward the beginning of the document, searching for similar words, and searching in comments.&lt;br /&gt;
* When you have set up your search, click &amp;quot;Find Next&amp;quot;. As the document view moves to each found instance, replace the text by clicking &amp;quot;Replace&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Expanded Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog.png|Expanded Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating an automatic Table of Contents====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Often it is useful to create text documents which are organize into headings and sub headings to denote different sections.  This can be done in two ways,&lt;br /&gt;
##You can select the text you want to define as a heading and choose from the predefined headings style, by selecting from the first drop down box as shown in the first image.&lt;br /&gt;
##You can also define this from the Style menu by clicking on Style and selecting the given heading.  &lt;br /&gt;
##You can define the appearance of each heading under the Styles and formatting option by changing the default font colour, size, etc.  &lt;br /&gt;
#Once the headings are defined, you can insert the Table of Contents.  Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents. Choose &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Table of Contents and Index --&amp;gt; Index Entry&amp;quot;, just click on “OK”.  For updating table of content,  right click on the table of content and Update Index or Table of Contents. Note that if you add any headings in the document, it will not automatically update the Table of Contents, hence you will need to come to the Table of Contents and do the update manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Inserting Table of Content&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding paragrapgh style.png|Paragraph style for Table of Content&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding TOC into the document.png|Insert Table of Content&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding page header and footer ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# You can add a header and/or footer to your document. You could provide the name of the document (or any other static information) in the footer. You can also insert page number in the header or the footer, which will be dynamically generated by Writer. It is useful to have page number and name of your document on every page, this is specially useful if the reader wants to read a print copy. LibreOffice Writer allows you to easily insert this information at the bottom or top of each page. This can be done using &amp;quot;Insert---&amp;gt;Footer&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once a footer has been inserted, you can go to the bottom of the page and insert multiple fields of information using &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Fields&amp;quot;. You can type any text in this footer, it will come on all pages. Other than page number, other dynamic information you can provide is the date/time stamp of the document. A similar method can also be adopted for inserting a header as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LOWriter - Header and footers.png| Adding header and footers for the page&lt;br /&gt;
File:LOWriter adding fields.png| Inserting page fields&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Spelling check ====&lt;br /&gt;
#Spelling - By enabling &amp;quot;Automatic spell checking&amp;quot; under Tools, you can check spelling within your document. You will see a red underline below a word spelt wrongly. (If you see a green line below a word, it suggests a grammatical error). You can move your cursor to the word and right click to get suggestions for correcting the spelling. In case you are clear your word is correct, you can also &amp;quot;Add your word to the dictionary&amp;quot; so that the next time you use it, it will not be treated as a wrong spelling.&lt;br /&gt;
#You can also do a manual spelling and grammar checking of the document. Select the text and click on &amp;quot;spelling and grammar&amp;quot; under &amp;quot;Tools&amp;quot; option. it will start looking spelling and grammar for the document. It is a good habit to always run a spelling check on your document before sharing.&lt;br /&gt;
#To check the spelling and the grammar of a text, the appropriate dictionaries must be installed. You can have dictionaries for your own language (Telugu, Urdu etc) installed, apart from the one in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Formatting in LibreOffice Writer&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Auto spell checking LO writer .png|Auto spell checking  &lt;br /&gt;
File:Checking spelling and grammar by manually .png|Spelling and grammar checking&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Customizing the Toolbar ====&lt;br /&gt;
* LibreOffice is a Open source application and therefore it allows the users to customize the interface. &lt;br /&gt;
* Menu is most useful section of Writer and its structure must be familiar to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* The structure of menu and its items can be customized easily so that it becomes user friendly.&lt;br /&gt;
* To do this, go to &amp;quot;Tools--&amp;gt;Customize&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Customize window will be having all the &amp;quot;Available Command&amp;quot; list on the left side. &amp;quot;Assigned command&amp;quot; on the right. If you want to remove the already assigned command then click on that particular command on the Assigned command list and move it towards Available command by clicking the left arrow button.&lt;br /&gt;
* Similarly if you want an additional command to your menu then choose the command from the &amp;quot;Available command&amp;quot; list. Click right arrow button to move it to the &amp;quot;Assigned command&amp;quot; list.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can also change the name of a particular command  by clicking that command and click on &amp;quot;Modify --&amp;gt; Rename&amp;quot;. Give the new name to that menu and click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Checked and Unchecked Toolbar.png|Customizing Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* To customize Toolbar, click on &amp;quot;Toolbar&amp;quot; tab in Customize window. As explained earlier, &amp;quot;Assigned Commands&amp;quot; will be having list of tools. The checked tools are already there in the toolbar and unchecked ones are available to move them to the toolbar. If you want any particular tool to be easily accessible and move to the toolbar then just check mark those and click &amp;quot;Apply--&amp;gt;OK&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the way you can change or assign the Keyboard shortcuts. For this Click on Keyboard tab in the Customize window. You can choose a command and click on &amp;quot;Modify?&amp;quot; to change its shortcut or functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Tools Language select.png|Menubar tools&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO language interface language settings, user interface.jpg|Languages interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tracking changes to a document ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can use several methods to keep track of changes made to a document.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make your changes to a copy of the document (stored in a different folder, under a different name, or both), then use Writer to compare the two files and show the changes you made. This technique is particularly useful if you are the only person working on the document, as it avoids the increase in file size and complexity caused by the other methods.&lt;br /&gt;
* Save versions that are stored as part of the original file. However, this method can cause problems with large or complex documents, especially if you save a lot of versions. Avoid this method if you can.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use Writer’s change marks (often called “revision marks”) to show added or deleted material or changed formatting. Later, you or another person can review and accept or reject each change.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Preparing a document for review'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you send a document to someone else to review or edit, you may want to prepare it first so that the editor or reviewer does not have to remember to turn on the revision marks. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the document. Check whether it contains multiple versions by clicking &amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Versions&amp;quot;. If multiple versions are listed, save the current version as a separate document with a different name and use this new document as the review copy.&lt;br /&gt;
* With the review copy open, make sure that change recording is turned on. The &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Record Changes&amp;quot; menu item has a check mark next to it when recording is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
* To begin tracking (recording) changes, click &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Record Changes&amp;quot;. To show or hide the display of changes, click &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Show Changes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To stop recording changes, click &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Record Changes&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
The results of accepting or rejecting a change are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Accept: Incorporates the alteration into the document and removes the change indication marking.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reject: Reverts the document to its original state and removes the change indication marking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Page orientation within the document ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Create a New Style.png|Creating a new style&lt;br /&gt;
File:Giving a name for a style.png|Giving a name for a style&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing Page Orientation.png|Changing page orientation&lt;br /&gt;
File:Inserting a page break1.png|Inserting a page break &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* LibreOffice Writer allows you to change the page orientation in between the document as per your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
* For example, If you have a document having data of three pages you can make the second page landscape and rest two to remain as portrait orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
* To do this, first go to sidebar of Writer. Click on &amp;quot;Styles --&amp;gt; Page styles&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* On the Page style list page, &amp;quot;right click --&amp;gt; New&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the new page style window click on &amp;quot;Organizer tab --&amp;gt; Enter a new name to the style --&amp;gt; Choose the 'Default style' as Next style&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to the &amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; tab --&amp;gt; Change the orientation as Landscape&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click &amp;quot;Apply --&amp;gt; OK&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Place the position of the cursor to the place where you need to change the orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on Insert --&amp;gt; More Breaks --&amp;gt; Manual Break&amp;quot;. You will get a new window called &amp;quot;Insert Break&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* In this window, choose the type “Page break” and name of the style you have given earlier as the style name.&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes it may happen that your cursor point becomes Landscape but remaining pages also changes their orientation and become Landscape. The solution for this is,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Place the cursor from which you want your orientation to be Portrait. Click on Insert --&amp;gt; More Breaks --&amp;gt; Manual Break&amp;quot;. You will get a new window called &amp;quot;Insert Break&amp;quot;. In this window, choose the type “Page break” and name of the style as Default Style. (Usually this Default style will be having the page orientation as portrait. In this way your can make the rest of the pages again as Portrait. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving the file====&lt;br /&gt;
* Like in most applications, a file can be saved using the &amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Save&amp;quot; command, or by the shortcut key &amp;quot;Ctrl+S&amp;quot;. Always give a meaningful file name, reading which you should get an idea of the file contents. Often adding the month-year information when the file was created can be useful later File will save in .odt format, ODT is the short form of Open Document Text. ODT conforms to Open Document Format (ODF) which is recommended by the Government of India through its website [https://india.gov.in/policy-open-standards-e-governance Policy on open standards]””.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Like in most applications, a file can be exported to a PDF format. This is useful when you only need to print the file and do not want any changes to it. You can also export a document to a 'html' (web page) format, which can be opened by a web browser or MS word format which is supported by Windows operating system.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Save as odt.png| Save as ODT&lt;br /&gt;
File:Export as PDF.png|Export as PDF&lt;br /&gt;
File:Save as Doc.png| Save in MS word format&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://help.libreoffice.org/Common/Track_Changes Track changes] (Recording editing changes by another person in another colour in the document, which can be accepted or rejected by the author)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://help.libreoffice.org/Writer/Columns Multiple columns] (Useful for making newsletters and magazines) and other page layout functions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ideas for resource creation===&lt;br /&gt;
# You can use this application to create and edit text resources. You can insert images, web links, hyper links in the document and connect the text to other resource formats. You can insert and edit tables, create sections (with section headings) and format it in many ways to create a text document.   &lt;br /&gt;
# Infographics, posters, comic strips are some resources you can create using text editors in addition to making reports. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://help.libreoffice.org/Main_Page LibreOffice page]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/LibreOffice_Writer Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_LibreOffice_Writer&amp;diff=13695</id>
		<title>Learn LibreOffice Writer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_LibreOffice_Writer&amp;diff=13695"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T11:23:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Tracking changes to a document */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%B2%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%AC%E0%A4%B0%E0%A5%87%E0%A4%91%E0%A4%AB%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%B8_%E0%A4%B0%E0%A4%BE%E0%A4%87%E0%A4%9F%E0%A4%B0_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%AF%E0%A5%87 हिंदी मे देखिये] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AC%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%86_%E0%B2%86%E0%B2%AB%E0%B3%80%E0%B2%B8%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%88%E0%B2%9F%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]'' &lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:Book-sidebar}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
LibreOffice Writer is the free and open-source text editor application of the LibreOffice software package. Writer is a text editor similar to Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT for creating generic resources&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|LibreOffice Writer is a software used for creating (including writing, editing, formatting, and possibly printing) text resources. Apart from entering and editing text, you can insert images and links also. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|LibreOffice Writer is also available on the Windows (visit [https://libreoffice.org/download/download/?type=win-x86_64&amp;amp;version=6.3.3&amp;amp;lang=en-US download LibreOffice on Windows] to install LibreOffice on a Windows system) and Macintosh operating systems.&lt;br /&gt;
This tool has no specific configuration requirements but in this application you can use many extra features by installing [https://extensions.libreoffice.org/extensions extensions]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://products.office.com/en-in/word Microsoft Word], [https://www.openoffice.org/product/writer.html OpenOffice writer], [https://www.google.co.in/docs/about/ Google Docs]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.collabora.libreoffice Collabora Office for Android] and [https://www.libreoffice.org/download/android-and-ios/ for iOS] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://documentation.libreoffice.org/assets/Uploads/Documentation/en/WG7.2/WG72-WriterGuide.pdf The Document Foundation]&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/community-support/ Community help]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of features ====&lt;br /&gt;
LibreOffice Writer lets you design and produce text documents that can include graphics, tables, or charts. In this application you can save the documents in a variety of formats, including the standardized Open Document Format (ODF), Microsoft Word format(.doc), or HTML. Here you can easily export your document to the Portable Document Format(PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
Please go through the below link to learn about LibreOffice installation &amp;amp; Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Starting a new document ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== From the Start Center =====&lt;br /&gt;
You can start a new, blank document in Writer in several ways. If a document is already open in LibreOffice, the new document opens in a new window.&lt;br /&gt;
* From the Start Center&lt;br /&gt;
When LibreOffice is open but no document is open, the Start Center is shown. Click the Create: Writer Document button to create a new text document.&lt;br /&gt;
* From the operating system menu&lt;br /&gt;
You can open the LibreOffice Start Center or the Writer component from the operating system menu in the same way that you start other programs. When LibreOffice was installed on your computer, in most cases a menu entry for each component was added to the system menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LibreOfficeStartCenter.png|LibreOffice start center&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Opening an existing document =====&lt;br /&gt;
You can open an existing document in any of the following options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Option1: Choose '''&amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Open&amp;quot;''' on the Menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Option2: Press '''&amp;quot;Ctrl+O'''&amp;quot; on the keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Option3: Click on the &amp;quot;'''Open icon'''&amp;quot; on the Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
==== LibreOffice Writer interface ====&lt;br /&gt;
The LibreOffice menu bar has multiple options for file operations including saving, editing, viewing the document, inserting images, links, tables, etc in the document and formatting and defining styles in the document. The commonly used parts of the window are discussed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;LibreOffice Writer menu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Writer Menu Bar window.png|LibreOffice Writer (Parts of the window) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''1. Title bar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Title bar is located at the top of the Writer window. It shows the file name of the current document. When the document is not yet named, the document name will appear as Untitled X, where X is a number. Untitled documents are numbered in the order in which they are created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2. Menu bar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Menu bar is located just below the Title bar in Windows and Linux and at the top of the screen in macOS. When you select one of the menus, a sub menu drops down to show further options,including:&lt;br /&gt;
# Commands that directly cause an action, such as Close or Save, in the File menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Commands that open further sub menus.&lt;br /&gt;
'''3. Standard toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a default LibreOffice installation , the top toolbar, just under the Menu bar, is called the Standard toolbar. This gives quick access to different types of elements and tools to the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''4. Formatting toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second toolbar at the top is the Formatting toolbar. It is context-sensitive; that is, it shows the tools relevant to the current position of the cursor or the selected object. For example, when the cursor is in text, the Formatting toolbar provides tools for formatting text. When the cursor is on a graphic (image), the tools are for formatting images. Other toolbars are available at &amp;quot;View --&amp;gt; Toolbars&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''5. Rulers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The horizontal ruler across the top of the workspace is visible by default but the vertical ruler on the left is hidden by default. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the vertical ruler, choose &amp;quot;View --&amp;gt; Rulers --&amp;gt; Vertical Ruler&amp;quot; from the Menu bar, or choose &amp;quot;Tools --&amp;gt; Options --&amp;gt; LibreOffice Writer --&amp;gt; View&amp;quot;. To quickly show or hide both rulers, use the key combination &amp;quot;Ctrl+Shift+R&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Editing document====&lt;br /&gt;
You can start adding the text from where the cursor blinks. You can also reposition cursor as per the requirement in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Cursor&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Cursor blink.png|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing default fonts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing the Font settings in Writer.png|Changing the Font settings in Writer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* LibreOffice Writer has some of the fonts set by default which can be customized any point of time. &lt;br /&gt;
* To do this, Go to &amp;quot;Tools--&amp;gt;Options&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the left panel &amp;quot;Double click on LibreOffice Writer--&amp;gt; Click on Basic Fonts (Western)&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Right side panel shows you the things that are fonts setup for your software by default. It is further classified as Default, Heading, List, Caption and Index. Based on your requirement you can click the drop down on their respective options and change the Font. Also note that you can customize the font size. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you are done, &amp;quot;Click Apply--&amp;gt;OK&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Cut, copy, and paste text ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Using cut, copy and paste options are similar to any other applications. You can copy or move text, image or any other objects within a document, or between documents. These features can be used by dragging or by using keyboard shortcuts. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} You can also copy text from other sources such as Web pages and paste it into a text document.&lt;br /&gt;
* To move (drag and drop) selected text using the mouse, drag it to the new location and release it; the cursor changes shape while dragging. To copy selected text, hold down the Ctrl key while dragging. The text retains the formatting it had before dragging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To move (cut and paste) selected text, use &amp;quot;Ctrl+X&amp;quot; to cut the text, insert the cursor at the paste-in point and use &amp;quot;Ctrl+V&amp;quot; to paste. Alternatively, use the buttons on the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When you paste text, the result depends on the source of the text and how you paste it. If you click the Paste button, then the pasted text keeps its original formatting (such as bold or italics). Text pasted from Web sites and other sources may be placed automatically into frames or tables as part of the format when you paste. If you do not like the results, click the Undo button or press &amp;quot;Ctrl+Z&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
To make the pasted text show the paragraph style at the insertion point:&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Paste Special&amp;quot;, or&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the arrow on the combination Paste button, or&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Paste&amp;quot; button without releasing the left mouse button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy text.png| Copy text&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy image.png|Copy image&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using text formatting ====&lt;br /&gt;
The format option is for changing the text styles like text font, text size and text color options. For many of these options, we can use shortcut icons from formatting toolbar as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Format features.png|Formatting properties&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
# Font name: Choose font name from dropdown &lt;br /&gt;
# Font size: Choose font size from the dropdown &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text '''Bold''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text ''Italic'' &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text strikethrough(Eg: &amp;lt;s&amp;gt;strikethrough&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text as superscript &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text as subscript &lt;br /&gt;
# Choose Font color from the dropdown &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text to highlight with color &lt;br /&gt;
# Change the background color &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Using Bulleting and Numbering''' ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Bullets and Numbering feature on the formatting toolbar can be used to create nested lists and access the Bullets and Numbering dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
# To add the bullets and numbers to text information, choose &amp;quot;Format --&amp;gt; Bullets and Numbering&amp;quot;. You can also select the different symbols of bullets and numbers here. You can also find the Bullets and Numbers in the formatting toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
# An important feature of Writer is to enable you present your information through simple and short points ('bullet points').&lt;br /&gt;
# For the selected text input that has been entered, go to &amp;quot;Format --&amp;gt; Select Bullets and Numbering&amp;quot; and choose the numbering type that is needed.  You can create sub-numbered lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bulleting numbering.png| Bulleting and Numbering &lt;br /&gt;
File:Bulleting.png|Bulleting Dialogue&lt;br /&gt;
File:Numbering.png|Numbering &amp;amp; Alphabetical Dialogue&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using paragraph formatting ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can apply many formats to paragraphs using the icons on the Formatting toolbar. Other formatting options are provided under the format option from the menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Formatting toolbar, the icons and formats include( As labeled in below paragraph properties image)&lt;br /&gt;
# Apply &amp;quot;Paragraph Style&amp;quot; from formatting toolbar .&lt;br /&gt;
# Align Left, Center Horizontally, Align Right, or Justified.&lt;br /&gt;
# Line Spacing (choose from 1, 1.15, 1.5, 2, or custom spacing. Line spacing refers to the distance from one baseline (the imaginary line at the bottom of a letter like “n” or “m”) to the next baseline. It is determined by the size of the font.&lt;br /&gt;
# Increase Paragraph Spacing, Decrease Paragraph Spacing. (Paragraph spacing refers to the vertical spacing between one paragraph and the paragraphs above and below it&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
# Increase Indent, Decrease Indent.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Paragraph properties.png|Paragraph properties&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserting &amp;amp; Formatting Images ====&lt;br /&gt;
#The insert menu option is for inserting images, hyperlinks, charts, page numbers, page breaks, formulas and etc...  &lt;br /&gt;
#To insert an image, Go to &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Image&amp;quot; This will open a folder from which images are to be inserted (Images need to be browsed from your computer local folders).&lt;br /&gt;
#The inserted image (triangle) will looks like below &amp;quot;Inserted Image View&amp;quot; image.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Insert images.png|Insert Menu&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO_Writer_9_Insert_image.png|Inserting Image&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO_Writer_10_Inserted_Image.png|Inserted Image View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After you insert any image if you want to resize (height*width), &amp;quot;Click on the image and select any of the dots on the corner of the image and drag to increase or decrease the size of the image&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Editing image =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Using the Crop tool: To use the Crop tool &amp;quot;Click on the Crop icon&amp;quot; as shown in Image1 or right-click on the image and select Crop from the context menu. Cropping handles appear at the corners and mid-points of the sides of the image. Drag a handle to cut off part of the image. Click outside the image to turn off cropping mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Compressing images (&amp;quot;Inserting Image&amp;quot; image)&lt;br /&gt;
* If you insert a large image in your document and resize it to fit into the layout of the page, the complete original image is stored in the document file to preserve its content, resulting in a large document file to store or send by mail.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you can accept some loss of quality of the image rendering, you can compress or resize the image object to reduce its data volume while preserving its display in the page layout. You probably don’t want to compress something that will be professionally printed. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Right-click to select the image and open the context menu&amp;quot;. Then choose &amp;quot;Compress&amp;quot; to open the Compress Image dialog. Click &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to apply the compression settings. If the resulting image is not acceptable, press &amp;quot;Ctrl+Z&amp;quot; to undo and choose another compression setting.&lt;br /&gt;
3. Transparency: set the transparency options for the image using this button as shown in Image1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Rotating images: Rotate images if required using button showed in Image1:Image Formatting features&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Image editng.png|Image1: Image Formatting features&lt;br /&gt;
File:Compress Image.png|Image 2: Image compressing window&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserting &amp;amp; Formatting Table ====&lt;br /&gt;
* To insert Table, go to &amp;quot;Table&amp;quot; from Menu bar and select &amp;quot;Insert Table&amp;quot;, in given window choose required number of rows and columns. Alternatively you can also insert table from standard toolbar, Click on &amp;quot;table grid&amp;quot; from toolbar and move the cursor over the grid until you highlight the number of columns and rows you want. Click and the table appears in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can format your table by selecting the options in 'Table'. Move your cursor inside the table and &amp;quot;Select --&amp;gt; Table&amp;quot;. You can then adjust the row and column widths (&amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Size&amp;quot;), add or remove borders (&amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Properties --&amp;gt; Borders&amp;quot;), split or merge cells (&amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Merge Cells&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Split Cells&amp;quot;) etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can also copy data from a spreadsheet. You can simply copy that data (in rows and columns) from the spreadsheet and paste into the document, it will create a copy of the spreadsheet in your document. If you do not want it as a spreadsheet, but only as a table, you need to select &amp;quot;Paste Special -&amp;gt; Formatted text option&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Inserting Table&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Inert table in LOW.png|Insert Table&lt;br /&gt;
File:Format Table in LOW.png|Select rows and columns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Table Formatting.png|Table Formatting&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Align text to the top, middle and to the bottom&lt;br /&gt;
# Apply Borders to cells and tables&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert caption for the table&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Finding and replacing text ====&lt;br /&gt;
Writer has two ways to find text within a document: The Find toolbar for fast searching and the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog. If the Find toolbar is not visible, you can display it by choosing &amp;quot;View --&amp;gt; Toolbars --&amp;gt; Find&amp;quot; from the Menu bar or by pressing &amp;quot;Ctrl+F&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Using the Find toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To use the &amp;quot;Find&amp;quot; toolbar, click in the text input box and type your search text, then press &amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot; to find the next occurrence of that term from the current cursor position. Click the &amp;quot;Find Next&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Find Previous&amp;quot; buttons as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the &amp;quot;Find All&amp;quot; button to select all instances of the search term within the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Using the Find toolbar.png|Using the Find toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Using the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To display the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog, use the keyboard shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+H&amp;quot;, or choose &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Find &amp;amp; Replace&amp;quot; from the Menu bar. Use the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog:&lt;br /&gt;
* Type the text you want to find in the Find box.&lt;br /&gt;
* To replace the text with different text, type the new text in the Replace box.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can select various options, such as matching the case or matching whole words only. The other options include searching only in selected text, searching from the current cursor position backwards toward the beginning of the document, searching for similar words, and searching in comments.&lt;br /&gt;
* When you have set up your search, click &amp;quot;Find Next&amp;quot;. As the document view moves to each found instance, replace the text by clicking &amp;quot;Replace&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Expanded Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog.png|Expanded Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating an automatic Table of Contents====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Often it is useful to create text documents which are organize into headings and sub headings to denote different sections.  This can be done in two ways,&lt;br /&gt;
##You can select the text you want to define as a heading and choose from the predefined headings style, by selecting from the first drop down box as shown in the first image.&lt;br /&gt;
##You can also define this from the Style menu by clicking on Style and selecting the given heading.  &lt;br /&gt;
##You can define the appearance of each heading under the Styles and formatting option by changing the default font colour, size, etc.  &lt;br /&gt;
#Once the headings are defined, you can insert the Table of Contents.  Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents. Choose &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Table of Contents and Index --&amp;gt; Index Entry&amp;quot;, just click on “OK”.  For updating table of content,  right click on the table of content and Update Index or Table of Contents. Note that if you add any headings in the document, it will not automatically update the Table of Contents, hence you will need to come to the Table of Contents and do the update manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Inserting Table of Content&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding paragrapgh style.png|Paragraph style for Table of Content&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding TOC into the document.png|Insert Table of Content&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding page header and footer ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# You can add a header and/or footer to your document. You could provide the name of the document (or any other static information) in the footer. You can also insert page number in the header or the footer, which will be dynamically generated by Writer. It is useful to have page number and name of your document on every page, this is specially useful if the reader wants to read a print copy. LibreOffice Writer allows you to easily insert this information at the bottom or top of each page. This can be done using &amp;quot;Insert---&amp;gt;Footer&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once a footer has been inserted, you can go to the bottom of the page and insert multiple fields of information using &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Fields&amp;quot;. You can type any text in this footer, it will come on all pages. Other than page number, other dynamic information you can provide is the date/time stamp of the document. A similar method can also be adopted for inserting a header as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LOWriter - Header and footers.png| Adding header and footers for the page&lt;br /&gt;
File:LOWriter adding fields.png| Inserting page fields&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Spelling check ====&lt;br /&gt;
#Spelling - By enabling &amp;quot;Automatic spell checking&amp;quot; under Tools, you can check spelling within your document. You will see a red underline below a word spelt wrongly. (If you see a green line below a word, it suggests a grammatical error). You can move your cursor to the word and right click to get suggestions for correcting the spelling. In case you are clear your word is correct, you can also &amp;quot;Add your word to the dictionary&amp;quot; so that the next time you use it, it will not be treated as a wrong spelling.&lt;br /&gt;
#You can also do a manual spelling and grammar checking of the document. Select the text and click on &amp;quot;spelling and grammar&amp;quot; under &amp;quot;Tools&amp;quot; option. it will start looking spelling and grammar for the document. It is a good habit to always run a spelling check on your document before sharing.&lt;br /&gt;
#To check the spelling and the grammar of a text, the appropriate dictionaries must be installed. You can have dictionaries for your own language (Telugu, Urdu etc) installed, apart from the one in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Formatting in LibreOffice Writer&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Auto spell checking LO writer .png|Auto spell checking  &lt;br /&gt;
File:Checking spelling and grammar by manually .png|Spelling and grammar checking&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Customizing the Toolbar ====&lt;br /&gt;
* LibreOffice is a Open source application and therefore it allows the users to customize the interface. &lt;br /&gt;
* Menu is most useful section of Writer and its structure must be familiar to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* The structure of menu and its items can be customized easily so that it becomes user friendly.&lt;br /&gt;
* To do this, go to &amp;quot;Tools--&amp;gt;Customize&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Customize window will be having all the &amp;quot;Available Command&amp;quot; list on the left side. &amp;quot;Assigned command&amp;quot; on the right. If you want to remove the already assigned command then click on that particular command on the Assigned command list and move it towards Available command by clicking the left arrow button.&lt;br /&gt;
* Similarly if you want an additional command to your menu then choose the command from the &amp;quot;Available command&amp;quot; list. Click right arrow button to move it to the &amp;quot;Assigned command&amp;quot; list.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can also change the name of a particular command  by clicking that command and click on &amp;quot;Modify --&amp;gt; Rename&amp;quot;. Give the new name to that menu and click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Checked and Unchecked Toolbar.png|Customizing Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* To customize Toolbar, click on &amp;quot;Toolbar&amp;quot; tab in Customize window. As explained earlier, &amp;quot;Assigned Commands&amp;quot; will be having list of tools. The checked tools are already there in the toolbar and unchecked ones are available to move them to the toolbar. If you want any particular tool to be easily accessible and move to the toolbar then just check mark those and click &amp;quot;Apply--&amp;gt;OK&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the way you can change or assign the Keyboard shortcuts. For this Click on Keyboard tab in the Customize window. You can choose a command and click on &amp;quot;Modify?&amp;quot; to change its shortcut or functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Tools Language select.png|Menubar tools&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO language interface language settings, user interface.jpg|Languages interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tracking changes to a document ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can use several methods to keep track of changes made to a document.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make your changes to a copy of the document (stored in a different folder, under a different name, or both), then use Writer to compare the two files and show the changes you made. This technique is particularly useful if you are the only person working on the document, as it avoids the increase in file size and complexity caused by the other methods.&lt;br /&gt;
* Save versions that are stored as part of the original file. However, this method can cause problems with large or complex documents, especially if you save a lot of versions. Avoid this method if you can.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use Writer’s change marks (often called “revision marks”) to show added or deleted material or changed formatting. Later, you or another person can review and accept or reject each change.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Preparing a document for review'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you send a document to someone else to review or edit, you may want to prepare it first so that the editor or reviewer does not have to remember to turn on the revision marks. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the document. Check whether it contains multiple versions by clicking &amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Versions&amp;quot;. If multiple versions are listed, save the current version as a separate document with a different name and use this new document as the review copy.&lt;br /&gt;
* With the review copy open, make sure that change recording is turned on. The &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Record Changes&amp;quot; menu item has a check mark next to it when recording is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
* To begin tracking (recording) changes, click &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Record Changes&amp;quot;. To show or hide the display of changes, click &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Show Changes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To stop recording changes, click &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Record Changes&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
The results of accepting or rejecting a change are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Accept: Incorporates the alteration into the document and removes the change indication marking.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reject: Reverts the document to its original state and removes the change indication marking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Page orientation within the document ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Create a New Style.png|Creating a new style&lt;br /&gt;
File:Giving a name for a style.png|Giving a name for a style&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing Page Orientation.png|Changing page orientation&lt;br /&gt;
File:Inserting a page break1.png|Inserting a page break &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* LibreOffice Writer allows you to change the page orientation in between the document as per your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
* For example, If you have a document having data of three pages you can make the second page landscape and rest two to remain as portrait orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
* To do this, first go to sidebar of Writer. Click on &amp;quot;Styles --&amp;gt; Page styles&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* On the Page style list page, &amp;quot;right click --&amp;gt; New&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the new page style window click on &amp;quot;Organizer tab --&amp;gt; Enter a new name to the style --&amp;gt; Choose the 'Default style' as Next style&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to the &amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; tab --&amp;gt; Change the orientation as Landscape&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click &amp;quot;Apply --&amp;gt; OK&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Place the position of the cursor to the place where you need to change the orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on Insert --&amp;gt; More Breaks --&amp;gt; Manual Break&amp;quot;. You will get a new window called &amp;quot;Insert Break&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* In this window, choose the type “Page break” and name of the style you have given earlier as the style name.&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes it may happen that your cursor point becomes Landscape but remaining pages also changes their orientation and become Landscape. The solution for this is,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Place the cursor from which you want your orientation to be Portrait. Click on Insert --&amp;gt; More Breaks --&amp;gt; Manual Break&amp;quot;. You will get a new window called &amp;quot;Insert Break&amp;quot;. In this window, choose the type “Page break” and name of the style as Default Style. (Usually this Default style will be having the page orientation as portrait. In this way your can make the rest of the pages again as Portrait. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving the file====&lt;br /&gt;
* Like in most applications, a file can be saved using the &amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Save&amp;quot; command, or by the shortcut key &amp;quot;Ctrl+S&amp;quot;. Always give a meaningful file name, reading which you should get an idea of the file contents. Often adding the month-year information when the file was created can be useful later File will save in .odt format, ODT is the short form of Open Document Text. ODT conforms to Open Document Format (ODF) which is recommended by the Government of India through its website [https://india.gov.in/policy-open-standards-e-governance Policy on open standards]””.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Like in most applications, a file can be exported to a PDF format. This is useful when you only need to print the file and do not want any changes to it. You can also export a document to a 'html' (web page) format, which can be opened by a web browser or MS word format which is supported by Windows operating system.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Save as odt.png| Save as ODT&lt;br /&gt;
File:Export as PDF.png|Export as PDF&lt;br /&gt;
File:Save as Doc.png| Save in MS word format&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://help.libreoffice.org/Common/Track_Changes Track changes] (Recording editing changes by another person in another colour in the document, which can be accepted or rejected by the author)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://help.libreoffice.org/Writer/Columns Multiple columns] (Useful for making newsletters and magazines) and other page layout functions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ideas for resource creation===&lt;br /&gt;
# You can use this application to create and edit text resources. You can insert images, web links, hyper links in the document and connect the text to other resource formats. You can insert and edit tables, create sections (with section headings) and format it in many ways to create a text document.   &lt;br /&gt;
# Infographics, posters, comic strips are some resources you can create using text editors in addition to making reports. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://help.libreoffice.org/Main_Page LibreOffice page]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/LibreOffice_Writer Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_LibreOffice_Writer&amp;diff=13694</id>
		<title>Learn LibreOffice Writer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_LibreOffice_Writer&amp;diff=13694"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T11:16:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%B2%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%AC%E0%A4%B0%E0%A5%87%E0%A4%91%E0%A4%AB%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%B8_%E0%A4%B0%E0%A4%BE%E0%A4%87%E0%A4%9F%E0%A4%B0_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%AF%E0%A5%87 हिंदी मे देखिये] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AC%E0%B3%8D%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%86_%E0%B2%86%E0%B2%AB%E0%B3%80%E0%B2%B8%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%88%E0%B2%9F%E0%B2%B0%E0%B3%8D_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]'' &lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:Book-sidebar}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
LibreOffice Writer is the free and open-source text editor application of the LibreOffice software package. Writer is a text editor similar to Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic information ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT for creating generic resources&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|LibreOffice Writer is a software used for creating (including writing, editing, formatting, and possibly printing) text resources. Apart from entering and editing text, you can insert images and links also. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|LibreOffice Writer is also available on the Windows (visit [https://libreoffice.org/download/download/?type=win-x86_64&amp;amp;version=6.3.3&amp;amp;lang=en-US download LibreOffice on Windows] to install LibreOffice on a Windows system) and Macintosh operating systems.&lt;br /&gt;
This tool has no specific configuration requirements but in this application you can use many extra features by installing [https://extensions.libreoffice.org/extensions extensions]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://products.office.com/en-in/word Microsoft Word], [https://www.openoffice.org/product/writer.html OpenOffice writer], [https://www.google.co.in/docs/about/ Google Docs]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.collabora.libreoffice Collabora Office for Android] and [https://www.libreoffice.org/download/android-and-ios/ for iOS] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://documentation.libreoffice.org/assets/Uploads/Documentation/en/WG7.2/WG72-WriterGuide.pdf The Document Foundation]&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/community-support/ Community help]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of features ====&lt;br /&gt;
LibreOffice Writer lets you design and produce text documents that can include graphics, tables, or charts. In this application you can save the documents in a variety of formats, including the standardized Open Document Format (ODF), Microsoft Word format(.doc), or HTML. Here you can easily export your document to the Portable Document Format(PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Starting a new document ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== From the Start Center =====&lt;br /&gt;
You can start a new, blank document in Writer in several ways. If a document is already open in LibreOffice, the new document opens in a new window.&lt;br /&gt;
* From the Start Center&lt;br /&gt;
When LibreOffice is open but no document is open, the Start Center is shown. Click the Create: Writer Document button to create a new text document.&lt;br /&gt;
* From the operating system menu&lt;br /&gt;
You can open the LibreOffice Start Center or the Writer component from the operating system menu in the same way that you start other programs. When LibreOffice was installed on your computer, in most cases a menu entry for each component was added to the system menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LibreOfficeStartCenter.png|LibreOffice start center&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Opening an existing document =====&lt;br /&gt;
You can open an existing document in any of the following options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Option1: Choose '''&amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Open&amp;quot;''' on the Menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Option2: Press '''&amp;quot;Ctrl+O'''&amp;quot; on the keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Option3: Click on the &amp;quot;'''Open icon'''&amp;quot; on the Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
==== LibreOffice Writer interface ====&lt;br /&gt;
The LibreOffice menu bar has multiple options for file operations including saving, editing, viewing the document, inserting images, links, tables, etc in the document and formatting and defining styles in the document. The commonly used parts of the window are discussed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;LibreOffice Writer menu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Writer Menu Bar window.png|LibreOffice Writer (Parts of the window) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''1. Title bar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Title bar is located at the top of the Writer window. It shows the file name of the current document. When the document is not yet named, the document name will appear as Untitled X, where X is a number. Untitled documents are numbered in the order in which they are created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2. Menu bar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Menu bar is located just below the Title bar in Windows and Linux and at the top of the screen in macOS. When you select one of the menus, a sub menu drops down to show further options,including:&lt;br /&gt;
# Commands that directly cause an action, such as Close or Save, in the File menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Commands that open further sub menus.&lt;br /&gt;
'''3. Standard toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a default LibreOffice installation , the top toolbar, just under the Menu bar, is called the Standard toolbar. This gives quick access to different types of elements and tools to the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''4. Formatting toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second toolbar at the top is the Formatting toolbar. It is context-sensitive; that is, it shows the tools relevant to the current position of the cursor or the selected object. For example, when the cursor is in text, the Formatting toolbar provides tools for formatting text. When the cursor is on a graphic (image), the tools are for formatting images. Other toolbars are available at &amp;quot;View --&amp;gt; Toolbars&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''5. Rulers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The horizontal ruler across the top of the workspace is visible by default but the vertical ruler on the left is hidden by default. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the vertical ruler, choose &amp;quot;View --&amp;gt; Rulers --&amp;gt; Vertical Ruler&amp;quot; from the Menu bar, or choose &amp;quot;Tools --&amp;gt; Options --&amp;gt; LibreOffice Writer --&amp;gt; View&amp;quot;. To quickly show or hide both rulers, use the key combination &amp;quot;Ctrl+Shift+R&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Editing document====&lt;br /&gt;
You can start adding the text from where the cursor blinks. You can also reposition cursor as per the requirement in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Cursor&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Cursor blink.png|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing default fonts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing the Font settings in Writer.png|Changing the Font settings in Writer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* LibreOffice Writer has some of the fonts set by default which can be customized any point of time. &lt;br /&gt;
* To do this, Go to &amp;quot;Tools--&amp;gt;Options&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the left panel &amp;quot;Double click on LibreOffice Writer--&amp;gt; Click on Basic Fonts (Western)&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Right side panel shows you the things that are fonts setup for your software by default. It is further classified as Default, Heading, List, Caption and Index. Based on your requirement you can click the drop down on their respective options and change the Font. Also note that you can customize the font size. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you are done, &amp;quot;Click Apply--&amp;gt;OK&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Cut, copy, and paste text ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Using cut, copy and paste options are similar to any other applications. You can copy or move text, image or any other objects within a document, or between documents. These features can be used by dragging or by using keyboard shortcuts. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} You can also copy text from other sources such as Web pages and paste it into a text document.&lt;br /&gt;
* To move (drag and drop) selected text using the mouse, drag it to the new location and release it; the cursor changes shape while dragging. To copy selected text, hold down the Ctrl key while dragging. The text retains the formatting it had before dragging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To move (cut and paste) selected text, use &amp;quot;Ctrl+X&amp;quot; to cut the text, insert the cursor at the paste-in point and use &amp;quot;Ctrl+V&amp;quot; to paste. Alternatively, use the buttons on the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When you paste text, the result depends on the source of the text and how you paste it. If you click the Paste button, then the pasted text keeps its original formatting (such as bold or italics). Text pasted from Web sites and other sources may be placed automatically into frames or tables as part of the format when you paste. If you do not like the results, click the Undo button or press &amp;quot;Ctrl+Z&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
To make the pasted text show the paragraph style at the insertion point:&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Paste Special&amp;quot;, or&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the arrow on the combination Paste button, or&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Paste&amp;quot; button without releasing the left mouse button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy text.png| Copy text&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy image.png|Copy image&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using text formatting ====&lt;br /&gt;
The format option is for changing the text styles like text font, text size and text color options. For many of these options, we can use shortcut icons from formatting toolbar as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Format features.png|Formatting properties&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
# Font name: Choose font name from dropdown &lt;br /&gt;
# Font size: Choose font size from the dropdown &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text '''Bold''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text ''Italic'' &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text strikethrough(Eg: &amp;lt;s&amp;gt;strikethrough&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text as superscript &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text as subscript &lt;br /&gt;
# Choose Font color from the dropdown &lt;br /&gt;
# Make selected text to highlight with color &lt;br /&gt;
# Change the background color &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Using Bulleting and Numbering''' ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Bullets and Numbering feature on the formatting toolbar can be used to create nested lists and access the Bullets and Numbering dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
# To add the bullets and numbers to text information, choose &amp;quot;Format --&amp;gt; Bullets and Numbering&amp;quot;. You can also select the different symbols of bullets and numbers here. You can also find the Bullets and Numbers in the formatting toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
# An important feature of Writer is to enable you present your information through simple and short points ('bullet points').&lt;br /&gt;
# For the selected text input that has been entered, go to &amp;quot;Format --&amp;gt; Select Bullets and Numbering&amp;quot; and choose the numbering type that is needed.  You can create sub-numbered lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bulleting numbering.png| Bulleting and Numbering &lt;br /&gt;
File:Bulleting.png|Bulleting Dialogue&lt;br /&gt;
File:Numbering.png|Numbering &amp;amp; Alphabetical Dialogue&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using paragraph formatting ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can apply many formats to paragraphs using the icons on the Formatting toolbar. Other formatting options are provided under the format option from the menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Formatting toolbar, the icons and formats include( As labeled in below paragraph properties image)&lt;br /&gt;
# Apply &amp;quot;Paragraph Style&amp;quot; from formatting toolbar .&lt;br /&gt;
# Align Left, Center Horizontally, Align Right, or Justified.&lt;br /&gt;
# Line Spacing (choose from 1, 1.15, 1.5, 2, or custom spacing. Line spacing refers to the distance from one baseline (the imaginary line at the bottom of a letter like “n” or “m”) to the next baseline. It is determined by the size of the font.&lt;br /&gt;
# Increase Paragraph Spacing, Decrease Paragraph Spacing. (Paragraph spacing refers to the vertical spacing between one paragraph and the paragraphs above and below it&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
# Increase Indent, Decrease Indent.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Paragraph properties.png|Paragraph properties&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserting &amp;amp; Formatting Images ====&lt;br /&gt;
#The insert menu option is for inserting images, hyperlinks, charts, page numbers, page breaks, formulas and etc...  &lt;br /&gt;
#To insert an image, Go to &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Image&amp;quot; This will open a folder from which images are to be inserted (Images need to be browsed from your computer local folders).&lt;br /&gt;
#The inserted image (triangle) will looks like below &amp;quot;Inserted Image View&amp;quot; image.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Insert images.png|Insert Menu&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO_Writer_9_Insert_image.png|Inserting Image&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO_Writer_10_Inserted_Image.png|Inserted Image View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After you insert any image if you want to resize (height*width), &amp;quot;Click on the image and select any of the dots on the corner of the image and drag to increase or decrease the size of the image&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Editing image =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Using the Crop tool: To use the Crop tool &amp;quot;Click on the Crop icon&amp;quot; as shown in Image1 or right-click on the image and select Crop from the context menu. Cropping handles appear at the corners and mid-points of the sides of the image. Drag a handle to cut off part of the image. Click outside the image to turn off cropping mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Compressing images (&amp;quot;Inserting Image&amp;quot; image)&lt;br /&gt;
* If you insert a large image in your document and resize it to fit into the layout of the page, the complete original image is stored in the document file to preserve its content, resulting in a large document file to store or send by mail.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you can accept some loss of quality of the image rendering, you can compress or resize the image object to reduce its data volume while preserving its display in the page layout. You probably don’t want to compress something that will be professionally printed. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Right-click to select the image and open the context menu&amp;quot;. Then choose &amp;quot;Compress&amp;quot; to open the Compress Image dialog. Click &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to apply the compression settings. If the resulting image is not acceptable, press &amp;quot;Ctrl+Z&amp;quot; to undo and choose another compression setting.&lt;br /&gt;
3. Transparency: set the transparency options for the image using this button as shown in Image1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Rotating images: Rotate images if required using button showed in Image1:Image Formatting features&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Image editng.png|Image1: Image Formatting features&lt;br /&gt;
File:Compress Image.png|Image 2: Image compressing window&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserting &amp;amp; Formatting Table ====&lt;br /&gt;
* To insert Table, go to &amp;quot;Table&amp;quot; from Menu bar and select &amp;quot;Insert Table&amp;quot;, in given window choose required number of rows and columns. Alternatively you can also insert table from standard toolbar, Click on &amp;quot;table grid&amp;quot; from toolbar and move the cursor over the grid until you highlight the number of columns and rows you want. Click and the table appears in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can format your table by selecting the options in 'Table'. Move your cursor inside the table and &amp;quot;Select --&amp;gt; Table&amp;quot;. You can then adjust the row and column widths (&amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Size&amp;quot;), add or remove borders (&amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Properties --&amp;gt; Borders&amp;quot;), split or merge cells (&amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Merge Cells&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Table --&amp;gt; Split Cells&amp;quot;) etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can also copy data from a spreadsheet. You can simply copy that data (in rows and columns) from the spreadsheet and paste into the document, it will create a copy of the spreadsheet in your document. If you do not want it as a spreadsheet, but only as a table, you need to select &amp;quot;Paste Special -&amp;gt; Formatted text option&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Inserting Table&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Inert table in LOW.png|Insert Table&lt;br /&gt;
File:Format Table in LOW.png|Select rows and columns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Table Formatting.png|Table Formatting&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Align text to the top, middle and to the bottom&lt;br /&gt;
# Apply Borders to cells and tables&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert caption for the table&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Finding and replacing text ====&lt;br /&gt;
Writer has two ways to find text within a document: The Find toolbar for fast searching and the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog. If the Find toolbar is not visible, you can display it by choosing &amp;quot;View --&amp;gt; Toolbars --&amp;gt; Find&amp;quot; from the Menu bar or by pressing &amp;quot;Ctrl+F&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Using the Find toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To use the &amp;quot;Find&amp;quot; toolbar, click in the text input box and type your search text, then press &amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot; to find the next occurrence of that term from the current cursor position. Click the &amp;quot;Find Next&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Find Previous&amp;quot; buttons as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the &amp;quot;Find All&amp;quot; button to select all instances of the search term within the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Using the Find toolbar.png|Using the Find toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Using the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To display the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog, use the keyboard shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+H&amp;quot;, or choose &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Find &amp;amp; Replace&amp;quot; from the Menu bar. Use the Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog:&lt;br /&gt;
* Type the text you want to find in the Find box.&lt;br /&gt;
* To replace the text with different text, type the new text in the Replace box.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can select various options, such as matching the case or matching whole words only. The other options include searching only in selected text, searching from the current cursor position backwards toward the beginning of the document, searching for similar words, and searching in comments.&lt;br /&gt;
* When you have set up your search, click &amp;quot;Find Next&amp;quot;. As the document view moves to each found instance, replace the text by clicking &amp;quot;Replace&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Expanded Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog.png|Expanded Find &amp;amp; Replace dialog&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating an automatic Table of Contents====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Often it is useful to create text documents which are organize into headings and sub headings to denote different sections.  This can be done in two ways,&lt;br /&gt;
##You can select the text you want to define as a heading and choose from the predefined headings style, by selecting from the first drop down box as shown in the first image.&lt;br /&gt;
##You can also define this from the Style menu by clicking on Style and selecting the given heading.  &lt;br /&gt;
##You can define the appearance of each heading under the Styles and formatting option by changing the default font colour, size, etc.  &lt;br /&gt;
#Once the headings are defined, you can insert the Table of Contents.  Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents. Choose &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Table of Contents and Index --&amp;gt; Index Entry&amp;quot;, just click on “OK”.  For updating table of content,  right click on the table of content and Update Index or Table of Contents. Note that if you add any headings in the document, it will not automatically update the Table of Contents, hence you will need to come to the Table of Contents and do the update manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Inserting Table of Content&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding paragrapgh style.png|Paragraph style for Table of Content&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding TOC into the document.png|Insert Table of Content&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding page header and footer ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# You can add a header and/or footer to your document. You could provide the name of the document (or any other static information) in the footer. You can also insert page number in the header or the footer, which will be dynamically generated by Writer. It is useful to have page number and name of your document on every page, this is specially useful if the reader wants to read a print copy. LibreOffice Writer allows you to easily insert this information at the bottom or top of each page. This can be done using &amp;quot;Insert---&amp;gt;Footer&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once a footer has been inserted, you can go to the bottom of the page and insert multiple fields of information using &amp;quot;Insert --&amp;gt; Fields&amp;quot;. You can type any text in this footer, it will come on all pages. Other than page number, other dynamic information you can provide is the date/time stamp of the document. A similar method can also be adopted for inserting a header as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LOWriter - Header and footers.png| Adding header and footers for the page&lt;br /&gt;
File:LOWriter adding fields.png| Inserting page fields&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Spelling check ====&lt;br /&gt;
#Spelling - By enabling &amp;quot;Automatic spell checking&amp;quot; under Tools, you can check spelling within your document. You will see a red underline below a word spelt wrongly. (If you see a green line below a word, it suggests a grammatical error). You can move your cursor to the word and right click to get suggestions for correcting the spelling. In case you are clear your word is correct, you can also &amp;quot;Add your word to the dictionary&amp;quot; so that the next time you use it, it will not be treated as a wrong spelling.&lt;br /&gt;
#You can also do a manual spelling and grammar checking of the document. Select the text and click on &amp;quot;spelling and grammar&amp;quot; under &amp;quot;Tools&amp;quot; option. it will start looking spelling and grammar for the document. It is a good habit to always run a spelling check on your document before sharing.&lt;br /&gt;
#To check the spelling and the grammar of a text, the appropriate dictionaries must be installed. You can have dictionaries for your own language (Telugu, Urdu etc) installed, apart from the one in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Formatting in LibreOffice Writer&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Auto spell checking LO writer .png|Auto spell checking  &lt;br /&gt;
File:Checking spelling and grammar by manually .png|Spelling and grammar checking&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Customizing the Toolbar ====&lt;br /&gt;
* LibreOffice is a Open source application and therefore it allows the users to customize the interface. &lt;br /&gt;
* Menu is most useful section of Writer and its structure must be familiar to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* The structure of menu and its items can be customized easily so that it becomes user friendly.&lt;br /&gt;
* To do this, go to &amp;quot;Tools--&amp;gt;Customize&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Customize window will be having all the &amp;quot;Available Command&amp;quot; list on the left side. &amp;quot;Assigned command&amp;quot; on the right. If you want to remove the already assigned command then click on that particular command on the Assigned command list and move it towards Available command by clicking the left arrow button.&lt;br /&gt;
* Similarly if you want an additional command to your menu then choose the command from the &amp;quot;Available command&amp;quot; list. Click right arrow button to move it to the &amp;quot;Assigned command&amp;quot; list.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can also change the name of a particular command  by clicking that command and click on &amp;quot;Modify --&amp;gt; Rename&amp;quot;. Give the new name to that menu and click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Checked and Unchecked Toolbar.png|Customizing Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* To customize Toolbar, click on &amp;quot;Toolbar&amp;quot; tab in Customize window. As explained earlier, &amp;quot;Assigned Commands&amp;quot; will be having list of tools. The checked tools are already there in the toolbar and unchecked ones are available to move them to the toolbar. If you want any particular tool to be easily accessible and move to the toolbar then just check mark those and click &amp;quot;Apply--&amp;gt;OK&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the way you can change or assign the Keyboard shortcuts. For this Click on Keyboard tab in the Customize window. You can choose a command and click on &amp;quot;Modify?&amp;quot; to change its shortcut or functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO Tools Language select.png|Menubar tools&lt;br /&gt;
File:LO language interface language settings, user interface.jpg|Languages interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
an type any your local languages in Ubuntu by adding those languages in IBUS. For typing in any local language, Ubuntu will use application called Ibus. You can follow the below step to set up Ibus and to add languages in the typing list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &amp;quot;Applications --&amp;gt; System tools --&amp;gt; System Settings --&amp;gt; Language Support --&amp;gt;Look at the Keyboard input method system Select &amp;quot;IBus&amp;quot; and close the window&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log-out your computer and log-in to applying this changes.&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have to add your languages in &amp;quot;Text Entry&amp;quot; to type it. You can type multiple language in any application by adding it in this list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Ibus - adding languages in Text entry.png|Selecting Text Entry from the top panel &lt;br /&gt;
File:Ibus - select plus to add .png| Adding languages in Text Entry&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;quot;En&amp;quot; from the top panel and select &amp;quot;Text Entry&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the Text Entry window opens, click on &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; arrow mark, as shown in image.&lt;br /&gt;
# The language list window will open, search your languages by typing it in search box. It will show the all the typing methods for the language. Choose a keyboard layout you are comfortable with and click &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Yes, you are finished all the set up, after this your language list looks like below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Ibus - adding languages.png| Adding Hindi to my language list&lt;br /&gt;
File:Ibus - added telugu.png|Added Hindi 3 typing methods&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Now its time to type your added language in most of the applications. Click on the language panel &amp;quot;En&amp;quot; (right top corner of the screen) and select language in which you want to type. When you select language, icon will change to that language. The very important is you can add multiple languages in this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Typing regional language on Microsoft windows OS =====&lt;br /&gt;
Click on [https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/change-your-keyboard-layout-245c49b8-f856-7fd7-2cf5-41e54c66f5b3#ID0EBBD=Windows_8.1 this link] to know more about typing regional language in windows 7 or 8&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on [https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/available-language-packs-for-windows?view=windows-11 this link] to know more about typing regional language in windows 10 or 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tracking changes to a document ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can use several methods to keep track of changes made to a document.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make your changes to a copy of the document (stored in a different folder, under a different name, or both), then use Writer to compare the two files and show the changes you made. This technique is particularly useful if you are the only person working on the document, as it avoids the increase in file size and complexity caused by the other methods.&lt;br /&gt;
* Save versions that are stored as part of the original file. However, this method can cause problems with large or complex documents, especially if you save a lot of versions. Avoid this method if you can.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use Writer’s change marks (often called “revision marks”) to show added or deleted material or changed formatting. Later, you or another person can review and accept or reject each change.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Preparing a document for review'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you send a document to someone else to review or edit, you may want to prepare it first so that the editor or reviewer does not have to remember to turn on the revision marks. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the document. Check whether it contains multiple versions by clicking &amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Versions&amp;quot;. If multiple versions are listed, save the current version as a separate document with a different name and use this new document as the review copy.&lt;br /&gt;
* With the review copy open, make sure that change recording is turned on. The &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Record Changes&amp;quot; menu item has a check mark next to it when recording is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
* To begin tracking (recording) changes, click &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Record Changes&amp;quot;. To show or hide the display of changes, click &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Show Changes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To stop recording changes, click &amp;quot;Edit --&amp;gt; Track Changes --&amp;gt; Record Changes&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
The results of accepting or rejecting a change are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Accept: Incorporates the alteration into the document and removes the change indication marking.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reject: Reverts the document to its original state and removes the change indication marking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Page orientation within the document ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Create a New Style.png|Creating a new style&lt;br /&gt;
File:Giving a name for a style.png|Giving a name for a style&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing Page Orientation.png|Changing page orientation&lt;br /&gt;
File:Inserting a page break1.png|Inserting a page break &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* LibreOffice Writer allows you to change the page orientation in between the document as per your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
* For example, If you have a document having data of three pages you can make the second page landscape and rest two to remain as portrait orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
* To do this, first go to sidebar of Writer. Click on &amp;quot;Styles --&amp;gt; Page styles&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* On the Page style list page, &amp;quot;right click --&amp;gt; New&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the new page style window click on &amp;quot;Organizer tab --&amp;gt; Enter a new name to the style --&amp;gt; Choose the 'Default style' as Next style&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to the &amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; tab --&amp;gt; Change the orientation as Landscape&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click &amp;quot;Apply --&amp;gt; OK&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Place the position of the cursor to the place where you need to change the orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on Insert --&amp;gt; More Breaks --&amp;gt; Manual Break&amp;quot;. You will get a new window called &amp;quot;Insert Break&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* In this window, choose the type “Page break” and name of the style you have given earlier as the style name.&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes it may happen that your cursor point becomes Landscape but remaining pages also changes their orientation and become Landscape. The solution for this is,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Place the cursor from which you want your orientation to be Portrait. Click on Insert --&amp;gt; More Breaks --&amp;gt; Manual Break&amp;quot;. You will get a new window called &amp;quot;Insert Break&amp;quot;. In this window, choose the type “Page break” and name of the style as Default Style. (Usually this Default style will be having the page orientation as portrait. In this way your can make the rest of the pages again as Portrait. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving the file====&lt;br /&gt;
* Like in most applications, a file can be saved using the &amp;quot;File --&amp;gt; Save&amp;quot; command, or by the shortcut key &amp;quot;Ctrl+S&amp;quot;. Always give a meaningful file name, reading which you should get an idea of the file contents. Often adding the month-year information when the file was created can be useful later File will save in .odt format, ODT is the short form of Open Document Text. ODT conforms to Open Document Format (ODF) which is recommended by the Government of India through its website [https://india.gov.in/policy-open-standards-e-governance Policy on open standards]””.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Like in most applications, a file can be exported to a PDF format. This is useful when you only need to print the file and do not want any changes to it. You can also export a document to a 'html' (web page) format, which can be opened by a web browser or MS word format which is supported by Windows operating system.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Save as odt.png| Save as ODT&lt;br /&gt;
File:Export as PDF.png|Export as PDF&lt;br /&gt;
File:Save as Doc.png| Save in MS word format&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://help.libreoffice.org/Common/Track_Changes Track changes] (Recording editing changes by another person in another colour in the document, which can be accepted or rejected by the author)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://help.libreoffice.org/Writer/Columns Multiple columns] (Useful for making newsletters and magazines) and other page layout functions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ideas for resource creation===&lt;br /&gt;
# You can use this application to create and edit text resources. You can insert images, web links, hyper links in the document and connect the text to other resource formats. You can insert and edit tables, create sections (with section headings) and format it in many ways to create a text document.   &lt;br /&gt;
# Infographics, posters, comic strips are some resources you can create using text editors in addition to making reports. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://help.libreoffice.org/Main_Page LibreOffice page]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/LibreOffice_Writer Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13693</id>
		<title>Learn Ubuntu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13693"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T10:33:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Home page overview */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%89%E0%B2%AC%E0%B3%81%E0%B2%82%E0%B2%9F%E0%B3%81_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]  [https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%89%E0%A4%AC%E0%A4%82%E0%A4%9F%E0%A5%82_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%8F हिंदी]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:Book-sidebar}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Operating system is also called system software as it works with the hardware. Every computer must have an operating system to run other computer programs. Even your mobile phone will have an operating system. Operating systems start automatically when you turn on the computer, this process is termed as booting. All the other computer programs like programs to paint, type, listen to music, learn mathematics etc., are called application software or 'Apps' which work with the system software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is a ‘[[wikipedia:Free_and_open-source_software|Free and Open Source Software]]’ (called FOSS in short) operating system. You may be familiar with Microsoft Windows operating system or used an application called Adobe Reader.  Windows or Adobe Photoshop are ‘[[wikt:proprietary|proprietary]]’ , meaning they cannot be copied or shared or modified by us; FOSS applications are licensed under the ‘General Public License’ which allows all of us to share the software freely, we can also modify the software as per our needs. Hence it is important to use FOSS in our schools. Teachers must learn and teach FOSS and avoid use of proprietary software, since it is not possible for all to access and use proprietary software, and not possible for anyone (other than the vendor) to study or improve the software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since all the software like [[wikipedia:Productivity_software#Office_suite|Office suite]], [[wikipedia:Web_browser|web browser]], educational software can be bundled with Ubuntu GNU/Linux operating system, all these applications can be installed on the computer at one time. On proprietary software Windows, each software has to be separately installed, which can make it cumbersome and time consuming. Operating systems use a program called the [[wikipedia:Graphical_user_interface|Graphical User Interface]] (GUI) to access other computer with a [[wikipedia:Pointing_device|mouse]].  The popular operating systems are [[wikipedia:Microsoft_Windows|Microsoft Windows]], [[wikipedia:Linux|GNU/Linux]] and [[wikipedia:MacOS|Mac OS]]. In this section, you will learn about the functions of an operating system, using an example of [[Learn Ubuntu|Ubuntu]] GNU/Linux operating system. With this learning, you can also operate a computer with Windows of Mac operating systems. Remember that we are focusing on learning the processes of any software application, so that we can, with that learning, use similar other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Ubuntu GNU/Linux is an operating system for the computer. The operating system is the foundation, which supports the interface between the user and other software applications. Hence learning Ubuntu constitutes basic digital literacy. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|There are a large number of freely shareable educational tools on Ubuntu pertaining to mathematics, science, social sciences, languages etc which can be used in all schools. There are a large number of additional freely shareable tools on GNU/Linux, such as [[wikipedia:Intelligent_Input_Bus|IBUS]] which support word processing in more than 50 languages, including all languages used in Telangana such as Telugu,  Urdu, Kannada, Tamil, Marathi, Hindi etc. The [[wikipedia:Orca_(disambiguation)|ORCA]] screen reader can be used by the visually handicapped for reading content on the computer screen. [[wikipedia:Scribus|Scribus]] can be used for for desktop publishing. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Once in six months, [[wikipedia:Canonical_(company)|Canonical]] releases a new version of the Ubuntu. The first Ubuntu release was in April 2004. The recently released version of Ubuntu is 18.04 (as April 2018), but Ubuntu 18.04 is the latest [https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS LTS] ('''L'''ong '''T'''erm '''S'''upport) version, which you will use.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|To install and use Ubuntu on your computer, it should have following configuration:&lt;br /&gt;
Processor: 2 GHz dual core processor or better&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Memory: 1GB of RAM (2GB recommended)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Disk: 30GB of disk space depending on options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Graphics: If you plan to use the netbook interface, you will require a graphics card that supports 3D acceleration on Ubuntu. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Either a DVD drive or a USB port for the installer media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your computer does not match the above hardware specifications, or is old, install [[wikipedia:Lubuntu|Lubuntu]] OS. Lubuntu is an Ubuntu based distribution meant for low hardware configuration computers. Lubuntu is a fast and lightweight operating system. It has low hardware requirements. Download Lubuntu ISO 32 bit from [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-i386.iso here] and 64 bit [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-amd64.iso here].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[[wikipedia:Linux_Mint|Mint]], [[wikipedia:Debian|Debian]], [[wikipedia:OpenSUSE|OpenSUSE]], and [[wikipedia:Fedora|Fedora]] are popular Linux distributions.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is available on select [https://ubuntu.com/mobile/devices Mobile phones] and [https://ubuntu.com/mobile tablets]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
There are many community forums are helping Ubuntu users.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://help.ubuntu.com/community/CommunityHelpWiki Community Wiki help]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://community.ubuntu.com/help-information/ Ubuntu help]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu performs all the basic functions expected of an operating system. &lt;br /&gt;
# It allows the user to login and logout and keeps the user data secure within that login&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can browse the folders and files using a file browser&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can use different applications on their computer for creating and accessing files. This includes accessing, creating, editing text, image, audio, video, animation files.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to other devices - printers and scanners, mobile phones, pen drives, external hard disks and other storage devices, external DVD writers etc.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is shipped with many applications relevant to education including GCompris, KDE Edutainment Suite, Ubuntu Menu editor, LibreOffice, Gnome Nanny etc. Ubuntu is available to [https://www.ubuntu.com/download/desktop freely download]. Edubuntu's default GUI is Unity while GNOME is also available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
====Starting and shutting down your computer====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Starting and shutting down your computer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Login.jpg|Ubuntu Login screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Ubuntu home screen.png|Ubuntu home screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Shutdown the computer.png|Shutdown the computer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above images show you the basic Ubuntu interface. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Logging in''': When you switch on your computer, you will see a login screen. Login with the user id (name) and password created by the system administrator. '''Ubuntu''' allows you to have a user interface in your own language, by specifying your language as the user language, during your user id creation. Once you have logged in, the home screen will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Home screen:''' The second image shows you the Ubuntu home screen.  The applications menu at the top left has a list of all the programs (apps) on your computer. The '''Places''' menu, next to it, lets you access the 'places' on your computer including the hard disk, CD/DVD or pen drives. Digital cameras and MP3 players are also listed here when plugged-in.  The '''Applications''' menu has sub menus for Education, Office, Internet, Games etc. Each sub-menu has many applications. You can try to learn them yourselves by clicking and selecting options.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Shutting down the computer:''' What will you do after you have finished your work? You have to turn off the computer. You must turn it off by clicking on the last button on the right hand top corner and select shut down. Never turn off the power button without shutting the computer properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing Ubuntu interface (Mate Tweak)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:System settings.png|Opening the system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening the Mate Tweak.png|Opening the Mate Tweak&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Tradi.png|Selecting the panel &lt;br /&gt;
File:Close.png|Closing the Mate Tweak   &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once you have chosen the option from drop down it will ask you to click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot;, Click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to apply the format &lt;br /&gt;
====Home page overview====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In home page we can see the below mentioned options,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Application menu:-''' You can see the list of software's from this option.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Places:-''' You can see the folder locations from this option.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''System settings:-''' You can see the setting options from this.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Shortcuts:-''' You can see the shortcuts created for shortcuts to the top panel.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Top panel:-''' It's a panel which includes Application menu, Places, System settings, Shortcuts, Top panel, Ibus language preferences option, Time &amp;amp; Settings.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Ibus language preferences option:-''' It's used to change the typing language.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Time &amp;amp; Settings:-''' Time will reflect the present date and time. Setting will open the settings options.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Short cut for Desktop:-''' Used to go to the desktop directly.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Minimized tabs:-''' It will show the list of minimized tabs in your system.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Down panel:-''' It includes Minimized tabs, Short cut for Desktop, Workspace and Trash&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Trash:-''' Trash will work just like recycle bean(The deleted files will be moved to trash).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Workspace:-''' It is just like a room where if we change workspace the entire tabs will be kept in previous room and a new room will open with blank home page.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;290&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Home page overview&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Home screen.png|Home screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Workspace.jpg|Once changed the workspace&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating and managing folders and files====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Managing files folders.png|Managing files &amp;amp; folders&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Creating and managing files and folders -  When you write an essay or paint something on a paper, you would like to keep it for future, right? You would probably put it in a hard bound folder. Maybe, if you have more than one essay or painting, you would have one folder to hold your essays and one folder to hold your paintings.&lt;br /&gt;
*#To create new folder right click on your mouse and click on &amp;quot;New Folder&amp;quot;. Rename the folder and save your files in it. You can also create many sub folders  within that.&lt;br /&gt;
*#Always give meaningful names for folders, so that you can easily search for them later.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can move folders, and files across folders.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can create a file by opening a application, and creating a new file to prepare your content. You can create text documents with LibreOffice Writer, Images with Tux Paint etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating folders with meaningful name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Create folder.png|Creating new folder&lt;br /&gt;
File:Created.png|Once the new folder created&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renamne.png|Giving a meaningful name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To delete a file or folder right click on the particular file or folder and click on the &amp;quot;Move to Trash&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Deleting the folder or files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Deleting the folder.png|Deleting the folder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*From '''HOME''' folder you can search any files and folders which you have saved in your computer, click on search option on the toolbar and type the keywords of the file or folder, it will show the all files contains our searching keywords in your computer. If you have an idea about the location of the file you are searching, you can launch the search from within that folder itself, instead of the Home folder, this will show you a lesser number of files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Filesearch.png|File search&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To access the hidden files of your system open the Home folder and click on &amp;quot;View-&amp;gt;Show Hidden Files&amp;quot; or open using the shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+H&amp;quot; and if you want to hide a file or folder then click on rename and add&amp;quot;.(dot)&amp;quot; before the file or folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening Hidden files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Hidden.png|Opening the Hidden Files option&lt;br /&gt;
File:After clicking hidden files.png|After opening the hidden files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To access the recent files click on the &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; option from the top panel and we can see the recently viewed documents fro &amp;quot;Recent Documents&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Accessing recently opened files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recent files.png|Recently opened files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To create a shortcut of software to the &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; or to the &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; follow the below steps,&lt;br /&gt;
** Open the software by clicking on the &amp;quot;Application menu&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** Right click on the particular software&lt;br /&gt;
** If shortcut need to be created on &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to panel&amp;quot;, If needs to be created on &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to Desktop&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating shortcut to Top panel and Desktop&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop.png|thumb|Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Opening files by &amp;quot;open with&amp;quot; option'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening files with application&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening files with application.png|Opening files with application&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#A file can usually be opened with any given application in Ubuntu which supports that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer, gimp, etc. So if you want to open with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available options.&lt;br /&gt;
#File can be opened with multiple application in Ubuntu which support that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer and also can be with Gimp, Mypaint, Kolorpaint, Shotwell viewer etc.  So if you want to open the file with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available multiple options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Import files and folders from external device====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Import files and folders from external device&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Access external device.png|Access external device&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy from external device.png|Copy from external device&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can import files from other devices. You can  insert devices such as CDs, DVDs or memory cards  into your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Connect the devices such as pen drives, memory card holders, external DVD drives  using a cable, to your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; from your desktop top panel. You can see your device name. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on your device name to view the files from that device. &lt;br /&gt;
#To import files from devices, right click on that file and click on &amp;quot;Copy&amp;quot;, then paste it into your computer folder.You can copy audio and video files, that you have recorded on your mobile phone, to your computer. You can edit these files. In the same way, you can copy these and other files from your computer to your mobile phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should periodically take back up of important files on your computer and store it on a pen drive or an external hard disk. So that if the hard disk of your computer has a problem or crashes, you would not lose your data entirely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Ambox&lt;br /&gt;
| text  = Study how there are different kinds of connecting cables, for different devices / ports on your computer. Use the appropriate cable in each case. You can connect printers, scanners, projectors to suitable ports on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
| type = notice&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Connecting to the WiFi or Wired Network====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To connect to the WiFi or Wired Network click on the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; symbol from the top panel and make sure &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Ensuring Enable Network and Enable WiFi are check marked&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Clicking on wifi option.png|Clicking on WiFi symbol from the top panel and Ensuring &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through Wired network connect the LAN cable to the computer and you will get a option as &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; below the &amp;quot;Ethernet Network&amp;quot; option. once you click on &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the wired network. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to Wired Network&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Connecting to wired network.png|Connection to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
File:1connection.png|Once connected to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through WiFi click on your WiFi name shown in the list you may asked to enter your WiFi password if the WiFi is protected, Once you enter the password click on &amp;quot;Connect&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; Network selected by you.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}}Ensure that your computer must have a WiFi drive if you wish to connect through WiFi.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to WiFi&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting and clicking on wifi network name.png|Selecting and clicking on WiFi network name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Asking to enter the password.png|Asking to enter the password&lt;br /&gt;
File:Once connected to the netwrok.png|Once connected to the WiFi network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing user interface language in Ubuntu ====&lt;br /&gt;
English will be default interface in Ubuntu but you can also use Ubuntu in you local languages like Telugu, Kannada or Tamil.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Select language support from system settings.png|Select language support from system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing the language from English to Kannada.png|Changing the language from English to Kannada&lt;br /&gt;
File:Arrange language list.png|Arrange language list&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# To get started, go to &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System settings -&amp;gt; Language support&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
# It may ask you to update or add components to your current default language when you first open the dialog. If you do not have internet connect then click &amp;quot;Remind Me Later&amp;quot; and If you have good internet connection, select install to update your language lists.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we are ready to change our Ubuntu interface language. Find your new language in the list, and then click and drag it to the top of the list and click Apply '''System-Wide'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have set you language as first and click on &amp;quot;system-wide&amp;quot;, you will need to '''log out''' of your account and '''log in''' to see your new interface language.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ubuntu may ask if you want to update your user folders names to your new language, Select Rename folder option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renaming folders.png|Renaming folders&lt;br /&gt;
File:Kannada Ubuntu interface.png|Kannada Ubuntu interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding software applications to your computer system====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding softwares to computer system using Appgrid.png|Adding software's to computer system using App Grid&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can add many more FOSS applications to your computer. Select the &amp;quot;System-&amp;gt;Administration-&amp;gt;App Grid&amp;quot; - You can download applications from the Internet. Teachers can explore new FOSS educational tools and utilities.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Applications &amp;gt; System Tools -&amp;gt; App Grid. You will need to type the required application name in the search bar. It will show all applications with the words you have entered and you will get an option for &amp;quot;Install&amp;quot;. Click on &amp;quot;install&amp;quot; if you want to install the application. If your search does not get the application(s) you want, try with fewer letters / words to search. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may ask your Ubuntu log in password for authentication, just type your Ubuntu password press enter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have doubts or difficulties in using the Ubuntu operating system or any of the applications, you can search for solutions on the Internet using a search engine or refer to '[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Frequently_Asked_Questions Frequently asked questions]'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding your languages to type in Ubuntu====&lt;br /&gt;
In Ubuntu by default you can type English in any application and by default it will use only Unicode fonts unless you manually changing it to non-Unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=350&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting ibus for typing language.png|Selecting Ibus for typing language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Also you can type any your local languages in Ubuntu by adding those languages in Ibus. For typing in any local language, Ubuntu will use application called Ibus. You can follow the below step to set up Ibus and to add languages in the typing list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System Settings -&amp;gt; Language Support -&amp;gt;Look at the Keyboard input method system Select '''IBus''' and close the window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log-out your computer and log-in to applying this changes.&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have to add your languages in &amp;quot;Text Entry&amp;quot; to type it. You can type multiple language in any application by adding it in this list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting preferences.png|left|thumb|Selecting preferences&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding language to text entry.png|thumb|Adding language to text entry&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Right click on '''&amp;quot;En&amp;quot;''' from the top panel and select &amp;quot;Preferences&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the Preferences window opens, click on &amp;quot;Input method-&amp;gt;Add&amp;quot; option, as shown in image.&lt;br /&gt;
# The language list window will open, search your languages by typing it in search box and click on the language. It will show the all the typing methods for the language. Choose a keyboard layout you are comfortable with and click &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Yes, you are finished all the set up, after this your language list looks like below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Searching Kannada language in search box.png|Searching Kannada language in search box&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting keyboard layout.png|Selecting keyboard layout&lt;br /&gt;
File:After adding language.png|after adding language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Now its time to type your added language in most of the applications. Click on the language panel &amp;quot;En&amp;quot; (right top corner of the screen) and select language in which you want to type. When you select language, icon will change to that language. The very important is you can add multiple languages in this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu contains a wide range of software that includes LibreOffice, Firefox, Thunderbird and several games and Educational tools. Many additional software packages are accessible from the built in Ubuntu Software Center known as &amp;quot;App Grid&amp;quot;. More complex commands can be given to the computer using the 'Terminal' interface, this is really for those who have technical expertise. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''{{Note}}To Know the installation process of Ubuntu please go through the below link'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Teachers%27_toolkit_for_creating_and_re-purposing_OER_using_FOSS/Installing_Ubuntu_-_creating_the_FOSS_platform#Installation_Process Click here to Know the Installation process.]&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/Releases Ubuntu releases]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS Ubuntu LTS]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://www.google.co.in/webhp?sourceid=chrome-instant&amp;amp;ion=1&amp;amp;espv=2&amp;amp;ie=UTF-8#q=ubuntu%20wikipedia Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
#[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Kalpavriksha Install Ubuntu (kalpavriksha)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13692</id>
		<title>Learn Ubuntu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13692"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T10:33:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Home page overview */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%89%E0%B2%AC%E0%B3%81%E0%B2%82%E0%B2%9F%E0%B3%81_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]  [https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%89%E0%A4%AC%E0%A4%82%E0%A4%9F%E0%A5%82_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%8F हिंदी]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:Book-sidebar}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Operating system is also called system software as it works with the hardware. Every computer must have an operating system to run other computer programs. Even your mobile phone will have an operating system. Operating systems start automatically when you turn on the computer, this process is termed as booting. All the other computer programs like programs to paint, type, listen to music, learn mathematics etc., are called application software or 'Apps' which work with the system software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is a ‘[[wikipedia:Free_and_open-source_software|Free and Open Source Software]]’ (called FOSS in short) operating system. You may be familiar with Microsoft Windows operating system or used an application called Adobe Reader.  Windows or Adobe Photoshop are ‘[[wikt:proprietary|proprietary]]’ , meaning they cannot be copied or shared or modified by us; FOSS applications are licensed under the ‘General Public License’ which allows all of us to share the software freely, we can also modify the software as per our needs. Hence it is important to use FOSS in our schools. Teachers must learn and teach FOSS and avoid use of proprietary software, since it is not possible for all to access and use proprietary software, and not possible for anyone (other than the vendor) to study or improve the software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since all the software like [[wikipedia:Productivity_software#Office_suite|Office suite]], [[wikipedia:Web_browser|web browser]], educational software can be bundled with Ubuntu GNU/Linux operating system, all these applications can be installed on the computer at one time. On proprietary software Windows, each software has to be separately installed, which can make it cumbersome and time consuming. Operating systems use a program called the [[wikipedia:Graphical_user_interface|Graphical User Interface]] (GUI) to access other computer with a [[wikipedia:Pointing_device|mouse]].  The popular operating systems are [[wikipedia:Microsoft_Windows|Microsoft Windows]], [[wikipedia:Linux|GNU/Linux]] and [[wikipedia:MacOS|Mac OS]]. In this section, you will learn about the functions of an operating system, using an example of [[Learn Ubuntu|Ubuntu]] GNU/Linux operating system. With this learning, you can also operate a computer with Windows of Mac operating systems. Remember that we are focusing on learning the processes of any software application, so that we can, with that learning, use similar other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Ubuntu GNU/Linux is an operating system for the computer. The operating system is the foundation, which supports the interface between the user and other software applications. Hence learning Ubuntu constitutes basic digital literacy. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|There are a large number of freely shareable educational tools on Ubuntu pertaining to mathematics, science, social sciences, languages etc which can be used in all schools. There are a large number of additional freely shareable tools on GNU/Linux, such as [[wikipedia:Intelligent_Input_Bus|IBUS]] which support word processing in more than 50 languages, including all languages used in Telangana such as Telugu,  Urdu, Kannada, Tamil, Marathi, Hindi etc. The [[wikipedia:Orca_(disambiguation)|ORCA]] screen reader can be used by the visually handicapped for reading content on the computer screen. [[wikipedia:Scribus|Scribus]] can be used for for desktop publishing. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Once in six months, [[wikipedia:Canonical_(company)|Canonical]] releases a new version of the Ubuntu. The first Ubuntu release was in April 2004. The recently released version of Ubuntu is 18.04 (as April 2018), but Ubuntu 18.04 is the latest [https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS LTS] ('''L'''ong '''T'''erm '''S'''upport) version, which you will use.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|To install and use Ubuntu on your computer, it should have following configuration:&lt;br /&gt;
Processor: 2 GHz dual core processor or better&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Memory: 1GB of RAM (2GB recommended)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Disk: 30GB of disk space depending on options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Graphics: If you plan to use the netbook interface, you will require a graphics card that supports 3D acceleration on Ubuntu. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Either a DVD drive or a USB port for the installer media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your computer does not match the above hardware specifications, or is old, install [[wikipedia:Lubuntu|Lubuntu]] OS. Lubuntu is an Ubuntu based distribution meant for low hardware configuration computers. Lubuntu is a fast and lightweight operating system. It has low hardware requirements. Download Lubuntu ISO 32 bit from [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-i386.iso here] and 64 bit [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-amd64.iso here].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[[wikipedia:Linux_Mint|Mint]], [[wikipedia:Debian|Debian]], [[wikipedia:OpenSUSE|OpenSUSE]], and [[wikipedia:Fedora|Fedora]] are popular Linux distributions.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is available on select [https://ubuntu.com/mobile/devices Mobile phones] and [https://ubuntu.com/mobile tablets]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
There are many community forums are helping Ubuntu users.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://help.ubuntu.com/community/CommunityHelpWiki Community Wiki help]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://community.ubuntu.com/help-information/ Ubuntu help]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu performs all the basic functions expected of an operating system. &lt;br /&gt;
# It allows the user to login and logout and keeps the user data secure within that login&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can browse the folders and files using a file browser&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can use different applications on their computer for creating and accessing files. This includes accessing, creating, editing text, image, audio, video, animation files.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to other devices - printers and scanners, mobile phones, pen drives, external hard disks and other storage devices, external DVD writers etc.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is shipped with many applications relevant to education including GCompris, KDE Edutainment Suite, Ubuntu Menu editor, LibreOffice, Gnome Nanny etc. Ubuntu is available to [https://www.ubuntu.com/download/desktop freely download]. Edubuntu's default GUI is Unity while GNOME is also available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
====Starting and shutting down your computer====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Starting and shutting down your computer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Login.jpg|Ubuntu Login screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Ubuntu home screen.png|Ubuntu home screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Shutdown the computer.png|Shutdown the computer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above images show you the basic Ubuntu interface. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Logging in''': When you switch on your computer, you will see a login screen. Login with the user id (name) and password created by the system administrator. '''Ubuntu''' allows you to have a user interface in your own language, by specifying your language as the user language, during your user id creation. Once you have logged in, the home screen will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Home screen:''' The second image shows you the Ubuntu home screen.  The applications menu at the top left has a list of all the programs (apps) on your computer. The '''Places''' menu, next to it, lets you access the 'places' on your computer including the hard disk, CD/DVD or pen drives. Digital cameras and MP3 players are also listed here when plugged-in.  The '''Applications''' menu has sub menus for Education, Office, Internet, Games etc. Each sub-menu has many applications. You can try to learn them yourselves by clicking and selecting options.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Shutting down the computer:''' What will you do after you have finished your work? You have to turn off the computer. You must turn it off by clicking on the last button on the right hand top corner and select shut down. Never turn off the power button without shutting the computer properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing Ubuntu interface (Mate Tweak)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:System settings.png|Opening the system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening the Mate Tweak.png|Opening the Mate Tweak&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Tradi.png|Selecting the panel &lt;br /&gt;
File:Close.png|Closing the Mate Tweak   &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once you have chosen the option from drop down it will ask you to click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot;, Click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to apply the format &lt;br /&gt;
====Home page overview====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In home page we can see the below mentioned options,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Application menu:-''' You can see the list of software's from this option.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Places:-''' You can see the folder locations from this option.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''System settings:-''' You can see the setting options from this.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Shortcuts:-''' You can see the shortcuts created for shortcuts to the top panel.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Top panel:-''' It's a panel which includes Application menu, Places, System settings, Shortcuts, Top panel, Ibus language preferences option, Time &amp;amp; Settings.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Ibus language preferences option:-''' It's used to change the typing language.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Time &amp;amp; Settings:-''' Time will reflect the present date and time. Setting will open the settings options.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Short cut for Desktop:-''' Used to go to the desktop directly.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Minimized tabs:-''' It will show the list of minimized tabs in your system.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Down panel:-''' It includes Minimized tabs, Short cut for Desktop, Workspace and Trash&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Trash:-''' Trash will work just like recycle bean(The deleted files will be moved to trash).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Workspace:-''' It is just like a room where if we change workspace the entire tabs will be kept in previous room and a new room will open with blank home page.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;280&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Home page overview&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Home screen.png|Home screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Workspace.jpg|Once changed the workspace&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating and managing folders and files====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Managing files folders.png|Managing files &amp;amp; folders&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Creating and managing files and folders -  When you write an essay or paint something on a paper, you would like to keep it for future, right? You would probably put it in a hard bound folder. Maybe, if you have more than one essay or painting, you would have one folder to hold your essays and one folder to hold your paintings.&lt;br /&gt;
*#To create new folder right click on your mouse and click on &amp;quot;New Folder&amp;quot;. Rename the folder and save your files in it. You can also create many sub folders  within that.&lt;br /&gt;
*#Always give meaningful names for folders, so that you can easily search for them later.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can move folders, and files across folders.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can create a file by opening a application, and creating a new file to prepare your content. You can create text documents with LibreOffice Writer, Images with Tux Paint etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating folders with meaningful name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Create folder.png|Creating new folder&lt;br /&gt;
File:Created.png|Once the new folder created&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renamne.png|Giving a meaningful name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To delete a file or folder right click on the particular file or folder and click on the &amp;quot;Move to Trash&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Deleting the folder or files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Deleting the folder.png|Deleting the folder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*From '''HOME''' folder you can search any files and folders which you have saved in your computer, click on search option on the toolbar and type the keywords of the file or folder, it will show the all files contains our searching keywords in your computer. If you have an idea about the location of the file you are searching, you can launch the search from within that folder itself, instead of the Home folder, this will show you a lesser number of files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Filesearch.png|File search&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To access the hidden files of your system open the Home folder and click on &amp;quot;View-&amp;gt;Show Hidden Files&amp;quot; or open using the shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+H&amp;quot; and if you want to hide a file or folder then click on rename and add&amp;quot;.(dot)&amp;quot; before the file or folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening Hidden files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Hidden.png|Opening the Hidden Files option&lt;br /&gt;
File:After clicking hidden files.png|After opening the hidden files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To access the recent files click on the &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; option from the top panel and we can see the recently viewed documents fro &amp;quot;Recent Documents&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Accessing recently opened files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recent files.png|Recently opened files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To create a shortcut of software to the &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; or to the &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; follow the below steps,&lt;br /&gt;
** Open the software by clicking on the &amp;quot;Application menu&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** Right click on the particular software&lt;br /&gt;
** If shortcut need to be created on &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to panel&amp;quot;, If needs to be created on &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to Desktop&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating shortcut to Top panel and Desktop&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop.png|thumb|Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Opening files by &amp;quot;open with&amp;quot; option'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening files with application&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening files with application.png|Opening files with application&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#A file can usually be opened with any given application in Ubuntu which supports that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer, gimp, etc. So if you want to open with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available options.&lt;br /&gt;
#File can be opened with multiple application in Ubuntu which support that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer and also can be with Gimp, Mypaint, Kolorpaint, Shotwell viewer etc.  So if you want to open the file with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available multiple options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Import files and folders from external device====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Import files and folders from external device&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Access external device.png|Access external device&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy from external device.png|Copy from external device&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can import files from other devices. You can  insert devices such as CDs, DVDs or memory cards  into your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Connect the devices such as pen drives, memory card holders, external DVD drives  using a cable, to your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; from your desktop top panel. You can see your device name. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on your device name to view the files from that device. &lt;br /&gt;
#To import files from devices, right click on that file and click on &amp;quot;Copy&amp;quot;, then paste it into your computer folder.You can copy audio and video files, that you have recorded on your mobile phone, to your computer. You can edit these files. In the same way, you can copy these and other files from your computer to your mobile phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should periodically take back up of important files on your computer and store it on a pen drive or an external hard disk. So that if the hard disk of your computer has a problem or crashes, you would not lose your data entirely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Ambox&lt;br /&gt;
| text  = Study how there are different kinds of connecting cables, for different devices / ports on your computer. Use the appropriate cable in each case. You can connect printers, scanners, projectors to suitable ports on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
| type = notice&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Connecting to the WiFi or Wired Network====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To connect to the WiFi or Wired Network click on the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; symbol from the top panel and make sure &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Ensuring Enable Network and Enable WiFi are check marked&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Clicking on wifi option.png|Clicking on WiFi symbol from the top panel and Ensuring &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through Wired network connect the LAN cable to the computer and you will get a option as &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; below the &amp;quot;Ethernet Network&amp;quot; option. once you click on &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the wired network. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to Wired Network&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Connecting to wired network.png|Connection to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
File:1connection.png|Once connected to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through WiFi click on your WiFi name shown in the list you may asked to enter your WiFi password if the WiFi is protected, Once you enter the password click on &amp;quot;Connect&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; Network selected by you.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}}Ensure that your computer must have a WiFi drive if you wish to connect through WiFi.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to WiFi&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting and clicking on wifi network name.png|Selecting and clicking on WiFi network name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Asking to enter the password.png|Asking to enter the password&lt;br /&gt;
File:Once connected to the netwrok.png|Once connected to the WiFi network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing user interface language in Ubuntu ====&lt;br /&gt;
English will be default interface in Ubuntu but you can also use Ubuntu in you local languages like Telugu, Kannada or Tamil.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Select language support from system settings.png|Select language support from system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing the language from English to Kannada.png|Changing the language from English to Kannada&lt;br /&gt;
File:Arrange language list.png|Arrange language list&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# To get started, go to &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System settings -&amp;gt; Language support&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
# It may ask you to update or add components to your current default language when you first open the dialog. If you do not have internet connect then click &amp;quot;Remind Me Later&amp;quot; and If you have good internet connection, select install to update your language lists.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we are ready to change our Ubuntu interface language. Find your new language in the list, and then click and drag it to the top of the list and click Apply '''System-Wide'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have set you language as first and click on &amp;quot;system-wide&amp;quot;, you will need to '''log out''' of your account and '''log in''' to see your new interface language.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ubuntu may ask if you want to update your user folders names to your new language, Select Rename folder option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renaming folders.png|Renaming folders&lt;br /&gt;
File:Kannada Ubuntu interface.png|Kannada Ubuntu interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding software applications to your computer system====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding softwares to computer system using Appgrid.png|Adding software's to computer system using App Grid&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can add many more FOSS applications to your computer. Select the &amp;quot;System-&amp;gt;Administration-&amp;gt;App Grid&amp;quot; - You can download applications from the Internet. Teachers can explore new FOSS educational tools and utilities.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Applications &amp;gt; System Tools -&amp;gt; App Grid. You will need to type the required application name in the search bar. It will show all applications with the words you have entered and you will get an option for &amp;quot;Install&amp;quot;. Click on &amp;quot;install&amp;quot; if you want to install the application. If your search does not get the application(s) you want, try with fewer letters / words to search. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may ask your Ubuntu log in password for authentication, just type your Ubuntu password press enter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have doubts or difficulties in using the Ubuntu operating system or any of the applications, you can search for solutions on the Internet using a search engine or refer to '[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Frequently_Asked_Questions Frequently asked questions]'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding your languages to type in Ubuntu====&lt;br /&gt;
In Ubuntu by default you can type English in any application and by default it will use only Unicode fonts unless you manually changing it to non-Unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=350&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting ibus for typing language.png|Selecting Ibus for typing language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Also you can type any your local languages in Ubuntu by adding those languages in Ibus. For typing in any local language, Ubuntu will use application called Ibus. You can follow the below step to set up Ibus and to add languages in the typing list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System Settings -&amp;gt; Language Support -&amp;gt;Look at the Keyboard input method system Select '''IBus''' and close the window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log-out your computer and log-in to applying this changes.&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have to add your languages in &amp;quot;Text Entry&amp;quot; to type it. You can type multiple language in any application by adding it in this list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting preferences.png|left|thumb|Selecting preferences&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding language to text entry.png|thumb|Adding language to text entry&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Right click on '''&amp;quot;En&amp;quot;''' from the top panel and select &amp;quot;Preferences&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the Preferences window opens, click on &amp;quot;Input method-&amp;gt;Add&amp;quot; option, as shown in image.&lt;br /&gt;
# The language list window will open, search your languages by typing it in search box and click on the language. It will show the all the typing methods for the language. Choose a keyboard layout you are comfortable with and click &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Yes, you are finished all the set up, after this your language list looks like below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Searching Kannada language in search box.png|Searching Kannada language in search box&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting keyboard layout.png|Selecting keyboard layout&lt;br /&gt;
File:After adding language.png|after adding language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Now its time to type your added language in most of the applications. Click on the language panel &amp;quot;En&amp;quot; (right top corner of the screen) and select language in which you want to type. When you select language, icon will change to that language. The very important is you can add multiple languages in this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu contains a wide range of software that includes LibreOffice, Firefox, Thunderbird and several games and Educational tools. Many additional software packages are accessible from the built in Ubuntu Software Center known as &amp;quot;App Grid&amp;quot;. More complex commands can be given to the computer using the 'Terminal' interface, this is really for those who have technical expertise. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''{{Note}}To Know the installation process of Ubuntu please go through the below link'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Teachers%27_toolkit_for_creating_and_re-purposing_OER_using_FOSS/Installing_Ubuntu_-_creating_the_FOSS_platform#Installation_Process Click here to Know the Installation process.]&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/Releases Ubuntu releases]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS Ubuntu LTS]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://www.google.co.in/webhp?sourceid=chrome-instant&amp;amp;ion=1&amp;amp;espv=2&amp;amp;ie=UTF-8#q=ubuntu%20wikipedia Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
#[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Kalpavriksha Install Ubuntu (kalpavriksha)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13691</id>
		<title>Learn Ubuntu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13691"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T10:32:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Home page overview */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%89%E0%B2%AC%E0%B3%81%E0%B2%82%E0%B2%9F%E0%B3%81_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]  [https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%89%E0%A4%AC%E0%A4%82%E0%A4%9F%E0%A5%82_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%8F हिंदी]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:Book-sidebar}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Operating system is also called system software as it works with the hardware. Every computer must have an operating system to run other computer programs. Even your mobile phone will have an operating system. Operating systems start automatically when you turn on the computer, this process is termed as booting. All the other computer programs like programs to paint, type, listen to music, learn mathematics etc., are called application software or 'Apps' which work with the system software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is a ‘[[wikipedia:Free_and_open-source_software|Free and Open Source Software]]’ (called FOSS in short) operating system. You may be familiar with Microsoft Windows operating system or used an application called Adobe Reader.  Windows or Adobe Photoshop are ‘[[wikt:proprietary|proprietary]]’ , meaning they cannot be copied or shared or modified by us; FOSS applications are licensed under the ‘General Public License’ which allows all of us to share the software freely, we can also modify the software as per our needs. Hence it is important to use FOSS in our schools. Teachers must learn and teach FOSS and avoid use of proprietary software, since it is not possible for all to access and use proprietary software, and not possible for anyone (other than the vendor) to study or improve the software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since all the software like [[wikipedia:Productivity_software#Office_suite|Office suite]], [[wikipedia:Web_browser|web browser]], educational software can be bundled with Ubuntu GNU/Linux operating system, all these applications can be installed on the computer at one time. On proprietary software Windows, each software has to be separately installed, which can make it cumbersome and time consuming. Operating systems use a program called the [[wikipedia:Graphical_user_interface|Graphical User Interface]] (GUI) to access other computer with a [[wikipedia:Pointing_device|mouse]].  The popular operating systems are [[wikipedia:Microsoft_Windows|Microsoft Windows]], [[wikipedia:Linux|GNU/Linux]] and [[wikipedia:MacOS|Mac OS]]. In this section, you will learn about the functions of an operating system, using an example of [[Learn Ubuntu|Ubuntu]] GNU/Linux operating system. With this learning, you can also operate a computer with Windows of Mac operating systems. Remember that we are focusing on learning the processes of any software application, so that we can, with that learning, use similar other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Ubuntu GNU/Linux is an operating system for the computer. The operating system is the foundation, which supports the interface between the user and other software applications. Hence learning Ubuntu constitutes basic digital literacy. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|There are a large number of freely shareable educational tools on Ubuntu pertaining to mathematics, science, social sciences, languages etc which can be used in all schools. There are a large number of additional freely shareable tools on GNU/Linux, such as [[wikipedia:Intelligent_Input_Bus|IBUS]] which support word processing in more than 50 languages, including all languages used in Telangana such as Telugu,  Urdu, Kannada, Tamil, Marathi, Hindi etc. The [[wikipedia:Orca_(disambiguation)|ORCA]] screen reader can be used by the visually handicapped for reading content on the computer screen. [[wikipedia:Scribus|Scribus]] can be used for for desktop publishing. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Once in six months, [[wikipedia:Canonical_(company)|Canonical]] releases a new version of the Ubuntu. The first Ubuntu release was in April 2004. The recently released version of Ubuntu is 18.04 (as April 2018), but Ubuntu 18.04 is the latest [https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS LTS] ('''L'''ong '''T'''erm '''S'''upport) version, which you will use.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|To install and use Ubuntu on your computer, it should have following configuration:&lt;br /&gt;
Processor: 2 GHz dual core processor or better&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Memory: 1GB of RAM (2GB recommended)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Disk: 30GB of disk space depending on options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Graphics: If you plan to use the netbook interface, you will require a graphics card that supports 3D acceleration on Ubuntu. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Either a DVD drive or a USB port for the installer media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your computer does not match the above hardware specifications, or is old, install [[wikipedia:Lubuntu|Lubuntu]] OS. Lubuntu is an Ubuntu based distribution meant for low hardware configuration computers. Lubuntu is a fast and lightweight operating system. It has low hardware requirements. Download Lubuntu ISO 32 bit from [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-i386.iso here] and 64 bit [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-amd64.iso here].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[[wikipedia:Linux_Mint|Mint]], [[wikipedia:Debian|Debian]], [[wikipedia:OpenSUSE|OpenSUSE]], and [[wikipedia:Fedora|Fedora]] are popular Linux distributions.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is available on select [https://ubuntu.com/mobile/devices Mobile phones] and [https://ubuntu.com/mobile tablets]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
There are many community forums are helping Ubuntu users.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://help.ubuntu.com/community/CommunityHelpWiki Community Wiki help]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://community.ubuntu.com/help-information/ Ubuntu help]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu performs all the basic functions expected of an operating system. &lt;br /&gt;
# It allows the user to login and logout and keeps the user data secure within that login&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can browse the folders and files using a file browser&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can use different applications on their computer for creating and accessing files. This includes accessing, creating, editing text, image, audio, video, animation files.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to other devices - printers and scanners, mobile phones, pen drives, external hard disks and other storage devices, external DVD writers etc.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is shipped with many applications relevant to education including GCompris, KDE Edutainment Suite, Ubuntu Menu editor, LibreOffice, Gnome Nanny etc. Ubuntu is available to [https://www.ubuntu.com/download/desktop freely download]. Edubuntu's default GUI is Unity while GNOME is also available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
====Starting and shutting down your computer====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Starting and shutting down your computer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Login.jpg|Ubuntu Login screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Ubuntu home screen.png|Ubuntu home screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Shutdown the computer.png|Shutdown the computer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above images show you the basic Ubuntu interface. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Logging in''': When you switch on your computer, you will see a login screen. Login with the user id (name) and password created by the system administrator. '''Ubuntu''' allows you to have a user interface in your own language, by specifying your language as the user language, during your user id creation. Once you have logged in, the home screen will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Home screen:''' The second image shows you the Ubuntu home screen.  The applications menu at the top left has a list of all the programs (apps) on your computer. The '''Places''' menu, next to it, lets you access the 'places' on your computer including the hard disk, CD/DVD or pen drives. Digital cameras and MP3 players are also listed here when plugged-in.  The '''Applications''' menu has sub menus for Education, Office, Internet, Games etc. Each sub-menu has many applications. You can try to learn them yourselves by clicking and selecting options.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Shutting down the computer:''' What will you do after you have finished your work? You have to turn off the computer. You must turn it off by clicking on the last button on the right hand top corner and select shut down. Never turn off the power button without shutting the computer properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing Ubuntu interface (Mate Tweak)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:System settings.png|Opening the system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening the Mate Tweak.png|Opening the Mate Tweak&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Tradi.png|Selecting the panel &lt;br /&gt;
File:Close.png|Closing the Mate Tweak   &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once you have chosen the option from drop down it will ask you to click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot;, Click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to apply the format &lt;br /&gt;
====Home page overview====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In home page we can see the below mentioned options,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Application menu:-''' You can see the list of software's from this option.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Places:-''' You can see the folder locations from this option.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''System settings:-''' You can see the setting options from this.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Shortcuts:-''' You can see the shortcuts created for shortcuts to the top panel.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Top panel:-''' It's a panel which includes Application menu, Places, System settings, Shortcuts, Top panel, Ibus language preferences option, Time &amp;amp; Settings.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Ibus language preferences option:-''' It's used to change the typing language.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Time &amp;amp; Settings:-''' Time will reflect the present date and time. Setting will open the settings options.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Short cut for Desktop:-''' Used to go to the desktop directly.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Minimized tabs:-''' It will show the list of minimized tabs in your system.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Down panel:-''' It includes Minimized tabs, Short cut for Desktop, Workspace and Trash&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Trash:-''' Trash will work just like recycle bean(The deleted files will be moved to trash).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Workspace:-''' It is just like a room where if we change workspace the entire tabs will be kept in previous room and a new room will open with blank home page.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Home page overview&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Home screen.png|Home screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Workspace.jpg|Once changed the workspace&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating and managing folders and files====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Managing files folders.png|Managing files &amp;amp; folders&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Creating and managing files and folders -  When you write an essay or paint something on a paper, you would like to keep it for future, right? You would probably put it in a hard bound folder. Maybe, if you have more than one essay or painting, you would have one folder to hold your essays and one folder to hold your paintings.&lt;br /&gt;
*#To create new folder right click on your mouse and click on &amp;quot;New Folder&amp;quot;. Rename the folder and save your files in it. You can also create many sub folders  within that.&lt;br /&gt;
*#Always give meaningful names for folders, so that you can easily search for them later.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can move folders, and files across folders.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can create a file by opening a application, and creating a new file to prepare your content. You can create text documents with LibreOffice Writer, Images with Tux Paint etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating folders with meaningful name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Create folder.png|Creating new folder&lt;br /&gt;
File:Created.png|Once the new folder created&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renamne.png|Giving a meaningful name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To delete a file or folder right click on the particular file or folder and click on the &amp;quot;Move to Trash&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Deleting the folder or files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Deleting the folder.png|Deleting the folder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*From '''HOME''' folder you can search any files and folders which you have saved in your computer, click on search option on the toolbar and type the keywords of the file or folder, it will show the all files contains our searching keywords in your computer. If you have an idea about the location of the file you are searching, you can launch the search from within that folder itself, instead of the Home folder, this will show you a lesser number of files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Filesearch.png|File search&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To access the hidden files of your system open the Home folder and click on &amp;quot;View-&amp;gt;Show Hidden Files&amp;quot; or open using the shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+H&amp;quot; and if you want to hide a file or folder then click on rename and add&amp;quot;.(dot)&amp;quot; before the file or folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening Hidden files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Hidden.png|Opening the Hidden Files option&lt;br /&gt;
File:After clicking hidden files.png|After opening the hidden files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To access the recent files click on the &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; option from the top panel and we can see the recently viewed documents fro &amp;quot;Recent Documents&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Accessing recently opened files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recent files.png|Recently opened files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To create a shortcut of software to the &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; or to the &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; follow the below steps,&lt;br /&gt;
** Open the software by clicking on the &amp;quot;Application menu&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** Right click on the particular software&lt;br /&gt;
** If shortcut need to be created on &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to panel&amp;quot;, If needs to be created on &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to Desktop&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating shortcut to Top panel and Desktop&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop.png|thumb|Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Opening files by &amp;quot;open with&amp;quot; option'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening files with application&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening files with application.png|Opening files with application&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#A file can usually be opened with any given application in Ubuntu which supports that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer, gimp, etc. So if you want to open with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available options.&lt;br /&gt;
#File can be opened with multiple application in Ubuntu which support that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer and also can be with Gimp, Mypaint, Kolorpaint, Shotwell viewer etc.  So if you want to open the file with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available multiple options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Import files and folders from external device====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Import files and folders from external device&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Access external device.png|Access external device&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy from external device.png|Copy from external device&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can import files from other devices. You can  insert devices such as CDs, DVDs or memory cards  into your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Connect the devices such as pen drives, memory card holders, external DVD drives  using a cable, to your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; from your desktop top panel. You can see your device name. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on your device name to view the files from that device. &lt;br /&gt;
#To import files from devices, right click on that file and click on &amp;quot;Copy&amp;quot;, then paste it into your computer folder.You can copy audio and video files, that you have recorded on your mobile phone, to your computer. You can edit these files. In the same way, you can copy these and other files from your computer to your mobile phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should periodically take back up of important files on your computer and store it on a pen drive or an external hard disk. So that if the hard disk of your computer has a problem or crashes, you would not lose your data entirely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Ambox&lt;br /&gt;
| text  = Study how there are different kinds of connecting cables, for different devices / ports on your computer. Use the appropriate cable in each case. You can connect printers, scanners, projectors to suitable ports on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
| type = notice&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Connecting to the WiFi or Wired Network====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To connect to the WiFi or Wired Network click on the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; symbol from the top panel and make sure &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Ensuring Enable Network and Enable WiFi are check marked&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Clicking on wifi option.png|Clicking on WiFi symbol from the top panel and Ensuring &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through Wired network connect the LAN cable to the computer and you will get a option as &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; below the &amp;quot;Ethernet Network&amp;quot; option. once you click on &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the wired network. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to Wired Network&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Connecting to wired network.png|Connection to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
File:1connection.png|Once connected to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through WiFi click on your WiFi name shown in the list you may asked to enter your WiFi password if the WiFi is protected, Once you enter the password click on &amp;quot;Connect&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; Network selected by you.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}}Ensure that your computer must have a WiFi drive if you wish to connect through WiFi.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to WiFi&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting and clicking on wifi network name.png|Selecting and clicking on WiFi network name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Asking to enter the password.png|Asking to enter the password&lt;br /&gt;
File:Once connected to the netwrok.png|Once connected to the WiFi network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing user interface language in Ubuntu ====&lt;br /&gt;
English will be default interface in Ubuntu but you can also use Ubuntu in you local languages like Telugu, Kannada or Tamil.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Select language support from system settings.png|Select language support from system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing the language from English to Kannada.png|Changing the language from English to Kannada&lt;br /&gt;
File:Arrange language list.png|Arrange language list&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# To get started, go to &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System settings -&amp;gt; Language support&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
# It may ask you to update or add components to your current default language when you first open the dialog. If you do not have internet connect then click &amp;quot;Remind Me Later&amp;quot; and If you have good internet connection, select install to update your language lists.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we are ready to change our Ubuntu interface language. Find your new language in the list, and then click and drag it to the top of the list and click Apply '''System-Wide'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have set you language as first and click on &amp;quot;system-wide&amp;quot;, you will need to '''log out''' of your account and '''log in''' to see your new interface language.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ubuntu may ask if you want to update your user folders names to your new language, Select Rename folder option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renaming folders.png|Renaming folders&lt;br /&gt;
File:Kannada Ubuntu interface.png|Kannada Ubuntu interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding software applications to your computer system====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding softwares to computer system using Appgrid.png|Adding software's to computer system using App Grid&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can add many more FOSS applications to your computer. Select the &amp;quot;System-&amp;gt;Administration-&amp;gt;App Grid&amp;quot; - You can download applications from the Internet. Teachers can explore new FOSS educational tools and utilities.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Applications &amp;gt; System Tools -&amp;gt; App Grid. You will need to type the required application name in the search bar. It will show all applications with the words you have entered and you will get an option for &amp;quot;Install&amp;quot;. Click on &amp;quot;install&amp;quot; if you want to install the application. If your search does not get the application(s) you want, try with fewer letters / words to search. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may ask your Ubuntu log in password for authentication, just type your Ubuntu password press enter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have doubts or difficulties in using the Ubuntu operating system or any of the applications, you can search for solutions on the Internet using a search engine or refer to '[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Frequently_Asked_Questions Frequently asked questions]'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding your languages to type in Ubuntu====&lt;br /&gt;
In Ubuntu by default you can type English in any application and by default it will use only Unicode fonts unless you manually changing it to non-Unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=350&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting ibus for typing language.png|Selecting Ibus for typing language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Also you can type any your local languages in Ubuntu by adding those languages in Ibus. For typing in any local language, Ubuntu will use application called Ibus. You can follow the below step to set up Ibus and to add languages in the typing list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System Settings -&amp;gt; Language Support -&amp;gt;Look at the Keyboard input method system Select '''IBus''' and close the window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log-out your computer and log-in to applying this changes.&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have to add your languages in &amp;quot;Text Entry&amp;quot; to type it. You can type multiple language in any application by adding it in this list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting preferences.png|left|thumb|Selecting preferences&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding language to text entry.png|thumb|Adding language to text entry&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Right click on '''&amp;quot;En&amp;quot;''' from the top panel and select &amp;quot;Preferences&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the Preferences window opens, click on &amp;quot;Input method-&amp;gt;Add&amp;quot; option, as shown in image.&lt;br /&gt;
# The language list window will open, search your languages by typing it in search box and click on the language. It will show the all the typing methods for the language. Choose a keyboard layout you are comfortable with and click &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Yes, you are finished all the set up, after this your language list looks like below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Searching Kannada language in search box.png|Searching Kannada language in search box&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting keyboard layout.png|Selecting keyboard layout&lt;br /&gt;
File:After adding language.png|after adding language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Now its time to type your added language in most of the applications. Click on the language panel &amp;quot;En&amp;quot; (right top corner of the screen) and select language in which you want to type. When you select language, icon will change to that language. The very important is you can add multiple languages in this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu contains a wide range of software that includes LibreOffice, Firefox, Thunderbird and several games and Educational tools. Many additional software packages are accessible from the built in Ubuntu Software Center known as &amp;quot;App Grid&amp;quot;. More complex commands can be given to the computer using the 'Terminal' interface, this is really for those who have technical expertise. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''{{Note}}To Know the installation process of Ubuntu please go through the below link'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Teachers%27_toolkit_for_creating_and_re-purposing_OER_using_FOSS/Installing_Ubuntu_-_creating_the_FOSS_platform#Installation_Process Click here to Know the Installation process.]&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/Releases Ubuntu releases]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS Ubuntu LTS]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://www.google.co.in/webhp?sourceid=chrome-instant&amp;amp;ion=1&amp;amp;espv=2&amp;amp;ie=UTF-8#q=ubuntu%20wikipedia Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
#[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Kalpavriksha Install Ubuntu (kalpavriksha)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13690</id>
		<title>Learn Ubuntu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13690"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T10:31:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Home page overview */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%89%E0%B2%AC%E0%B3%81%E0%B2%82%E0%B2%9F%E0%B3%81_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]  [https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%89%E0%A4%AC%E0%A4%82%E0%A4%9F%E0%A5%82_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%8F हिंदी]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:Book-sidebar}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Operating system is also called system software as it works with the hardware. Every computer must have an operating system to run other computer programs. Even your mobile phone will have an operating system. Operating systems start automatically when you turn on the computer, this process is termed as booting. All the other computer programs like programs to paint, type, listen to music, learn mathematics etc., are called application software or 'Apps' which work with the system software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is a ‘[[wikipedia:Free_and_open-source_software|Free and Open Source Software]]’ (called FOSS in short) operating system. You may be familiar with Microsoft Windows operating system or used an application called Adobe Reader.  Windows or Adobe Photoshop are ‘[[wikt:proprietary|proprietary]]’ , meaning they cannot be copied or shared or modified by us; FOSS applications are licensed under the ‘General Public License’ which allows all of us to share the software freely, we can also modify the software as per our needs. Hence it is important to use FOSS in our schools. Teachers must learn and teach FOSS and avoid use of proprietary software, since it is not possible for all to access and use proprietary software, and not possible for anyone (other than the vendor) to study or improve the software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since all the software like [[wikipedia:Productivity_software#Office_suite|Office suite]], [[wikipedia:Web_browser|web browser]], educational software can be bundled with Ubuntu GNU/Linux operating system, all these applications can be installed on the computer at one time. On proprietary software Windows, each software has to be separately installed, which can make it cumbersome and time consuming. Operating systems use a program called the [[wikipedia:Graphical_user_interface|Graphical User Interface]] (GUI) to access other computer with a [[wikipedia:Pointing_device|mouse]].  The popular operating systems are [[wikipedia:Microsoft_Windows|Microsoft Windows]], [[wikipedia:Linux|GNU/Linux]] and [[wikipedia:MacOS|Mac OS]]. In this section, you will learn about the functions of an operating system, using an example of [[Learn Ubuntu|Ubuntu]] GNU/Linux operating system. With this learning, you can also operate a computer with Windows of Mac operating systems. Remember that we are focusing on learning the processes of any software application, so that we can, with that learning, use similar other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Ubuntu GNU/Linux is an operating system for the computer. The operating system is the foundation, which supports the interface between the user and other software applications. Hence learning Ubuntu constitutes basic digital literacy. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|There are a large number of freely shareable educational tools on Ubuntu pertaining to mathematics, science, social sciences, languages etc which can be used in all schools. There are a large number of additional freely shareable tools on GNU/Linux, such as [[wikipedia:Intelligent_Input_Bus|IBUS]] which support word processing in more than 50 languages, including all languages used in Telangana such as Telugu,  Urdu, Kannada, Tamil, Marathi, Hindi etc. The [[wikipedia:Orca_(disambiguation)|ORCA]] screen reader can be used by the visually handicapped for reading content on the computer screen. [[wikipedia:Scribus|Scribus]] can be used for for desktop publishing. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Once in six months, [[wikipedia:Canonical_(company)|Canonical]] releases a new version of the Ubuntu. The first Ubuntu release was in April 2004. The recently released version of Ubuntu is 18.04 (as April 2018), but Ubuntu 18.04 is the latest [https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS LTS] ('''L'''ong '''T'''erm '''S'''upport) version, which you will use.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|To install and use Ubuntu on your computer, it should have following configuration:&lt;br /&gt;
Processor: 2 GHz dual core processor or better&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Memory: 1GB of RAM (2GB recommended)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Disk: 30GB of disk space depending on options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Graphics: If you plan to use the netbook interface, you will require a graphics card that supports 3D acceleration on Ubuntu. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Either a DVD drive or a USB port for the installer media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your computer does not match the above hardware specifications, or is old, install [[wikipedia:Lubuntu|Lubuntu]] OS. Lubuntu is an Ubuntu based distribution meant for low hardware configuration computers. Lubuntu is a fast and lightweight operating system. It has low hardware requirements. Download Lubuntu ISO 32 bit from [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-i386.iso here] and 64 bit [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-amd64.iso here].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[[wikipedia:Linux_Mint|Mint]], [[wikipedia:Debian|Debian]], [[wikipedia:OpenSUSE|OpenSUSE]], and [[wikipedia:Fedora|Fedora]] are popular Linux distributions.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is available on select [https://ubuntu.com/mobile/devices Mobile phones] and [https://ubuntu.com/mobile tablets]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
There are many community forums are helping Ubuntu users.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://help.ubuntu.com/community/CommunityHelpWiki Community Wiki help]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://community.ubuntu.com/help-information/ Ubuntu help]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu performs all the basic functions expected of an operating system. &lt;br /&gt;
# It allows the user to login and logout and keeps the user data secure within that login&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can browse the folders and files using a file browser&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can use different applications on their computer for creating and accessing files. This includes accessing, creating, editing text, image, audio, video, animation files.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to other devices - printers and scanners, mobile phones, pen drives, external hard disks and other storage devices, external DVD writers etc.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is shipped with many applications relevant to education including GCompris, KDE Edutainment Suite, Ubuntu Menu editor, LibreOffice, Gnome Nanny etc. Ubuntu is available to [https://www.ubuntu.com/download/desktop freely download]. Edubuntu's default GUI is Unity while GNOME is also available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
====Starting and shutting down your computer====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Starting and shutting down your computer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Login.jpg|Ubuntu Login screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Ubuntu home screen.png|Ubuntu home screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Shutdown the computer.png|Shutdown the computer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above images show you the basic Ubuntu interface. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Logging in''': When you switch on your computer, you will see a login screen. Login with the user id (name) and password created by the system administrator. '''Ubuntu''' allows you to have a user interface in your own language, by specifying your language as the user language, during your user id creation. Once you have logged in, the home screen will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Home screen:''' The second image shows you the Ubuntu home screen.  The applications menu at the top left has a list of all the programs (apps) on your computer. The '''Places''' menu, next to it, lets you access the 'places' on your computer including the hard disk, CD/DVD or pen drives. Digital cameras and MP3 players are also listed here when plugged-in.  The '''Applications''' menu has sub menus for Education, Office, Internet, Games etc. Each sub-menu has many applications. You can try to learn them yourselves by clicking and selecting options.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Shutting down the computer:''' What will you do after you have finished your work? You have to turn off the computer. You must turn it off by clicking on the last button on the right hand top corner and select shut down. Never turn off the power button without shutting the computer properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing Ubuntu interface (Mate Tweak)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:System settings.png|Opening the system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening the Mate Tweak.png|Opening the Mate Tweak&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Tradi.png|Selecting the panel &lt;br /&gt;
File:Close.png|Closing the Mate Tweak   &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once you have chosen the option from drop down it will ask you to click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot;, Click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to apply the format &lt;br /&gt;
====Home page overview====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In home page we can see the below mentioned options,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Application menu:-''' You can see the list of software's from this option.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Places:-''' You can see the folder locations from this option.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''System settings:-''' You can see the setting options from this.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Shortcuts:-''' You can see the shortcuts created for shortcuts to the top panel.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Top panel:-''' It's a panel which includes Application menu, Places, System settings, Shortcuts, Top panel, Ibus language preferences option, Time &amp;amp; Settings.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Ibus language preferences option:-''' It's used to change the typing language.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Time &amp;amp; Settings:-''' Time will reflect the present date and time. Setting will open the settings options.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Short cut for Desktop:-''' Used to go to the desktop directly.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Minimized tabs:-''' It will show the list of minimized tabs in your system.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Down panel:-''' It includes Minimized tabs, Short cut for Desktop, Workspace and Trash&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Trash:-''' Trash will work just like recycle bean(The deleted files will be moved to trash).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Workspace:-''' It is just like a room where if we change workspace the entire tabs will be kept in previous room and a new room will open with blank home page.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Home page overview&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Home screen.png|Home screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Workspace.jpg|Once changed the workspace&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating and managing folders and files====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Managing files folders.png|Managing files &amp;amp; folders&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Creating and managing files and folders -  When you write an essay or paint something on a paper, you would like to keep it for future, right? You would probably put it in a hard bound folder. Maybe, if you have more than one essay or painting, you would have one folder to hold your essays and one folder to hold your paintings.&lt;br /&gt;
*#To create new folder right click on your mouse and click on &amp;quot;New Folder&amp;quot;. Rename the folder and save your files in it. You can also create many sub folders  within that.&lt;br /&gt;
*#Always give meaningful names for folders, so that you can easily search for them later.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can move folders, and files across folders.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can create a file by opening a application, and creating a new file to prepare your content. You can create text documents with LibreOffice Writer, Images with Tux Paint etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating folders with meaningful name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Create folder.png|Creating new folder&lt;br /&gt;
File:Created.png|Once the new folder created&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renamne.png|Giving a meaningful name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To delete a file or folder right click on the particular file or folder and click on the &amp;quot;Move to Trash&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Deleting the folder or files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Deleting the folder.png|Deleting the folder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*From '''HOME''' folder you can search any files and folders which you have saved in your computer, click on search option on the toolbar and type the keywords of the file or folder, it will show the all files contains our searching keywords in your computer. If you have an idea about the location of the file you are searching, you can launch the search from within that folder itself, instead of the Home folder, this will show you a lesser number of files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Filesearch.png|File search&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To access the hidden files of your system open the Home folder and click on &amp;quot;View-&amp;gt;Show Hidden Files&amp;quot; or open using the shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+H&amp;quot; and if you want to hide a file or folder then click on rename and add&amp;quot;.(dot)&amp;quot; before the file or folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening Hidden files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Hidden.png|Opening the Hidden Files option&lt;br /&gt;
File:After clicking hidden files.png|After opening the hidden files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To access the recent files click on the &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; option from the top panel and we can see the recently viewed documents fro &amp;quot;Recent Documents&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Accessing recently opened files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recent files.png|Recently opened files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To create a shortcut of software to the &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; or to the &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; follow the below steps,&lt;br /&gt;
** Open the software by clicking on the &amp;quot;Application menu&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** Right click on the particular software&lt;br /&gt;
** If shortcut need to be created on &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to panel&amp;quot;, If needs to be created on &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to Desktop&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating shortcut to Top panel and Desktop&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop.png|thumb|Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Opening files by &amp;quot;open with&amp;quot; option'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening files with application&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening files with application.png|Opening files with application&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#A file can usually be opened with any given application in Ubuntu which supports that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer, gimp, etc. So if you want to open with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available options.&lt;br /&gt;
#File can be opened with multiple application in Ubuntu which support that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer and also can be with Gimp, Mypaint, Kolorpaint, Shotwell viewer etc.  So if you want to open the file with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available multiple options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Import files and folders from external device====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Import files and folders from external device&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Access external device.png|Access external device&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy from external device.png|Copy from external device&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can import files from other devices. You can  insert devices such as CDs, DVDs or memory cards  into your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Connect the devices such as pen drives, memory card holders, external DVD drives  using a cable, to your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; from your desktop top panel. You can see your device name. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on your device name to view the files from that device. &lt;br /&gt;
#To import files from devices, right click on that file and click on &amp;quot;Copy&amp;quot;, then paste it into your computer folder.You can copy audio and video files, that you have recorded on your mobile phone, to your computer. You can edit these files. In the same way, you can copy these and other files from your computer to your mobile phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should periodically take back up of important files on your computer and store it on a pen drive or an external hard disk. So that if the hard disk of your computer has a problem or crashes, you would not lose your data entirely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Ambox&lt;br /&gt;
| text  = Study how there are different kinds of connecting cables, for different devices / ports on your computer. Use the appropriate cable in each case. You can connect printers, scanners, projectors to suitable ports on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
| type = notice&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Connecting to the WiFi or Wired Network====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To connect to the WiFi or Wired Network click on the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; symbol from the top panel and make sure &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Ensuring Enable Network and Enable WiFi are check marked&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Clicking on wifi option.png|Clicking on WiFi symbol from the top panel and Ensuring &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through Wired network connect the LAN cable to the computer and you will get a option as &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; below the &amp;quot;Ethernet Network&amp;quot; option. once you click on &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the wired network. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to Wired Network&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Connecting to wired network.png|Connection to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
File:1connection.png|Once connected to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through WiFi click on your WiFi name shown in the list you may asked to enter your WiFi password if the WiFi is protected, Once you enter the password click on &amp;quot;Connect&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; Network selected by you.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}}Ensure that your computer must have a WiFi drive if you wish to connect through WiFi.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to WiFi&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting and clicking on wifi network name.png|Selecting and clicking on WiFi network name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Asking to enter the password.png|Asking to enter the password&lt;br /&gt;
File:Once connected to the netwrok.png|Once connected to the WiFi network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing user interface language in Ubuntu ====&lt;br /&gt;
English will be default interface in Ubuntu but you can also use Ubuntu in you local languages like Telugu, Kannada or Tamil.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Select language support from system settings.png|Select language support from system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing the language from English to Kannada.png|Changing the language from English to Kannada&lt;br /&gt;
File:Arrange language list.png|Arrange language list&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# To get started, go to &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System settings -&amp;gt; Language support&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
# It may ask you to update or add components to your current default language when you first open the dialog. If you do not have internet connect then click &amp;quot;Remind Me Later&amp;quot; and If you have good internet connection, select install to update your language lists.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we are ready to change our Ubuntu interface language. Find your new language in the list, and then click and drag it to the top of the list and click Apply '''System-Wide'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have set you language as first and click on &amp;quot;system-wide&amp;quot;, you will need to '''log out''' of your account and '''log in''' to see your new interface language.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ubuntu may ask if you want to update your user folders names to your new language, Select Rename folder option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renaming folders.png|Renaming folders&lt;br /&gt;
File:Kannada Ubuntu interface.png|Kannada Ubuntu interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding software applications to your computer system====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding softwares to computer system using Appgrid.png|Adding software's to computer system using App Grid&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can add many more FOSS applications to your computer. Select the &amp;quot;System-&amp;gt;Administration-&amp;gt;App Grid&amp;quot; - You can download applications from the Internet. Teachers can explore new FOSS educational tools and utilities.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Applications &amp;gt; System Tools -&amp;gt; App Grid. You will need to type the required application name in the search bar. It will show all applications with the words you have entered and you will get an option for &amp;quot;Install&amp;quot;. Click on &amp;quot;install&amp;quot; if you want to install the application. If your search does not get the application(s) you want, try with fewer letters / words to search. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may ask your Ubuntu log in password for authentication, just type your Ubuntu password press enter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have doubts or difficulties in using the Ubuntu operating system or any of the applications, you can search for solutions on the Internet using a search engine or refer to '[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Frequently_Asked_Questions Frequently asked questions]'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding your languages to type in Ubuntu====&lt;br /&gt;
In Ubuntu by default you can type English in any application and by default it will use only Unicode fonts unless you manually changing it to non-Unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=350&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting ibus for typing language.png|Selecting Ibus for typing language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Also you can type any your local languages in Ubuntu by adding those languages in Ibus. For typing in any local language, Ubuntu will use application called Ibus. You can follow the below step to set up Ibus and to add languages in the typing list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System Settings -&amp;gt; Language Support -&amp;gt;Look at the Keyboard input method system Select '''IBus''' and close the window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log-out your computer and log-in to applying this changes.&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have to add your languages in &amp;quot;Text Entry&amp;quot; to type it. You can type multiple language in any application by adding it in this list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting preferences.png|left|thumb|Selecting preferences&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding language to text entry.png|thumb|Adding language to text entry&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Right click on '''&amp;quot;En&amp;quot;''' from the top panel and select &amp;quot;Preferences&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the Preferences window opens, click on &amp;quot;Input method-&amp;gt;Add&amp;quot; option, as shown in image.&lt;br /&gt;
# The language list window will open, search your languages by typing it in search box and click on the language. It will show the all the typing methods for the language. Choose a keyboard layout you are comfortable with and click &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Yes, you are finished all the set up, after this your language list looks like below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Searching Kannada language in search box.png|Searching Kannada language in search box&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting keyboard layout.png|Selecting keyboard layout&lt;br /&gt;
File:After adding language.png|after adding language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Now its time to type your added language in most of the applications. Click on the language panel &amp;quot;En&amp;quot; (right top corner of the screen) and select language in which you want to type. When you select language, icon will change to that language. The very important is you can add multiple languages in this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu contains a wide range of software that includes LibreOffice, Firefox, Thunderbird and several games and Educational tools. Many additional software packages are accessible from the built in Ubuntu Software Center known as &amp;quot;App Grid&amp;quot;. More complex commands can be given to the computer using the 'Terminal' interface, this is really for those who have technical expertise. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''{{Note}}To Know the installation process of Ubuntu please go through the below link'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Teachers%27_toolkit_for_creating_and_re-purposing_OER_using_FOSS/Installing_Ubuntu_-_creating_the_FOSS_platform#Installation_Process Click here to Know the Installation process.]&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/Releases Ubuntu releases]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS Ubuntu LTS]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://www.google.co.in/webhp?sourceid=chrome-instant&amp;amp;ion=1&amp;amp;espv=2&amp;amp;ie=UTF-8#q=ubuntu%20wikipedia Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
#[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Kalpavriksha Install Ubuntu (kalpavriksha)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=File:Workspace.jpg&amp;diff=13689</id>
		<title>File:Workspace.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=File:Workspace.jpg&amp;diff=13689"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T10:30:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Workspace&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=File:Home_screen.png&amp;diff=13688</id>
		<title>File:Home screen.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=File:Home_screen.png&amp;diff=13688"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T10:29:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Home screen&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13687</id>
		<title>Learn Ubuntu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13687"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T10:11:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%89%E0%B2%AC%E0%B3%81%E0%B2%82%E0%B2%9F%E0%B3%81_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]  [https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%89%E0%A4%AC%E0%A4%82%E0%A4%9F%E0%A5%82_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%8F हिंदी]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:Book-sidebar}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Operating system is also called system software as it works with the hardware. Every computer must have an operating system to run other computer programs. Even your mobile phone will have an operating system. Operating systems start automatically when you turn on the computer, this process is termed as booting. All the other computer programs like programs to paint, type, listen to music, learn mathematics etc., are called application software or 'Apps' which work with the system software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is a ‘[[wikipedia:Free_and_open-source_software|Free and Open Source Software]]’ (called FOSS in short) operating system. You may be familiar with Microsoft Windows operating system or used an application called Adobe Reader.  Windows or Adobe Photoshop are ‘[[wikt:proprietary|proprietary]]’ , meaning they cannot be copied or shared or modified by us; FOSS applications are licensed under the ‘General Public License’ which allows all of us to share the software freely, we can also modify the software as per our needs. Hence it is important to use FOSS in our schools. Teachers must learn and teach FOSS and avoid use of proprietary software, since it is not possible for all to access and use proprietary software, and not possible for anyone (other than the vendor) to study or improve the software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since all the software like [[wikipedia:Productivity_software#Office_suite|Office suite]], [[wikipedia:Web_browser|web browser]], educational software can be bundled with Ubuntu GNU/Linux operating system, all these applications can be installed on the computer at one time. On proprietary software Windows, each software has to be separately installed, which can make it cumbersome and time consuming. Operating systems use a program called the [[wikipedia:Graphical_user_interface|Graphical User Interface]] (GUI) to access other computer with a [[wikipedia:Pointing_device|mouse]].  The popular operating systems are [[wikipedia:Microsoft_Windows|Microsoft Windows]], [[wikipedia:Linux|GNU/Linux]] and [[wikipedia:MacOS|Mac OS]]. In this section, you will learn about the functions of an operating system, using an example of [[Learn Ubuntu|Ubuntu]] GNU/Linux operating system. With this learning, you can also operate a computer with Windows of Mac operating systems. Remember that we are focusing on learning the processes of any software application, so that we can, with that learning, use similar other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Ubuntu GNU/Linux is an operating system for the computer. The operating system is the foundation, which supports the interface between the user and other software applications. Hence learning Ubuntu constitutes basic digital literacy. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|There are a large number of freely shareable educational tools on Ubuntu pertaining to mathematics, science, social sciences, languages etc which can be used in all schools. There are a large number of additional freely shareable tools on GNU/Linux, such as [[wikipedia:Intelligent_Input_Bus|IBUS]] which support word processing in more than 50 languages, including all languages used in Telangana such as Telugu,  Urdu, Kannada, Tamil, Marathi, Hindi etc. The [[wikipedia:Orca_(disambiguation)|ORCA]] screen reader can be used by the visually handicapped for reading content on the computer screen. [[wikipedia:Scribus|Scribus]] can be used for for desktop publishing. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Once in six months, [[wikipedia:Canonical_(company)|Canonical]] releases a new version of the Ubuntu. The first Ubuntu release was in April 2004. The recently released version of Ubuntu is 18.04 (as April 2018), but Ubuntu 18.04 is the latest [https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS LTS] ('''L'''ong '''T'''erm '''S'''upport) version, which you will use.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|To install and use Ubuntu on your computer, it should have following configuration:&lt;br /&gt;
Processor: 2 GHz dual core processor or better&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Memory: 1GB of RAM (2GB recommended)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Disk: 30GB of disk space depending on options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Graphics: If you plan to use the netbook interface, you will require a graphics card that supports 3D acceleration on Ubuntu. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Either a DVD drive or a USB port for the installer media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your computer does not match the above hardware specifications, or is old, install [[wikipedia:Lubuntu|Lubuntu]] OS. Lubuntu is an Ubuntu based distribution meant for low hardware configuration computers. Lubuntu is a fast and lightweight operating system. It has low hardware requirements. Download Lubuntu ISO 32 bit from [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-i386.iso here] and 64 bit [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-amd64.iso here].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[[wikipedia:Linux_Mint|Mint]], [[wikipedia:Debian|Debian]], [[wikipedia:OpenSUSE|OpenSUSE]], and [[wikipedia:Fedora|Fedora]] are popular Linux distributions.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is available on select [https://ubuntu.com/mobile/devices Mobile phones] and [https://ubuntu.com/mobile tablets]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
There are many community forums are helping Ubuntu users.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://help.ubuntu.com/community/CommunityHelpWiki Community Wiki help]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://community.ubuntu.com/help-information/ Ubuntu help]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu performs all the basic functions expected of an operating system. &lt;br /&gt;
# It allows the user to login and logout and keeps the user data secure within that login&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can browse the folders and files using a file browser&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can use different applications on their computer for creating and accessing files. This includes accessing, creating, editing text, image, audio, video, animation files.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to other devices - printers and scanners, mobile phones, pen drives, external hard disks and other storage devices, external DVD writers etc.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is shipped with many applications relevant to education including GCompris, KDE Edutainment Suite, Ubuntu Menu editor, LibreOffice, Gnome Nanny etc. Ubuntu is available to [https://www.ubuntu.com/download/desktop freely download]. Edubuntu's default GUI is Unity while GNOME is also available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
====Starting and shutting down your computer====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Starting and shutting down your computer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Login.jpg|Ubuntu Login screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Ubuntu home screen.png|Ubuntu home screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Shutdown the computer.png|Shutdown the computer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above images show you the basic Ubuntu interface. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Logging in''': When you switch on your computer, you will see a login screen. Login with the user id (name) and password created by the system administrator. '''Ubuntu''' allows you to have a user interface in your own language, by specifying your language as the user language, during your user id creation. Once you have logged in, the home screen will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Home screen:''' The second image shows you the Ubuntu home screen.  The applications menu at the top left has a list of all the programs (apps) on your computer. The '''Places''' menu, next to it, lets you access the 'places' on your computer including the hard disk, CD/DVD or pen drives. Digital cameras and MP3 players are also listed here when plugged-in.  The '''Applications''' menu has sub menus for Education, Office, Internet, Games etc. Each sub-menu has many applications. You can try to learn them yourselves by clicking and selecting options.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Shutting down the computer:''' What will you do after you have finished your work? You have to turn off the computer. You must turn it off by clicking on the last button on the right hand top corner and select shut down. Never turn off the power button without shutting the computer properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing Ubuntu interface (Mate Tweak)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:System settings.png|Opening the system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening the Mate Tweak.png|Opening the Mate Tweak&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Tradi.png|Selecting the panel &lt;br /&gt;
File:Close.png|Closing the Mate Tweak   &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once you have chosen the option from drop down it will ask you to click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot;, Click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to apply the format &lt;br /&gt;
====Home page overview====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating and managing folders and files====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Managing files folders.png|Managing files &amp;amp; folders&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Creating and managing files and folders -  When you write an essay or paint something on a paper, you would like to keep it for future, right? You would probably put it in a hard bound folder. Maybe, if you have more than one essay or painting, you would have one folder to hold your essays and one folder to hold your paintings.&lt;br /&gt;
*#To create new folder right click on your mouse and click on &amp;quot;New Folder&amp;quot;. Rename the folder and save your files in it. You can also create many sub folders  within that.&lt;br /&gt;
*#Always give meaningful names for folders, so that you can easily search for them later.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can move folders, and files across folders.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can create a file by opening a application, and creating a new file to prepare your content. You can create text documents with LibreOffice Writer, Images with Tux Paint etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating folders with meaningful name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Create folder.png|Creating new folder&lt;br /&gt;
File:Created.png|Once the new folder created&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renamne.png|Giving a meaningful name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To delete a file or folder right click on the particular file or folder and click on the &amp;quot;Move to Trash&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Deleting the folder or files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Deleting the folder.png|Deleting the folder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*From '''HOME''' folder you can search any files and folders which you have saved in your computer, click on search option on the toolbar and type the keywords of the file or folder, it will show the all files contains our searching keywords in your computer. If you have an idea about the location of the file you are searching, you can launch the search from within that folder itself, instead of the Home folder, this will show you a lesser number of files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Filesearch.png|File search&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To access the hidden files of your system open the Home folder and click on &amp;quot;View-&amp;gt;Show Hidden Files&amp;quot; or open using the shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+H&amp;quot; and if you want to hide a file or folder then click on rename and add&amp;quot;.(dot)&amp;quot; before the file or folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening Hidden files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Hidden.png|Opening the Hidden Files option&lt;br /&gt;
File:After clicking hidden files.png|After opening the hidden files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To access the recent files click on the &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; option from the top panel and we can see the recently viewed documents fro &amp;quot;Recent Documents&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Accessing recently opened files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recent files.png|Recently opened files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To create a shortcut of software to the &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; or to the &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; follow the below steps,&lt;br /&gt;
** Open the software by clicking on the &amp;quot;Application menu&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** Right click on the particular software&lt;br /&gt;
** If shortcut need to be created on &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to panel&amp;quot;, If needs to be created on &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to Desktop&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating shortcut to Top panel and Desktop&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop.png|thumb|Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Opening files by &amp;quot;open with&amp;quot; option'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening files with application&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening files with application.png|Opening files with application&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#A file can usually be opened with any given application in Ubuntu which supports that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer, gimp, etc. So if you want to open with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available options.&lt;br /&gt;
#File can be opened with multiple application in Ubuntu which support that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer and also can be with Gimp, Mypaint, Kolorpaint, Shotwell viewer etc.  So if you want to open the file with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available multiple options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Import files and folders from external device====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Import files and folders from external device&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Access external device.png|Access external device&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy from external device.png|Copy from external device&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can import files from other devices. You can  insert devices such as CDs, DVDs or memory cards  into your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Connect the devices such as pen drives, memory card holders, external DVD drives  using a cable, to your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; from your desktop top panel. You can see your device name. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on your device name to view the files from that device. &lt;br /&gt;
#To import files from devices, right click on that file and click on &amp;quot;Copy&amp;quot;, then paste it into your computer folder.You can copy audio and video files, that you have recorded on your mobile phone, to your computer. You can edit these files. In the same way, you can copy these and other files from your computer to your mobile phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should periodically take back up of important files on your computer and store it on a pen drive or an external hard disk. So that if the hard disk of your computer has a problem or crashes, you would not lose your data entirely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Ambox&lt;br /&gt;
| text  = Study how there are different kinds of connecting cables, for different devices / ports on your computer. Use the appropriate cable in each case. You can connect printers, scanners, projectors to suitable ports on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
| type = notice&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Connecting to the WiFi or Wired Network====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To connect to the WiFi or Wired Network click on the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; symbol from the top panel and make sure &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Ensuring Enable Network and Enable WiFi are check marked&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Clicking on wifi option.png|Clicking on WiFi symbol from the top panel and Ensuring &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through Wired network connect the LAN cable to the computer and you will get a option as &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; below the &amp;quot;Ethernet Network&amp;quot; option. once you click on &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the wired network. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to Wired Network&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Connecting to wired network.png|Connection to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
File:1connection.png|Once connected to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through WiFi click on your WiFi name shown in the list you may asked to enter your WiFi password if the WiFi is protected, Once you enter the password click on &amp;quot;Connect&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; Network selected by you.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}}Ensure that your computer must have a WiFi drive if you wish to connect through WiFi.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to WiFi&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting and clicking on wifi network name.png|Selecting and clicking on WiFi network name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Asking to enter the password.png|Asking to enter the password&lt;br /&gt;
File:Once connected to the netwrok.png|Once connected to the WiFi network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing user interface language in Ubuntu ====&lt;br /&gt;
English will be default interface in Ubuntu but you can also use Ubuntu in you local languages like Telugu, Kannada or Tamil.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Select language support from system settings.png|Select language support from system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing the language from English to Kannada.png|Changing the language from English to Kannada&lt;br /&gt;
File:Arrange language list.png|Arrange language list&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# To get started, go to &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System settings -&amp;gt; Language support&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
# It may ask you to update or add components to your current default language when you first open the dialog. If you do not have internet connect then click &amp;quot;Remind Me Later&amp;quot; and If you have good internet connection, select install to update your language lists.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we are ready to change our Ubuntu interface language. Find your new language in the list, and then click and drag it to the top of the list and click Apply '''System-Wide'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have set you language as first and click on &amp;quot;system-wide&amp;quot;, you will need to '''log out''' of your account and '''log in''' to see your new interface language.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ubuntu may ask if you want to update your user folders names to your new language, Select Rename folder option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renaming folders.png|Renaming folders&lt;br /&gt;
File:Kannada Ubuntu interface.png|Kannada Ubuntu interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding software applications to your computer system====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding softwares to computer system using Appgrid.png|Adding software's to computer system using App Grid&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can add many more FOSS applications to your computer. Select the &amp;quot;System-&amp;gt;Administration-&amp;gt;App Grid&amp;quot; - You can download applications from the Internet. Teachers can explore new FOSS educational tools and utilities.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Applications &amp;gt; System Tools -&amp;gt; App Grid. You will need to type the required application name in the search bar. It will show all applications with the words you have entered and you will get an option for &amp;quot;Install&amp;quot;. Click on &amp;quot;install&amp;quot; if you want to install the application. If your search does not get the application(s) you want, try with fewer letters / words to search. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may ask your Ubuntu log in password for authentication, just type your Ubuntu password press enter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have doubts or difficulties in using the Ubuntu operating system or any of the applications, you can search for solutions on the Internet using a search engine or refer to '[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Frequently_Asked_Questions Frequently asked questions]'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding your languages to type in Ubuntu====&lt;br /&gt;
In Ubuntu by default you can type English in any application and by default it will use only Unicode fonts unless you manually changing it to non-Unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=350&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting ibus for typing language.png|Selecting Ibus for typing language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Also you can type any your local languages in Ubuntu by adding those languages in Ibus. For typing in any local language, Ubuntu will use application called Ibus. You can follow the below step to set up Ibus and to add languages in the typing list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System Settings -&amp;gt; Language Support -&amp;gt;Look at the Keyboard input method system Select '''IBus''' and close the window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log-out your computer and log-in to applying this changes.&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have to add your languages in &amp;quot;Text Entry&amp;quot; to type it. You can type multiple language in any application by adding it in this list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting preferences.png|left|thumb|Selecting preferences&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding language to text entry.png|thumb|Adding language to text entry&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Right click on '''&amp;quot;En&amp;quot;''' from the top panel and select &amp;quot;Preferences&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the Preferences window opens, click on &amp;quot;Input method-&amp;gt;Add&amp;quot; option, as shown in image.&lt;br /&gt;
# The language list window will open, search your languages by typing it in search box and click on the language. It will show the all the typing methods for the language. Choose a keyboard layout you are comfortable with and click &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Yes, you are finished all the set up, after this your language list looks like below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Searching Kannada language in search box.png|Searching Kannada language in search box&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting keyboard layout.png|Selecting keyboard layout&lt;br /&gt;
File:After adding language.png|after adding language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Now its time to type your added language in most of the applications. Click on the language panel &amp;quot;En&amp;quot; (right top corner of the screen) and select language in which you want to type. When you select language, icon will change to that language. The very important is you can add multiple languages in this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu contains a wide range of software that includes LibreOffice, Firefox, Thunderbird and several games and Educational tools. Many additional software packages are accessible from the built in Ubuntu Software Center known as &amp;quot;App Grid&amp;quot;. More complex commands can be given to the computer using the 'Terminal' interface, this is really for those who have technical expertise. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''{{Note}}To Know the installation process of Ubuntu please go through the below link'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Teachers%27_toolkit_for_creating_and_re-purposing_OER_using_FOSS/Installing_Ubuntu_-_creating_the_FOSS_platform#Installation_Process Click here to Know the Installation process.]&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/Releases Ubuntu releases]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS Ubuntu LTS]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://www.google.co.in/webhp?sourceid=chrome-instant&amp;amp;ion=1&amp;amp;espv=2&amp;amp;ie=UTF-8#q=ubuntu%20wikipedia Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
#[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Kalpavriksha Install Ubuntu (kalpavriksha)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13686</id>
		<title>Learn Ubuntu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13686"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T09:19:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%89%E0%B2%AC%E0%B3%81%E0%B2%82%E0%B2%9F%E0%B3%81_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]  [https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%89%E0%A4%AC%E0%A4%82%E0%A4%9F%E0%A5%82_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%8F हिंदी]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:Book-sidebar}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Operating system is also called system software as it works with the hardware. Every computer must have an operating system to run other computer programs. Even your mobile phone will have an operating system. Operating systems start automatically when you turn on the computer, this process is termed as booting. All the other computer programs like programs to paint, type, listen to music, learn mathematics etc., are called application software or 'Apps' which work with the system software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is a ‘[[wikipedia:Free_and_open-source_software|Free and Open Source Software]]’ (called FOSS in short) operating system. You may be familiar with Microsoft Windows operating system or used an application called Adobe Reader.  Windows or Adobe Photoshop are ‘[[wikt:proprietary|proprietary]]’ , meaning they cannot be copied or shared or modified by us; FOSS applications are licensed under the ‘General Public License’ which allows all of us to share the software freely, we can also modify the software as per our needs. Hence it is important to use FOSS in our schools. Teachers must learn and teach FOSS and avoid use of proprietary software, since it is not possible for all to access and use proprietary software, and not possible for anyone (other than the vendor) to study or improve the software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since all the software like [[wikipedia:Productivity_software#Office_suite|Office suite]], [[wikipedia:Web_browser|web browser]], educational software can be bundled with Ubuntu GNU/Linux operating system, all these applications can be installed on the computer at one time. On proprietary software Windows, each software has to be separately installed, which can make it cumbersome and time consuming. Operating systems use a program called the [[wikipedia:Graphical_user_interface|Graphical User Interface]] (GUI) to access other computer with a [[wikipedia:Pointing_device|mouse]].  The popular operating systems are [[wikipedia:Microsoft_Windows|Microsoft Windows]], [[wikipedia:Linux|GNU/Linux]] and [[wikipedia:MacOS|Mac OS]]. In this section, you will learn about the functions of an operating system, using an example of [[Learn Ubuntu|Ubuntu]] GNU/Linux operating system. With this learning, you can also operate a computer with Windows of Mac operating systems. Remember that we are focusing on learning the processes of any software application, so that we can, with that learning, use similar other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Ubuntu GNU/Linux is an operating system for the computer. The operating system is the foundation, which supports the interface between the user and other software applications. Hence learning Ubuntu constitutes basic digital literacy. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|There are a large number of freely shareable educational tools on Ubuntu pertaining to mathematics, science, social sciences, languages etc which can be used in all schools. There are a large number of additional freely shareable tools on GNU/Linux, such as [[wikipedia:Intelligent_Input_Bus|IBUS]] which support word processing in more than 50 languages, including all languages used in Telangana such as Telugu,  Urdu, Kannada, Tamil, Marathi, Hindi etc. The [[wikipedia:Orca_(disambiguation)|ORCA]] screen reader can be used by the visually handicapped for reading content on the computer screen. [[wikipedia:Scribus|Scribus]] can be used for for desktop publishing. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Once in six months, [[wikipedia:Canonical_(company)|Canonical]] releases a new version of the Ubuntu. The first Ubuntu release was in April 2004. The recently released version of Ubuntu is 18.04 (as April 2018), but Ubuntu 18.04 is the latest [https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS LTS] ('''L'''ong '''T'''erm '''S'''upport) version, which you will use.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|To install and use Ubuntu on your computer, it should have following configuration:&lt;br /&gt;
Processor: 2 GHz dual core processor or better&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Memory: 1GB of RAM (2GB recommended)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Disk: 30GB of disk space depending on options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Graphics: If you plan to use the netbook interface, you will require a graphics card that supports 3D acceleration on Ubuntu. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Either a DVD drive or a USB port for the installer media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your computer does not match the above hardware specifications, or is old, install [[wikipedia:Lubuntu|Lubuntu]] OS. Lubuntu is an Ubuntu based distribution meant for low hardware configuration computers. Lubuntu is a fast and lightweight operating system. It has low hardware requirements. Download Lubuntu ISO 32 bit from [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-i386.iso here] and 64 bit [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-amd64.iso here].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[[wikipedia:Linux_Mint|Mint]], [[wikipedia:Debian|Debian]], [[wikipedia:OpenSUSE|OpenSUSE]], and [[wikipedia:Fedora|Fedora]] are popular Linux distributions.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is available on select [https://ubuntu.com/mobile/devices Mobile phones] and [https://ubuntu.com/mobile tablets]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
There are many community forums are helping Ubuntu users.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://help.ubuntu.com/community/CommunityHelpWiki Community Wiki help]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://community.ubuntu.com/help-information/ Ubuntu help]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu performs all the basic functions expected of an operating system. &lt;br /&gt;
# It allows the user to login and logout and keeps the user data secure within that login&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can browse the folders and files using a file browser&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can use different applications on their computer for creating and accessing files. This includes accessing, creating, editing text, image, audio, video, animation files.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to other devices - printers and scanners, mobile phones, pen drives, external hard disks and other storage devices, external DVD writers etc.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is shipped with many applications relevant to education including GCompris, KDE Edutainment Suite, Ubuntu Menu editor, LibreOffice, Gnome Nanny etc. Ubuntu is available to [https://www.ubuntu.com/download/desktop freely download]. Edubuntu's default GUI is Unity while GNOME is also available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
====Starting and shutting down your computer====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Starting and shutting down your computer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Login.jpg|Ubuntu Login screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Ubuntu home screen.png|Ubuntu home screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Shutdown the computer.png|Shutdown the computer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above images show you the basic Ubuntu interface. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Logging in''': When you switch on your computer, you will see a login screen. Login with the user id (name) and password created by the system administrator. '''Ubuntu''' allows you to have a user interface in your own language, by specifying your language as the user language, during your user id creation. Once you have logged in, the home screen will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Home screen:''' The second image shows you the Ubuntu home screen.  The applications menu at the top left has a list of all the programs (apps) on your computer. The '''Places''' menu, next to it, lets you access the 'places' on your computer including the hard disk, CD/DVD or pen drives. Digital cameras and MP3 players are also listed here when plugged-in.  The '''Applications''' menu has sub menus for Education, Office, Internet, Games etc. Each sub-menu has many applications. You can try to learn them yourselves by clicking and selecting options.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Shutting down the computer:''' What will you do after you have finished your work? You have to turn off the computer. You must turn it off by clicking on the last button on the right hand top corner and select shut down. Never turn off the power button without shutting the computer properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing Ubuntu interface (Mate Tweak)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:System settings.png|Opening the system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening the Mate Tweak.png|Opening the Mate Tweak&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Tradi.png|Selecting the panel &lt;br /&gt;
File:Close.png|Closing the Mate Tweak   &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once you have chosen the option from drop down it will ask you to click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot;, Click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to apply the format &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating and managing folders and files====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Managing files folders.png|Managing files &amp;amp; folders&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Creating and managing files and folders -  When you write an essay or paint something on a paper, you would like to keep it for future, right? You would probably put it in a hard bound folder. Maybe, if you have more than one essay or painting, you would have one folder to hold your essays and one folder to hold your paintings.&lt;br /&gt;
*#To create new folder right click on your mouse and click on &amp;quot;New Folder&amp;quot;. Rename the folder and save your files in it. You can also create many sub folders  within that.&lt;br /&gt;
*#Always give meaningful names for folders, so that you can easily search for them later.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can move folders, and files across folders.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can create a file by opening a application, and creating a new file to prepare your content. You can create text documents with LibreOffice Writer, Images with Tux Paint etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating folders with meaningful name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Create folder.png|Creating new folder&lt;br /&gt;
File:Created.png|Once the new folder created&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renamne.png|Giving a meaningful name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To delete a file or folder right click on the particular file or folder and click on the &amp;quot;Move to Trash&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Deleting the folder or files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Deleting the folder.png|Deleting the folder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*From '''HOME''' folder you can search any files and folders which you have saved in your computer, click on search option on the toolbar and type the keywords of the file or folder, it will show the all files contains our searching keywords in your computer. If you have an idea about the location of the file you are searching, you can launch the search from within that folder itself, instead of the Home folder, this will show you a lesser number of files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Filesearch.png|File search&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To access the hidden files of your system open the Home folder and click on &amp;quot;View-&amp;gt;Show Hidden Files&amp;quot; or open using the shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+H&amp;quot; and if you want to hide a file or folder then click on rename and add&amp;quot;.(dot)&amp;quot; before the file or folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening Hidden files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Hidden.png|Opening the Hidden Files option&lt;br /&gt;
File:After clicking hidden files.png|After opening the hidden files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To access the recent files click on the &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; option from the top panel and we can see the recently viewed documents fro &amp;quot;Recent Documents&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Accessing recently opened files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recent files.png|Recently opened files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To create a shortcut of software to the &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; or to the &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; follow the below steps,&lt;br /&gt;
** Open the software by clicking on the &amp;quot;Application menu&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** Right click on the particular software&lt;br /&gt;
** If shortcut need to be created on &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to panel&amp;quot;, If needs to be created on &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to Desktop&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating shortcut to Top panel and Desktop&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop.png|thumb|Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Opening files by &amp;quot;open with&amp;quot; option'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening files with application&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening files with application.png|Opening files with application&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#A file can usually be opened with any given application in Ubuntu which supports that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer, gimp, etc. So if you want to open with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available options.&lt;br /&gt;
#File can be opened with multiple application in Ubuntu which support that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer and also can be with Gimp, Mypaint, Kolorpaint, Shotwell viewer etc.  So if you want to open the file with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available multiple options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Import files and folders from external device====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Import files and folders from external device&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Access external device.png|Access external device&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy from external device.png|Copy from external device&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can import files from other devices. You can  insert devices such as CDs, DVDs or memory cards  into your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Connect the devices such as pen drives, memory card holders, external DVD drives  using a cable, to your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; from your desktop top panel. You can see your device name. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on your device name to view the files from that device. &lt;br /&gt;
#To import files from devices, right click on that file and click on &amp;quot;Copy&amp;quot;, then paste it into your computer folder.You can copy audio and video files, that you have recorded on your mobile phone, to your computer. You can edit these files. In the same way, you can copy these and other files from your computer to your mobile phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should periodically take back up of important files on your computer and store it on a pen drive or an external hard disk. So that if the hard disk of your computer has a problem or crashes, you would not lose your data entirely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Ambox&lt;br /&gt;
| text  = Study how there are different kinds of connecting cables, for different devices / ports on your computer. Use the appropriate cable in each case. You can connect printers, scanners, projectors to suitable ports on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
| type = notice&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Connecting to the WiFi or Wired Network====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To connect to the WiFi or Wired Network click on the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; symbol from the top panel and make sure &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Ensuring Enable Network and Enable WiFi are check marked&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Clicking on wifi option.png|Clicking on WiFi symbol from the top panel and Ensuring &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through Wired network connect the LAN cable to the computer and you will get a option as &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; below the &amp;quot;Ethernet Network&amp;quot; option. once you click on &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the wired network. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to Wired Network&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Connecting to wired network.png|Connection to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
File:1connection.png|Once connected to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through WiFi click on your WiFi name shown in the list you may asked to enter your WiFi password if the WiFi is protected, Once you enter the password click on &amp;quot;Connect&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; Network selected by you.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}}Ensure that your computer must have a WiFi drive if you wish to connect through WiFi.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to WiFi&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting and clicking on wifi network name.png|Selecting and clicking on WiFi network name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Asking to enter the password.png|Asking to enter the password&lt;br /&gt;
File:Once connected to the netwrok.png|Once connected to the WiFi network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing user interface language in Ubuntu ====&lt;br /&gt;
English will be default interface in Ubuntu but you can also use Ubuntu in you local languages like Telugu, Kannada or Tamil.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Select language support from system settings.png|Select language support from system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing the language from English to Kannada.png|Changing the language from English to Kannada&lt;br /&gt;
File:Arrange language list.png|Arrange language list&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# To get started, go to &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System settings -&amp;gt; Language support&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
# It may ask you to update or add components to your current default language when you first open the dialog. If you do not have internet connect then click &amp;quot;Remind Me Later&amp;quot; and If you have good internet connection, select install to update your language lists.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we are ready to change our Ubuntu interface language. Find your new language in the list, and then click and drag it to the top of the list and click Apply '''System-Wide'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have set you language as first and click on &amp;quot;system-wide&amp;quot;, you will need to '''log out''' of your account and '''log in''' to see your new interface language.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ubuntu may ask if you want to update your user folders names to your new language, Select Rename folder option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renaming folders.png|Renaming folders&lt;br /&gt;
File:Kannada Ubuntu interface.png|Kannada Ubuntu interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding software applications to your computer system====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding softwares to computer system using Appgrid.png|Adding software's to computer system using App Grid&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can add many more FOSS applications to your computer. Select the &amp;quot;System-&amp;gt;Administration-&amp;gt;App Grid&amp;quot; - You can download applications from the Internet. Teachers can explore new FOSS educational tools and utilities.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Applications &amp;gt; System Tools -&amp;gt; App Grid. You will need to type the required application name in the search bar. It will show all applications with the words you have entered and you will get an option for &amp;quot;Install&amp;quot;. Click on &amp;quot;install&amp;quot; if you want to install the application. If your search does not get the application(s) you want, try with fewer letters / words to search. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may ask your Ubuntu log in password for authentication, just type your Ubuntu password press enter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have doubts or difficulties in using the Ubuntu operating system or any of the applications, you can search for solutions on the Internet using a search engine or refer to '[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Frequently_Asked_Questions Frequently asked questions]'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding your languages to type in Ubuntu====&lt;br /&gt;
In Ubuntu by default you can type English in any application and by default it will use only Unicode fonts unless you manually changing it to non-Unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=350&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting ibus for typing language.png|Selecting Ibus for typing language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Also you can type any your local languages in Ubuntu by adding those languages in Ibus. For typing in any local language, Ubuntu will use application called Ibus. You can follow the below step to set up Ibus and to add languages in the typing list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System Settings -&amp;gt; Language Support -&amp;gt;Look at the Keyboard input method system Select '''IBus''' and close the window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log-out your computer and log-in to applying this changes.&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have to add your languages in &amp;quot;Text Entry&amp;quot; to type it. You can type multiple language in any application by adding it in this list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting preferences.png|left|thumb|Selecting preferences&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding language to text entry.png|thumb|Adding language to text entry&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Right click on '''&amp;quot;En&amp;quot;''' from the top panel and select &amp;quot;Preferences&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the Preferences window opens, click on &amp;quot;Input method-&amp;gt;Add&amp;quot; option, as shown in image.&lt;br /&gt;
# The language list window will open, search your languages by typing it in search box and click on the language. It will show the all the typing methods for the language. Choose a keyboard layout you are comfortable with and click &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Yes, you are finished all the set up, after this your language list looks like below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Searching Kannada language in search box.png|Searching Kannada language in search box&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting keyboard layout.png|Selecting keyboard layout&lt;br /&gt;
File:After adding language.png|after adding language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Now its time to type your added language in most of the applications. Click on the language panel &amp;quot;En&amp;quot; (right top corner of the screen) and select language in which you want to type. When you select language, icon will change to that language. The very important is you can add multiple languages in this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu contains a wide range of software that includes LibreOffice, Firefox, Thunderbird and several games and Educational tools. Many additional software packages are accessible from the built in Ubuntu Software Center known as &amp;quot;App Grid&amp;quot;. More complex commands can be given to the computer using the 'Terminal' interface, this is really for those who have technical expertise. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''{{Note}}To Know the installation process of Ubuntu please go through the below link'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Teachers%27_toolkit_for_creating_and_re-purposing_OER_using_FOSS/Installing_Ubuntu_-_creating_the_FOSS_platform#Installation_Process Click here to Know the Installation process.]&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/Releases Ubuntu releases]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS Ubuntu LTS]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://www.google.co.in/webhp?sourceid=chrome-instant&amp;amp;ion=1&amp;amp;espv=2&amp;amp;ie=UTF-8#q=ubuntu%20wikipedia Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
#[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Kalpavriksha Install Ubuntu (kalpavriksha)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13685</id>
		<title>Learn Ubuntu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13685"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T09:13:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Installation process */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%89%E0%B2%AC%E0%B3%81%E0%B2%82%E0%B2%9F%E0%B3%81_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]  [https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%89%E0%A4%AC%E0%A4%82%E0%A4%9F%E0%A5%82_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%8F हिंदी]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:Book-sidebar}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Operating system is also called system software as it works with the hardware. Every computer must have an operating system to run other computer programs. Even your mobile phone will have an operating system. Operating systems start automatically when you turn on the computer, this process is termed as booting. All the other computer programs like programs to paint, type, listen to music, learn mathematics etc., are called application software or 'Apps' which work with the system software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is a ‘[[wikipedia:Free_and_open-source_software|Free and Open Source Software]]’ (called FOSS in short) operating system. You may be familiar with Microsoft Windows operating system or used an application called Adobe Reader.  Windows or Adobe Photoshop are ‘[[wikt:proprietary|proprietary]]’ , meaning they cannot be copied or shared or modified by us; FOSS applications are licensed under the ‘General Public License’ which allows all of us to share the software freely, we can also modify the software as per our needs. Hence it is important to use FOSS in our schools. Teachers must learn and teach FOSS and avoid use of proprietary software, since it is not possible for all to access and use proprietary software, and not possible for anyone (other than the vendor) to study or improve the software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since all the software like [[wikipedia:Productivity_software#Office_suite|Office suite]], [[wikipedia:Web_browser|web browser]], educational software can be bundled with Ubuntu GNU/Linux operating system, all these applications can be installed on the computer at one time. On proprietary software Windows, each software has to be separately installed, which can make it cumbersome and time consuming. Operating systems use a program called the [[wikipedia:Graphical_user_interface|Graphical User Interface]] (GUI) to access other computer with a [[wikipedia:Pointing_device|mouse]].  The popular operating systems are [[wikipedia:Microsoft_Windows|Microsoft Windows]], [[wikipedia:Linux|GNU/Linux]] and [[wikipedia:MacOS|Mac OS]]. In this section, you will learn about the functions of an operating system, using an example of [[Learn Ubuntu|Ubuntu]] GNU/Linux operating system. With this learning, you can also operate a computer with Windows of Mac operating systems. Remember that we are focusing on learning the processes of any software application, so that we can, with that learning, use similar other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Ubuntu GNU/Linux is an operating system for the computer. The operating system is the foundation, which supports the interface between the user and other software applications. Hence learning Ubuntu constitutes basic digital literacy. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|There are a large number of freely shareable educational tools on Ubuntu pertaining to mathematics, science, social sciences, languages etc which can be used in all schools. There are a large number of additional freely shareable tools on GNU/Linux, such as [[wikipedia:Intelligent_Input_Bus|IBUS]] which support word processing in more than 50 languages, including all languages used in Telangana such as Telugu,  Urdu, Kannada, Tamil, Marathi, Hindi etc. The [[wikipedia:Orca_(disambiguation)|ORCA]] screen reader can be used by the visually handicapped for reading content on the computer screen. [[wikipedia:Scribus|Scribus]] can be used for for desktop publishing. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Once in six months, [[wikipedia:Canonical_(company)|Canonical]] releases a new version of the Ubuntu. The first Ubuntu release was in April 2004. The recently released version of Ubuntu is 18.04 (as April 2018), but Ubuntu 18.04 is the latest [https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS LTS] ('''L'''ong '''T'''erm '''S'''upport) version, which you will use.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|To install and use Ubuntu on your computer, it should have following configuration:&lt;br /&gt;
Processor: 2 GHz dual core processor or better&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Memory: 1GB of RAM (2GB recommended)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Disk: 30GB of disk space depending on options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Graphics: If you plan to use the netbook interface, you will require a graphics card that supports 3D acceleration on Ubuntu. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Either a DVD drive or a USB port for the installer media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your computer does not match the above hardware specifications, or is old, install [[wikipedia:Lubuntu|Lubuntu]] OS. Lubuntu is an Ubuntu based distribution meant for low hardware configuration computers. Lubuntu is a fast and lightweight operating system. It has low hardware requirements. Download Lubuntu ISO 32 bit from [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-i386.iso here] and 64 bit [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-amd64.iso here].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[[wikipedia:Linux_Mint|Mint]], [[wikipedia:Debian|Debian]], [[wikipedia:OpenSUSE|OpenSUSE]], and [[wikipedia:Fedora|Fedora]] are popular Linux distributions.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is available on select [https://ubuntu.com/mobile/devices Mobile phones] and [https://ubuntu.com/mobile tablets]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
There are many community forums are helping Ubuntu users.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://help.ubuntu.com/community/CommunityHelpWiki Community Wiki help]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://community.ubuntu.com/help-information/ Ubuntu help]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu performs all the basic functions expected of an operating system. &lt;br /&gt;
# It allows the user to login and logout and keeps the user data secure within that login&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can browse the folders and files using a file browser&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can use different applications on their computer for creating and accessing files. This includes accessing, creating, editing text, image, audio, video, animation files.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to other devices - printers and scanners, mobile phones, pen drives, external hard disks and other storage devices, external DVD writers etc.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is shipped with many applications relevant to education including GCompris, KDE Edutainment Suite, Ubuntu Menu editor, LibreOffice, Gnome Nanny etc. Ubuntu is available to [https://www.ubuntu.com/download/desktop freely download]. Edubuntu's default GUI is Unity while GNOME is also available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
====Starting and shutting down your computer====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Starting and shutting down your computer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Login.jpg|Ubuntu Login screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Ubuntu home screen.png|Ubuntu home screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Shutdown the computer.png|Shutdown the computer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above images show you the basic Ubuntu interface. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Logging in''': When you switch on your computer, you will see a login screen. Login with the user id (name) and password created by the system administrator. '''Ubuntu''' allows you to have a user interface in your own language, by specifying your language as the user language, during your user id creation. Once you have logged in, the home screen will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Home screen:''' The second image shows you the Ubuntu home screen.  The applications menu at the top left has a list of all the programs (apps) on your computer. The '''Places''' menu, next to it, lets you access the 'places' on your computer including the hard disk, CD/DVD or pen drives. Digital cameras and MP3 players are also listed here when plugged-in.  The '''Applications''' menu has sub menus for Education, Office, Internet, Games etc. Each sub-menu has many applications. You can try to learn them yourselves by clicking and selecting options.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Shutting down the computer:''' What will you do after you have finished your work? You have to turn off the computer. You must turn it off by clicking on the last button on the right hand top corner and select shut down. Never turn off the power button without shutting the computer properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing Ubuntu interface (Mate Tweak)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:System settings.png|Opening the system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening the Mate Tweak.png|Opening the Mate Tweak&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Tradi.png|Selecting the panel &lt;br /&gt;
File:Close.png|Closing the Mate Tweak   &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once you have chosen the option from drop down it will ask you to click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot;, Click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to apply the format &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Connecting to the WiFi or Wired Network====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To connect to the WiFi or Wired Network click on the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; symbol from the top panel and make sure &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Ensuring Enable Network and Enable WiFi are check marked&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Clicking on wifi option.png|Clicking on WiFi symbol from the top panel and Ensuring &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through Wired network connect the LAN cable to the computer and you will get a option as &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; below the &amp;quot;Ethernet Network&amp;quot; option. once you click on &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the wired network. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to Wired Network&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Connecting to wired network.png|Connection to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
File:1connection.png|Once connected to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through WiFi click on your WiFi name shown in the list you may asked to enter your WiFi password if the WiFi is protected, Once you enter the password click on &amp;quot;Connect&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; Network selected by you.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}}Ensure that your computer must have a WiFi drive if you wish to connect through WiFi.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to WiFi&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting and clicking on wifi network name.png|Selecting and clicking on WiFi network name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Asking to enter the password.png|Asking to enter the password&lt;br /&gt;
File:Once connected to the netwrok.png|Once connected to the WiFi network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating and managing folders and files====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Managing files folders.png|Managing files &amp;amp; folders&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Creating and managing files and folders -  When you write an essay or paint something on a paper, you would like to keep it for future, right? You would probably put it in a hard bound folder. Maybe, if you have more than one essay or painting, you would have one folder to hold your essays and one folder to hold your paintings.&lt;br /&gt;
*#To create new folder right click on your mouse and click on &amp;quot;New Folder&amp;quot;. Rename the folder and save your files in it. You can also create many sub folders  within that.&lt;br /&gt;
*#Always give meaningful names for folders, so that you can easily search for them later.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can move folders, and files across folders.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can create a file by opening a application, and creating a new file to prepare your content. You can create text documents with LibreOffice Writer, Images with Tux Paint etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating folders with meaningful name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Create folder.png|Creating new folder&lt;br /&gt;
File:Created.png|Once the new folder created&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renamne.png|Giving a meaningful name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To delete a file or folder right click on the particular file or folder and click on the &amp;quot;Move to Trash&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Deleting the folder or files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Deleting the folder.png|Deleting the folder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*From '''HOME''' folder you can search any files and folders which you have saved in your computer, click on search option on the toolbar and type the keywords of the file or folder, it will show the all files contains our searching keywords in your computer. If you have an idea about the location of the file you are searching, you can launch the search from within that folder itself, instead of the Home folder, this will show you a lesser number of files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Filesearch.png|File search&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To access the hidden files of your system open the Home folder and click on &amp;quot;View-&amp;gt;Show Hidden Files&amp;quot; or open using the shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+H&amp;quot; and if you want to hide a file or folder then click on rename and add&amp;quot;.(dot)&amp;quot; before the file or folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening Hidden files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Hidden.png|Opening the Hidden Files option&lt;br /&gt;
File:After clicking hidden files.png|After opening the hidden files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To access the recent files click on the &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; option from the top panel and we can see the recently viewed documents fro &amp;quot;Recent Documents&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Accessing recently opened files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recent files.png|Recently opened files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To create a shortcut of software to the &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; or to the &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; follow the below steps,&lt;br /&gt;
** Open the software by clicking on the &amp;quot;Application menu&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** Right click on the particular software&lt;br /&gt;
** If shortcut need to be created on &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to panel&amp;quot;, If needs to be created on &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to Desktop&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating shortcut to Top panel and Desktop&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop.png|thumb|Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Opening files by &amp;quot;open with&amp;quot; option'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening files with application&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening files with application.png|Opening files with application&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#A file can usually be opened with any given application in Ubuntu which supports that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer, gimp, etc. So if you want to open with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available options.&lt;br /&gt;
#File can be opened with multiple application in Ubuntu which support that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer and also can be with Gimp, Mypaint, Kolorpaint, Shotwell viewer etc.  So if you want to open the file with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available multiple options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Import files and folders from external device====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Import files and folders from external device&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Access external device.png|Access external device&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy from external device.png|Copy from external device&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can import files from other devices. You can  insert devices such as CDs, DVDs or memory cards  into your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Connect the devices such as pen drives, memory card holders, external DVD drives  using a cable, to your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; from your desktop top panel. You can see your device name. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on your device name to view the files from that device. &lt;br /&gt;
#To import files from devices, right click on that file and click on &amp;quot;Copy&amp;quot;, then paste it into your computer folder.You can copy audio and video files, that you have recorded on your mobile phone, to your computer. You can edit these files. In the same way, you can copy these and other files from your computer to your mobile phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should periodically take back up of important files on your computer and store it on a pen drive or an external hard disk. So that if the hard disk of your computer has a problem or crashes, you would not lose your data entirely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Ambox&lt;br /&gt;
| text  = Study how there are different kinds of connecting cables, for different devices / ports on your computer. Use the appropriate cable in each case. You can connect printers, scanners, projectors to suitable ports on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
| type = notice&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing user interface language in Ubuntu ====&lt;br /&gt;
English will be default interface in Ubuntu but you can also use Ubuntu in you local languages like Telugu, Kannada or Tamil.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Select language support from system settings.png|Select language support from system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing the language from English to Kannada.png|Changing the language from English to Kannada&lt;br /&gt;
File:Arrange language list.png|Arrange language list&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# To get started, go to &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System settings -&amp;gt; Language support&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
# It may ask you to update or add components to your current default language when you first open the dialog. If you do not have internet connect then click &amp;quot;Remind Me Later&amp;quot; and If you have good internet connection, select install to update your language lists.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we are ready to change our Ubuntu interface language. Find your new language in the list, and then click and drag it to the top of the list and click Apply '''System-Wide'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have set you language as first and click on &amp;quot;system-wide&amp;quot;, you will need to '''log out''' of your account and '''log in''' to see your new interface language.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ubuntu may ask if you want to update your user folders names to your new language, Select Rename folder option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renaming folders.png|Renaming folders&lt;br /&gt;
File:Kannada Ubuntu interface.png|Kannada Ubuntu interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding software applications to your computer system====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding softwares to computer system using Appgrid.png|Adding software's to computer system using App Grid&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can add many more FOSS applications to your computer. Select the &amp;quot;System-&amp;gt;Administration-&amp;gt;App Grid&amp;quot; - You can download applications from the Internet. Teachers can explore new FOSS educational tools and utilities.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Applications &amp;gt; System Tools -&amp;gt; App Grid. You will need to type the required application name in the search bar. It will show all applications with the words you have entered and you will get an option for &amp;quot;Install&amp;quot;. Click on &amp;quot;install&amp;quot; if you want to install the application. If your search does not get the application(s) you want, try with fewer letters / words to search. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may ask your Ubuntu log in password for authentication, just type your Ubuntu password press enter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have doubts or difficulties in using the Ubuntu operating system or any of the applications, you can search for solutions on the Internet using a search engine or refer to '[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Frequently_Asked_Questions Frequently asked questions]'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding your languages to type in Ubuntu====&lt;br /&gt;
In Ubuntu by default you can type English in any application and by default it will use only Unicode fonts unless you manually changing it to non-Unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=350&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting ibus for typing language.png|Selecting Ibus for typing language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Also you can type any your local languages in Ubuntu by adding those languages in Ibus. For typing in any local language, Ubuntu will use application called Ibus. You can follow the below step to set up Ibus and to add languages in the typing list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System Settings -&amp;gt; Language Support -&amp;gt;Look at the Keyboard input method system Select '''IBus''' and close the window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log-out your computer and log-in to applying this changes.&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have to add your languages in &amp;quot;Text Entry&amp;quot; to type it. You can type multiple language in any application by adding it in this list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting preferences.png|left|thumb|Selecting preferences&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding language to text entry.png|thumb|Adding language to text entry&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Right click on '''&amp;quot;En&amp;quot;''' from the top panel and select &amp;quot;Preferences&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the Preferences window opens, click on &amp;quot;Input method-&amp;gt;Add&amp;quot; option, as shown in image.&lt;br /&gt;
# The language list window will open, search your languages by typing it in search box and click on the language. It will show the all the typing methods for the language. Choose a keyboard layout you are comfortable with and click &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Yes, you are finished all the set up, after this your language list looks like below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Searching Kannada language in search box.png|Searching Kannada language in search box&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting keyboard layout.png|Selecting keyboard layout&lt;br /&gt;
File:After adding language.png|after adding language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Now its time to type your added language in most of the applications. Click on the language panel &amp;quot;En&amp;quot; (right top corner of the screen) and select language in which you want to type. When you select language, icon will change to that language. The very important is you can add multiple languages in this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu contains a wide range of software that includes LibreOffice, Firefox, Thunderbird and several games and Educational tools. Many additional software packages are accessible from the built in Ubuntu Software Center known as &amp;quot;App Grid&amp;quot;. More complex commands can be given to the computer using the 'Terminal' interface, this is really for those who have technical expertise. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''{{Note}}To Know the installation process of Ubuntu please go through the below link'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://teacher-network.in/OER/index.php/Teachers%27_toolkit_for_creating_and_re-purposing_OER_using_FOSS/Installing_Ubuntu_-_creating_the_FOSS_platform#Installation_Process Click here to Know the Installation process.]&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/Releases Ubuntu releases]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS Ubuntu LTS]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://www.google.co.in/webhp?sourceid=chrome-instant&amp;amp;ion=1&amp;amp;espv=2&amp;amp;ie=UTF-8#q=ubuntu%20wikipedia Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
#[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Kalpavriksha Install Ubuntu (kalpavriksha)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13683</id>
		<title>Learn Ubuntu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13683"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T09:02:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%89%E0%B2%AC%E0%B3%81%E0%B2%82%E0%B2%9F%E0%B3%81_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]  [https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%89%E0%A4%AC%E0%A4%82%E0%A4%9F%E0%A5%82_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%8F हिंदी]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:Book-sidebar}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Operating system is also called system software as it works with the hardware. Every computer must have an operating system to run other computer programs. Even your mobile phone will have an operating system. Operating systems start automatically when you turn on the computer, this process is termed as booting. All the other computer programs like programs to paint, type, listen to music, learn mathematics etc., are called application software or 'Apps' which work with the system software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is a ‘[[wikipedia:Free_and_open-source_software|Free and Open Source Software]]’ (called FOSS in short) operating system. You may be familiar with Microsoft Windows operating system or used an application called Adobe Reader.  Windows or Adobe Photoshop are ‘[[wikt:proprietary|proprietary]]’ , meaning they cannot be copied or shared or modified by us; FOSS applications are licensed under the ‘General Public License’ which allows all of us to share the software freely, we can also modify the software as per our needs. Hence it is important to use FOSS in our schools. Teachers must learn and teach FOSS and avoid use of proprietary software, since it is not possible for all to access and use proprietary software, and not possible for anyone (other than the vendor) to study or improve the software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since all the software like [[wikipedia:Productivity_software#Office_suite|Office suite]], [[wikipedia:Web_browser|web browser]], educational software can be bundled with Ubuntu GNU/Linux operating system, all these applications can be installed on the computer at one time. On proprietary software Windows, each software has to be separately installed, which can make it cumbersome and time consuming. Operating systems use a program called the [[wikipedia:Graphical_user_interface|Graphical User Interface]] (GUI) to access other computer with a [[wikipedia:Pointing_device|mouse]].  The popular operating systems are [[wikipedia:Microsoft_Windows|Microsoft Windows]], [[wikipedia:Linux|GNU/Linux]] and [[wikipedia:MacOS|Mac OS]]. In this section, you will learn about the functions of an operating system, using an example of [[Learn Ubuntu|Ubuntu]] GNU/Linux operating system. With this learning, you can also operate a computer with Windows of Mac operating systems. Remember that we are focusing on learning the processes of any software application, so that we can, with that learning, use similar other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Ubuntu GNU/Linux is an operating system for the computer. The operating system is the foundation, which supports the interface between the user and other software applications. Hence learning Ubuntu constitutes basic digital literacy. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|There are a large number of freely shareable educational tools on Ubuntu pertaining to mathematics, science, social sciences, languages etc which can be used in all schools. There are a large number of additional freely shareable tools on GNU/Linux, such as [[wikipedia:Intelligent_Input_Bus|IBUS]] which support word processing in more than 50 languages, including all languages used in Telangana such as Telugu,  Urdu, Kannada, Tamil, Marathi, Hindi etc. The [[wikipedia:Orca_(disambiguation)|ORCA]] screen reader can be used by the visually handicapped for reading content on the computer screen. [[wikipedia:Scribus|Scribus]] can be used for for desktop publishing. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Once in six months, [[wikipedia:Canonical_(company)|Canonical]] releases a new version of the Ubuntu. The first Ubuntu release was in April 2004. The recently released version of Ubuntu is 18.04 (as April 2018), but Ubuntu 18.04 is the latest [https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS LTS] ('''L'''ong '''T'''erm '''S'''upport) version, which you will use.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|To install and use Ubuntu on your computer, it should have following configuration:&lt;br /&gt;
Processor: 2 GHz dual core processor or better&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Memory: 1GB of RAM (2GB recommended)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Disk: 30GB of disk space depending on options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Graphics: If you plan to use the netbook interface, you will require a graphics card that supports 3D acceleration on Ubuntu. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Either a DVD drive or a USB port for the installer media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your computer does not match the above hardware specifications, or is old, install [[wikipedia:Lubuntu|Lubuntu]] OS. Lubuntu is an Ubuntu based distribution meant for low hardware configuration computers. Lubuntu is a fast and lightweight operating system. It has low hardware requirements. Download Lubuntu ISO 32 bit from [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-i386.iso here] and 64 bit [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-amd64.iso here].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[[wikipedia:Linux_Mint|Mint]], [[wikipedia:Debian|Debian]], [[wikipedia:OpenSUSE|OpenSUSE]], and [[wikipedia:Fedora|Fedora]] are popular Linux distributions.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is available on select [https://ubuntu.com/mobile/devices Mobile phones] and [https://ubuntu.com/mobile tablets]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
There are many community forums are helping Ubuntu users.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://help.ubuntu.com/community/CommunityHelpWiki Community Wiki help]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://community.ubuntu.com/help-information/ Ubuntu help]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu performs all the basic functions expected of an operating system. &lt;br /&gt;
# It allows the user to login and logout and keeps the user data secure within that login&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can browse the folders and files using a file browser&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can use different applications on their computer for creating and accessing files. This includes accessing, creating, editing text, image, audio, video, animation files.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to other devices - printers and scanners, mobile phones, pen drives, external hard disks and other storage devices, external DVD writers etc.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is shipped with many applications relevant to education including GCompris, KDE Edutainment Suite, Ubuntu Menu editor, LibreOffice, Gnome Nanny etc. Ubuntu is available to [https://www.ubuntu.com/download/desktop freely download]. Edubuntu's default GUI is Unity while GNOME is also available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
====Starting and shutting down your computer====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Starting and shutting down your computer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Login.jpg|Ubuntu Login screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Ubuntu home screen.png|Ubuntu home screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Shutdown the computer.png|Shutdown the computer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above images show you the basic Ubuntu interface. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Logging in''': When you switch on your computer, you will see a login screen. Login with the user id (name) and password created by the system administrator. '''Ubuntu''' allows you to have a user interface in your own language, by specifying your language as the user language, during your user id creation. Once you have logged in, the home screen will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Home screen:''' The second image shows you the Ubuntu home screen.  The applications menu at the top left has a list of all the programs (apps) on your computer. The '''Places''' menu, next to it, lets you access the 'places' on your computer including the hard disk, CD/DVD or pen drives. Digital cameras and MP3 players are also listed here when plugged-in.  The '''Applications''' menu has sub menus for Education, Office, Internet, Games etc. Each sub-menu has many applications. You can try to learn them yourselves by clicking and selecting options.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Shutting down the computer:''' What will you do after you have finished your work? You have to turn off the computer. You must turn it off by clicking on the last button on the right hand top corner and select shut down. Never turn off the power button without shutting the computer properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Get Applications, Places menu (Mate Tweak)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:System settings.png|Opening the system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening the Mate Tweak.png|Opening the Mate Tweak&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Tradi.png|Selecting the panel &lt;br /&gt;
File:Close.png|Closing the Mate Tweak   &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once you have chosen the option from drop down it will ask you to click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot;, Click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to apply the format &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Connecting to the WiFi or Wired Network====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To connect to the WiFi or Wired Network click on the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; symbol from the top panel and make sure &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Ensuring Enable Network and Enable WiFi are check marked&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Clicking on wifi option.png|Clicking on WiFi symbol from the top panel and Ensuring &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through Wired network connect the LAN cable to the computer and you will get a option as &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; below the &amp;quot;Ethernet Network&amp;quot; option. once you click on &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the wired network. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to Wired Network&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Connecting to wired network.png|Connection to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
File:1connection.png|Once connected to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through WiFi click on your WiFi name shown in the list you may asked to enter your WiFi password if the WiFi is protected, Once you enter the password click on &amp;quot;Connect&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; Network selected by you.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}}Ensure that your computer must have a WiFi drive if you wish to connect through WiFi.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to WiFi&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting and clicking on wifi network name.png|Selecting and clicking on WiFi network name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Asking to enter the password.png|Asking to enter the password&lt;br /&gt;
File:Once connected to the netwrok.png|Once connected to the WiFi network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating and managing folders and files====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Managing files folders.png|Managing files &amp;amp; folders&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Creating and managing files and folders -  When you write an essay or paint something on a paper, you would like to keep it for future, right? You would probably put it in a hard bound folder. Maybe, if you have more than one essay or painting, you would have one folder to hold your essays and one folder to hold your paintings.&lt;br /&gt;
*#To create new folder right click on your mouse and click on &amp;quot;New Folder&amp;quot;. Rename the folder and save your files in it. You can also create many sub folders  within that.&lt;br /&gt;
*#Always give meaningful names for folders, so that you can easily search for them later.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can move folders, and files across folders.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can create a file by opening a application, and creating a new file to prepare your content. You can create text documents with LibreOffice Writer, Images with Tux Paint etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating folders with meaningful name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Create folder.png|Creating new folder&lt;br /&gt;
File:Created.png|Once the new folder created&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renamne.png|Giving a meaningful name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To delete a file or folder right click on the particular file or folder and click on the &amp;quot;Move to Trash&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Deleting the folder or files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Deleting the folder.png|Deleting the folder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*From '''HOME''' folder you can search any files and folders which you have saved in your computer, click on search option on the toolbar and type the keywords of the file or folder, it will show the all files contains our searching keywords in your computer. If you have an idea about the location of the file you are searching, you can launch the search from within that folder itself, instead of the Home folder, this will show you a lesser number of files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Filesearch.png|File search&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To access the hidden files of your system open the Home folder and click on &amp;quot;View-&amp;gt;Show Hidden Files&amp;quot; or open using the shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+H&amp;quot; and if you want to hide a file or folder then click on rename and add&amp;quot;.(dot)&amp;quot; before the file or folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening Hidden files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Hidden.png|Opening the Hidden Files option&lt;br /&gt;
File:After clicking hidden files.png|After opening the hidden files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To access the recent files click on the &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; option from the top panel and we can see the recently viewed documents fro &amp;quot;Recent Documents&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Accessing recently opened files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recent files.png|Recently opened files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To create a shortcut of software to the &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; or to the &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; follow the below steps,&lt;br /&gt;
** Open the software by clicking on the &amp;quot;Application menu&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** Right click on the particular software&lt;br /&gt;
** If shortcut need to be created on &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to panel&amp;quot;, If needs to be created on &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to Desktop&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating shortcut to Top panel and Desktop&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop.png|thumb|Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Opening files by &amp;quot;open with&amp;quot; option'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening files with application&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening files with application.png|Opening files with application&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#A file can usually be opened with any given application in Ubuntu which supports that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer, gimp, etc. So if you want to open with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available options.&lt;br /&gt;
#File can be opened with multiple application in Ubuntu which support that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer and also can be with Gimp, Mypaint, Kolorpaint, Shotwell viewer etc.  So if you want to open the file with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available multiple options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Import files and folders from external device====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Import files and folders from external device&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Access external device.png|Access external device&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy from external device.png|Copy from external device&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can import files from other devices. You can  insert devices such as CDs, DVDs or memory cards  into your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Connect the devices such as pen drives, memory card holders, external DVD drives  using a cable, to your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; from your desktop top panel. You can see your device name. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on your device name to view the files from that device. &lt;br /&gt;
#To import files from devices, right click on that file and click on &amp;quot;Copy&amp;quot;, then paste it into your computer folder.You can copy audio and video files, that you have recorded on your mobile phone, to your computer. You can edit these files. In the same way, you can copy these and other files from your computer to your mobile phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should periodically take back up of important files on your computer and store it on a pen drive or an external hard disk. So that if the hard disk of your computer has a problem or crashes, you would not lose your data entirely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Ambox&lt;br /&gt;
| text  = Study how there are different kinds of connecting cables, for different devices / ports on your computer. Use the appropriate cable in each case. You can connect printers, scanners, projectors to suitable ports on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
| type = notice&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing user interface language in Ubuntu ====&lt;br /&gt;
English will be default interface in Ubuntu but you can also use Ubuntu in you local languages like Telugu, Kannada or Tamil.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Select language support from system settings.png|Select language support from system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing the language from English to Kannada.png|Changing the language from English to Kannada&lt;br /&gt;
File:Arrange language list.png|Arrange language list&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# To get started, go to &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System settings -&amp;gt; Language support&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
# It may ask you to update or add components to your current default language when you first open the dialog. If you do not have internet connect then click &amp;quot;Remind Me Later&amp;quot; and If you have good internet connection, select install to update your language lists.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we are ready to change our Ubuntu interface language. Find your new language in the list, and then click and drag it to the top of the list and click Apply '''System-Wide'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have set you language as first and click on &amp;quot;system-wide&amp;quot;, you will need to '''log out''' of your account and '''log in''' to see your new interface language.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ubuntu may ask if you want to update your user folders names to your new language, Select Rename folder option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renaming folders.png|Renaming folders&lt;br /&gt;
File:Kannada Ubuntu interface.png|Kannada Ubuntu interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding software applications to your computer system====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding softwares to computer system using Appgrid.png|Adding software's to computer system using App Grid&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can add many more FOSS applications to your computer. Select the &amp;quot;System-&amp;gt;Administration-&amp;gt;App Grid&amp;quot; - You can download applications from the Internet. Teachers can explore new FOSS educational tools and utilities.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Applications &amp;gt; System Tools -&amp;gt; App Grid. You will need to type the required application name in the search bar. It will show all applications with the words you have entered and you will get an option for &amp;quot;Install&amp;quot;. Click on &amp;quot;install&amp;quot; if you want to install the application. If your search does not get the application(s) you want, try with fewer letters / words to search. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may ask your Ubuntu log in password for authentication, just type your Ubuntu password press enter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have doubts or difficulties in using the Ubuntu operating system or any of the applications, you can search for solutions on the Internet using a search engine or refer to '[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Frequently_Asked_Questions Frequently asked questions]'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding your languages to type in Ubuntu====&lt;br /&gt;
In Ubuntu by default you can type English in any application and by default it will use only Unicode fonts unless you manually changing it to non-Unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=350&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting ibus for typing language.png|Selecting Ibus for typing language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Also you can type any your local languages in Ubuntu by adding those languages in Ibus. For typing in any local language, Ubuntu will use application called Ibus. You can follow the below step to set up Ibus and to add languages in the typing list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System Settings -&amp;gt; Language Support -&amp;gt;Look at the Keyboard input method system Select '''IBus''' and close the window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log-out your computer and log-in to applying this changes.&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have to add your languages in &amp;quot;Text Entry&amp;quot; to type it. You can type multiple language in any application by adding it in this list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting preferences.png|left|thumb|Selecting preferences&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding language to text entry.png|thumb|Adding language to text entry&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Right click on '''&amp;quot;En&amp;quot;''' from the top panel and select &amp;quot;Preferences&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the Preferences window opens, click on &amp;quot;Input method-&amp;gt;Add&amp;quot; option, as shown in image.&lt;br /&gt;
# The language list window will open, search your languages by typing it in search box and click on the language. It will show the all the typing methods for the language. Choose a keyboard layout you are comfortable with and click &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Yes, you are finished all the set up, after this your language list looks like below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Searching Kannada language in search box.png|Searching Kannada language in search box&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting keyboard layout.png|Selecting keyboard layout&lt;br /&gt;
File:After adding language.png|after adding language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Now its time to type your added language in most of the applications. Click on the language panel &amp;quot;En&amp;quot; (right top corner of the screen) and select language in which you want to type. When you select language, icon will change to that language. The very important is you can add multiple languages in this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced features====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu contains a wide range of software that includes LibreOffice, Firefox, Thunderbird and several games and Educational tools. Many additional software packages are accessible from the built in Ubuntu Software Center known as &amp;quot;App Grid&amp;quot;. More complex commands can be given to the computer using the 'Terminal' interface, this is really for those who have technical expertise. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Installation process====&lt;br /&gt;
# Dual core processor and above&lt;br /&gt;
# Minimum 2 GB of RAM&lt;br /&gt;
# 30 GB of Separate partition in your hard-drive&lt;br /&gt;
# Either a CD/DVD drive or a USB port for the installer media&lt;br /&gt;
You will also need the Ubuntu software in a DVD or in a pen drive (as a boot-able USB device). You can download the Ubuntu(Kalpavriksha) iso from '''[https://drive.google.com/file/d/1L8GgWFiWJi-7jEGEe6QZzFCgeS4lXqK1/view?usp=sharing this link].'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you download Ubuntu22.04_dist.iso from the above link, follow below steps to put it in dvd or pen drive for installation.&lt;br /&gt;
# To make Ubuntu DVD in windows platform, follow this [http://www.tutonics.com/2012/07/how-to-create-bootable-live-cddvd.html#Windows link]&lt;br /&gt;
# To make Ubuntu DVD in Ubuntu plat form, follow this [http://www.ubuntubuzz.com/2015/04/how-to-burn-iso-dvd-with-k3b.html link]&lt;br /&gt;
# To make Ubuntu boot-able pen drive, follow this [https://www.ubuntu.com/download/desktop/create-a-usb-stick-on-windows link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Installation steps =====&lt;br /&gt;
# To install Ubuntu along side your current windows OS - [https://drive.google.com/file/d/1hL99CH_pjCUzz9Yw4h75iSmZRX17Gq1Z/view click here for installation handout] &lt;br /&gt;
# To install Ubuntu by erasing your current OS - [https://drive.google.com/file/d/0BwTV-oNEYKZBUUstUGNBcmNMUkU/view click here for installation handout]&lt;br /&gt;
# To Upgrade your current Ubuntu to latest version - [https://drive.google.com/file/d/0BwTV-oNEYKZBQ2YzT2hrUTI4ejQ/view click here for installation handout]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/Releases Ubuntu releases]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS Ubuntu LTS]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://www.google.co.in/webhp?sourceid=chrome-instant&amp;amp;ion=1&amp;amp;espv=2&amp;amp;ie=UTF-8#q=ubuntu%20wikipedia Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
#[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Kalpavriksha Install Ubuntu (kalpavriksha)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13682</id>
		<title>Learn Ubuntu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://oer.teacher-network.in/index.php?title=Learn_Ubuntu&amp;diff=13682"/>
		<updated>2022-09-26T08:55:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Prateek: /* Get Applications, Places menu (Mate Tweak) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/index.php/%E0%B2%89%E0%B2%AC%E0%B3%81%E0%B2%82%E0%B2%9F%E0%B3%81_%E0%B2%95%E0%B2%B2%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%AF%E0%B2%BF%E0%B2%B0%E0%B2%BF ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಡಿ]  [https://teacher-network.in/OER/hi/index.php/%E0%A4%89%E0%A4%AC%E0%A4%82%E0%A4%9F%E0%A5%82_%E0%A4%B8%E0%A5%80%E0%A4%96%E0%A4%BF%E0%A4%8F हिंदी]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:Book-sidebar}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
Operating system is also called system software as it works with the hardware. Every computer must have an operating system to run other computer programs. Even your mobile phone will have an operating system. Operating systems start automatically when you turn on the computer, this process is termed as booting. All the other computer programs like programs to paint, type, listen to music, learn mathematics etc., are called application software or 'Apps' which work with the system software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is a ‘[[wikipedia:Free_and_open-source_software|Free and Open Source Software]]’ (called FOSS in short) operating system. You may be familiar with Microsoft Windows operating system or used an application called Adobe Reader.  Windows or Adobe Photoshop are ‘[[wikt:proprietary|proprietary]]’ , meaning they cannot be copied or shared or modified by us; FOSS applications are licensed under the ‘General Public License’ which allows all of us to share the software freely, we can also modify the software as per our needs. Hence it is important to use FOSS in our schools. Teachers must learn and teach FOSS and avoid use of proprietary software, since it is not possible for all to access and use proprietary software, and not possible for anyone (other than the vendor) to study or improve the software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since all the software like [[wikipedia:Productivity_software#Office_suite|Office suite]], [[wikipedia:Web_browser|web browser]], educational software can be bundled with Ubuntu GNU/Linux operating system, all these applications can be installed on the computer at one time. On proprietary software Windows, each software has to be separately installed, which can make it cumbersome and time consuming. Operating systems use a program called the [[wikipedia:Graphical_user_interface|Graphical User Interface]] (GUI) to access other computer with a [[wikipedia:Pointing_device|mouse]].  The popular operating systems are [[wikipedia:Microsoft_Windows|Microsoft Windows]], [[wikipedia:Linux|GNU/Linux]] and [[wikipedia:MacOS|Mac OS]]. In this section, you will learn about the functions of an operating system, using an example of [[Learn Ubuntu|Ubuntu]] GNU/Linux operating system. With this learning, you can also operate a computer with Windows of Mac operating systems. Remember that we are focusing on learning the processes of any software application, so that we can, with that learning, use similar other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic information====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ICT Competency&lt;br /&gt;
|Ubuntu GNU/Linux is an operating system for the computer. The operating system is the foundation, which supports the interface between the user and other software applications. Hence learning Ubuntu constitutes basic digital literacy. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Educational application and relevance&lt;br /&gt;
|There are a large number of freely shareable educational tools on Ubuntu pertaining to mathematics, science, social sciences, languages etc which can be used in all schools. There are a large number of additional freely shareable tools on GNU/Linux, such as [[wikipedia:Intelligent_Input_Bus|IBUS]] which support word processing in more than 50 languages, including all languages used in Telangana such as Telugu,  Urdu, Kannada, Tamil, Marathi, Hindi etc. The [[wikipedia:Orca_(disambiguation)|ORCA]] screen reader can be used by the visually handicapped for reading content on the computer screen. [[wikipedia:Scribus|Scribus]] can be used for for desktop publishing. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Version&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Once in six months, [[wikipedia:Canonical_(company)|Canonical]] releases a new version of the Ubuntu. The first Ubuntu release was in April 2004. The recently released version of Ubuntu is 18.04 (as April 2018), but Ubuntu 18.04 is the latest [https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS LTS] ('''L'''ong '''T'''erm '''S'''upport) version, which you will use.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|To install and use Ubuntu on your computer, it should have following configuration:&lt;br /&gt;
Processor: 2 GHz dual core processor or better&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Memory: 1GB of RAM (2GB recommended)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Disk: 30GB of disk space depending on options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Graphics: If you plan to use the netbook interface, you will require a graphics card that supports 3D acceleration on Ubuntu. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Either a DVD drive or a USB port for the installer media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your computer does not match the above hardware specifications, or is old, install [[wikipedia:Lubuntu|Lubuntu]] OS. Lubuntu is an Ubuntu based distribution meant for low hardware configuration computers. Lubuntu is a fast and lightweight operating system. It has low hardware requirements. Download Lubuntu ISO 32 bit from [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-i386.iso here] and 64 bit [http://cdimage.ubuntu.com/lubuntu/releases/16.10/release/lubuntu-16.10-desktop-amd64.iso here].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Other similar applications&lt;br /&gt;
|[[wikipedia:Linux_Mint|Mint]], [[wikipedia:Debian|Debian]], [[wikipedia:OpenSUSE|OpenSUSE]], and [[wikipedia:Fedora|Fedora]] are popular Linux distributions.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The application on mobiles and tablets&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is available on select [https://ubuntu.com/mobile/devices Mobile phones] and [https://ubuntu.com/mobile tablets]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Development and community help&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
There are many community forums are helping Ubuntu users.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://help.ubuntu.com/community/CommunityHelpWiki Community Wiki help]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://community.ubuntu.com/help-information/ Ubuntu help]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview of Features ====&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu performs all the basic functions expected of an operating system. &lt;br /&gt;
# It allows the user to login and logout and keeps the user data secure within that login&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can browse the folders and files using a file browser&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can use different applications on their computer for creating and accessing files. This includes accessing, creating, editing text, image, audio, video, animation files.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to other devices - printers and scanners, mobile phones, pen drives, external hard disks and other storage devices, external DVD writers etc.&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can connect to the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu is shipped with many applications relevant to education including GCompris, KDE Edutainment Suite, Ubuntu Menu editor, LibreOffice, Gnome Nanny etc. Ubuntu is available to [https://www.ubuntu.com/download/desktop freely download]. Edubuntu's default GUI is Unity while GNOME is also available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working with the application===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Starting and shutting down your computer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Login.jpg|Ubuntu Login screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Ubuntu home screen.png|Ubuntu home screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:Shutdown the computer.png|Shutdown the computer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above images show you the basic Ubuntu interface. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Logging in''': When you switch on your computer, you will see a login screen. Login with the user id (name) and password created by the system administrator. '''Ubuntu''' allows you to have a user interface in your own language, by specifying your language as the user language, during your user id creation. Once you have logged in, the home screen will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Home screen:''' The second image shows you the Ubuntu home screen.  The applications menu at the top left has a list of all the programs (apps) on your computer. The '''Places''' menu, next to it, lets you access the 'places' on your computer including the hard disk, CD/DVD or pen drives. Digital cameras and MP3 players are also listed here when plugged-in.  The '''Applications''' menu has sub menus for Education, Office, Internet, Games etc. Each sub-menu has many applications. You can try to learn them yourselves by clicking and selecting options.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Shutting down the computer:''' What will you do after you have finished your work? You have to turn off the computer. You must turn it off by clicking on the last button on the right hand top corner and select shut down. Never turn off the power button without shutting the computer properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Get Applications, Places menu (Mate Tweak)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
* After login into your Ubuntu and if it is not showing Applications and places menu option, Just open &amp;quot;Settings-&amp;gt;System setting&amp;quot;. Another dialog box will open in that click on &amp;quot;MATE Tweak&amp;quot; option &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:System settings.png|Opening the system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening the Mate Tweak.png|Opening the Mate Tweak&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Tradi.png|Selecting the panel &lt;br /&gt;
File:Close.png|Closing the Mate Tweak   &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once you have chosen the option from drop down it will ask you to click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot;, Click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to apply the format &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Connecting to the WiFi or Wired Network''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To connect to the WiFi or Wired Network click on the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; symbol from the top panel and make sure &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Ensuring Enable Network and Enable WiFi are check marked&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Clicking on wifi option.png|Clicking on WiFi symbol from the top panel and Ensuring &amp;quot;Enable Network&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable WiFi&amp;quot; are check marked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through Wired network connect the LAN cable to the computer and you will get a option as &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; below the &amp;quot;Ethernet Network&amp;quot; option. once you click on &amp;quot;Wired connection 1&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the wired network. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to Wired Network&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Connecting to wired network.png|Connection to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
File:1connection.png|Once connected to the Wired Network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are connecting through WiFi click on your WiFi name shown in the list you may asked to enter your WiFi password if the WiFi is protected, Once you enter the password click on &amp;quot;Connect&amp;quot; your system will be connected to the &amp;quot;WiFi&amp;quot; Network selected by you.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}}Ensure that your computer must have a WiFi drive if you wish to connect through WiFi.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Connecting to WiFi&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting and clicking on wifi network name.png|Selecting and clicking on WiFi network name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Asking to enter the password.png|Asking to enter the password&lt;br /&gt;
File:Once connected to the netwrok.png|Once connected to the WiFi network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating and managing folders and files''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Managing files folders.png|Managing files &amp;amp; folders&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Creating and managing files and folders -  When you write an essay or paint something on a paper, you would like to keep it for future, right? You would probably put it in a hard bound folder. Maybe, if you have more than one essay or painting, you would have one folder to hold your essays and one folder to hold your paintings.&lt;br /&gt;
*#To create new folder right click on your mouse and click on &amp;quot;New Folder&amp;quot;. Rename the folder and save your files in it. You can also create many sub folders  within that.&lt;br /&gt;
*#Always give meaningful names for folders, so that you can easily search for them later.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can move folders, and files across folders.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can create a file by opening a application, and creating a new file to prepare your content. You can create text documents with LibreOffice Writer, Images with Tux Paint etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating folders with meaningful name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Create folder.png|Creating new folder&lt;br /&gt;
File:Created.png|Once the new folder created&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renamne.png|Giving a meaningful name&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To delete a file or folder right click on the particular file or folder and click on the &amp;quot;Move to Trash&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Deleting the folder or files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Deleting the folder.png|Deleting the folder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*From '''HOME''' folder you can search any files and folders which you have saved in your computer, click on search option on the toolbar and type the keywords of the file or folder, it will show the all files contains our searching keywords in your computer. If you have an idea about the location of the file you are searching, you can launch the search from within that folder itself, instead of the Home folder, this will show you a lesser number of files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating and managing folders and files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Filesearch.png|File search&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To access the hidden files of your system open the Home folder and click on &amp;quot;View-&amp;gt;Show Hidden Files&amp;quot; or open using the shortcut &amp;quot;Ctrl+H&amp;quot; and if you want to hide a file or folder then click on rename and add&amp;quot;.(dot)&amp;quot; before the file or folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening Hidden files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Hidden.png|Opening the Hidden Files option&lt;br /&gt;
File:After clicking hidden files.png|After opening the hidden files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To access the recent files click on the &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; option from the top panel and we can see the recently viewed documents fro &amp;quot;Recent Documents&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Accessing recently opened files&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recent files.png|Recently opened files&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To create a shortcut of software to the &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; or to the &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; follow the below steps,&lt;br /&gt;
** Open the software by clicking on the &amp;quot;Application menu&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** Right click on the particular software&lt;br /&gt;
** If shortcut need to be created on &amp;quot;Top panel&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to panel&amp;quot;, If needs to be created on &amp;quot;Desktop&amp;quot; click on &amp;quot;Add this launcher to Desktop&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Creating shortcut to Top panel and Desktop&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop.png|thumb|Creating shortcut to top panel and desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Opening files by &amp;quot;open with&amp;quot; option====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Opening files with application&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening files with application.png|Opening files with application&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#A file can usually be opened with any given application in Ubuntu which supports that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer, gimp, etc. So if you want to open with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available options.&lt;br /&gt;
#File can be opened with multiple application in Ubuntu which support that particular file. For example, an image file can be opened with image viewer and also can be with Gimp, Mypaint, Kolorpaint, Shotwell viewer etc.  So if you want to open the file with a application of your choice, right click on file select &amp;quot;Open with&amp;quot; to see the available multiple options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Import files and folders from external device====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Import files and folders from external device&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Access external device.png|Access external device&lt;br /&gt;
File:Copy from external device.png|Copy from external device&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can import files from other devices. You can  insert devices such as CDs, DVDs or memory cards  into your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Connect the devices such as pen drives, memory card holders, external DVD drives  using a cable, to your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; from your desktop top panel. You can see your device name. &lt;br /&gt;
##Click on your device name to view the files from that device. &lt;br /&gt;
#To import files from devices, right click on that file and click on &amp;quot;Copy&amp;quot;, then paste it into your computer folder.You can copy audio and video files, that you have recorded on your mobile phone, to your computer. You can edit these files. In the same way, you can copy these and other files from your computer to your mobile phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should periodically take back up of important files on your computer and store it on a pen drive or an external hard disk. So that if the hard disk of your computer has a problem or crashes, you would not lose your data entirely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Ambox&lt;br /&gt;
| text  = Study how there are different kinds of connecting cables, for different devices / ports on your computer. Use the appropriate cable in each case. You can connect printers, scanners, projectors to suitable ports on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
| type = notice&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing user interface language in Ubuntu ====&lt;br /&gt;
English will be default interface in Ubuntu but you can also use Ubuntu in you local languages like Telugu, Kannada or Tamil.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Select language support from system settings.png|Select language support from system settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:Changing the language from English to Kannada.png|Changing the language from English to Kannada&lt;br /&gt;
File:Arrange language list.png|Arrange language list&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# To get started, go to &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System settings -&amp;gt; Language support&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
# It may ask you to update or add components to your current default language when you first open the dialog. If you do not have internet connect then click &amp;quot;Remind Me Later&amp;quot; and If you have good internet connection, select install to update your language lists.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we are ready to change our Ubuntu interface language. Find your new language in the list, and then click and drag it to the top of the list and click Apply '''System-Wide'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have set you language as first and click on &amp;quot;system-wide&amp;quot;, you will need to '''log out''' of your account and '''log in''' to see your new interface language.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ubuntu may ask if you want to update your user folders names to your new language, Select Rename folder option.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot; caption=&amp;quot;Changing user interface language in Ubuntu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Renaming folders.png|Renaming folders&lt;br /&gt;
File:Kannada Ubuntu interface.png|Kannada Ubuntu interface&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding software applications to your computer system====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding softwares to computer system using Appgrid.png|Adding software's to computer system using App Grid&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can add many more FOSS applications to your computer. Select the &amp;quot;System-&amp;gt;Administration-&amp;gt;App Grid&amp;quot; - You can download applications from the Internet. Teachers can explore new FOSS educational tools and utilities.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Applications &amp;gt; System Tools -&amp;gt; App Grid. You will need to type the required application name in the search bar. It will show all applications with the words you have entered and you will get an option for &amp;quot;Install&amp;quot;. Click on &amp;quot;install&amp;quot; if you want to install the application. If your search does not get the application(s) you want, try with fewer letters / words to search. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may ask your Ubuntu log in password for authentication, just type your Ubuntu password press enter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have doubts or difficulties in using the Ubuntu operating system or any of the applications, you can search for solutions on the Internet using a search engine or refer to '[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Frequently_Asked_Questions Frequently asked questions]'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding your languages to type in Ubuntu===&lt;br /&gt;
In Ubuntu by default you can type English in any application and by default it will use only Unicode fonts unless you manually changing it to non-Unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=350&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting ibus for typing language.png|Selecting Ibus for typing language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Also you can type any your local languages in Ubuntu by adding those languages in Ibus. For typing in any local language, Ubuntu will use application called Ibus. You can follow the below step to set up Ibus and to add languages in the typing list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to Applications -&amp;gt; System tools -&amp;gt; System Settings -&amp;gt; Language Support -&amp;gt;Look at the Keyboard input method system Select '''IBus''' and close the window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log-out your computer and log-in to applying this changes.&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have to add your languages in &amp;quot;Text Entry&amp;quot; to type it. You can type multiple language in any application by adding it in this list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting preferences.png|left|thumb|Selecting preferences&lt;br /&gt;
File:Adding language to text entry.png|thumb|Adding language to text entry&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Right click on '''&amp;quot;En&amp;quot;''' from the top panel and select &amp;quot;Preferences&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the Preferences window opens, click on &amp;quot;Input method-&amp;gt;Add&amp;quot; option, as shown in image.&lt;br /&gt;
# The language list window will open, search your languages by typing it in search box and click on the language. It will show the all the typing methods for the language. Choose a keyboard layout you are comfortable with and click &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Yes, you are finished all the set up, after this your language list looks like below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=300 caption=&amp;quot;Adding language to text entry&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Searching Kannada language in search box.png|Searching Kannada language in search box&lt;br /&gt;
File:Selecting keyboard layout.png|Selecting keyboard layout&lt;br /&gt;
File:After adding language.png|after adding language&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Now its time to type your added language in most of the applications. Click on the language panel &amp;quot;En&amp;quot; (right top corner of the screen) and select language in which you want to type. When you select language, icon will change to that language. The very important is you can add multiple languages in this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Advanced features===&lt;br /&gt;
Ubuntu contains a wide range of software that includes LibreOffice, Firefox, Thunderbird and several games and Educational tools. Many additional software packages are accessible from the built in Ubuntu Software Center known as &amp;quot;App Grid&amp;quot;. More complex commands can be given to the computer using the 'Terminal' interface, this is really for those who have technical expertise. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation process===&lt;br /&gt;
# Dual core processor and above&lt;br /&gt;
# Minimum 2 GB of RAM&lt;br /&gt;
# 30 GB of Separate partition in your hard-drive&lt;br /&gt;
# Either a CD/DVD drive or a USB port for the installer media&lt;br /&gt;
You will also need the Ubuntu software in a DVD or in a pen drive (as a boot-able USB device). You can download the Ubuntu(Kalpavriksha) iso from '''[https://drive.google.com/file/d/1L8GgWFiWJi-7jEGEe6QZzFCgeS4lXqK1/view?usp=sharing this link].'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you download Ubuntu22.04_dist.iso from the above link, follow below steps to put it in dvd or pen drive for installation.&lt;br /&gt;
# To make Ubuntu DVD in windows platform, follow this [http://www.tutonics.com/2012/07/how-to-create-bootable-live-cddvd.html#Windows link]&lt;br /&gt;
# To make Ubuntu DVD in Ubuntu plat form, follow this [http://www.ubuntubuzz.com/2015/04/how-to-burn-iso-dvd-with-k3b.html link]&lt;br /&gt;
# To make Ubuntu boot-able pen drive, follow this [https://www.ubuntu.com/download/desktop/create-a-usb-stick-on-windows link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation steps ====&lt;br /&gt;
# To install Ubuntu along side your current windows OS - [https://drive.google.com/file/d/1hL99CH_pjCUzz9Yw4h75iSmZRX17Gq1Z/view click here for installation handout] &lt;br /&gt;
# To install Ubuntu by erasing your current OS - [https://drive.google.com/file/d/0BwTV-oNEYKZBUUstUGNBcmNMUkU/view click here for installation handout]&lt;br /&gt;
# To Upgrade your current Ubuntu to latest version - [https://drive.google.com/file/d/0BwTV-oNEYKZBQ2YzT2hrUTI4ejQ/view click here for installation handout]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===References===&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/Releases Ubuntu releases]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://wiki.ubuntu.com/LTS Ubuntu LTS]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://www.google.co.in/webhp?sourceid=chrome-instant&amp;amp;ion=1&amp;amp;espv=2&amp;amp;ie=UTF-8#q=ubuntu%20wikipedia Wikipedia]&lt;br /&gt;
#[http://karnatakaeducation.org.in/KOER/en/index.php/Kalpavriksha Install Ubuntu (kalpavriksha)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Explore an application]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Prateek</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>